Preface, Contents

SIMATIC
1
General Technical Specifications
Programmable Logic 2
Power Supply Modules
Controllers S7-300
Module Data 3
Digital Modules

4
Analog Modules

Reference Manual 5
Special Signal Modules

6
Interface Modules
The following supplement is part of this documentation:
7
No. Designation Drawing number Edition RS 485 Repeater
1 Product information A5E00201782-03 12/2004
SIMATIC TOP Connect and 8
2 Product information A5E00348892-01 08/2004
SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA
3 Product information A5E00352937-02 01/2005
4 Product information A5E00400156-01 12/2004
5 Product information A5E00455107-01 05/2005 Appendices
Parameter Sets for
Signal Modules
A
Diagnostics Data of
Signal Modules
B

Dimension Drawings
C
Spare Parts and Accessories
for S7-300 Modules
D
This manual is part of the documentation package
with the order numbers: Guidelines for Handling Electro-
Programmable Controller S7-300: static Sensitive Devices (ESD)
E
6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0

List of Abbreviations
F
ET 200M Distributed I/O Device:
6ES7153-1AA00-8BA0
Glossary, Index

Edition 02/2004
A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and
connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and
graded according to severity by the following texts:
Danger
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
are not taken.

Warning
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Caution
! indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a
particular part of the documentation.

Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are
defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:

Warning
! This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which
have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

Trademarks
SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks
might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

Copyright W Siemens AG 2004 All rights reserved Disclaim of Liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement
contents is not permitted without express written authority. with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed
design, are reserved. regularly and any necessary corrections included in
subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are
Siemens AG welcomed.
Bereich Automation and Drives
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems  Siemens AG 2004
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Preface

Purpose of the manual

The information contained in this manual will enable you to look up operator
actions, function descriptions and the technical specifications of the signal
modules, power supply modules and interface modules of the S7-300.
How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-300 or ET 200M
system is described in the installation manuals for each system.

Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual, it is necessary to have a general knowledge of
automation and programmable logic controllers.

Scope of this manual

The present documentation package contains reference manuals for all the
modules current at the time the manuals were published.
We reserve the right to enclose a product information leaflet containing up-to-date
information on the module with new modules and modules with a new product
version.

Changes compared with the previous version

Compared to the previous version, of the “Module Data” reference manual, the
following chapters and appendices have been thoroughly revised and new modules
added, as necessary:
• Preface
• Chapter 1 “General Technical Specifications”
• Chapter 3 “Digital Modules”,
• Chapter 4 “Analog Modules”
• Appendix A “Signal Module Parameter Sets”
• Glossary
Note: The previous version of this “Module Data” reference manual can be
recognized by the number in the footer: A5E00105505-02.
The current number is: A5E00105505-03.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 iii

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Preface

Approbations
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

CE Approval
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

Identification for Australia (C-Tick-Mark)

Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

Standards
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

iv A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Preface

How the manual fits in

S7-300

Manual Description of operation, functions and

• CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical Data technical specifications of the CPU.

Reference Manual Description of operation, functions and

• CPU Data: CPU 312 IFM – 318-2 DP technical specifications of the CPU.

Operating Manual Description of configuration, installation,

• S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Installation wiring, networking and commissioning of an
S7-300.
Installation manual Description of configuration, installation,
• Automation system S7-300, installation: CPU 312 wiring, networking and commissioning of an
IFM – 318-2 DP S7-300.

Manual Description of the individual technological

• CPU 31xC: Technological Functions functions: Positioning, counting, point–to–point
coupling, control.
• Examples
The CD contains examples for the
technological functions.
Module data reference manual Descriptions of functions and technical
specifications of signal modules, power
→ • Reference Manual supply modules and interface modules.
You are reading this manual

Instruction List The instruction set lists of the CPUs and their
• CPU 312 IFM – 318-2 DP execution times.
• CPU 31xC and CPU 31x A list of executable blocks (OBs/SFCs/SFBs)
and their execution times.
Getting Started Getting Started documents use a concrete
• CPU 31x: Commissioning example to guide you through the individual
commissioning steps until you have a
• CPU 31xC: Commissioning
functioning application.
• CPU 31xC: Positioning with analog output
• CPU 314C: Positioning with digital output
• CPU 31xC: Counting
• CPU 31xC: Rules
• CPU 31xC: Point-to-point connection
• CPU 317-2 PN/DP: Configuration of the PROFInet
interface X2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 v

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Preface

ET 200M

Distributed Peripheral manual

• Manual Description of configuration, assembly,
wiring.
Signal modules for process automation reference
manual Description of use in process automation,
• Reference Manual parameterization with SIMATIC PDM, digital
input modules, digital output modules.
Module data reference manual

→ • Reference Manual Descriptions of functions and technical

You are reading this manual

specifications of signal modules, power

supply modules and interface
modules.

Navigation
To help you find special information quickly, the manual contains the following
access aids:
• At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of
the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual.
• An overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left column on
each page of each chapter.
• You will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual. The glossary
contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual.
• At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you
fast access to the information you need.

Recycling and disposal

Because of its low-emission equipment, it is possible to recycle the S7-300. For
ecologically harmless recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a
certificated disposal service for electronic scrap.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

vi A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Preface

Additional support
Please contact your local Siemens representative if you have any queries about
the products described in this manual.
http://www.ad.siemens.com/automation/partner

Training center
We offer a range of relevant courses to help you to get started with the SIMATIC
S7 programmable controller. Please contact your local training center or the central
training center in Nuremberg, D 90327 Germany.
Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200.
Internet: http://www.sitrain.com

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 vii

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Preface

A&D Technical Support

Worldwide, available 24 hours a day:

Nuernberg

Johnson City
Beijing

Technical Support

Worldwide (Nuernberg)
Technical Support

24 hours a day, 365 days a year

Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223
E-Mail: adsupport@
siemens.com
GMT: +1:00
Europe / Africa (Nuernberg) United States (Johnson City) Asia / Australia (Beijing)
Authorization Technical Support and Technical Support and
Authorization Authorization
Local time: Mon.-Fri. Local time: Mon.-Fri. Local time: Mon.-Fri.
8:00 AM to 5:00 PM 8:00 AM to 500 PM 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM
Phone: +49 (180) 5050–222 Phone: +1 (423) 262 2522 Phone: +86 10 64 75 75 75
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 Fax: +1 (423) 262 2289 Fax: +86 10 64 74 74 74
E-Mail: adsupport@ E-Mail: simatic.hotline@ E-Mail: adsupport.asia@
siemens.com sea.siemens.com siemens.com
GMT: +1:00 GMT: –5:00 GMT: +8:00

The languages of the SIMATIC Hotlines and the authorization hotline are generally German and English.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

viii A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Preface

Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer our Know-how online on the internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
where you will find the following:
• The newsletter, which constantly provides you with up–to–date information on
your products.
• The right documents via our Search function in Service & Support.
• A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange their
experiences.
• Your local representative for Automation & Drives.
• Information on field service, repairs, spare parts and more under “Services”.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 ix

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Preface

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

x A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Contents

1 General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Standards and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries . . . . 1-8
1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions
for Operating S7-300s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class
and Degree of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.7 SIPLUS S7-300 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions
for the Operation of SIPLUS S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 potentially explosive area . . . . 1-17
2 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A;
(6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A;
(6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A;
(6ES7307-1EAx0-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A;
(6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
3 Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 3-10
3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24;
(6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC;
(6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.7 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24;
(6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; (6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xi

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Contents

3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V;

with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked;
(6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.9.1 Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.9.2 Assigning Parameters to SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.9.3 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.9.4 Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; Source Input;
(6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V
(6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125;
(6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V
(6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230;
(6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.15 Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.16 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.17 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.18 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 16 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed;
(6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC;
(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.20.1 Parameters of digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x UC24/48 V . . . . . . 3-63
3.21 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 16 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A;
(6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A;
with diagnostic interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.23.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.23.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . 3-77
3.23.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3.24 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A;
(6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3.25 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; (6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3.26 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xii A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Contents

3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322;

DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC;
(6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3.29 Relay Output Module SM 322;
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.29.1 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
3.29.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 230 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . 3-104
3.29.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A;
(6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
3.31 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
3.32 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
3.33 Digital Input/Output Module SM 327;
DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A; parameterizable (6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0) . . 3-116
3.33.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . 3-119
4 Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Module . . . . . . 4-8
4.3 Analog Value Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.3.2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog Input
Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.5 Behavior of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5.1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5.2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5.3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules . . . . 4-35
4.7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.7.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.7.2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.7.3 Parameters of the analog input/output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.10 Connecting Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.11.1 Connecting resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . 4-56
4.12 Connecting Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xiii

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Contents

4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits;
(6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4.18.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.18.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.19 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
(6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4.19.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.19.2 8-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4.19.3 4-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.19.4 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits 4-94
4.20 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; synchronous;
(6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
4.20.1 Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
4.20.2 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4.20.3 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4.21 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits;
(6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
4.21.1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
4.21.2 Measuring Methods of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
4.22 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits;
(6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
4.22.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
4.22.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0) . . . . 4-125
4.23.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4.23.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . 4-135
4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC (6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0) . . . . . . 4-138
4.24.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
4.24.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . 4-150
4.25 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits;
(6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
4.25.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
4.25.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
4.26 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits;
(6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
4.26.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
4.26.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
4.27 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit; synchronous;
(6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
4.27.1 Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
4.27.2 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
4.27.3 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . . 4-175

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xiv A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Contents

4.28 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits;

(6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
4.28.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
4.28.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
4.29 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits;
(6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182
4.29.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-185
4.29.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; (6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
4.30.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192
4.30.2 Measuring/output Method and Measuring/output Range of the SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
4.31 Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits;
(6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194
4.31.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
4.31.2 Measuring/output Method and Measuring/output Range of the SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
5 Special Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16;
(6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.4 Position Decoder Module SM 338; POS-INPUT;
(6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4.1 Synchronous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.2 Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.4.3 Functions of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.4 Encoder Value Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.5 Gray/Dual Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.6 Transferred Encoder Value and Normalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.7 Freeze Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.8 SM 338; POS-INPUT Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.4.9 SM 338; POS-INPUT Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.4.10 Diagnosis of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.4.11 Interrupts of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.4.12 Technical Specifications of the 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xv

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Contents

6 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7361-3CA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
7 RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Application and Characteristics; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
8 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Wiring Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.1 Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.2 Wiring the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2.3 Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.4 Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect with Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.1 SIMATIC TOP connect Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.2 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection . . 8-14
8.3.3 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection 8-16
8.3.4 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA with Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.4.1 SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.4.2 SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Terminal Assignment
and Terminal Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.4.3 Connecting the Signal-Line Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.4.4 Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
A Parameter Sets for Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program . A-1
A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.6 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A.7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A.8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
A.9 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A.10 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A.11 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xvi A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Contents

B Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program . B-1
B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.4 Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
C Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
D Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
E Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.1 What is ESD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage . E-4
F List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xvii

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Contents

Figures
2-1 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . 2-7
2-5 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-6 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) . . . . . . 2-10
2-7 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-8 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . 2-15
3-1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-2 Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-3 ModuleView and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 32 x 20 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-4 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-5 Module view and block diagram of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24VDC High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-6 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-7 Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders of SM 321;
DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-8 Terminal assignment for resistive circuit of the encoder of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-9 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered
the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3-10 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC (Source Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3-11 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24/48VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-12 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC . . . . . . 3-38
3-13 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230VAC . . 3-40
3-14 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC . . . 3-42
3-15 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321;
DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-16 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-17 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-18 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322;
D0 32 x VAC 120/230 /1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3-19 Terminal assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x AC 120/230 V/1 A . . . . . . 3-51
3-20 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 3-54
3-21 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3-22 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC . . . . . . 3-60
3-23 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3-24 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3-25 Module view of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 V DC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3-26 Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3-27 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
3-28 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xviii A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Contents

3-29 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;

DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3-30 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322;
DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3-31 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM
322; DO 8 x REL. 230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
3-32 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
3-33 Special Characteristic for Operation
with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
3-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
3-35 Special Characteristic for Operation with a
Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
3-36 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323;
DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
3-37 Terminal assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . 3-111
3-38 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
3-39 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 327;
DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
3-40 Data record 1 of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
3-41 Re-readability of the outputs of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A 3-121
4-1 Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module . . . . . . 4-29
4-2 Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module . . . . . 4-30
4-3 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-4 Scan time of an analog input or output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-6 Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-8 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-9 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-10 Connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4-11 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4-12 Connecting two-wire transmitters to an isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-13 Connecting two-wire transmitters supplied from L+ to an
isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-14 Connecting four-wire transmitters to an isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-15 Four-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated AI 4-54
4-16 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4-17 Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-18 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-19 Two-conductor connection of resistance thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-20 Three-conductor connection of resistance thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-21 Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4-22 Design of Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4-23 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to
an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4-24 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI 4-62

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xix

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Contents

4-25 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No.

M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-26 Connecting thermocouples via a reference junction to the
SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4-27 Connecting thermocouples with external compensation via resistance
thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4-28 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over
a Four-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4-29 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a
Two-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4-30 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4-31 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4-32 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered
the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4-33 Module view and block diagram of the analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4-35 8-channel mode cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4-36 4-channel mode cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4-37 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4-38 Calculation of the filter and processing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
4-39 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331;
AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
4-40 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331;
AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
4-41 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
4-42 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
4-43 Software filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
4-44 Hardware filter 4 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
4-45 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
4-46 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
4-47 Software filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
4-48 Hardware filter 4 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4-49 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331;
AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
4-50 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
4-51 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . 4-170
4-52 Calculation of the processing time and the time for updating the output . 4-173
4-53 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
4-54 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 2 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4-55 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
4-56 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . 4-195
5-1 Module view of the simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-2 Module view of the dummy module DM 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . 5-9
6-1 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-2 Front View of the Interface Module IM 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-3 Front View of the Interface Module IM 365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
7-1 RC Network with 10 MW for Configuration with
Ungrounded Reference Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xx A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Contents

7-2 Isolation between the Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

7-3 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2 Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-3 Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . 8-8
8-4 Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-5 Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-6 Spring-loaded terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-7 Principle of Spring-Loaded Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-8 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a
One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-9 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a
Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-10 Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8-11 Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . 8-22
8-12 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate . . . . . . . 8-23
8-13 Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to SM 321;
AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
A-1 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A-2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A-3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A-4 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-5 Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A-6 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A-7 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A-8 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A-9 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A-10 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A-11 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A-12 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A-13 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
A-14 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A-17 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . A-37
A-18 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . A-40
A-19 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . A-42
B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-3 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B-4 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B-5 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the SM 322;
DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B-6 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a SM 331
with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B-7 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a SM 332
with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B-8 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . B-7
B-9 Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . B-8
B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
C-1 Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C-2 Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C-3 Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-4 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-5 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C-6 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . C-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xxi

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Contents

C-7 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C-8 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C-9 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C-10 Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for “Insert and Remove” Function
with Active Bus Module, S7-300 Module and Explosion-proof Partition . . C-7
C-11 Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C-12 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C-13 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C-14 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C-15 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A
with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C-16 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A
with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C-17 Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-18 Interface Module IM 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-19 Interface Module IM 365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C-20 Signal Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C-21 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C-22 SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-23 SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-24 SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-25 RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-26 RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
E-1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xxii A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Contents

Tables
1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2 Pulse-Shaped Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-3 Sinusoidal Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-4 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-5 Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-6 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-7 Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-8 Test Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-9 Rated Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-10 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-11 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-12 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
2-1 Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)
to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-2 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A)
to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-3 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A)
to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-4 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A)
to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-4 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-5 Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-6 Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-7 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 3-10
3-8 Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-9 Assigning Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the SM 321;
DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-10 Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-11 Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode
of the CPU and Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . 3-29
3-12 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-13 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V,
Causes of Error and Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-14 Data record no. 0 (static parameters): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3-15 Data record no. 1 (dynamic parameters): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3-16 Structure of the data record for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3-17 System diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3-18 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3-19 Dependence of the output values on the operating mode of the
CPU and on the supply voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A. 3-77
3-20 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3-21 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A,
Causes of Error and Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3-22 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3-23 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . 3-91
3-24 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL,
error causes and remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
3-25 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
3-26 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. AC 230 VDC/0.5 A . . 3-104
3-27 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A,
error causes and remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xxiii

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Contents

3-28 Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119

4-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-2 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-4 Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module 4-8
4-6 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and a 13-bit analog value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-7 Possible analog value resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-8 Bipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-9 Unipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-10 Analog Value Representation in
Voltage Measuring Ranges + 10 V to + 1 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-11 Analog Value Representation in
Voltage Measuring Ranges + 500 mV to + 80 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-12 Analog Value Representation in
Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-13 Analog Value Representation in
Current Measuring Ranges + 20 mA to + 3.2 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-14 Analog Value Representation in
Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters
from 10 kW
and from 150 W to 600 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-16 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors
PT 100, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-17 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors
PT 100, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-18 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors
Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-19 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors
Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-20 Analog Value Representation for
RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-21 Analog Value Representation for
RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-22 Analog value representation for thermocouples type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-23 Analog value representation for thermocouples type C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-24 Analog value representation for thermocouples type E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-25 Analog value representation for thermocouples type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-26 Analog value representation for thermocouples type K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-27 Analog value representation for thermocouples type L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-28 Analog value representation for thermocouples type N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-29 Analog value representation for thermocouples type R, S . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-30 Analog value representation for thermocouples type T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-31 Analog value representation for thermocouples type U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-32 Bipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-33 Unipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range +10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V . 4-26
4-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range +20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA
and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-38 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State
of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xxiv A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Contents

of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

4-40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position
of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4-42 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4-43 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-44 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature . . . . . 4-59
4-45 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-46 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4-47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors
and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-49 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors
and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4-50 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4-51 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4-52 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4-53 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
4-54 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
4-55 Assignment of the channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits to channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4-56 Scan times in 8-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4-57 Measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4-58 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from
OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . 4-96
4-59 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits
High Speed using Measuring Range Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4-60 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4-61 Assignment of the channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed to
channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4-62 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
4-63 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
4-64 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
Using Measuring Range Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
4-65 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
4-66 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
4-68 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4-69 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD to Channel Groups 4-131
4-70 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
4-71 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
4-72 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40
during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
4-73 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
4-74 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC to Channel Groups . . 4-145
4-75 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4-76 Measuring Ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
4-77 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331;
AI 8 x TC in 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
4-78 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331;
AI 8 x TC in 5F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xxv

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Contents

4-79 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from

OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . 4-152
4-80 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits
Using Measuring Range Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4-81 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4-82 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
4-83 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . 4-168
4-84 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . 4-175
4-85 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits . . . 4-181
4-86 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits . . . 4-187
4-87 Measuring ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
4-88 Output ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-200
5-1 Special signal modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 Meaning of the switch settings of the dummy module DM 370 . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-4 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-5 Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-6 Diagnostics Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and Remedial
Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
6-1 Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
7-1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: ConnecModules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2 Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3 Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-4 Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes
of 32-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-6 Selection for SIMATIC TOP connect Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-7 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect
with One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-8 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block
for One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-9 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect
with Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-10 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block
for Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-11 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection 8-18
8-12 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-13 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-14 Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block
of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
A-1 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A-5 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . A-9
A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . A-9
A-7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A-8 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A-9 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . A-16
A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . A-16
A-11 Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . A-18
A-12 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xxvi A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Contents

A-13 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19

A-14 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A-15 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . A-24
A-16 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A-17 Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . A-26
A-18 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
A-19 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module . . . . . . A-28
A-20 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . A-28
A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . A-28
A-22 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module . . . . . . A-29
A-23 Parameters for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . A-30
A-24 Codes for the modes of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-25 Codes for interference frequency suppression of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-26 Codes for the measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-27 Codes for the smoothing mode settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . A-36
A-28 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A-29 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A-30 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A-31 Codes for the output ranges of the analog output module SM332;
AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-32 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-33 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . A-43
A-34 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . A-43
B-1 Codes of the Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xxvii

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Contents

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xxviii A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications 1
What are general technical specifications?
General technical specifications include the following:
• the standards and test values which the modules of the S7-300 programmable
logic controller maintain and satisfy
• the test criteria to which the S7-300 modules were tested.

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

1.1 Standards and Approvals 1-2
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility 1-6
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup 1-8
Batteries
1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating 1-9
S7-300s
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of 1-12
Protection
1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300 1-13
1.7 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules 1-14
1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions for the Operation of 1-16
SIPLUS S7-300 Modules
1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive 1-17
Area

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.1 Standards and Approvals

CE approval
The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements and
safety-related requirements of the following EU directives and conforms with the
harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable controllers announced in
the Official Journals of the European Community:
• 73/23/EEC “Electrical Equipment Designed for Use between Certain Voltage
Limits” (Low-Voltage Directive)
• 89/336/EEC “Electromagnetic Compatibility” (EMC Directive)
• 94/9/EU “Devices and protection systems for use as prescribed in potentially
explosive areas” (Guidelines for Explosion Protection)

The declarations of conformity are held

at the disposal of the competent authorities at the address below:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
A&D AS RD4
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 General Technical Specifications

UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with
• UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

CSA approval
Canadian Standards Association in accordance with
• C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with

UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with

UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

HAZ. LOC.
CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)

CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

Note
The currently applicable approvals can be found on the nameplate of the particular
module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

in accordance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive

atmospheres; Type of protection “n”)

II 3 G EEx nA II T4..T5

Identification for Australia

The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements of standard
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).

IEC 61131
The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements and criteria of
standard IEC 61131-2 (Programmable Controllers, Part 2: Equipment
Requirements and Tests).

Shipbuilding approval
Classification Societies:
• ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
• BV (Bureau Veritas)
• DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
• GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
• LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
• Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 General Technical Specifications

Use in an industrial environment

SIMATIC products have been designed for use in an industrial environment.

Table 1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment

EMC Directive Requirements in respect of:

Emitted interference Immunity
Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2001 EN 61000-6-2: 2001

Use in residential environments

If you operate an S7-300 in a residential area, you must ensure Limit Value Class
B in accordance with EN 55011 to guard against radio interference emissions.
Suitable measures to achieve interference suppression according to Limit Value
Class B:
• installation of the S7-300 in grounded cabinets and control boxes
• use of filters in supply lines

Warning
! Personal injury or property damage can result.
In areas subject to danger of explosion, personal injury or property damage can
result if you withdraw connectors while an S7-300 is in operation.
Always isolate the S7-300 in areas subject to danger of explosion before
withdrawing connectors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Introduction
In this section you will find details of the noise immunity of S7-300 modules and
details of radio interference suppression.
The S7-300 modules satisfy, among other things, the requirements of the law
applicable to EMC on the European domestic market.

Definition of “EMC”
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to
function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with
that environment.

Pulse-shaped interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules compared
to pulse-shaped disturbance variables. A requirement for this is that the S7-300
system complies with the specifications and directives on electric design.

Table 1-2 Pulse-Shaped Interference

Pulse-Shaped Interference Tested with Satisfies

degree of
severity
Electrostatic discharge Discharge in air:"8 kV 3
according to IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: "4 kV
Bursts (fast transient bursts) to 2 kV (supply cable) 3
IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV (signal cable > 3 m)
1 kV (signal cable < 3 m)
Energy-rich single impulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuit required (refer to the manual
S7-300 Programmable Logic Controller, Hardware and Installation,
Chapter “Lightning Protection and Overvoltage Protection”)
• Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV (supply cable)
Direct voltage with protective
elements 3
2 kV (signal/
data cable only > 3 m) possi-
bly with protection elements
• Symmetrical coupling 1 kV (supply cable)
Direct voltage with protection
elements
1 kV (signal line only > 3 m)
possibly with protection ele-
ments

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 General Technical Specifications

Additional measures
If you want to connect an S7-300 system to the public network, you must ensure
Limit Value Class B in accordance with EN 55022.

Sinusoidal interference
The table below shows the EMC behavior of the S7-300 modules with regard to
sinusoidal disturbance variables.

Table 1-3 Sinusoidal Interference

Sinusoidal Interference Test values Satisfies

degree of
severity
HF irradiation (electromagnetic fields)
according to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz
3
over the range from 80 MHz to 1000 MHz
according to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz
HF conductance on cables and cable Test voltage 10 V with 80% amplitude modula-
shields according to IEC 61000-4-6 tion of 1 kHz over the range from 9 MHz to 3
80 MHz

Emission of radio interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit
value class A, Group 1.

From 30 to 230 MHz < 40 dB (
V/m)Q

From 230 to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (
V/m)Q
Measured at a distance of 10 m (98.4 ft.)

Interference emission via the mains AC power supply in accordance with

EN 55011: Limit value class A, Group 1.

From 0.15 to 0.5 MHz < 79 dB (
V)Q

< 66 dB (
V)M
From 0.5 to 5 MHz < 73 dB (
V)Q
< 60 dB (
V)M
From 5 to 30 MHz < 73 dB (
V)Q
< 60 dB (
V)M

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup

Batteries

Shipping and storage of modules

S7-300 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131-2, in respect of shipping
and storage requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped and/or
stored in their original packing.
Climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC
60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transportation.
Mechanical conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.

Table 1-4 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules

Condition Permitted range

Free fall (in shipping packing) v 1m
Temperature from – 40 C to + 70C
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponding to an
altitude of –1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 10 to 95 %, no condensation
Sinusoidal oscillations 5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
to IEC 60068-2-6 9 – 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock according to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks

Transporting backup batteries

Wherever possible, transport backup batteries in their original packing. Special
approval does not have to be obtained for transporting backup batteries for S7-300
systems. The lithium content of the backup battery is approximately 0.25 g.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 General Technical Specifications

Storing backup batteries

Backup batteries must be stored in a cool and dry place. The maximum shelf life is
5 years.

Warning
! Improper handling of backup batteries can result in injury and damage to property.
If backup batteries are not treated properly, they can explode and cause severe
burning.
Observe the following rules when handling backup batteries used in the S7-300
programmable logic controller:
• never charge them
• never heat them
• never throw them in the fire
• never damage them mechanically (drill, squeeze, etc.)

1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for

Operating S7-300s

Operating conditions
S7-300 systems are intended for stationary use in locations protected against the
weather. The operating conditions surpass the requirements of DIN IEC 60721-3-3.
• Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
• Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)

Use with additional measures

The S7-300, for example, must not be used without taking additional measures:
• in locations exposed to a high degree of ionizing radiation
• in hostile environments caused, for instance, by
– dust accumulation
– corrosive vapors or gases
– strong electric or magnetic fields
• in installations requiring special monitoring, for example
– elevators
– electrical installations in particularly hazardous areas
An additional measure might be, for instance, installation of the S7-300 in a cabinet
or in a housing.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Ambient mechanical conditions

The ambient mechanical conditions for S7-300 modules are listed in the following
table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations.

Table 1-5 Mechanical Conditions

Frequency Range Continuous Occasional

in Hz
10 v f v 58 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.075 mm amplitude
58 v f v 150 0.5 g constant acceleration 1 g constant acceleration

Reducing vibrations
If your S7-300 modules are exposed to severe shock and/or vibrations, you must
take the appropriate measures to reduce the acceleration and/or amplitude,
respectively.
We recommend that you install the S7-300 on vibration-damping materials
(for example, rubber-metal antivibration mountings).

Ambient mechanical conditions test

The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests
for ambient mechanical conditions.

Table 1-6 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test

Test ... Test Standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test accor- Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of
ding to IEC 60068 change of 1 octave/minute.
Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) 10 Hz v f v 58 Hz, constant amplitude of
0.075 mm
58 Hz v f v 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1 g
Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per
axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each
other
Shock Shock test to Type of shock: half-sine
IEC 60068, Part 2-29 Severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/– direc-
tion in each of three axes perpendicular to each
other

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-10 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 General Technical Specifications

Climatic conditions
You can use S7-300s under the following climatic conditions:

Table 1-7 Climatic Conditions

Climatic Conditions Permitted range Remarks

Temperature: –
horizontal installation: from 0 to 60C
vertical installation: from 0 to 40C
Relative humidity 10 to 95 % Non-condensing, corres-
ponds to relative humi-
dity (RH) Class 2 accor-
ding to IEC 61131, Part 2
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponding to an alti-
tude of –1000 to 2000 m
Concentration of contami- SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test: 10 ppm; 4 days
nants RH < 60 %, non-condensing
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; Test: 1 ppm; 4 days
RH < 60 %, non-condensing

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of

Protection

Test voltages
Insulation stability must be demonstrated in the type test with the following test
voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:

Table 1-8 Test Voltages

Circuits with rated voltage Ue to other Test Voltage

circuits or to ground
< 50 V 500 VDC
< 150 V 2500 VDC
< 250 V DC 4000 V

Protection class
Protection Class I according to IEC 60536 – in other words, protective conductor
connection to rail necessary

Protection against ingress of foreign bodies and water

Degree of protection IP 20 according to IEC 60529, that is, protection against
contact with standard probes.
There is no special protection against the ingress of water.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-12 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 General Technical Specifications

1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300

Rated operating voltages

The modules of the S7-300 operate with different rated voltages. The following
table contains the rated voltages and the corresponding tolerances.

Table 1-9 Rated Voltages

Rated voltage Tolerance Range

24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
120 VAC 93 to 132 VAC
230 VAC 187 to 264 VAC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.7 SIPLUS S7-300 modules

Definition
SIPLUS S7-300 modules are modules that can be used under extended
environmental conditions. Extended environmental conditions mean:
• operation possible at temperatures from –25°C to +60°C
• occasional, brief condensation permitted
• increased mechanical stress permissible

Comparison with “standard” modules

The functional scope and technical specifications for the SIPLUS S7-300 modules
are the same as those of the “standard” modules.
The mechanical and climatic environmental conditions as well as their test method
have changed.
The SIPLUS S7-300 modules have their own order numbers (see table 1-10)

Project engineering in STEP 7

The SIPLUS S7-300 modules are not included in the hardware catalog. Please
design your installation with the corresponding “standard” modules according to the
table 1-10.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-14 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 General Technical Specifications

SIPLUS S7-300 Modules

The following table contains all SIPLUS S7-300 modules.
The order numbers of the corresponding “standard” modules have been included
as an aid to configuration. You can refer to the description and technical
specifications in the special section on the “standard” module.

Table 1-10 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules

Module SIPLUS S7-300-SIMATIC ”Standard” modules

module for use under
extended environmental
conditions
as of order no.
IM 153-1 6AG1153-1AA03-2XB0 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0
CPU 312C 6AG1312-5BD00-2AB0 6ES7312-5BD00-0AB0
CPU 313C 6AG1313-5BE00-2AB0 6ES7313-5BE00-0AB0
CPU 314 6AG1314-1AF10-2AB0 6ES7314-1AF10-0AB0
CPU 315-2 DP 6AG1315-2AG10-2AB0 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0
IM 365 6AG1365-0BA01-2AA0 6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0
SM 321 digital input module;
SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC 6AG1321-1BH02-2AA0 6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0
SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC 6AG1321-1BL00-2AA0 6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC 6AG1321-7BH01-2AB0 6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 V-125 VDC 6AG1321-1CH20-2AA0 6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0
SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC 6AG1321-1FF01-2AA0 6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0
SM 322 digital output module;
SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 6AG1322-1BH01-2AA0 6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A 6AG1322-1HF10-2AA0 6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0
SM 322, DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A 6AG1322-1CF00-2AA0 6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A 6AG1322-1FF01-2AA0 6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 6AG1322-8BF00-2AB0 6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0
Digital Input/Output Module
SM 323; DI8/DO8 x DC 24V/0.5A 6AG1323-1BH01-2AA0 6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0
Analog input module
SM 331 analog input module; AI 2 x 12 bits 6AG1331-7KB02-2AB0 6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0
Analog output module
SM 332 analog output module; AO 2 x 12 6AG1332-5HB01-2AB0 6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0
bits
SM 334 analog I/O module;
SM 334; AI4/AO 2 x 12 bits 6AG1334-0KE00-2AB0 6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-15

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions for the Operation

of SIPLUS S7-300 Modules

Ambient mechanical conditions

Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3M4.

Ambient mechanical conditions test

The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests
for ambient mechanical conditions of SIPLUS S7-300 modules.

Table 1-11 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test

Test ... Test Standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test according to Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of
IEC 6008 Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) change of
1 octave/minute.
5 Hz
f 
9 Hz, constant amplitude of 3.5 mm
9 Hz
f 
150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1 g
oscillation period: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in
each of three axes perpendicular to each other
Shock Shock test according to IEC 6008 Type of shock: half-sine
Part 2-27 severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/–
direction in each of three axes perpendicular to
each other

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-16 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 General Technical Specifications

Climatic conditions
You can use SIPLUS S7-300 modules under the following climatic conditions:
Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3K5.

Table 1-12 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Climatic Conditions

Ambient Condition Permitted range Remarks

Temperature: –
horizontal installation –25 °C to 60 °C
vertical installation –25 °C to 40 °C
Relative humidity From 5 to 95 % Occasional, brief condensation,
corresponds to relative humidity (RH) Class
2 according to IEC 61131, Part 2
Pollutant concentration Test:
(according to IEC 721 3-3; SO2: < 0.5 ppm; 10 ppm; 4 days
class 3C3) Relative humidity < 60%
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; 1 ppm; 4 days
Relative humidity < 60%

1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive

Area

The following sections contain important information in the following languages.

In this chapter

Section Topic
1.9.1 Using the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 potentially explosive area
1.9.2 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
1.9.3 Utilisation de l’ET 200M / S7-300 dans un environnement à risque d’explosion
en zone 2
1.9.4 Aplicación del ET 200M / S7-300 en áreas con peligro de explosión, zona 2
1.9.5 Impiego dell’ET 200M / S7-300 nell’area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2
1.9.6 Gebruik van de ET 200M / S7-300 in het explosieve gebied zone 2
1.9.7 Brug af ET 200M / S7-300 i det eksplosionsfarlige område zone 2
1.9.8 ET 200M / S7-300:n käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2
1.9.9 Användning av ET 200M / S7-300 i explosionsriskområde zon 2
1.9.10 Uso do ET 200M / S7-300 em área exposta ao perigo de explosão, zona 2
1.9.11 p    ET 200M / S  

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-17

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.1 Einsatz der ET 200M / S7-300 im explosionsgefährdeten Bereich

Zone 2

Zone 2
Explosionsgefährdete Bereiche werden in Zonen eingeteilt. Die Zonen werden
nach der Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorhandenseins einer explosionsfähigen
Atmosphäre unterschieden.

Zone Explosionsgefahr Beispiel

2 explosive Gasatmosphäre tritt Bereiche um Flanschverbindungen mit
nur selten und kurzzeitig auf Flachdichtungen bei Rohrleitungen in
geschlossenen Räumen
sicherer nein • außerhalb der Zone 2
Bereich • Standardanwendungen von dezentraler
Peripherie

Nachfolgend finden Sie wichtige Hinweise für die Installation des Dezentralen
Peripheriegerätes ET 200M und der SIMATIC S7-300 im explosionsgefährdeten
Bereich.

Weitere Informationen
Weitere Informationen zum ET 200M und zu den verschiedenen S7-300-
Baugruppen finden Sie im Handbuch.

Fertigungsort
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Zulassung

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 nach EN 50021 : 1999

Prüfnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Hinweis
Baugruppen mit der Zulassung II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 dürfen nur in
Automatisierungssysteme SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M der Gerätekategorie 3
eingesetzt werden.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 18

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Instandhaltung
Für eine Reparatur muss die betroffene Baugruppe an den Fertigungsort geschickt
werden. Nur dort darf die Reparatur durchgeführt werden.

Besondere Bedingungen
1. Das Dezentrale Peripheriegerät ET 200M und die SIMATIC S7-300 müssen in
einen Schaltschrank oder ein metallisches Gehäuse eingebaut werden. Diese
müssen mindestens die Schutzart IP 54 (nach EN 60529) gewährleisten. Dabei
sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zu berücksichtigen, in denen das Gerät
installiert wird. Für das Gehäuse muss eine Herstellererklärung für Zone 2
vorliegen (gemäß EN 50021).
2. Wenn am Kabel bzw. an der Kabeleinführung dieses Gehäuses unter Betriebs-
bedingungen eine Temperatur > 70 °C erreicht wird oder wenn unter Betriebs-
bedingungen die Temperatur an der Aderverzweigung > 80 °C sein kann,
müssen die Temperatureigenschaften der Kabel mit den tatsächlich
gemessenen Temperaturen übereinstimmen.
3. Die eingesetzten Kabeleinführungen müssen der geforderten IP-Schutzart und
dem Abschnitt 7.2 (gemäß EN 50021) entsprechen.
4. Alle Geräte, einschließlich Schalter etc., die an den Ein- und Ausgängen von
ET 200M- und S7-300-Systemen angeschlossen werden, müssen für den
Explosionsschutz Typ EEx nA oder EEx nC genehmigt sein.
5. Es müssen Maßnahmen getroffen werden, dass die Nennspannung durch
Transienten um nicht mehr als 40 % überschritten werden kann.
6. Umgebungstemperaturbereich: 0° C bis 60° C
7. Innerhalb des Gehäuses ist an einem nach dem Öffnen gut sichtbaren Platz ein
Schild mit folgender Warnung anzubringen:
Warnung
Das Gehäuse darf nur kurze Zeit geöffnet werden, z. B. für visuelle Diagnose.
Betätigen Sie dabei keine Schalter, ziehen oder stecken keine Baugruppen und
trennen keine elektrischen Leitungen (Steckverbindungen).
Diese Warnung kann unberücksichtigt bleiben, wenn bekannt ist, dass keine
explosionsgefährdete Atmosphäre herrscht.

Liste der zugelassenen Baugruppen

Die Liste mit den zugelassenen Baugruppen finden Sie im Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
unter der Beitrags-ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-19

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.2 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

Zone 2
Hazardous areas are divided up into zones. The zones are distinguished according
to the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.

Zone Explosion Hazard Example

2 Explosive gas atmosphere Areas around flange joints with flat
occurs only seldom and for a gaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces
short time
Safe area No • Outside zone 2
• Standard distributed I/O applications

Below you will find important information on the installation of the ET 200M
distributed I/O device and the SIMATIC S7-300 in a hazardous area.

Further Information
You will find further information on the ET 200M and the various S7-300 modules
in the manual.

Production Location
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Certification
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 to EN 50021 : 1999
Test number: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Note
Modules with II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 certification can only be used in
SIMATIC S7-300/ET 200M automation systems belonging to equipment
category 3.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-20 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Maintenance
If repair is necessary, the affected module must be sent to the production location.
Repairs can only be carried there.

Special Conditions
1. The ET 200M distributed I/O device and the SIMATIC S7-300 must be installed
in a cabinet or metal housing. These must comply with the IP 54 degree of
protection as a minimum. The environmental conditions under which the
equipment is installed must be taken into account. There must be a
manufacturer's declaration for zone 2 available for the housing (in accordance
with EN 50021).
2. If a temperature of > 70 °C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this
housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 °C can be
reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the
temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the
temperatures actually measured.
3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection
and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021).
4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and
outputs of fail-safe signal modules must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC
explosion protection.
5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot
be exceeded by more than 40 %.
6. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to 60° C
7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an
easily visible position when the housing is opened:
Warning
The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If
you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or
disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections).
You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not
hazardous (i.e. there is no risk of explosion).

List of Approved Modules

You will find the list of approved modules under the ID 13702947 on the Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-21

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.3 Utilisation de l'ET 200M / S7-300 dans un environnement à

risque d'explosion en zone 2

Zone 2
Les environnements à risque d'explosion sont répartis en zones. Les zones se
distinguent par la probabilité de présence d'une atmosphère explosive.

Zone Risque d'explosion Exemple

2 Formation rare et brève d'une Environnement de raccords à joints plats
atmosphère gazeuse explosive dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux
fermés
Zone sûre Non • A l'extérieur de la zone 2
• Utilisation standard de périphérie
décentralisée

Vous trouverez ci-après des remarques importantes pour l'installation de la station

de périphérie décentralisée ET 200M et du SIMATIC S7-300 dans un
environnement présentant un risque d'explosion.

Informations complémentaires
Des informations complémentaires sur l'ET 200M et les divers modules S7-300 se
trouvent dans le manuel.

Lieu de production
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Homologation
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 selon EN 50021 : 1999
Numéro de contrôle : KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Nota
Les modules homologués II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuvent être utilisés
que dans des automates SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M de catégorie 3.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-22 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Entretien
Si une réparation est nécessaire, le module concerné doit être expédié au lieu de
production. La réparation ne doit être effectuée qu'en ce lieu.

Conditions particulières
1. La station de périphérie décentralisée ET 200M et le SIMATIC S7-300 doivent
être installés dans une armoire ou un boîtier métallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer
au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il faut alors tenir compte des conditions
d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil est installé. Le boîtier doit faire
l’objet d’une déclaration de conformité du fabricant pour la zone 2 (selon
EN 50021).
2. Si dans les conditions d’exploitation, une température > 70 °C est atteinte au
niveau du câble ou de l’entrée du câble dans ce boîtier, ou bien si la
température au niveau de la dérivation des conducteurs peut être > 80 °C, les
capacités de résistance thermique des câbles doivent corespondre aux
températures effectivement mesurées.
3. Les entrées de câbles utilisées doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exigé et
être conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021).
4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccordés aux entrées
et sorties de modules de signaux à sécurité intrinsèque doivent être
homologués pour la protection antidéflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas être
dépassée de plus de 40% sous l’influence de transitoires.
6. Plage de température ambiante : 0° C à 60° C
7. A l’intérieur du boîtier, il faut placer, à un endroit bien visible après ouverture,
une plaquette comportant l’avertissement suivant :
Avertissement
Ouvir le boîtier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer un
diagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, n’actionnez aucun commutateur, ne déconnectez
aucun module et ne débanchez pas de câbles électriques (connexions).
Le respect de cet avertissement n’est pas impératif s’il est certain que
l’environnement ne présente pas de risque d’explosion.

Liste des modules homologués

Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules homologués :
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
référence ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-23

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.4 Aplicación de la ET 200M / S7-300 en áreas con peligro de

explosión, zona 2

Zona 2
Las áreas con peligro de explosión se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas se
diferencian según la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmósfera capaz de sufrir
una explosión.

Zona Peligro de explosión Ejemplo

2 La atmósfera explosiva de gas Áreas alrededor de uniones abridadas con
sólo se presenta rara vez y muy juntas planas en tuberías en locales
brevemente cerrados
Área segura No • fuera de la zona 2
• Aplicaciones estándar de la periferia
descentralizada

A continuación encontrará importantes informaciones para la instalación de la

unidad periférica descentralizada ET 200M y del SIMATIC S7-300 en áreas con
peligro de explosión.

Otras informaciones
Encontrará otras informaciones relativas a la ET 200S y a los distintos módulos
S7-300 en el Manual.

Lugar de fabricación
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Homologación
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 según norma EN 50021 : 1999
Número de comprobación: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Nota
Los módulos con la homologación II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pueden
utilizarse únicamente en los autómatas programables SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M
de la categoría de equipo 3.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-24 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Mantenimiento
Para una reparación se ha de remitir el módulo afectado al lugar de fabricación.
Sólo allí se puede realizar la reparación.

Condiciones especiales
1. La unidad periférica descentralizada ET 200M y el SIMATIC S7-300 se han de
montar en un armario eléctrico de distribución o en una carcasa metálica. Éstos
deben garantizar como mínimo el grado de protección IP 54. Para ello se han
de tener en cuenta las condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el
equipo. La caja deberá contar con una declaración del fabricante para la zona 2
(conforme a EN 50021).
2. Si durante la operación se alcanzara una temperatura > 70° C en el cable o la
entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80° C en la
bifurcación de hilos, deberán adaptarse las propiedades térmicas de los cables
a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente.
3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de protección IP
exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021).
4. Todos los dispositivos –inclusive interruptores, etc.– conectados a las entradas
y salidas de módulos de señales de alta disponibilidad deben estar
homologados para la protección contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensión
nominal pueda rebasar en más del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios.
6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0° C hasta 60° C
7. Dentro de la caja deberá colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su
apertura un rótulo con la siguiente advertencia:
Precaución
Abrir la caja sólo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnóstico visual. Durante este
tiempo Ud. no deberá activar ningún interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar
módulos ni separar conductores eléctricos (conexiones enchufables).
Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmósfera existente no
hay peligro de explosión.

Lista de los módulos homologados

En la internet hallará Ud. una lista con los módulos homologados:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
bajo el ID de asignación 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-25

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.5 Impiego dell'ET 200M / S7-300 nell'area a pericolo di esplosione

zona 2

Zona 2
Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengono
distinte secondo la probabilità della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva.

Zona Pericolo di esplosione Esempio

2 L'atmosfera esplosiva si Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con
presente solo raramente e guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in
brevemente ambienti chiusi
Area sicura No • Al di fuori della zona 2
• Applicazioni standard di periferia
decentrata

Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione dell'unità
di periferia decentrata ET 200M e del SIMATIC S7-300 nell'area a pericolo di
esplosione.

Ulteriori informazioni
Ulteriori informazioni sull'ET 200M e sulle diverse unità S7-300 si trovano nel
manuale.

Luogo di produzione
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Autorizzazione
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 secondo EN 50021 : 1999
Numero di controllo: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Avvertenza
Le unità con l'autorizzazione II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essere
impiegate solo nei sistemi di controllori programmabili SIMATIC S7-300 /
ET 200M della categoria di apparecchiature 3.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-26 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Manutenzione
Per una riparazione, l'unità interessata deve essere inviata al luogo di produzione.
La riparazione può essere effettuata solo lì.

Condizioni particolari
1. L'unità di periferia decentrata ET 200M e il SIMATIC S7-300 devono essere
montati in un armadio elettrico o in un contenitore metallico. Questi devono
assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione IP 54. In questo caso bisogna tenere
conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle quali l'apparecchiatura viene installata.
Per il contenitore deve essere presente una dichiarazione del costruttore per la
zona 2 (secondo EN 50021).
2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in
condizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 °C o se in condizioni di esercizio la
temperatura nella derivazione dei fili può essere > 80 °C, le caratteristiche di
temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente
misurata.
3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione richiesto
e alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021).
4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati agli
ingressi/uscite di unità di segnale ad elevata sicurezza, devono essere stati
omologati per la protezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa
essere superata per più del 40% da parte di transienti.
6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0° C a 60° C
7. All’interno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo l’apertura,
una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento:
Attenzione
Il contenitore può rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per una
diagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare
o innestare unità e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori).
Non è necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se è noto che non c’è
un’atmosfera a rischio di esplosione.

Elenco delle unità abilitate

La lista con le unità omologate si trova in Internet al sito:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
all’ID di voce 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-27

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.6 Gebruik van de ET 200M / S7-300 in het explosief gebied zone 2

Zone 2
Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordt
onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een
explosieve atmosfeer.

Zone Explosiegevaar Voorbeeld

2 Een explosieve gasatmosfeer Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met
treedt maar zelden op en voor pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten
korte duur vertrekken
Veilig Neen • Buiten de zone 2
gebied • Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale
periferie

Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van het decentrale

periferieapparaat ET 200M en van de SIMATIC S7-300 in het explosief gebied.

Verdere informatie
In het handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de ET 200M en over de
verschillende
S7-300-modulen.

Productieplaats
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Strasse 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Vergunning
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 conform EN 50021 : 1999
Keuringsnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Opmerking
Modulen met de vergunning II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogen slechts worden
gebruikt in automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M van de
apparaatcategorie 3.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-28 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Instandhouding
Voor een reparatie moet de betreffende module naar de plaats van vervaardiging
worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden uitgevoerd.

Speciale voorwaarden
1. Het decentrale periferieapparaat ET 200M en de SIMATIC S7-300 moeten
worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een behuizing van metaal. Deze
moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54 waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening
te worden gehouden met de omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt
geïnstalleerd. Voor de behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor
zone 2 te worden ingediend (volgens EN 50021).
2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 °C of als onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 °C kan
zijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met
de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen.
3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraad
hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021).
4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de in-
en uitgangen van tegen fouten beveiligde signaalmodulen, moeten zijn
goedgekeurd voor de explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC.
5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door
transiënten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden.
6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0° C tot 60° C
7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een
bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing:
Waarschuwing
De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuele
diagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en
ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen).
Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat er
geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.

Lijst van de toegelaten modulen

De lijst met de toegelaten modulen vindt u in het internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-29

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.7 Brug af ET 200M / S7-300 i det eksplosionfarlige område zone 2

Zone 2
Eksplosionsfarlige områder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter
hvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfære.

Zone Eksplosionsfare Eksempel

2 Eksplosiv gasatmosfære Områder rundt om flangeforbindelser med
optræder kun sjældent og varer flade pakninger ved rørledninger i lukkede
kort rum
Sikkert Nej • Uden for zone 2
område • Standardanvendelser decentral periferi

I det følgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af det decentrale

periferiudstyr ET 200M og SIMATIC S7-300 i det eksplosionfarlige område.

Yderligere informationer
Yderligere informationer om ET 200M og de forskellige S7-300-komponenter
findes i manualen.

Produktionssted
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Godkendelse
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 efter EN 50021 : 1999
Kontrolnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Bemærk
Komponenter med godkendelsen II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 må kun monteres
i automatiseringssystemer SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M - udstyrskategori 3.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-30 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Vedligeholdelse
Skal den pågældende komponent repareres, bedes De sende den til
produktionsstedet. Reparation må kun udføres der.

Særlige betingelser
1. Det decentrale periferiudstyr ET 200M og SIMATIC S7-300 skal monteres i et
kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet. Disse skal mindst kunne sikre
beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelse skal der tages højde for de
omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret er installeret. Der skal være
udarbejdet en erklæring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet for zone 2 (iht. EN 50021).
2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindføringen på dette hus når op på en temperatur på
> 70 °C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen på åreforegreningen kan
være > 80 °C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber
stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk måles.
3. De benyttede kabelindføringer skal være i overensstemmelse med den
krævede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021).
4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene til
fejlsikre signalkomponenter, skal være godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af
type EEx nA eller EEx nC.
5. Der skal træffes foranstaltninger, der sørger for, at den nominelle spænding via
transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %.
6. Omgivelsestemperaturområde: 0° C til 60° C
7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, når kabinettet åbnes.
Dette skilt skal have følgende advarsel:
Advarsel
Kabinettet må kun åbnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denne
forbindelse ikke på kontakter, træk eller isæt ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke
elektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser).
Denne advarsel skal der ikke tages højde for, hvis man ved, at der ikke er
nogen eksplosionsfarlig atmosfære.

Liste over godkendte komponenter

Listen med de godkendte komponenter findes på internettet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
under bidrags-ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-31

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.8 ET 200M / S7-300:n käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla,

vyöhyke 2

Vyöhyke 2
Räjähdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyöhykkeisiin. Vyöhykkeet erotellaan
räjähdyskelpoisen ilmakehän olemassa olon todennäköisyyden mukaan.

Vyöhyke Räjähdysvaara Esimerkki

2 Räjähtävä kaasuilmakehä Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteillä varustuilla
ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa
lyhytaikaisesti
turvallinen Ei • vyöhykkeen 2 ulkopuolella
alue • Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset

Seuraavasta löydätte tärkeitä ohjeita hajautetun ulkopiirilaitteen ET 200M ja

SIMATIC S7-300 asennukseen räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.

Lisätietoja
Lisätietoja ET 200M:ään ja erilaisiin S7-300-rakenneryhmiin löydätte ohjekirjasta.

Valmistuspaikka
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Hyväksyntä
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 mukaan: 1999
Tarkastusnumero: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Ohje
Rakenneryhmät hyväksynnän II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssa saadaan
käyttää ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 automatisointijärjestelmissä
SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-32 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Kunnossapito
Korjausta varten täytyy kyseinen rakenneryhmä lähettää valmistuspaikkaan.
Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siellä.

Erityiset vaatimukset
1. Hajautettu ulkopiirilaite ET 200M ja SIMATIC S7-300 täytyy asentaa
kytkentäkaappiin tai metalliseen koteloon. Näiden täytyy olla vähintään
kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tällöin on huomioitava ympäristöolosuhteet,
johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle täytyy olla valmistajaselvitys vyöhykettä 2
varten (EN 50021 mukaan).
2. Kun johdolla tai tämän kotelon johdon sisäänviennillä saavutetaan > 70 °C
lämpötila tai kun käyttöolosuhteissa lämpötila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 °C,
täytyy johdon lämpötilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lämpötiloja.
3. Käytettyjen johtojen sisäänohjauksien täytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan ja
kohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia.
4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetään virheiltä
suojattujen signaalirakenneryhmien tuloille ja lähdöille, täytyy olla hyväksyttyjä
tyypin EEx nA tai EEx nC räjähdyssuojausta varten.
5. Toimenpiteet täytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjännite voi transienttien kautta ylittyä
enemmän kuin 40 %.
6. Ympäristölämpötila-alue: 0° C ... 60° C
7. Kotelon sisälle, avauksen jälkeen näkyvälle paikalle, on kiinnitettävä kilpi, jossa
on seuraava varoitus:
Varoitus
Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosia
varten. Älä tällöin käytä mitään kytkimiä, vedä tai liitä mitään rakenneryhmiä,
äläkä erota mitään sähköjohtoja (pistoliittimiä).
Tätä varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, että minkäänlaista
räjähdysvaarannettua ilmakehää ei ole olemassa.

Hyväksyttyjen rakenneryhmien lista

Lista hyväksiytyistä rakennesarjoista löytyy internetistä osoitteesta:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
käyttäjätunnuksella 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-33

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.9 Användning av ET 200M / S7-300 i explosionsriskområde zon 2

Zon 2
Explosionsriskområden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att
en atmosfär med explosionsfara föreligger.

Zon Explosionsfara Exempel

2 Explosiv gasatmosfär uppstår Områden kring flänsförbindelser med
endast sällan eller kortvarigt packningar vid rörledningar i slutna
utrymmen
Säkert Nej • Utanför zon 2
område • Standardanvändning av decentral
periferi

Nedan följer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av den decentrala

periferienheten ET 200M och SIMATIC°S7-300 i ett explosionsriskområde.

Ytterligare information
Ytterligare information om ET 200M och de olika S7-300-komponentgrupperna
finner du i handboken.

Tillverkningsort
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Godkännande
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 enligt EN 50021 : 1999
Kontrollnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Anvisning
Komponentgrupper med godkännande II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 får endast
användas i automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7-300 / ET°200M från
apparatgrupp 3.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-34 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Underhåll
Vid reparation måste den aktuella komponentgruppen insändas till tillverkaren.
Reparationer får endast genomföras där.

Särskilda villkor
1. Den decentrala periferienheten ET 200M och SIMATIC°S7-300 måste monteras
i ett kopplingsskåp eller metallhus. Dessa måste minst vara av skyddsklass
IP 54. Därvid ska omgivningsvillkoren där enheten installeras beaktas. För
kåpan måste en tillverkardeklaration för zon 2 föreligga (enligt EN 50021).
2. Om en temperatur på > 70°C uppnås vid husets kabel resp kabelinföring under
driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trådförgreningen kan vara > 80°C under
driftvillkor, måste kabelns temperaturegenskaper överensstämma med den
verkligen uppmätta temperaturen.
3. De använda kabelinföringarna måste uppfylla kraven i det krävda IP-
skyddsutförandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021).
4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts till felsäkrade signalenheters
in- och utgångar, måste vara godkända för explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA eller
EEx nC.
5. Åtgärder måste vidtas så, att märkspänningen ej kan överskridas med mer än
40°% genom transienter.
6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0° C till 60° C
7. När huset öppnats ska en skylt med följande varning monteras på ett tydligt
synligt ställe huset:
Varning
Huset får endast öppnas under kort tid, t ex för visuell diagnos. Använd därvid
inga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frånskilj inga elektriska
ledningar (insticksanslutningar).
Ingen hänsyn måste tas till denna varning om det är säkert att det inte råder
någon explosionsfarlig atmosfär.

Lista över godkända komponentgrupper

Lista över godkända enheter återfinns i Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
under bidrags-ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-35

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.10 Uso do ET 200M / S7-300 em área exposta ao perigo de

explosão 2

Zona 2
As áreas expostas ao perigo de explosão são divididas em zonas. As zonas são
diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existência de uma atmosfera
explosiva.

Zona Perigo de explosão Exemplo

2 Só raramente e por um breve Áreas em torno de ligações flangeadas
período de tempo surgem com vedações chatas em tubulações em
atmosferas explosivas recintos fechados
Área segura Não • fora da zona 2
• Aplicações descentralizadas de
periferia descentralizada

A seguir, o encontrará avisos importantes para a instalação do aparelho periférico

descentralizado ET 200M e da SIMATIC S7-300 em área exposta ao perigo de
explosão.

Mais informações
Para obter mais informações sobre o ET 200M e os diversos grupos construtivos
S7-300, consulte o manual.

Local de produção
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Licença
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 seg. EN 50021 : 1999
Número de ensaio: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Aviso
Componentes com a licença II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 só podem ser
aplicados em sistemas de automação SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M da categoria
de aparelho 3.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-36 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Reparo
Os grupos construtivos em questão devem ser remetidos para o local de produção
a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas lá deve ser efetuado o reparo.

Condições especiais
1. O aparelho periférico ET 200M e a SIMATIC S7-300 devem ser montados em
um armário de distribuição ou em uma caixa metálica. Estes devem garantir no
mínimo o tipo de proteção IP 54. Durante este trabalho deverão ser levados em
consideração as condições locais, nas quais o aparelho será instalado. Para a
caixa deverá ser apresentada uma declaração do fabricante para a zona 2 (de
acordo com EN 50021).
2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta carcaça sob as condições
operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 °C, ou caso sob condições
operacionais a temperatura na ramificação do fio poderá atingir > 80 °C, as
caraterísticas de temperatura deverão corresponder às temperaturas realmente
medidas.
3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de
proteção IP e à seção 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021).
4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas em
entradas e saídas de módulos de sinais protegidos contra erro, devem possuir
a licença para a proteção de explosão do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tensão nominal através de
transitórios não possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %.
6. Área de temperatura ambiente: 0° C até 60° C
7. No âmbito da carcaça deve ser colocada, após a abertura, em um ponto bem
visível uma placa com a seguinte advertência:
Advertência
A carcaça deve ser aberta apenas por um breve período de tempo, por ex. para
diagnóstico visual. Não acione nenhum interruptor, não retire ou conecte
nenhum módulo e não separe nenhum fio elétrico (ligações de tomada).
Esta advertência poderá ser ignorada caso se saiba que não há nenhuma
atmosfera sujeita ao perigo de explosão.

Lista dos componentes autorizados

A lista com os módulos autorizados encontram-se na Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
sob o número de ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-37

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

1.9.11 Χρήση της συσκευής ET 200M / S7-300 σε επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη

περιοχή, ζώνη 2

Ζώνη 2
Οι επικίνδυνες για έκρηξη περιοχές χωρίζονται σε ζώνες. Οι ζώνες διαφέρουν
σύµφωνα µε την πιθανότητα ύπαρξης ενός ικανού για έκρηξη περιβάλλοντος.

Ζώνη Κίνδυνος έκρηξης Παράδειγµα

2 Εκρηκτικό περιβάλλον αερίου Περιοχές γύρω από φλαντζωτές
παρουσιάζεται µόνο σπάνια και συνδέσεις µε τσιµούχες σε σωληνώσεις σε
για σύντοµο χρονικό διάστηµα κλειστούς χώρους
Ασφαλής Όχι • Εκτός της ζώνης 2
περιοχή • Τυπικές εφαρµογές αποκεντρωµένης
περιφέρειας

Στη συνέχεια θα βρείτε σηµαντικές υποδείξεις για την εγκατάσταση της

αποκεντρωµένης περιφερειακής συσκευής ET 200M και του δοµικού
συγκροτήµατος SIMATIC S7-300 σε επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη περιοχή.

Επιπλέον πληροφορίες
Επιπλέον πληροφορίες για τη συσκευή ET 200M και για τα διάφορα δοµικά
συγκροτήµατα (ενότητες) S7-300 θα βρείτε στο εγχειρίδιο.

Τόπος κατασκευής
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Άδεια
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο
EN 50021 : 1999
Αριθµός ελέγχου: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Υπόδειξη
Τα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα µε την άδεια II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 επιτρέπεται
να τοποθετηθούν µόνο σε συστήµατα αυτοµατισµού SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M
της κατηγορίας συσκευής 3.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-38 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Συντήρηση
Για µια επισκευή πρέπει να σταλθεί το αντίστοιχο δοµικό συγκρότηµα στον τόπο
κατασκευής. Μόνο εκεί επιτρέπεται να γίνει η επισκευή.

Ιδιαίτερες προϋποθέσεις
1. Η αποκεντρωµένη περιφερειακή συσκευή ET 200M και το δοµικό συγκρότηµα
SIMATIC S7-300 πρέπει να ενσωµατωθούν σε ένα ερµάριο ζεύξης ή σε ένα
µεταλλικό περίβληµα. Αυτά πρέπει να εξασφαλίζουν το λιγότερο το βαθµό
προστασίας IP 54. Σε αυτήν την περίπτωση πρέπει να ληφθούν υπόψη οι
περιβαλλοντικές συνθήκες, στις οποίες θα εγκατασταθεί η συσκευή. Για το
περίβληµα πρέπει να προβλέπεται δήλωση του κατασκευαστή για τη ζώνη 2
(σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο EN 50021).
2. Εάν στο καλώδιο ή στην είσοδο του καλωδίου αυτού του περιβλήµατος κάτω
από συνθήκες λειτουργίας η θερµοκρασία ξεπεράσει τους 70 °C ή όταν κάτω
από συνθήκες λειτουργίας η θερµοκρασία στη διακλάδωση του σύρµατος
µπορεί να είναι µεγαλύτερη από 80 °C, πρέπει οι θερµοκρασιακές ιδιότητες των
καλωδίων να ταυτίζονται µε τις πραγµατικά µετρηµένες θερµοκρασίες.
3. Οι χρησιµοποιούµενες εισόδοι καλωδίων πρέπει να συµµορφώνονται µε το
βαθµό προστασίας IP 54 στην ενότητα 7.2 (σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο
EN 50021).
4. Όλες οι συσκευές, συµπεριλαµβανοµένων διακοπτών κ.α., που συνδέονται στις
εισόδους και εξόδους δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων ασφαλών σηµάτων, πρέπει να
φέρουν εγκριµένη προστασία κατά έκρηξης τύπου EEx nA ή EEx nC.
5. Πρέπει να ληφθούν µέτρα, να µην µπορεί να γίνει υπέρβαση της ονοµαστικής
τάσης µέσω αιφνίδιας µεταβολής της τάσης πάνω από 40 %.
6. Περιοχή θερµοκρασίας περιβάλλοντος: 0° C έως 60° C
7. Πρέπει να τοποθετηθεί µέσα στο περίβληµα σε ευδιάκριτο σηµείο µετά το
άνοιγµα µία πινακίδα µε την ακόλουθη προειδοποίηση:
Προειδοποίηση
Το περίβληµα επιτρέπεται να ανοίγει µόνο για µικρό χρονικό διάστηµα, π.χ. για
τη διενέργεια οπτικής διάγνωσης. Μην κάνετε χρήση διακοπτών, µην τραβάτε ή
εµβυσµατώνετε δοµικά συγκροτήµατα και µη διαχωρίζετε ηλεκτροφόρους
αγωγούς (εµβσυµατώσιµες συνδέσεις).
Η προειδοποίηση αυτή δε χρειάζεται να ληφθεί υπ’ όψιν, εάν είναι γνωστό ότι
δεν υφίσταται ατµόσφαιρα παρουσιάζουσα κίνδυνο έκρηξης.

Κατάλογος των εγκεκριµένων δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων

Η λίστα µε τα εγκριµένα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα υπάρχει στο διαδίκτυο:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
µε τον κωδικό συνδροµής 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-39

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
General Technical Specifications

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-40 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Power Supply Modules 2
Introduction
Various power supply modules are available to supply your S7-300 programmable
controller and the sensors/actuators with 24 VDC.

Power supply modules

This chapter describes the technical specifications of the power supply modules of
the S7-300 programmable controller.
In addition to the technical specifications, this chapter describes the following:
• The characteristics
• Connection Diagram
• Block Diagram
• Line protection
• Reaction to atypical operating conditions

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

2.1 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A 2-2
(6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0)
2.2 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A; 2-6
(6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0)
2.3 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A; 2-9
(6ES7307-1EAx0-0AA0)
2.4 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A; 2-14
(6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 2-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Power Supply Modules

2.1 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A;

(6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0)

Order number “SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 305 power supply module (2 A) has the following salient features:
• Output current 2 A
• Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit
• Connection to DC power supply
(rated input voltage 24/48/72/96/110 VDC)
• Reliable isolation to EN 60 950
• Can be used as load power supply

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

2-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Power Supply Modules

Terminal assignment of the PS 305; 2 A

LED for “24 VDC

output voltage
available”
24 VDC

On/Off switch
for 24 VDC
I
Terminals for system
voltage and protective
grounding conductor

L+1
M1
L+2
Terminals for
M2 24 VDC output
L+2
voltage
M2
L+2
M2

Strain-relief assembly

Figure 2-1 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 2-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 305; 2 A (6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W H D 80 125 120 Protection class according to I, with protective
(in millimeters) IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part grounding conductor
1)
Weight Approx. 740 g
Insulation
Input Rating
• Isolation voltage rating 150 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to input)
• Rated value 24/48/72/96/110 VDC
• Tested with 2800 VDC
• Voltage range 16.8 to 138 VDC
Reliable isolation SELV circuit
Rated input current
• At 24 V 2.7 A Buffering of supply failures (at > 10 ms
24/48/72/96/110 V)
• At 48 V 1.3 A
• At 72 V 0.9 A • Repeat rate min. 1 s
• At 96 V 0.65 A Efficiency 75%
• At 110 V 0.6 A
Power input 64 W
Inrush current (at 25 C) 20 A
Power loss 16 W
I2t (at inrush current) 5 A2s
Diagnostics
Output Rating
LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
Output voltage
• Rated value 24 VDC
1) With limited input voltage range > 24 V (24 to 138 VDC)
• Permitted range 24 V " 3 %, stable at
no load the PS 305 can be loaded with 3 A.

• Ramp-up time max. 3 s

Output current
• Rated value 2 A; 1)
Can be connected in
parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching,
from 1.65 to 1.95 x IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

2-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Power Supply Modules

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 305; 2 A

L+1 L+2

M1 M2

24 VDC

I/

Figure 2-2 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example
Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply
cable of the PS 305 power supply module (2 A):
• Rated current at 110 VDC: 10 A
• Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-1 Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating
Conditions

If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC

LED
... the output circuit is overloaded:
• I > 3.9 A (dynamic) Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Flashes
• 3 A < I v 3.9 A (static) Voltage drop, shortening of service life
... the output is short-circuited Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage Dark
recovery after short circuit has been
eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary side Possible destruction -
There is an undervoltage on the primary Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage Dark
side recovery

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 2-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Power Supply Modules

2.2 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A;

(6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 307 power supply module (2 A) has the following salient features:
• Output current 2 A
• Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit
• Connection to single-phase AC system
(input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
• Reliable isolation to EN 60 950
• Can be used as load power supply

Wiring schematic of the PS 307; 2 A

LED for “24 VDC output

voltage available”
24 VDC

230V Voltage Selector

On/Off switch for

I 24 VDC

L1 Terminals for system

N voltage and protective
grounding conductor

L+
Terminals for 24 VDC
M output voltage
L+
M

Strain-relief assembly

Figure 2-3 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

2-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Power Supply Modules

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 307; 2 A

L1 L+

N M

24 VDC

I/

Figure 2-4 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A)

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example
Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply
cable of the PS 307 power supply module (2 A):
• Rated current at 230 VAC: 6 A
• Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-2 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating
Conditions

If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC

LED
... the output circuit is overloaded:
• I > 2.6 A (dynamic) Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Flashes
• 2 A < I v 2.6 A (static) Voltage drop, shortening of service life
... the output is short-circuited Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage Dark
recovery after short circuit has been
eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary side Possible destruction -
There is an undervoltage on the primary Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage Dark
side recovery

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 2-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 2 A (6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W H D 50 125 120 Protection class according to I, with protective
(in millimeters) IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part grounding conductor
1)
Weight Approx. 420 g
Insulation
Input Rating
• Rated insulation level 250 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to L1)
• Rated value 120 / 230 VAC • Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency
Reliable isolation SELV circuit
• Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz
• Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
and/or 187 V)
Rated input current • Repeat rate min 1 s
• At 230 V 0.5 A
• At 120 V 0.8 A Efficiency 83 %

Inrush current (at 25°C) 20 A Power input 58 W

I2t (at inrush current) 1 A2s Power loss typ. 10 W

Output Rating Diagnostics

Output voltage LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
• Rated value 24 VDC
• Permitted range 24 V " 5 %, stable at
no load
• Ramp-up time max. 2.5 s

Output current
• Rated value 2 A,
Cannot be connected in
parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching,
1.1 to 1.3 x IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

2-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Power Supply Modules

2.3 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A;

(6ES7307-1EAx0-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module

6ES7307-1EA00-0AA0

Order number “SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7307-1EA80-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 307 power supply module (5 A) has the following salient features:
• Output current 5 A
• Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit
• Connection to single-phase AC system
(input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
• Reliable isolation to EN 60 950
• Can be used as load power supply

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 2-9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Power Supply Modules

Wiring schematic of the PS 307; 5 A

LED for “24 VDC

output voltage
available”
24 VDC

Voltage Selector
230V

On/Off switch
for 24 VDC
I
Terminals for system
voltage and protective
grounding conductor

L1
N
L+ Terminals for
M 24 VDC output
L+ voltage
M
L+
M

Strain-relief assembly

Figure 2-5 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A)

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 307; 5 A

L1 L+

N M

24 VDC

I/

Figure 2-6 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

2-10 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Power Supply Modules

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example
Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply
cable of the PS 307 power supply module (5 A):
• Rated current at 230 VAC: 10 A
• Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-3 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) to Atypical Operating
Conditions

If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC

LED
... the output circuit is overloaded:
• I > 6.5 A (dynamic) Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Flashes
• 5 A < I v 6.5 A (static) Voltage drop, shortening of service life
... the output is short-circuited Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage recovery Dark
after short circuit has been eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary Possible destruction –
side
There is an undervoltage on the Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage Dark
primary side recovery

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 2-11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 5 A (6ES7307-1EA00-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W x H x D 80 x 125 x 120 Protection class according to I, with protective
(in millimeters) IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part grounding conductor
1)
Weight Approx. 740 g
Insulation
Input Rating
• Rated insulation level 250 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to L1)
• Rated value 120 / 230 VAC
• Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency
Reliable isolation SELV circuit
• Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz
• Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
and/or 187 V)
Rated input current • Repeat rate min 1 s
• At 120 V 2A
• At 230 V 1A Efficiency 87 %

Inrush current (at 25 C) 45 A Power input 138 W

I2t (at inrush current) 1.2 A2s Power loss typ. 18 W

Output Rating Diagnostics

Output voltage LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
• Rated value 24 VDC
• Permitted range 24 V " 5 %,
stable at no load

• Ramp-up time max. 2.5 s

Output current
• Rated value 5A
Cannot be connected in
parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching,
from 1.1 to 1.3 x IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

2-12 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 5 A (6ES7307-1EA80-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W x H x D 80 x 125 x 120 Protection class according to I, with protective
(in millimeters) IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part grounding conductor
1)
Weight Approx. 570 g
Insulation
Input Rating
• Rated insulation level 250 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to L1)
• Rated value 120/230 VDC • Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency Reliable isolation SELV circuit
• Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
• Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz and/or 187 V)
Rated input current • Repeat rate min. 1 s
• At 120 V 2.1 A Efficiency 84%
• At 230 V 1.2 A Power input 143 W
Inrush current (at 25 C) 45 A Power loss 23 W
I2t (at inrush current) 1.8 A2s Diagnostics
Output Rating LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
Output voltage
• Rated value 24 VDC
• Permitted range 24 V " 3 %
• Ramp-up time max. 3 s

Output current
• Rated value 5 A; cannot be
connected in parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic,
nonlatching,
from 1.1 to 1.3 x IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 2-13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Power Supply Modules

2.4 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A;

(6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 307 power supply module (10 A) has the following salient features:
• Output current 10 A
• Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit
• Connection to single-phase AC system
(input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
• Reliable isolation to EN 60 950
• Can be used as load power supply

Wiring schematic of the PS 307; 10 A

LED for “24 VDC

output voltage
available” 24 VDC

230V
Voltage Selector

On/Off switch for I

24 VDC

L+ Terminals for
M
L+ 24 VDC
M output
L1 L+ voltage
N M
L+
M

Strain-relief assembly Terminals for system

voltage and protective
grounding conductor

Figure 2-7 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

2-14 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Power Supply Modules

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 307; 10 A

L1 L+

N M

24 VDC

I/

Figure 2-8 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A)

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example,
Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply
cable of the PS 307 power supply module (10 A):
• Rated current at 230 VAC: 16 A
• Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-4 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) to Atypical Operating
Conditions

If ... Reaction of the module 24 VDC

LED
... the output circuit is overloaded:
• I > 13 A (dynamic) Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Flashes
• 10 A < I v 13 A (static) Voltage drop, shortening of service life
... the output is short-circuited Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage Dark
recovery after short circuit has been
eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary side Possible destruction –
There is an undervoltage on the primary Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage Dark
side recovery

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 2-15

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 10 A (6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W x H x D 200 x 125 x 120 Protection class according to I, with protective
(in millimeters) IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part grounding conductor
1)
Weight 1.2 kg
Insulation
Input Rating
• Rated insulation level 250 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to L1)
• Rated value 120 / 230 VAC • Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency Reliable isolation SELV circuit
• Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
• Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz
and/or 187 V)
Rated input current • Repeat rate min 1 s
• At 230 V 1.7 A
Efficiency 89 %
• At 120 V 3.5 A
Power input 270 W
Inrush current (at 25 °C) 55 A
Power loss typ. 30 W
I2t (at inrush current) 9 A2s
Diagnostics
Output Rating
LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
Output voltage
• Rated value 24 VDC
• Permitted range 24 V " 5 %, stable at
no load
• Ramp-up time max. 2.5 s

Output current
• Rated value 10 A,
Cannot be connected in
parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching,
from 1.1 to 1.3 x IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

2-16 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules 3
Structure of the chapter
The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects:
1. Chapter overview of which modules are available and described here
2. Module overview on the most important properties of the modules
3. Sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the digital module
4. Information that is generally valid – in other words, relating to all digital modules
(for example, parameter assignment and diagnostics)
5. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics,
diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special
characteristics of the module):
a) for digital input modules
b) for digital output modules
c) for relay output modules
d) for digital input/output modules

Additional information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and
128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in
the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

3.1 Module Overview 3-4
3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital 3-10
Module
3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment 3-11
3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules 3-12
3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24; 3-13
(6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0)
3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC; 3-16
(6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0)
3.7 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24; 3-18
(6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0)
3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; 3-20
(6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0)
3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; with Hardware and 3-22
Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)
3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; Source Input; 3-34
(6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0)
3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V 3-36
(6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0)
3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125; 3-38
(6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0)
3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC 3-40
(6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0)
3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230; 3-42
(6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0)
3.15 Digital Input Module SM 321; 3-44
DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0)
3.16 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; 3-46
(6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0)
3.17 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; 3-49
(6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0)
3.18 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 16 x VDC 24/0.5 A; 3-53
(6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0)
3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 3-56
High Speed; (6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0)
3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC 3-59
(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0)
3.21 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A 3-66
(6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0)
3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A; 3-69
(6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0)
3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; 3-72
with Diagnostic Interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)
3.24 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A; 3-81
(6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Section Contents Page

3.25 Digital Input module SM 322; DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; 3-84
(6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0)
3.26 Digital Output Module SM 322; 3-87
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)
3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322; 3-93
DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0)
3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC; 3-96
(6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0)
3.29 Relay Output Module SM 322; 3-100
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)
3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A; 3-106
(6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0)
3.31 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; 3-110
DI 16/DO16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0)
3.32 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; 3-113
DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0)
3.33 Digital Input/Output Module SM 327; 3-116
DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the digital
modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module
for your task.

Table 3-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321;

Module DI 32 x DI 32 x DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 16 x
24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC High 24 VDC with 24 VDC;
Speed hardware and source input
Char- diagnostic
acter- interrupts
istics
(-1BL00-) (-1EL00-) (-1BH02-) (-7BH01-) (-1BH50-)
(-1BH10-)

Number of inputs 32 DI; 32 DI; 16 DI; 16 DI; isolated 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI,
isolated in isolated in isolated in in groups of 16 groups of 16 source input,
groups of 16 groups of 8 groups of 16 isolated in
groups of 16

Rated input 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

voltage
Suitable for... Switches;
two, three, and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
Supports No No No Yes Yes No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No Yes No
interrupt
Hardware interrupt No No No No Yes No
upon edge change
Settable No No No No Yes No
input delays
Special Features – – – - 2 –
short-circuit-pro
of sensor
supplies for 8
channels each
External
redundant power
supply possible
to supply
sensors

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Table 3-2 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)

SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321;

Module
DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 8 x DI 8 x
UC 24/48V 48-125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
Char- ISOL
acter- (-1CH20-) (-1FH00-) (-1FF01-)
istics (-1CH00-) (-1FF10-)
Number of inputs 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI; isolated in 8 DI, isolated in 8 DI; isolated in
groups of 1 groups of 8 groups of 4 groups of 2 groups of 1
Rated input 24 to 48 VDC, 24 48 to 125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
voltage to 48 VAC
Suitable for... Switches; Switches;
two, three, and four-wire proximity two and three-wire AC proximity switches
switches (BEROs)
Supports No No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No No
interrupt
Hardware interrupt No No No No No
upon edge change
Settable No No No No No
input delays
Special Features – –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Table 3-3 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322;

Module DO 32 x DO 32 x DO 16 x DO 16 x DO 16 x DO 16 x
24 VDC VAC 120/230/ 24 VDC/ 24 VDC/ 24/48 VUC 120/230 VDC/
Char- 0.5 A 1A 0.5 A 0.5 A High 1A
acter- Speed
istics (-1BL00-) (-1FL00-) (-1BH01-) (-1BH10-) (-5GH00-) (-1FH00-)

Number of outputs 32 DO; 32 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO;

isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 1 groups of 8
Output current 0.5 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A
Rated load voltage 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 to 48 VDC, 120/230 VAC
24 to 48 VAC
Suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
Supports No No No Yes No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No Yes No
interrupt
Substitute value No No No No Yes No
output
Special Features –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Table 3-4 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)

SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322;

Module DO 8 x 24VDC/ DO 8 x DO 8 x 48-125 DO8 x DO8 x
2A 24 VDC/0.5 A VDC/ 1.5 A 120/ 230 VAC/2A 120/ 230 VAC/
Char- with diagnostic 2A ISOL
acter- interrupt
istics (-1BF01-) (-8BF00-) (-1CF00-) (-1FF01-) (-5FF00-)
Number of outputs 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated in
groups of 4 groups of 8 and reverse groups of 4 groups of 1
polarity
protection, in
groups of 4
Output current 2A 0.5 A 1.5 A 2A 2A
Rated load voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 48 to 125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
Suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor
starters, fractional h.p. motors and
indicator lights.
Supports No No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No Yes No No Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic No Yes No No Yes
interrupt
Substitute value No Yes No No Yes
output
Special Features – Redundant – Fuse blown -
driving of a load display.
possible Replaceable fuse
for each group

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Table 3-5 Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 322; DO 16 x SM 322; DO 8 x SM 322; DO 8 x SM 322; DO 8 x

Char- Rel. 120 VAC Rel. 230 VAC Rel. 230 VAC/ 5 A Rel. 230 VAC/ 5 A
(-1HH01-) (-1HF01-) (-5HF00-) (-1HF10-)
acter-
istics
Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 2 groups of 1 groups of 1
Rated load voltage 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC,
48 to 230 VAC 48 to 230 VAC 24 to 230 VAC 48 to 230 VAC
Suitable for... AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional horsepower motors and
indicator lights
Supports No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic interrupt No No Yes No
Substitute value output No No Yes No
Special Features –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Table 3-6 Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 323; SM 323; SM 327;

DI 16/DO 16x24 VDC/ DI 8/DO 8x DI 8/DX 8x
Char- 0.5 A 24 VDC/0.5 A DC 24 V/0.5 A,
acter- parameterizable
istics (-1BL00-) (-1BH01-) (-1BH00-)

Number of inputs 16 inputs, isolated in 8 inputs, isolated in 8 digital inputs and 8

groups of 16 groups of 8 individually
parameterizable inputs
Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in or outputs, isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 16
Rated input voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
Output current 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A
Rated load voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
Inputs suitable for... Switches and two, three and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs).
Outputs suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
Supports No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic interrupt No No No
Hardware interrupt upon No No No
edge change
Settable input delay No No No
Substitute value output No No No
Special Features –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the

Digital Module

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other
to commission digital modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either
earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other
modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.

Sequence of steps

Table 3-7 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module

Step Procedure Refer To...

1. Select the module Section 3.1 and specific module section from
Section 3.5
2. Install the module in the “Mounting” section in the Installation Manual for
SIMATIC S7 network the programmable logic controller being used:
• S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
• ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
3. Assign parameters to module Section 3.3
4. Commission configuration “Commissioning” section in the Installation
Manual for the programmable controller being
used:
• S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
• ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
5. If commissioning was not Section 3.4
successful, diagnose
configuration

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-10 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment

Introduction
Digital modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics
of dome modules by means of parameter assignment.
The information contained in this section refers only to the programmable digital
modules:
• Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V with process and diagnosis
alarm, synchronous; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)
• Digital input module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt
(6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)
• Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC /2A ISOL
(6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)
• Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC /5A
(6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)
• Digital Input/Output Module SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A
(6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)

Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7. You must perform parameter
assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP ³ to RUN mode, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual digital modules.

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You can also change the dynamic parameters in the running user program in an S7
logic control using SFC. Note, however, that after a change from RUN ³ STOP,
STOP ³ RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find
a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in
Appendix A.

Parameter Settable with CPU Operating State

Static PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
Dynamic PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
SFC 55 in the user program RUN

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Parameters of the digital modules

The settable parameters are listed in the special section on the module.

3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules

Introduction
The information contained in this section refers only to the digital modules with
diagnostics capability. For the S7-300, these modules are as follows:
• Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V with hardware and diagnostic
interrupts, clocked; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)
• Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC
(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0)
• Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt
(6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)
• Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC /2A ISOL
(6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)
• Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC /5A
(6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)

Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and
non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled
diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the
“Diagnostics” parameter field in STEP 7.
Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the digital
module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
• The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the digital module and
forwarded to the CPU.
• The SF LED on the digital module lights.
• If you have programmed “Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” in STEP 7, a diagnostic
interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-12 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user
program (refer to the Appendix “Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules”).
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to
online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

The digital modules with diagnostics capability indicate errors for you by means of
their SF LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic
message is triggered by the digital module. It goes out when all errors have been
rectified.
The group fault (SF) LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of
sensor supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on).

Diagnostic messages interrupt processing by the digital modules

You will find the diagnostic messages with their possible causes and remedial
action, together with a description of possible interrupts in the specific section on
the module.

3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24;

(6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300 Module

6AG1321-1BL00-2AA0

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC has the following salient
features:
• 32 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Backplane bus
interface

24V 24V

Channel
number
Status display – green

Figure 3-1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Input byte x Input byte (x+2)

Input byte (x+1) Input byte (x+3)

Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-14 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 Current consumption
(in millimeters) • From the backplane bus max. 15 mA
Weight Approx. 260 g Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.5 W
Data for Specific Module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Supports clocked No Status display Green LED per channel
operation
Interrupts None
Number of inputs 32
Diagnostic functions None
Length of cable
• Unshielded max. 600 m Data for Selecting a Sensor

• Shielded max. 1000 m Input voltage

Voltages, Currents, Potentials • Rated value 24 VDC

• For signal “1” 13 to 30 V
Number of inputs that can be
triggered simultaneously • For signal “0” –30 to + 5 V

• Horizontal configuration Input current

Up to 40 C 32 • At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Up to 60 C 16 Input delay
• Vertical configuration • At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Up to 40 C 32 • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Isolation Input characteristic curve According to
• Between channels and IEC 61131, type 1
backplane bus Yes
Connection of Two-Wire Possible
• Between the channels Yes BEROs max. 1.5 mA
In groups of 16
• Permitted bias current
Permitted potential difference
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-15

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC;

(6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 32 x 20 VAC features the following characteristics:
• 32 inputs, isolated in groups of 8
• 120 VAC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three-wire AC proximity switches

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC

1L 3L

1N 3N
backplane
bus
IM 4L
2L

2N 4N

Channel
number
Status display - green

Figure 3-3 ModuleView and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 20 VAC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-16 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 300 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Supports clocked No
Input voltage
operation
• Rated value 120 VAC
Number of inputs 32
• For ‘‘1’’ signal 74 to 132 V
Length of cable
• For ‘‘0’’ signal 0 to 20 V
• Unshielded max. 600 m
47 to 63 Hz
• Frequency range
• Shielded max. 1000 m
Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
• At ‘‘1’’ signal typ. 21 mA
Number of inputs that can be
triggered simultaneously Input delay

• Horizontal configuration • From ‘‘0’’ to ‘‘1’’ max. 15 ms

Up to 40 C 32
• From ‘‘1’’ to ‘‘0’’ max. 25 ms

Input characteristic curve According to

Up to 60 C 24
IEC 61131, type 2
• Vertical configuration Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Up to 40 C 32 BEROs max. 4 A
Isolation • Permitted bias current
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
• Between the channels Yes
In groups of 8
Permitted potential difference
• Between Minternal and 120 VAC
the inputs
• Between the inputs of 250 VAC
the different groups
Insulation tested with 2500 VDC
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 16 mA
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4 W

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-17

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.7 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24;

(6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300 module

6AG1321-1BH02-2AA0

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC has the following salient
features:
• 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Backplane bus
interface

M
24 V

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-4 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-18 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Input voltage

(in millimeters) • Rated value 24 VDC
Weight Approx. 200 g • For signal “1” 13 to 30 V

Data for Specific Module • For signal “0” –30 to + 5 V

Supports clocked No Input current

operation • At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Number of inputs 16 Input delay
Length of cable • At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• Unshielded max. 600 m • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• Shielded max. 1000 m Input characteristic curve According to
IEC 61131, type 1
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Number of inputs that can be
BEROs max. 1.5 mA
triggered simultaneously
• Horizontal configuration
• Permitted bias current

Up to 60 C 16
• Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C 16

Isolation
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus

Permitted potential difference

• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 10 mA

Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.5 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-19

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321;

DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; (6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0)

Order number:
6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed has the following salient features:
• 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).
• Supports clocked operation

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321;

DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed

Backplane bus
interface

M
24 V

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-5 Module view and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC High Speed

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-20 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Input voltage
(in millimeters) • Rated value 24 VDC
Weight Approx. 200 g • For signal “1” 13 to 30 V
Data for Specific Module • For signal “0” –30 to + 5 V

Supports clocked Yes Input current

operation • At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Number of inputs 16 Input delay
Length of cable • At “0” to “1” 25 to 75
s
• Unshielded max. 600 m • At “1” to “0” 25 to 75
s
• Shielded max. 1000 m
Input characteristic curve According to
Voltages, Currents, Potentials IEC 61131, type 1

Number of inputs that can be Connection of Two-Wire Possible

triggered simultaneously BEROs max. 1.5 mA
• Horizontal configuration • Permitted bias current
Up to 60 C 16
• Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C 16

Isolation
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus

Permitted potential difference

• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 110 mA

Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.8 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-21

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.9 Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V;

with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked;
(6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300 module

6AG1321-7BH01-2AB0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; with hardware and diagnostic interrupts features the
following characteristics:
• 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• Input characteristic curve according to IEC 61131, Type 2
• Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).
• 2 short-circuit-proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each
• External redundant power supply possible to supply sensors
• “Sensor supply (Vs)” status display
• Group error display
• Supports clocked operation
• Supports the “parameter changing during the RUN” function
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Programmable hardware interrupt
• Programmable input delays

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-22 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

SF L+
L+

Broken–wire
detection

Vs Vs
L+

Vs
Vs

Broken–wire
detection

Backplane bus M M
interface
24 V

Channel number
Status display – green
Fault indicator – red
Encoder supplies Vs – green

Figure 3-6 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-23

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders

The figure below shows how encoder can additionally be supplied by means of Vs
with a redundant voltage source – for example, via another module).

L+ 1 L+
Short-circuit-
proof driver Vs
2 L+
Digital input M
module ±
to the sensors

Figure 3-7 Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders of SM 321;

DI 16 x VDC 24

Terminal assignment for resistive circuit of the encoder

In order to detect a broken wire, it is necessary to wire the encoder contact with a
resistor.

L +/ Vs E x.x

15 k ... 18 k

Figure 3-8 Terminal assignment for resistive circuit of the encoder of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-24 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Interrupts

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • Hardware interrupt Parameters can be
(in millimeters) • Diagnostic interrupt assigned
Parameters can be
Weight Approx. 200 g assigned
Data for Specific Module Diagnostic functions Parameters can be
Supports clocked Yes assigned
operation • Group error display Red LED (SF)
Parameter changing during the Yes • Diagnostics information Possible
RUN is possible read-out
• Behavior of the non para- gives the last valid Monitoring of
meterized inputs output value before the
parameterization • Wire-break yes, at I < 1 mA

Number of inputs 16 Sensor Power Supply Outputs

Length of cable Number of outputs 2

• Unshielded max. 600 m Output voltage
• Shielded max. 1000 m • With load min. L+ (–2.5 V)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Output current
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC • Rated value 120 mA
electronics and encoder L+ • Permitted range 0 to 150 mA

• Reverse polarity protection Yes Additional (redundant) supply Permitted

Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Short-circuit protection Yes, electronic

• Horizontal configuration Data for Selecting a Sensor

Up to 60 C 16 Input voltage
• Vertical configuration • Rated value 24 VDC
Up to 40 C 16 • For signal “1” 13 to 30 V

Isolation
• For signal “0” *30 to + 5 V

• Between channels and Yes Input current

backplane bus • At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Permitted potential difference Input characteristic curve According to
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC IEC 61131, type 2
circuits Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Insulation tested with 500 VDC BEROs max. 2 mA
• Permitted bias current
Current consumption
Resistive circuit of the sensor 10 to 18 kOhm
• From the backplane bus max. 130 mA for detecting broken wires
• From load voltage L + max. 90 mA Time/Frequency
(without sensor supply VS)
Internal processing time for
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4 W status processing (in non
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics synchronous operation)

Status display
• Release of process and max. 40
s
diagnosis alarm
• Inputs Green LED per channel
Input delay
• Sensor power supplies (Vs) Green LED per output
• Parameters can be Yes
assigned typ. 0.1/0.5/3/15/20 ms
• Rated value

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-25

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.9.1 Synchronicity

Characteristics
Reproducible (i.e. same length) reaction times are achieved for the SIMATIC with
an equidistant DP bus cycle and synchronization of the following free running
single cycles:
• Free running of the user program. The length of the cycle time can vary due to
acyclic program branches.
• Free running, variable DP cycle at the PROFIBUS subnetwork
• Free running cycle at the DP slave back plane bus.
• Free running cycle during signal processing and conversion in the electronic
modules of the DP slave.
In the case of equidistance the DP cycle runs in phase and with the same length.
The procedure levels of a CPU (OB 61 to OB 64) and the synchronous peripheral
are synchronized in this cycle. The E/A data are therefore transferred at defined
and consistent time intervals (clock synchronicity).

Requirements
• The DP-Master and DP-Slave must support the synchronicity. They require
STEP 7 from Version 5.2.

Module filtering mode Synchronicity

In synchronous operation, the following conditions apply:

Filter and processing time TWE between reading the current value 255 to 345
s
and loading it into the transfer buffer
(the specified value for TWE applies, independent of the activation of
the hardware interrupt or diagnosis)
including an input delay time of 100
s
TDPmin 2.5 ms
Diagnostic interrupt max. 4 x TDP

Note
In “synchronous” mode the input delay of the inputs is always set to 100
s
independent of the input delay parameterized in STEP 7

Further information
Further information on clock synchronicity is given in the Online help of STEP 7, in
the manual Local peripheral system ET 200Mand in the manual
Clock synchronicity.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-26 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.9.2 Assigning Parameters to SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
digital modules in the reference manual, section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default
settings for the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC in the table below.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 3-8 Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
• Hardware interrupt Yes/no No
Input delay/voltage type 0.1 ms (DC) (DC) Static Module
0.5 ms (DC)
3 ms (DC)
15 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
Diagnostics
• Sensor supply missing Yes/no No Static Channel
• Wire-break Yes/no No group

Trigger for hardware interrupt

• Rising edge Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
• Falling edge Yes/no No group

Assignment of the encoder supplies to channel groups

The two encoder supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups:
inputs 0 to 7 and inputs 8 to 15. In these two channel groups, you parameterize the
diagnostics for the encoder supply, too.

Assigning interrupt parameters to channel groups

The table below shows the channels that can be combined to form a channel
group if you would like to parameterize interrupt processing.
You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program
with an SFC.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-27

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Table 3-9 Assigning Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24

Parameter... Can Be Set in Following Channel Group

Channel Groups Number
0 and 1 0
2 and 3 1
4 and 5 2
Hardware interrupt
6 and 7 3
(for falling, rising or both types of pulse
8 and 9 4
edges)
10 and 11 5
12 and 13 6
14 and 15 7
Diagnostic interrupt 0 to 7
-
for missing sensor supply 8 to 15
Diagnostic interrupt 0 and 1 0
for wire–break 2 and 3 1
:

Tolerances of the programmable input delays

Table 3-10 Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24

Programmed Input delay Tolerance
0.1 ms 60 to 140
s
0.5 ms 400 to 900 ms
3 ms (preset) 2,6 to 3,3 ms
15 ms 12 to 15 ms
20 ms 17 to 23 ms

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-28 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.9.3 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Effect of operating and mode supply voltage on the input values

The input values of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 DC depend on the operating mode of
the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 3-11 Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and Supply
Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24

CPU Operating State Power Supply L+ Input Value of Digital

to Digital Module Module
POWER ON RUN L+ exists Process value
L+ missing 0 signal
STOP L+ exists Process value
L+ missing 0 signal
POWER OFF – L+ exists –
L+ missing –

Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

The table below presents an overview of the diagnostic messages for the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC.

Table 3-12 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24

Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Diagno- Parameters

stics can be
assigned
Sensor supply missing SF Channel group
Wire-break SF Channel group Yes

Module not parameterized. SF Channel group

External auxiliary supply missing SF Module
Internal auxiliary power missing SF Module
Fuse blown SF Module
Incorrect parameter on module SF Module
No
Watchdog timeout SF Module
EPROM error SF Module
RAM error SF Module
Hardware interrupt lost SF Module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-29

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly
in STEP 7.

Behavior upon failure of the supply voltage

A failure of the supply voltage of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 DC is always indicated by
the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the
module.
The input value is initially held for 20 to 40 ms before the 0 signal is transferred to
the CPU. Supply voltage dips < 20 ms do not modify the process value (refer to
Table 3-11).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see
Section 3.9.4).

Failure of the supply voltage with redundant encoder incoming supply

Note
If an external redundant source is applied simultaneously to the sensor supply
(Vs), a failure in the internal sensor supply causes a failure of the internal and/or
external sensor supply and/or a blown fuse to be indicated instead of a regular
sensor supply failure.

Short-circuit of sensor supply Vs

Irrespective of the parameter assignment, the corresponding Vs LED goes out if a
short-circuit of the encoder supply Vs occurs.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-30 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Causes of error and remedial measures

Table 3-13 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V, Causes of Error and

Remedial Action

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Lack of encoder Overload of sensor supply Eliminate overload
supply
Short circuit of sensor supply to M Eliminate short circuit
External auxiliary Power supply L+ to module missing Feed supply L+
voltage missing
Internal auxiliary Power supply L+ to module missing Feed supply L+
voltage missing
Fuse in module defective Replace module
Fuse blown Fuse in module defective Replace module
Wrong parameters in One parameter or the combination of Reassign module parameter
module parameters is not plausible
Watchdog tripped Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference
interference
Module defective Replace module
EPROM error Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference and switch on/off
interference power supply of CPU
Module defective Replace module
RAM error Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference and switch on/off
interference power supply of CPU
Module defective Replace module
Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, Change interrupt processing in CPU
since the previous interrupt was not and reconfigure module parameters, if
acknowledged; configuration error required
possible The error continues until the module is
configured with new parameters
Module not Fault during startup Reassign module parameters
parameterized

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-31

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.9.4 Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Introduction
This section describes the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC with regard to its interrupt
behavior. The following interrupts exist:
• Diagnostic interrupt
• Hardware interrupt
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in
STEP 7 (refer to Section 3.9.2).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the
diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Hardware interrupt
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC can trigger a hardware interrupt for every channel
group with a rising or falling edge, or both, of a signal status change.
Perform parameter assignment one channel group at a time. It can be modified at
any time (in RUN mode using the user program).
Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU
(OB 40). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of the priority
classes with low priority.
You can set in the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40) how the
programmable logic controller has to react to an edge change. When the hardware
interrupt OB is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
The module can buffer one interrupt per channel. If no higher priority run-time
levels are waiting to be processed, the buffered interrupts (of all modules) are
serviced one after the other by the CPU according to the order in which they
occurred.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-32 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Hardware interrupt lost

In an interrupt has been buffered for a channel and another interrupt occurs on that
channel before it has been processed by the CPU, a diagnostic interrupt “hardware
interrupt lost” is triggered.
More interrupts on this channel are not acquired until processing of the interrupt
buffered on this channel has been executed.

Interrupt-triggering channels
The channel triggered by the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of the OB 40 in the OB40_POINT_ADDR variable. Figure 3-9 shows the
assignment of the bits to the local data double word 8.

Byte Variable Data type Description

6/7 OB40_MDL_ADDR WORD B#16#0 Address of the interrupt
triggering module
From OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD See Display of the interrupt
8 Figure 3-9 triggering inputs

LB 8 LB 9 LB 10 LB 11

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 1 0 Bit no.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LD 8

reserved

Edge change: Channel 8

Edge change: Channel 9
Edge change channel 10

Edge change: Channel 15

Edge change: Channel 0

Edge change: Channel 1
Edge change channel 2

Edge change: Channel 7

Figure 3-9 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit
Value

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-33

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; Source

Input; (6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC (source input) has the following salient features:
• 16 inputs, source input, isolated in groups of 16
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

L+

Backplane bus
interface

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-10 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC
(Source Input)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-34 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Input voltage (reference potential is L+)
(in millimeters)
• Rated value 24 VDC
Weight Approx. 200 g • For signal “1” –13 V to –30 V
Data for Specific Module • For signal “0” +30 V to –5 V
Supports clocked No Input current
operation • At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Number of inputs 16 Input delay
Length of cable • At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• Unshielded max. 600 m • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• Shielded max. 1000 m Input characteristic curve According to IEC 61131,
Voltages, Currents, Potentials type 1

Number of inputs that can be Connection of Two-Wire Possible

triggered simultaneously BEROs max. 1.5 mA
• Permitted bias current
• Horizontal configuration
Up to 60 C 16
• Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C 16
Isolation
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
Permitted potential difference
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 10 mA
Power dissipation of the typ. 3.5 W
module
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-35

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V

(6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x UC24/48 V features the following characteristics:
• 16 inputs, isolated electrically
• Electrical isolation between channels of 120 V
• Rated input voltage from 24 to 48 DC)
• Inputs are fully independent and can be connected in any required configuration

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24/48 VUC

1 21
2 22
0 0
3 23
4 24
1 1
5 25
6 26
2 2
Backplane bus interface

7 27
8 28
3 3
9 29
10 30

11 31
4 4 12 32
13 33
5 5 14 34
15 35
6 6 16 36
17 37
7 7 18 38
19 39
20 40

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-11 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24/48VUC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-36 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24/48 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Status display Green LEDs per

Interrupts channel
Weight Approx. 260 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module None
Supports clocked No Data for Selecting a Sensor
operation
Input voltage
Number of inputs 16
• Rated value 24 or 48 VDC/ 24 or
Length of cable 48 VAC
• Unshielded max. 600 m • At signal “1” 14 V to 60 V
• Shielded max. 1000 m • At signal “0” –5 V to 5 V
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • Frequency range 0 to 63 Hz

Number of inputs that can be Input current

triggered simultaneously
• At signal “1” typ. 2.7 mA
• Horizontal configuration 16
Up to 60°C • At signal “0” –1 to +1 mA

• All other configuration types 16 Input delay

Up to 40° C • From “ 0” to “1” max. 16 ms
Isolation • At “1” to “0” max. 16 ms

• Between channels and Yes Input characteristic curve According to

backplane bus IEC 61131, type 1

• Between channels Yes Connection of Two-Wire Possible

In groups of 1 BEROs

Permitted potential difference • Permitted bias current max. 1 mA

• Between the channels and 170 VDC, 120 VAC

the backplane bus

• Between the inputs of the 170 VDC, 120 VAC

different groups

Insulation tested with

• Between the channels and 1500 VAC

the backplane bus

• Between the inputs of the 1500 VAC

different groups

Current consumption

• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA

Power dissipation of the module

• Operation with 24 V typ. 1.5 W

• Operation with 48 V typ. 2.8 W

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-37

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125;

(6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1321-1CH20-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC features the following characteristics:
• 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 8
• Rated input voltage 48 to 125 VDC
• Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC

2
3
4
M
5
6
7
8
9
10 1M
48 to 125 V

12
13
14
M
15
Backplane bus 16
interface 17
18
19
20 2M
48 to 125 V

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-12 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-38 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x125 x120 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 200 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module
Sensor Selection Data
Supports clocked No
operation Input voltage

Number of inputs 16 • Rated value 48 VDC to

125 VDC
Length of cable
• Unshielded max. 600 m • For signal “1” 30 V to 146 V

• Shielded max. 1000 m • For signal “0” –146 V to 15 V

Voltages, Currents, Potentials Input current

Number of inputs that can be • At signal “1” typ. 3.5 mA

triggered simultaneously at UE Up to 60 V Input delay
Up to 146 V
• From “ 0” to “1” 0.1 ms to 3.5 ms
• Horizontal installation • At “1” to “0” 0.7 ms to 3.0 ms
Up to 50 C 8 8
Input characteristic curve According to
Up to 60 C 8 6 IEC 61131, type 1
• Vertical configuration Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Up to 40 C 8 8 BEROs max. 1 mA
Isolation • Permitted bias current

• Between channels and Yes

backplane bus
• Between the channels Yes
In groups of 8
Permiss. potential differences
• Between the different 146 VDC / 132 VAC
circuits
Insulation tested with 1500 VDC
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 40 mA
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.3 W

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-39

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V

(6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics:
• 16 inputs, electrically isolated in groups of 4
• 120/230 VAC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three-wire proximity switches (alternating
voltage)

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC

N
M

Backplane bus N
interface

N
M

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-13 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230VAC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-40 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Status display Green LED per channel

(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 240 g Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module SensorSelection Data
Supports clocked No Input voltage
operation
• Rated value 120/230 VAC
Number of inputs 16 • For signal “1” 79 to 264 V
Length of cable • For signal “0” 0 to 40 V
• Unshielded max. 600 m • Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
• Shielded max. 1000 m Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • At signal “1”
120 V, 60 Hz typ. 8.0 mA
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 V
230 V, 50 Hz typ. 16.0 mA
All load voltages must be of the
same phase Input delay

Number of inputs that can be

• “0” to “1” max. 25 ms
triggered simultaneously • “0” to “1” max. 25 ms

• Horizontal configuration 16 Input characteristic curve According to IEC 61131,

Up to 60 °C type 1
Connection of Two-Wire Possible
• Vertical configuration 16
BEROs
Up to 40 °C max. 2 mA
• Permitted bias current
Isolation

• Between channels and Yes

backplane bus

• Between channels Yes

In groups of 4

Permitted potential difference

• Between Minternal and the 500 VAC

inputs

• Between the inputs of the 230 VAC

different groups

Insulation tested with 4000 VDC

Current consumption

• From the backplane bus max. 29 mA

Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.9 W

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-41

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230;

(6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1321-1FF01-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics:
• 8 inputs, isolated in groups of 2
• 120/230 VAC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three-wire AC proximity switches

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC

1N

2N
M
Backplane bus in-
terface 3N

4N
M

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-14 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-42 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 240 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Supports clocked No
Input voltage
operation
• Rated value 120/230 VAC
Number of inputs 8
• For signal “1” 79 to 264 V
Length of cable
• For signal “0” 0 to 40 V
• Unshielded max. 600 m
• Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
• Shielded max. 1000 m
Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
• At signal “1”
Number of inputs that can be 120 V, 60 Hz typ. 6.5 mA
triggered simultaneously
230 V, 50 Hz typ. 11 mA
• Horizontal configuration
Input delay
Up to 60 C 8
• At “0” to “1” max. 25 ms
• Vertical configuration
• At “1” to “0” max. 25 ms
Up to 40 C 8
Input characteristic curve According to
Isolation IEC 61131, type 1
• Between channels and Yes Connection of Two-Wire Possible
backplane bus BEROs max. 2 mA
• Between the channels Yes • Permitted bias current
In groups of 2
Permitted potential difference
• Between Minternal and the 230 VAC
inputs
• Between the inputs of the 500 VAC
different groups
Insulation tested with 4000 VDC
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 29 mA
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.9 W

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-43

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.15 Digital Input Module SM 321;

DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL has the following
distinguishing characteristics:
• 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1
• 120/230 VAC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire AC proximity switches

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL

4
7

10
M
11
14

17

M 20

Backplane bus
interface 21
24

27
30
31

34
37

40
M

Channel
number
Status display – green

Figure 3-15 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-44 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Status display Green LED per channel

Weight Approx. 240 g Interrupts None

Data for Specific Module Diagnostic functions None

Supports clocked No Data for Selecting a Sensor

operation Input voltage
Number of inputs 8 • Rated value 120/230 VAC

Length of cable
• For signal “1” 79 to 264 V

• Unshielded max. 600 m

• For signal “0” 0 to 40 V

• Shielded max. 1000 m

• Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz

Voltages, Currents, Potentials Input current

• At signal “1”
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC
120 V, 60 Hz typ. 7.5 mA
All load voltages must be of the
230 V, 50 Hz typ. 17.3 W
same phase
Input delay
Number of inputs that can be
triggered simultaneously • ”0” to “1” max. 25 ms

• Horizontal configuration 8
• ”0” to “1” max. 25 ms
Up to 60 °C Input characteristic curve According to
IEC 61131, type 1
• Vertical configuration 8
Up to 40 °C Connection of Two-Wire Possible
BEROs
Isolation
• Permitted bias current max. 2 mA
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus

• Between channels Yes

In groups of 1

Permitted potential difference

• Between Minternal and the 230 VAC

inputs

• Between the inputs of the 500 VAC

different groups

Insulation tested with

• Between Minternal and the 1500 VAC

inputs

• Between the inputs of the 2000 VAC

different groups

Current consumption

• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA

Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.9 W

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-45

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.16 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient
features:
• 32 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
• 0.5 A output current
• 24 VDC rated load voltage
• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50
s for
reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-46 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A

1 L+ 3 L+
24 V 24 V

M M

Backplane bus
interface
1M 3M

2L+ 4 L+
24 V 24 V

M M

2M 4M

Channel
number
Status display -green

Figure 3-16 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Terminal assignment
The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Output byte x Output byte (x + 2)

Output byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 3)

Figure 3-17 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-47

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Output voltage
(in millimeters) • At signal “1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Weight Approx. 260 g Output current
Data for Specific Module • At signal “1”
Supports clocked No Rated value 0.5 A
operation
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
Number of outputs 32 • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
Length of cable (leakage current)
• Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay (for resistive load)
• Shielded max. 1000 m • From “ 0” to “1” max. 100
s
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • At “1” to “0” max. 500
s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Load resistor range 48  to 4 k
Total current of the outputs Lamp load max. 5 W
(per group)
Parallel connection of 2
• Horizontal configuration outputs
Up to 40 C max. 4 A
• For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Up to 60 C max. 3 A a load of the same group)
• Vertical configuration • To increase performance Not possible
Up to 40 C max. 2 A Triggering a digital input Possible
Isolation Switch rate
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus • For resistive load max. 100 Hz

• Between the channels Yes • Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz

according to IEC 947-5-1,
In groups of 8 DC 13
Permitted potential difference • For lamp load max. 10 Hz
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
circuits
circuit interruption voltage up
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
Current consumption output
• From the backplane bus max. 110 mA • Threshold on 1 A, typ.
• From load voltage L + max. 160 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.6 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-48 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.17 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A has the following distinguishing
characteristics:
• 32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8
• 1.0 A output current
• 120/230 VAC rated load voltage
• Blown fuse indicator for each group
• Suitable for AC solenoids, contactors, starters, fractional horsepower motors
and indicator lights
• Group error display

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-49

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 32 x VC 120/230/1 A

SF1 SF3
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7

SF2 SF4
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
X 2
3 4

Channel numbers
Status display – green
Error display - red

SF

1 L1 2 L1

Back-
plane
bus
interface

SF 1N 2N
1 L1 2 L1

1N 2N

Figure 3-18 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; D0 32 x VAC 120/230 /1 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-50 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment
The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Output byte x Output byte (x + 2)

Output byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 3)

Figure 3-19 Terminal assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x AC 120/230 V/1 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-51

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 32 x 120 VAC/1.0 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions 80 x 125 x 117 Output voltage
WxHxD • At signal “1” min. L1 (–0,8 V)
(in millimeters)
Output current
Weight Approx. 500 g
• At “1” signal
Data for Specific Module
Rated value 1A
Supports clocked No
operation Permitted range 10 mA to 1 A

Number of outputs 32 Permitted current surge 10 A

(per group) (for 2 AC scan cycles)
Length of cable
• Unshielded max. 600 m
• At “0” signal max. 2 mA
Leakage current
• Shielded max. 1000 m
Output delay (for resistive load)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
• At “0” to “1” 1 AC scan cycle
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC
• At “1” to “0” 1 AC scan cycle
• Permitted frequency range 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Blocking voltage
Total current of the outputs Zero transition max. 60 V
(per group)
Size of the motor starter max. size 4 to NEMA
• Horizontal configuration
up to 60 C max. 3 A Lamp load max. 50 W
up to 40 C max. 4 A Parallel connection of
2 outputs
• Vertical configuration
Up to 40C max. 4 A • For redundant Possible (only outputs
actuation of a load of the same group)
Isolation

• Between channels and Yes

• To increase Not possible
performance
backplane bus
Actuation of Possible
• Between the channels Yes
digital input
In groups of 8
Switch rate
Permitted potential difference • For resistive load max. 10 Hz
• Between Minternal and the 250 VAC • Inductive loads, max. 0.5 Hz
outputs according to
• Between the outputs of the 250 VAC IEC 947-5-1, AC 15 1 Hz
different groups • For lamp load
Insulation tested with DC 4000 V Short-circuit protection of the No
Current consumption output

• From the backplane bus max. 190 mA

• From load voltage L1 max. 10 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. max. 25 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts No
Diagnostic functions Yes
• Group error display Red LED (SF)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-52 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.18 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 16 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1322-1BH01-2AA0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient
features:
• 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
• 0.5 A output current
• 24 VDC rated load voltage
• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50
s for
reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-53

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

1 L+

M 24 V

Backplane bus
interface
1M

2 L+

M 24 V

2M

Channel number

Status display – green

Figure 3-20 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-54 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Output voltage
(in millimeters) • At signal “1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Weight Approx. 190 g Output current
Data for Specific Module • At signal “1”
Supports clocked No Rated value 0.5 A
operation
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
Number of outputs 16
• At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
Length of cable (leakage current)
• Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay
• Shielded max. 1000 m (for resistive load)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • From “ 0” to “1” max. 100
s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC • At “1” to “0” max. 500
s
Total current of the outputs Load resistor range 48  to 4 k
(per group)
Lamp load max. 5 W
• Horizontal configuration Parallel connection of
Up to 40 C max. 4 A 2 outputs
Up to 60 C max. 3 A • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
• Vertical configuration a load of the same group)

Up to 40 C max. 2 A • To increase performance Not possible

Isolation Triggering a digital input Possible

• Between channels and Yes Switch rate

backplane bus • For resistive load max. 100 Hz
• Between the channels Yes • Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz
In groups of 8 according to IEC 947-5-1,
DC 13
Permitted potential difference
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
• For lamp load max. 10 Hz
circuits Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
circuit interruption voltage up
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
Current consumption
output
• From the backplane bus max. 80 mA
• Threshold on 1 A, typ.
• From load voltage L + max. 80 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.9 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-55

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

High Speed;
(6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0)

Order number:
6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed has the following salient features:
• 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
• 0.5 A output current
• 24 VDC rated load voltage
• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
• Supports clocked operation

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed carry a “1” signal for
approximately 50
s for reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-56 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO

16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

1 L+

M 24 V

Backplane bus
interface 1M

2 L+

24 V

2M

Channel number

Status display – green

Figure 3-21 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-57

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Output voltage
(in millimeters) • At signal “1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Weight Approx. 200 g Output current
Data for Specific Module • At signal “1”
Supports clocked Yes Rated value 0.5 A
operation
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
Number of outputs 16
• At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
Length of cable (leakage current)
• Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay
• Shielded max. 1000 m (for resistive load)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • From “ 0” to “1” max. 100
s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC • At “1” to “0” max. 200
s
Total current of the outputs Internal module run time
(per group) between the backplane bus and
the output driver input
• Horizontal configuration
Up to 40 C max. 4 A • “0” to “1” 0.1
s to 20
s
Up to 60 C max. 3 A • At “1” to “0” 0.1
s to 20
s
• Vertical configuration Load resistor range 48  to 4 k
Up to 40 C max. 2 A Lamp load max. 5 W
Isolation Parallel connection of
• Between channels and Yes 2 outputs
backplane bus • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
• Between the channels Yes a load of the same group)

In groups of 8 • To increase performance Not possible

Permitted potential difference Triggering a digital input Possible

• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC Switch rate
circuits • For resistive load max. 1000 Hz
Insulation tested with 500 VDC • Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz
Current consumption according to IEC 947-5-1,
• From the backplane bus max. 70 mA DC 13

• From load voltage L + max. 110 mA • For lamp load max. 10 Hz

(without load) Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
Power dissipation of the module typ. 5 W circuit interruption voltage up

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic

output
Status display Green LED per channel
• Threshold on 1 A, typ.
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-58 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC;

(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0

Characteristics
Digital output module SM 322; DO 16 x UC24/48 V has the following features:
• 16 individually isolated static relay outputs
• Electrical isolation between channels of 120 V
• Switch characteristics: RDS ON is typically 0.25 ohms and RDS OFF is typically
greater than 100 G-ohms
• Designed for load voltages up to 48 V AC or DC and there is no minimum load
voltage
• Designed for output loads up to 0.5 A and there is no minimum load current
• Outputs are fully independent and can be connected in any required
configuration
• Substitute values or “Hold last values” can be programmed for the outputs
• The module has diagnostics for parameterization errors and external loss of
voltage
• Suitable for AC solenoids, contact makers, motor starters, fractional
horsepower motors and indicator lights

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-59

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC

24V L+ 1 21
SF
0 2 22
0
3 23
1 4 24
1
5 25
2 6 26
2
7 27
3 3 8 28

Backplane bus
9 29
10 30
5V
+

11 31
4 4 12 32
13 33
5 5 14 34
15 35
6 6 16 36
17 37
7 7 18 38
19 39
M 20 40

Channel number
Status LEDs - green
Byte X Byte (X +1)

Figure 3-22 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-60 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Insulation tested with

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • Between channels and 1500 VAC
(in millimeters) backplane bus
Weight Approx. 260 g • Between channels and 1500 VAC
Data for Specific Module power supply of the
Supports clocked No electronics
operation • Between the outputs of 1500 VAC
Number of outputs 16 the different groups
Length of cable Current consumption
• Unshielded max. 600 m • From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
• Shielded max. 1000 m • From supply max. 200 mA
Voltages, Currents, Potentials voltage L+
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC Power dissipation of the module typ. 2.8 W
electronics L+ Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
• Reverse polarity Yes Status display Green LEDs per
protection min. 5 ms channel
• Power failure Diagnostic functions
jumpering
• Group error display Red LED (SF)
Total current of the outputs
(per group) Interrupts

• Horizontal configuration max. 0.5 A • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be

assigned
Up to 60° C • Diagnostics information
read-out Possible
• All other mounting max. 0.5 A
positions Data for Selecting an Actuator
Up to 40° C Output voltage
Total current of the outputs (per • At signal “1” min. L+ (–0.25 V)
module)
Output current
• Horizontal configuration max. 8 A
• At signal “1”
Up to 60° C 0.5 A
rated value
• All other mounting max. 8 A permissible surge max. 1.5 A
positions (max. 50 ms)
current (per group)
Up to 40° C max. 10 uA
• For “0” signal
Isolation (leakage current)
• Between channels and Yes Output delay (for resistive load)
backplane bus • From “ 0” to “1” max. 6 ms
• Between channels and Yes • At “1” to “0” max. 3 ms
power supply of the External fuse for relay outputs Fuse,
electronics I2 t: 1 A2 s,
• Between channels Yes quick-acting*
In groups of 1 Lamp load max. 2.5 W
Permitted potential difference Contact circuit (internal) parallel Varistor, 85 V
switching of 2 outputs
• Between channels and 170 VDC, 120 VAC
backplane bus • For redundant triggering Possible
of a load
• Between channels and 170 VDC, 120 VAC
• To increase Not possible
power supply of the
performance
electronics
• Between the outputs of 170 VDC, 120 VAC
the different groups

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-61

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Triggering a digital input Possible * Outputs must be protected by a 250 V quick-acting

fuse (recommended fuses: Wickman 194-1100 1.1
Switch rate
A and Littelfuse 0217-800 V 800 mA).
• For resistive load max. 10 Hz When mounted in a hazardous area in accordance
• Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz with the National Electric Code (NEC), use only a
according to suitable tool to remove the fuse if the module is not
IEC 947-5-1; DC 12 located in a potentially explosive atmosphere.
AC/12
• For lamp load max. 0.5 Hz

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-62 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.20.1 Parameters of digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x UC24/48 V

Parameter assignment
Table 3-14 and Table 3-15 show the data record numbers for static and dynamic
parameters.

Table 3-14 Data record no. 0 (static parameters):

Parameters Comments
Enable diagnostics Enabling an interrupt when the module fails
because of an operation code error, a hardware
fault or a voltage error.

Table 3-15 Data record no. 1 (dynamic parameters):

Parameters Comments
Behavior on CPU STOP
Hold last value
Substitute value output
Substitute value
Substitute value Each bit corresponds to an output.

This module supports failure state/substitute value outputs when the CPU changes
from RUN to STOP.

Status display
Each output of this module has a green LED to indicate the status of the relay.
There is also a red LED (SF) that indicates the diagnostics status of the module.

Diagnostics, troubleshooting
Diagnostic data is assigned in accordance with the following technical
specifications.
In the additional interrupt information, the four system diagnostics data bytes can
be read as data record 0 or in the first 4 bytes of data record 1.

Structure of the data record

The structure of data record 1 is as specified in Table 3-16.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-63

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Table 3-16 Structure of the data record for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V

Data record 1 Available information Contents

byte address
0..3 System-specific diagnostics data 4 Bytes
4 Channel type 72h
5 Diagnosis length per channel in bytes 0
6 Number of channels 16
7 Channel error vector 0 byte per
channel
8..15 Channel-specific diagnostic data 0 byte per
channel

Table 3-17 shows the system diagnostics for module SM 322;

DO 16 x UC24/48 V.

Table 3-17 System diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V

System diagnosis byte 1: Technical specification

D0: Module error Yes
D1: Internal malfunction Yes
D2: External malfunction Yes
D3: Channel error No
D4: External auxiliary supply missing Yes
D5: Front connector missing No
D6: Module not parameterized. Yes
D7: Wrong parameters Yes

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-64 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Table 3-17 System diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V

System diagnosis byte 2:

D0..D3 Module Type 1111
D4: Channel information available No
D5: User information available No
D6: Diagnostic alarm from substitute No
D7: Spare
System diagnosis byte 3:
D0: Memory module incorrect/missing No
D1: Communication error No
D2: RUN/STOP mode No
D3: Time monitoring triggered Yes
D4: Internal power failure No
D5: Battery 1 empty No
D6: Complete backup failure No
System diagnosis byte 4:
D7: Spare
D0: Rack failure No
D1: Processor failure Yes
D2: EPROM error Yes
D3: RAM error Yes
D4: DAC error No
D5: Blown fuse No
D6: Hardware interrupt lost No
D7: Spare
Channel-specific diagnosis byte
D0: Parameter setup error No
D1: Grounding error No
D2: Short-circuit to P No
D3: Short-circuit to M No
D4: Wire-break No
D5: Spare
D6: Auxiliary supply missing No
D7: Overtemperature No

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-65

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.21 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 16 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0

Characteristics
Digital output module SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A has the following
distinguishing characteristics:
• 16 outputs, fused and electrically isolated in groups of 8
• 1 A output current
• Rated load voltage 120/230 VAC
• Suitable for AC solenoids, contact makers, motor starters, fractional
horsepower motors and indicator lights

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-66 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322 DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A

SF 5V L1
SF

Backplane bus
interface
N
5V

L1
SF

Channel number
Status LEDs - green
Fault indicator – red

Figure 3-23 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-67

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Output voltage

(in millimeters) • At signal “1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Weight Approx. 275 g Output current
Data for Specific Module • At signal “1”
Supports clocked No Rated value 1A
operation Permitted range for 0° C to 10 mA to 1 A
40° C
Number of outputs 16
Permitted range for 0° C to 10 mA to 0.5 A
Length of cable 60° C
• Unshielded max. 600 m Permitted surge current max. 20 A
• Shielded max. 1000 m (per group) (with 2 half-waves)

Voltages, Currents, Potentials • At signal “0” max. 2 mA

(leakage current)
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC
All load voltages must be of the Inhibit voltage max. 60 V
same phase Zero cross inhibit voltage
Total current of the outputs Size of the motor starter max. size 4 to NEMA
(per group)
Lamp load max. 50 W
• Horizontal configuration
Up to 40 C max. 4 A Connecting two outputs in
parallel
Up to 60 C max. 2 A
• For redundant triggering Possible (only outputs
• Vertical configuration
of a load of the same group)
Up to 40 C max. 2 A
• To increase No
Isolation
performance
• Between channels and Yes
Triggering a digital input Possible
backplane bus
Switch rate
• Between channels Yes
In groups of 8 • For resistive load max. 10 Hz

Permitted potential difference • Inductive loads, max. 0.5 Hz

according to
• Between Minternal and the 500 VAC
outputs
IEC 947-5-1, AC 15

• Between the outputs of the 230 VAC • For lamp load max. 1 Hz
different groups Short-circuit protection of output Fuse 8 A,
Insulation tested with 4000 VDC 250 V; per group

Current consumption • Min. current required for min. 40 A

• From the backplane bus max. 200 mA fuse to blow
• From load voltage L+ max. 2 mA • Max. response time max. 300 ms
(without load)
Replacement fuses 8 A fuse, quick-acting
Power dissipation of the module typ. 8.6 W
• Wickman 19 194-8 A
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
• Schurter SP001.1014
Status display Green LED per channel • Littlefuse 217.008
Interrupts
Fuse carrier
• Diagnostic interrupt No
• Wickman 19 653
Diagnostic functions
• Group error display Red LED (SF)
(fuse or no L1/N)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-68 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A;

(6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A has the following salient
features.
• 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 4
• 2 A output current
• 24 VDC rated load voltage
• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50
s for
reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-69

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A

1 L+

M
24 V

Backplane bus
interface
1M

2 L+

M
24 V

2M

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-24 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-70 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Output voltage
(in millimeters) • At signal “1” min. L + –0.8 V
Weight Approx. 190 g Output current
Data for Specific Module • At signal “1”
Supports clocked No Rated value 2A
operation Permitted range 5 mA to 2.4 A
Number of outputs 8 • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
Length of cable (leakage current)
• Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay (for resistive load)
• Shielded max. 1000 m • From “ 0” to “1” max. 100
s
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • At “1” to “0” max. 500
s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Load resistor range 12  to 4 k
Total current of the outputs Lamp load max. 10 W
(per group)
Parallel connection of
• Horizontal configuration 2 outputs
Up to 60 C max. 4 A • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
• Vertical configuration a load of the same group)
Up to 40 C max. 4 A • To increase performance Not possible
Isolation Triggering a digital input Possible
• Between channels and Yes Switch rate
backplane bus
• For resistive load max. 100 Hz
• Between the channels Yes
• Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz
In groups of 4 according to IEC 947-5-1,
Permitted potential difference DC 13

• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC • For lamp load max. 10 Hz

circuits
Limit (internal) of the inductive typ. L + (–48 V)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC circuit interruption voltage up

Current consumption Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic

• From the backplane bus max. 40 mA output

• From load voltage L+ max. 60 mA • Threshold on typ. 3 A

(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.8 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-71

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A;

with diagnostic interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1322-8BF00-2AB0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient
features:
• 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
• 0.5 A output current
• 24 VDC rated load voltage
• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
• 2 terminals per output
– Output without series diode
– Output with series diode (for redundant load control)
• Group error display
• Channel-specific status and error LEDs
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Programmable substitute value output

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-72 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

SF
F0
0
F1
1
F2
2
F3
3

F4
4
F5
5
F6
6
F7
7

Connection Diagram
Channel number, channel fault (F)
Status display – green
Fault indicator – red

Figure 3-25 Module view of the SM 322; DO 8 24 V DC/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-73

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

L+ Monitoring

L+
Fuse
Monitoring

Control
Output

Diagnostics
Output Output
Status (8x)
drivers
Backplane (8 x)
bus Logic M

Channel status LED (8x) ƪ0 to 7ƫ

green

Channel fault LED (8x) F ƪ0 to 7ƫ

red

Group error display (1x) SF

red

Figure 3-26 Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 DC 24 V/0.5 A

Redundant control of a load

The output with series diode can be used for redundant control of a load.
Redundant control is possible from two different signal modules without external
circuitry. Both modules must have the same reference potential, M.

Note
If the output with series diode is used, external short-circuits to L+ cannot be
detected.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-74 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Diagnostic functions Parameters can be

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • Group error display assigned
(in millimeters) • Channel error display (F) Red LED (SF)

Weight Approx. 210 g • Diagnostics information Red LED (F) per

readable channel
Data for Specific Module Possible
Supports clocked No Data for Selecting an Actuator
operation
Output voltage
Number of outputs 8 • At signal “1”
Length of cable Without series diode min. L + (–0.8 V)
• Unshielded max. 600 m With series diode min. L + (–1.6 V)
• Shielded max. 1000 m
Output current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
• At signal “1”
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Rated value 0.5 A
Total current of the outputs (per Permitted range 10 mA to 0.6 A1)
group) without series diode
• At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
• Horizontal configuration (leakage current)
Up to 40 C max. 4 A Output delay (for resistive load)
Up to 60 C max. 3 A • At “0” to “1”
• Vertical configuration • At “1” to “0” max. 180
s
Up to 40 C max. 4 A max. 245
s

Total current of the outputs (per Load resistor range 48  to 3 k

group) with series diode Lamp load max. 5 W
• Horizontal configuration Parallel connection of
Up to 40 C max. 3 A 2 outputs
Up to 60 C max. 2 A • For redundant Output with series
• Vertical configuration actuation of a load diode only, must have
the same reference
Up to 40 C max. 3 A
potential
Isolation
• To increase performance Not possible
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus Triggering a digital input Possible
1 binary input
Permitted potential difference
according to
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC IEC 61131, Type 2;
circuits
Type 1 with disabled
Insulation tested with 500 VDC open-circuit monitoring

Current consumption Switch rate

• From the backplane bus max. 70 mA • For resistive load max. 100 Hz
• From load voltage L+ max. 90 mA • Inductive load according to max. 2 Hz
(without load) IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC

Power dissipation of the module typ. 5 W • For lamp load max. 10 Hz

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Limit (internal) of the inductive typ. L + (–45 V)

circuit interruption voltage up
Status display Green LED per channel
Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
Interrupts output
• Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be • Threshold on typ. 0.75 A to 1.5 A
assigned
1) 5 mA to 0.6 A with disabled open-circuit
monitoring

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-75

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.23.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
digital modules in Section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default
settings for the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A in the table below.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 3-18 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Behavior on CPU STOP Apply substitute value (EWS) EWS
Hold last value (LWH)
Diagnostics
• Wire-break Yes/no No
• No load voltage L+ Yes/no No Static Channel
• Short-circuit to M
• Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No
Yes/no No
Apply substitute value “1” Yes/no No Dynamic Channel

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-76 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.23.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Effect of operating and mode supply voltage on the output values

The output values of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A depend on the operating
mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 3-19 Dependence of the output values on the operating mode of the CPU and on the
supply voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A.

CPU Operating State Power Supply L+ to Digital Output Value of Digital

Module Module
POWER ON RUN L+ exists CPU value
L+ missing 0 signal
STOP L+ exists Substitute value/last value
(0 signal preset)
L+ missing 0 signal
POWER – L+ exists 0 signal
OFF
L+ missing 0 signal

Behavior upon failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A is always
indicated by the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made
available on the module (entry in diagnosis).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment
(see Section 3.23.3).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-77

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

The following table provides an overview of the diagnostic messages of the
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A.

Table 3-20 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Parameters can

Diagnostics be assigned
Wire-break SF Channel Yes
Load voltage missing SF Channel Yes
Short-circuit to M SF Channel Yes
Short-circuit to L+ SF Channel Yes
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module No
Internal auxiliary power missing SF Module No
Fuse blown SF Module No
Watchdog timeout SF Module No
EPROM error SF Module No
RAM error SF Module No
* Open-circuit detection is performed at a current < 1 mA.
When suitably parameterized, a wire-break results only in the
SF LED and the corresponding channel error LED lighting up.

Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly
in STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-78 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Causes of error and remedial action

Table 3-21 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, Causes of Error and Remedial
Action

Diagnostics Mes- Error Detec- Possible Error Cause Remedy

sage tion ...
Wire-break Only with Open circuit between module Close circuit
output to “1” and actuator
Channel not connected Disable the “Diagnose
(open) Wire-break” parameter for the
channel in STEP 7
No load voltage Only with Defective output Replace module
output to “1”
Short-circuit to M Only with Overload of output Eliminate overload
output to “1”
Short-circuit of output to M Eliminate short circuit
Short-circuit to L+ Always Short-circuit at output to L+ of Eliminate short circuit
module supply
No external auxiliary Always Power supply L+ to module Feed supply L+
voltage missing
No internal auxiliary Always Power supply L+ to module Feed supply L+
voltage missing
Fuse in module defective Replace module
Fuse blown Always Fuse in module defective Replace module
Watchdog tripped Always Temporary high Eliminate interference
electromagnetic interference
Module defective Replace module
EPROM error Always Temporary high Eliminate interference and
electromagnetic interference switch on/off power supply of
CPU
Module defective Replace module
RAM error Always Temporary high Eliminate interference and
electromagnetic interference switch on/off power supply of
CPU
Module defective Replace module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-79

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.23.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A

Introduction
The SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in
STEP 7 (refer to Section 3.23.1).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the
diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-80 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.24 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A;

(6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1322-1CF00-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A features the following characteristics:
• 8 outputs, reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 4
• 1.5 A output current
• Rated load voltage 48 to 125 VDC
• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
• Group error display

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the
SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50
s for
reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-81

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A

+5V 1 1 L+
SF

SF
5

48 to
7
125 V

9
Backplane bus
interface 10 1M

+5V 11 2 L+

13

15
48 to
17 125 V

19
20 2M

Channel number
Status display – green
Fault indicator – red

Figure 3-27 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-82 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x125 x117 Output voltage
(in millimeters) • At “ 1” signal min. L + (–1.,2 V)
Weight Approx. 250 g Output current
Data for Specific Module • At “ 1” signal
Supports clocked No Rated value 1.5 A
operation Permitted range 10 mA to 1.5 A
Number of outputs 8 • Permitted surge current max. 3 A for 10 ms
Length of cable • For ”0” signal max. 0.5 mA
• Unshielded max. 600 m (leakage current)
• Shielded max. 1000 m Output delay (for resistive load)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • From “ 0” to “1” max. 2 ms
Rated load voltage L+ 48 VDC to 125 VDC • At “1” to “0” max. 15 ms

• Reverse polarity protection Yes, by means of Lamp load max. 15 W at 48 V

fuse1) max. 40 W at 125 V

Total current of the outputs Parallel connection of

(per group) 2 outputs

• Horizontal configuration • For redundant actuation of Possible (only outputs

a load of the same group)
Up to 40 C max. 6 A
Up to 50 C max. 4 A • To increase performance Not possible
Up to 60 C max. 3 A Triggering a digital input Possible

• Vertical configuration Switch rate

Up to 40 C max. 4 A • For resistive load max. 25 Hz

Isolation • For inductive load max. 0.5 Hz

• Between channels and Yes • For lamp load max. 10 Hz

backplane bus Limit (internal) of the in typ. M (–1V)
• Between the channels Yes ductive circuit interruption
voltage up
In groups of 4
Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic3)
Permitted potential difference output
• Between the different 146 VDC / 132 VAC • Threshold on typ. 4.4 A
circuits
Replacement fuses Fuse 6.,3 A/250 V,
Insulation tested with 1500 VAC quick blow, 5 x 20 mm
Current consumption • Schurter SP0001.1012
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA • Wickman 194-1630-0
• From the load voltage L+ max. 2 mA
(no load) Fuse carrier
• Wickman 653 0000 040
Power dissipation of the module typ. 7.2 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics 1) The fuses on this module are merely
Status display Green LED per channel supplementary fuses. External overcurrent
protection (suitable for branch circuits conforming
Interrupts None to the local regulations for electrical engineering)
Diagnostic functions is required in the supply cables of the load circuit.
2) Potential errors are:
• Group error display Red LED (SF)2) - No load voltage
- Fuse defective
- Output overloaded
3) If an overload condition is detected, the output is
inhibited for approximately 2.4 s.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-83

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.25 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; (6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1322-1FF01-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A features the following characteristics:
• 8 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 4
• 2 A output current
• 120/230 VAC rated load voltage
• Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.
• Group error display

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-84 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A

5V
SF 1L
SF 1N

Backplane bus
interface

5V
2L
2N

M
*
M

Channel number
Status display – green
Fault indicator – red * Zero cross inhibit voltage triac

Figure 3-28 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-85

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Output voltage
(in millimeters) • At signal “1”
Weight Approx. 275 g – At maximum current min. L1 (–1.5 V)
Data for Specific Module – At minimum current min. L1 (–8.5 V)
Supports clocked No Output current
operation • At signal “1”
Number of outputs 8 Rated value AC 2 A1)
Length of cable Permitted range for 0 C to 10 mA to 2 A
• Unshielded max. 600 m 40 C
• Shielded max. 1000 m Permitted range for 40 C 10 mA to 1 A
Voltages, Currents, Potentials to 60 C
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC Permitted current surge max. 20 A
• Permitted frequency range 47 Hz to 63 Hz (per group) (not more than 1 AC
scan cycle)
Total current of the outputs
(per group) • At signal “0” max. 2 mA
(leakage current)
• Horizontal configuration
Output delay (for resistive load)
Up to 40 C max. 4 A
• From “0” to “1” Not more than 1 AC
Up to 60 C max. 2 A scan cycle
• Vertical configuration • From “1” to “0” Not more than 1 AC
Up to 40 C max. 2 A scan cycle
Isolation Minimum load current 10 mA
• Between channels and Yes Zero cross inhibit voltage max. 60 V
backplane bus
Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA
• Between the channels Yes
Lamp load max. 50 W
In groups of 4
Connecting two outputs in parallel
Permitted potential difference
• For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
• Between Minternal and the 230 VAC a load of the same group)
outputs
• To increase performance Not possible
• Between the outputs of the 500 VAC
different groups Triggering a digital input Possible

Insulation tested with 1500 VAC Switch rate

• For resistive load max. 10 Hz
Current consumption
• Inductive loads, according max. 0.5 Hz
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15
• From load voltage L1 max. 2 mA • For lamp load 1 Hz
(without load)
Short-circuit protection Fuse, 8 A/250 V; per
Power dissipation of the module typ. 8.6 W of output group
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
• Min. current required for min. 40 A
Status display Green LED per channel fuse to blow
Interrupts None • Max. response time max. 300 ms
Diagnostic functions Yes Replacement fuses 8 A fuse/quick-acting
• Group error display Red LED (SF) 2) • Wickman 194-1800-0
• Schurter SP001.1013
• Littelfuse 217.008
Fuse carrier
• Wickman 653 07

1) The load current must not be half-wave

2) Potential errors are:
- No load voltage
- Fuse defective

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-86 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.26 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0

Characteristics
Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL has the following
distinguishing characteristics:
• 8 outputs, isolated in one group
• Group error display
• Channel-specific status LEDs
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Programmable substitute value output
• 2 A output current
• 120/230 VAC rated load voltage
• Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-87

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

SF
Group error display – red

1
1L

4
7 2L

10
11 3L
M
14
17 4L
Backplane bus 20
interface
21 L5

24
27 L6

30
31 7L
M 34
37 8L

40

Channel
number
Status display – green

Figure 3-29 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-88 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Output voltage
Weight Approx. 275 g • At signal “1” min. L1 (–8.5 V)
Data for Specific Module Output current
Supports clocked No
operation • At signal “1”
Rated value 2A
Number of outputs 8
Permitted range for 0 °C to 10 mA to 2 A
Length of cable
40 °C
• Unshielded max. 600 m
Permitted range for 10 mA to 1 A
• Shielded max. 1000 m 40 °C to 60 °C
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Permitted surge current max. 20 A
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC (per group) (with 2 half-waves)
Total current of the outputs
(module)
• For “0” signal max. 2 mA
(leakage current)
• Horizontal configuration
Zero cross inhibit voltage max. 60 V
Up to 40 °C max. 8 A
Up to 60 °C max. 4 A Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA

• Vertical configuration max. 4 A Lamp load max. 50 W

Up to 40 °C Connecting two outputs in
Isolation parallel
• Between channels and Yes • For redundant triggering of Possible
backplane bus a load
• Between channels Yes • To increase performance Not possible
In groups of 1 Triggering a digital input Possible
Permitted potential difference
Switch rate
• Between Minternal and the 230 VAC
outputs • For resistive load max. 10 Hz
• Between outputs 500 VAC • Inductive loads, according max. 0.5 Hz
Insulation tested with to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15

• Between Minternal and the 1500 VAC • For lamp load max. 1 Hz
outputs
Short-circuit protection of output Yes,
• Between the outputs of the 2000 VAC 3.15 A /
different groups 250 V fuse, fast-acting
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
• From load voltage L1 max. 2 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 8.6 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts
• Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
assigned
Diagnostic functions
• Group error display Red LED (SF)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-89

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Note
The outputs must be protected by a high-speed, fast-acting 3.15 A 250 VAC fuse.
When mounted in a hazardous area in accordance with the National Electric Code,
a tool must be used to remove the fuse and the area must be designated safe
before the fuse is removed/replaced.

Parameterization of the SM 322; DO x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

A description of the general procedure for parameterizing digital modules can be
found in section 3.3.
Detailed information on the digital output module parameters can be found in
Appendix A.3.

Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Table 3-22 shows the settable parameters with the default settings for the SM 322;
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 3-22 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

settings type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupts Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Behavior on CPU STOP Switch substitute value EWS Dynamic Channel
(EWS)
Hold last value (LWH)
Switch substitute value Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
“1”

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-90 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Table 3-23 gives an overview of the diagnostic messages of the
SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.

Table 3-23 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the diagnostics Parameters can be

assigned
Time-out SF Module No
EPROM error SF Module No
RAM error SF Module No

Error causes and remedies

Table 3-24 shows the diagnostic messages and error causes as well as the
remedies of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.

Table 3-24 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL,

error causes and remedies

Diagnostics Error detection Possible error cause Remedy

message
Time-out Always Transient high Remove interference and turn
electromagnetic the CPU power supply off and
interference on
Module defective Replace module
EPROM error Always Transient high Remove interference and turn
electromagnetic the CPU power supply off and
interference on
Module defective Replace module
RAM error Always Transient high Remove interference and turn
electromagnetic the CPU power supply off and
interference on
Module defective Replace module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-91

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

The SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below are described in detail in the online Help for
STEP 7.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not available – in other words, they are withheld without
appropriate parameter assignment. Use STEP 7 to assign parameters for enabling
interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of interrupts.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic
interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged at the module.

Load restrictions with a horizontal configuration

With a horizontal configuration, the module loads must be restricted so that two
adjacent inputs or outputs do not exceed the maximum rating for an input or an
output.

Load restrictions with a vertical configuration

With a vertical configuration, the module loads must be restricted so that four
adjacent inputs or outputs do not exceed the maximum rating for an input or an
output.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-92 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322;

DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics:
• 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
• Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC
• Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.

Behavior upon power down of the supply voltage

Note
When the power supply is switched off, the capacitor still stores energy for
about 200 ms. The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the
user program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-93

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322;

DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC

M
Backplane bus
interface N
L+

24 V

M
N
M

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-30 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-94 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • For resistive load
(in millimeters)
Voltage Current No. of
Weight Approx. 250 g switching cyc.
(typ.)
Data for Specific Module
24 VDC 2.0 A 0.1 million
Supports clocked No
1.0 A 0.2 million
operation
0.5 A 1.0 million
Number of outputs 16 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.2 million
120 VDC 0.2 A 0.6 million
Length of cable
24 VAC 1.5 A 1.5 million
• Unshielded max. 600 m 48 VAC 1.5 A 1.5 million
• Shielded max. 1000 m 60 VAC 1.5 A 1.5 million
120 VAC 2.0 A 1.0 million
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
1.0 A 1.5 million
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC 0.5 A 2.0 million
relay L + 230 VAC 2.0 A 1.0 million
1.0 A 1.5 million
Total current of the outputs max. 8 A
0.5 A 2.0 million
(per group)
Isolation
• Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 DC13/AC15
Voltage Current No. of
• Between channels and Yes switching cyc.
backplane bus (typ.)
• Between the channels Yes 24 VDC 2.0 A 0.05 million
In groups of 8 1.0 A 0.1 million
0.5 A 0.5 million
Permitted potential difference
60 VDC 0.5 A 0.1 million
• Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC 120 VDC 0.2 A 0.3 million
supply voltage of the 24 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
relays 48 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
60 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
• Between Minternal and 230 VAC
120 VAC 2.0 A 0.7 million
supply voltage of the
1.0 A 1.0 million
relays and the outputs
0.5 A 1.5 million
• Between the outputs of 500 VAC 230 VAC 2.0 A 0.7 million
the different groups 1.0 A 1.0 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
Insulation tested with
An external protection circuit will enhance the service life
• Between Minternal and 500 VDC of the contacts.
supply voltage of the
relays Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA
• Between Minternal and 1500 VAC
supply voltage of the Lamp load 50 W / 230 VAC
relays and the outputs 5 W / 24 VDC
• Between the outputs of 2000 VAC Contact protection (internal) None
the different groups
Parallel connection of
Current consumption 2 outputs
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
• For redundant triggering Possible (only outputs of
• From supply voltage L+ max. 250 mA of a load the same group)
Power dissipation of the typ. 4.5 W • To increase performance Not possible
module
Triggering a digital input Possible
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Switch rate
Status display Green LED per channel
• Mechanical max. 10 Hz
Interrupts None
• For resistive load 1 Hz
Diagnostic functions None
• Inductive loads according max. 0.5 Hz
Data for Selecting an Actuator to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/AC
Continuous thermal current max. 2 A 15
Minimum load voltage / 10 V / 10 mA • For lamp load 1 Hz
current
Short-circuit proof to 200 A, with B10/B16
IEC 947-5-1 circuit breaker

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-95

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC;

(6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x REL. 230 VAC features the following characteristics:
• 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 2
• Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC
• Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.

Behavior upon power down of the supply voltage

Note
Applicable only for the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC with product status 1 is:
When the power supply is switched off, the capacitor still stores energy for about
200 ms. The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the user
program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-96 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC

M
Backplane bus 24 V
interface

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-31 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x REL. 230 VAC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-97

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Continuous thermal current max. 3 A
(in millimeters)
Minimum load voltage / current 10 V /5 mA
Weight Approx. 190 g
Short-circuit proof according to With circuit-breaker of
Data for Specific Module IEC 947-5-1 2) characteristic B for:
Supports clocked No cos  1.0: 600 A
operation cos  0.5 to 0.7: 900
A
Number of outputs 8
With Diazed 8 A fuse:
Length of cable 1000 A
• Unshielded max. 600 m Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts
• Shielded max. 1000 m
• For resistive load
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Voltage Current No. of
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC switching
relay L + cyc. (typ.)
Total current of the outputs max. 4 A 24 VDC 2.0 A 0.7 million
(per group) 1.0 A 1.6 million
0.5 A 4 million
Isolation
60 VDC 0.5 A 1.6 million
• Between channels and Yes 120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 million
backplane bus 48 VAC 2.0 A 1.6 million
60 VAC 2.0 A 1.2 million
• Between the channels Yes 120 VAC 2.0 A 0.5 million 2)
In groups of 2 1.0 A 0.7 million 2)
0.5 A 1.5 million 2)
Permitted potential difference 230 VAC 2.0 A 0.5 million 2)
• Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC 1.0 A 0.7 million 2)
supply voltage of the relays 0.5 A 1.5 million

• Between Minternal and 230 VAC • Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC
supply voltage of the relays Voltage Current No. of
and the outputs switching
• Between the outputs of the 400 VAC cyc. (typ.)
different groups 24 VDC 2.0 A 0.3 million
Insulation tested with 1.0 A 0.5 million
0.5 A 1.0 million
• Between Minternal and 500 VDC 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.5 million
supply voltage of the relays 120 VDC 0.2 A 0.3 million 2)
48 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
• Between Minternal and 1500 VAC
60 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
supply voltage of the relays
120 VAC 2.0 A 0.2 million
and the outputs
1.0 A 0.7 million
• Between the outputs of the 1500 VAC 0.7 A 1 million
different groups 0.5 A 2.0 million
230 VAC 2.0 A 0.3 million 2)
Current consumption 1.0 A 0.7 million 2)
• From the backplane bus max. 40 mA 0.5 A 2 million 2)
• From supply voltage L+ max. 160 mA Contact protection (internal) Varistor SIOV-CU4032
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.2 W K275 G

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics An external protection circuit will enhance the service life
of the contacts.
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-98 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator, continued Connecting two outputs in parallel

Lamp load 1) max. 50 W • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load of the same group)
Power No. of
switching • To increase performance Not possible
cyc. (typ.)
Triggering a digital input Possible
Lamp load (230 VAC) 2) 1000 W 25000
1500 W 10000 Switch rate
• Mechanical max. 10 Hz
Energy-saving 10 58W 25000
lamps/fluorescent lamps with • For resistive load max. 2 Hz
electronic ballast2)
• Inductive loads according max. 0.5 Hz
Fluorescent lamps, 1 58W 25000 to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15
conventionally compensated 2) AC

Fluorescent lamps, 10 58W 25000 • For lamp load max. 2 Hz

non-compensated 2)

1) Product status 1
2) Product status 2 or later

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-99

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.29 Relay Output Module SM 322;

DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0

Characteristics
Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A has the following
distinguishing characteristics:
• 8 outputs, isolated in one group
• Load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 24 VAC to 230 VAC
• Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.
• An RC quenching element can be connected via a jumper (SJ) to protect the
contacts.
• Group error display
• Channel-specific status LEDs
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Programmable substitute value output

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-100 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Protection of contacts against overvoltages

You protect the contacts against overvoltages by inserting jumpers (SJ) on the
module between terminals 3 and 4, 7 and 8, 12 and 13 etc. (refer to Figure 3-32).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

Fault indicator – red

SF 1 1L+ 2L+ 21
2 22
3 23
1L+ 1L+
4 24
SJ 5 25 SJ

6 26
7 1M 1M
27
1L+ 1L+
8 28
SJ 9 29 SJ

Backplane bus interface

10 30
1M 1M
24V 24V

11 31
1L+ 1L+
12 32
SJ SJ
13 33
14 34
1M 1M
15 35
1L+ 1L+
16 36
SJ 17 37 SJ

18 38
1M 1M
19 39

20 SF 40

1M 2M

Channel
number
Status display – green

Figure 3-32 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-101

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Operation with safe electrical extra-low voltage

When using relay output module 6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0 with safe and electrically
isolated extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account:
If a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the
horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more
than 120 VUC. With operation at voltages greater than 120 VUC, the creepages
and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the SIMATIC
requirements for safe electrical isolation.

If one of the two horizontally adjacent termi-

nals is operated with a safe electrical extra-
low voltage, the adjacent terminal must be
operated at not more than UC 120 V.

Figure 3-33 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

Dimensions and Weight • Between the channels and Yes

the relay supply voltage
Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117
(in millimeters) • Between the channels Yes
Weight Approx. 320 g In groups of 1

Data for Specific Module Permitted potential difference

Supports clocked No • Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC

operation supply voltage of the relays

Number of outputs 8 • Between Minternal and 250 VAC

supply voltage of the relays
Length of cable and the outputs
• Unshielded max. 600 m • Between the outputs of the 500 VAC
• Shielded max. 1000 m different groups
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC
electronics L +
• Reverse polarity protection Yes
Total current of the outputs
(per group)
• Horizontal configuration max. 5 A
Up to 60° C
• Vertical configuration max. 5 A
Up to
40 ° C
Isolation
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-102 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Insulation tested with • Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC

• Between Minternal and 500 VDC Voltage Current No. of
supply voltage of the relays switching
cyc. (typ.)
• Between Minternal and 1500 VAC
supply voltage of the relays 24 VDC 5.0 A 0.1 million
and the outputs 24 VDC 2.5 A 0.25 million
24 VDC 1.0 A 0.5 million
• Between the outputs of the 2000 VAC 230 VAC 5.0 A 0.1 million
different groups 230 VAC 2.5 A 0.25 million
Current consumption 230 VAC 1.0 A 0.5 million
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA With a connected RC quenching element (jumper “SJ”
• From supply voltage L+ max. 160 mA inserted) or with an external protection circuit, you
lengthen the service life of the contacts.
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.5 W
Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Power No. of
Status display Green LED per channel switching
Interrupts cyc. (typ.)

• Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be Lamp load (230 VAC) 1000 W 25000
assigned 1500 W 10000

Diagnostic functions Parameters can be Energy-saving 10 58W 25000

assigned lamps/fluorescent lamps with
electronic ballast
• Group error display Red LED (SF)
Fluorescent lamps, 1 58W 25000
• Diagnostics information Possible conventionally compensated
read-out
Fluorescent lamps, 10 58W 25000
Data for Selecting an Actuator non-compensated
Continuous thermal current max. 5 A Contact protection RC quenching element
330 Ω, 0.1
F
Minimum load voltage / current 10 V /10 mA1)
Connecting two outputs in parallel
Leakage current 11.5 mA 2)
• For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Short-circuit proof according to With circuit-breaker of a load with identical load vol-
IEC 947-5-1 characteristic B for: tage)
cos  1.0: 600 A
• To increase performance Not possible
cos  0.5 to 0.7: 900
A Triggering a digital input Possible
With Diazed 8 A fuse: Switch rate
1000 A
• Mechanical max. 10 Hz
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts
• For resistive load max. 2 Hz
• For resistive load
• Inductive loads according max. 0.5 Hz
Voltage Current No. of to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15
switching AC
cyc. (typ.)
• For lamp load max. 2 Hz
24 VDC 5.0 A 0.2 million
24 VDC 2.5 A 0.4 million
1) Without inserted jumper (SJ).
24 VDC 1.0 A 0.9 million
230 VAC 5.0 A 0.2 million 2) For AC load voltage and inserted jumper (SJ).
230 VAC 2.5 A 0.4 million Without jumper (SJ) inserted there is a leakage
230 VAC 1.0 A 0.9 million current

Note
Due to the leakage current of the RC quenching element, wrong signal states
might occur when an IEC Type 1 input is connected (remove SJ jumper)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-103

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.29.1 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A parameterization

Parameter assignment
You will find the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in
Section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default
settings for the SM 322; DO 8 x 230 VDC/0.5 A in the table below.

Table 3-25 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

settings type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupts Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Behavior on CPU STOP Switch substitute value EWS Dynamic Channel
(EWS)
Hold last value (LWH)
Switch substitute value Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
“1”

3.29.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 230 VDC/0.5 A

Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

The table below presents an overview of the diagnostic messages for the
SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A.

Table 3-26 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. AC 230 VDC/0.5 A

Diagnostics message LED Scope of the diagnostics Parameters can be

assigned
Time-out SF Module No
EPROM error SF Module No
RAM error SF Module No

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-104 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Error causes and remedies

Table 3-27 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A, error causes and remedies

Diagnostics Error Detection Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Time-out Always Temporary high Remove interference and turn
electromagnetic the CPU power supply off and
interference on
Module defective Replace module
EPROM error Always Temporary high Remove interference and turn
electromagnetic the CPU power supply off and
interference on
Module defective Replace module
RAM error Always Temporary high Remove interference and turn
electromagnetic the CPU power supply off and
interference on
Module defective Replace module

3.29.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

Introduction
The SM 322; DO8 x Rel.230VAC/0.5 A can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not available – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Use STEP 7 to assign parameters for enabling
interrupts.

Diagnostic Interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then incoming active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of interrupts.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic
interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-105

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A;

(6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1322-1HF10-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A features the following characteristics:
• 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1
• Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC
• Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.

Measures with switching currents > 3 A

Note
To keep the additional temperature rise of the module near the connectors as low
as possible, you must select a cable cross-section of 1.5 mm2 for connecting
cables with switching currents > 3 A.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-106 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

L+
L+

L+ L+

1)
M M
L+ L+

Backplane bus interface

M M
24 V
1)

L+ L+

1)
M M
L+ L+

M M
M
M

Channel 1) Connection possibility for contact supply

number I aggregate current v8 A for Ta v30 C
Status display -green I aggregate current v5A for Ta v60 C

Figure 3-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

Operation with safe electrical extra-low voltage

When using relay output module 322-1HF10 with safe and electrically isolated
extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account:
If a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the
horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more
than 120 VUC. With operation at voltages greater than 120 VUC, the creepages
and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the SIMATIC
requirements for safe electrical isolation.

If one of the two horizontally adjacent termi-

nals is operated with a safe electrical extra-
low voltage, the adjacent terminal must be
operated at not more than UC 120 V.

Figure 3-35 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-107

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

Dimensions and Weight Permitted potential difference

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 • Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
(in millimeters) supply voltage of the
relays
Weight Approx. 320 g
• Between Minternal and 250 VAC
Data for Specific Module supply voltage of the
Supports clocked No relays and the outputs
operation • Between the outputs of the 500 VAC
Number of outputs 8 different groups

Length of cable Insulation tested with

• Unshielded max. 600 m • Between Minternal and 500 VDC
• Shielded max. 1000 m supply voltage of the
relays
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
• Between Minternal and 1500 VAC
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC supply voltage of the
relay L + relays and the outputs
Total current of the outputs • Between the outputs of the 2000 VAC
(per group) different groups
• Horizontal configuration Current consumption
Up to 30 C max. 8 A • From the backplane bus max. 40 mA
Up to 60 C max. 5 A • From supply voltage L+ max. 125 mA
• Vertical configuration max. 5 A
Power dissipation of the typ. 4.2 W
Up to 40 C module
Isolation
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
• Between the channels Yes
In groups of 1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-108 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

Status display Green LED per channel • Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC
Interrupt None Voltage Current No. of
Diagnostic functions None switching
cyc. (typ.)
Data for Selecting an Actuator
24 VDC 2.0 A 0.3 million
Continuous thermal current max. 8 A 1.0 A 0.5 million
Minimum load voltage / current 10 V / 5 mA 0.5 A 1 million

Short-circuit proof to With circuit-breaker of 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.5 million

IEC 947-5-1 characteristic B for: 0.3 A 1 million
cos  1.0: 600 A 120 VDC 0.2 A 0.5 mill.
cos  0.5 to 0.7: 900 A
48 VAC 3.0 A 0.5 million
With Diazed 8 A fuse: 1.5 A 1 million
1000 A
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts 60 VAC 3.0 A 0.3 million
1.5 A 1 million
• For resistive load
120 VAC 3.0 A 0.2 million
Voltage Current No. of 2.0 A 0.3 million
switching 1.0 A 0.7 million
cyc. (typ.) 0.5 A 2.0 million
24 VDC 8.0 A 0.1 million 230 VAC 3.0 A 0.1 million
4.0 A 0.3 million 2.0 A 0.3 million
2.0 A 0.7 1.0 A 0.7 million
0.5 A 4.0 million 0.5 A 2.0 million
60 VDC 0.5 A 4 million • Aux. contactors Size 0 30 mill.
120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 mill. (3TH28)

48 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million An external protection circuit will enhance the service life
2.0 A 1.6 million of the contacts.

60 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million Power No. of

2.0 A 1.2 million switching
cyc. (typ.)
120 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million
4.0 A 0.3 million Lamp load (230 VAC) 1000W 25000
2.0 A 0.5 million 1500W 10000
1.0 A 0.7 million Energy-saving 10 58W 25000
0.5 A 1.5 million lamps/fluorescent lamps with
230 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million electronic ballast
4.0 A 0.3 million
Fluorescent lamps, 1 58W 25000
2.0 A 0.5 million
conventionally compensated
1.0 A 0.7 million
0.5 A 1.5 million Fluorescent lamps, 10 58W 25000
non-compensated
Contact protection (internal) None
Connecting two outputs in parallel
• For redundant actuation of Possible
a load
• To increase performance Not possible
Triggering a digital input Possible
Switch rate
• Mechanical max. 10 Hz
• For resistive load max. 2 Hz
• Inductive loads according max. 0.5 Hz
to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15
AC
• For lamp load max. 2 Hz

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-109

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.31 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;

DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A features the following characteristics:
• 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
• 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• 24 VDC rated load voltage
• Inputs suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity
switches)
• Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately
50
s for reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-110 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 323;

DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

2L+
24V

M
2M
Backplane bus
interface
3L+
24V

1M M 3M
24V

Channel
number
Status display – green

Figure 3-36 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Terminal assignment
The figure below shows the assignment of the channels to the input and output
addresses.

Inputs Outputs
Input byte x Output byte x

Input byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 1)

Figure 3-37 Terminal assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-111

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Input voltage
(in millimeters) • Rated value 24 VDC
Weight Approx. 260 g • For signal “1” 13 to 30 V
Data for Specific Module • For signal “0” –30 to + 5 V

Clocked No Input current

• At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Number of inputs 16
Input delay
Number of outputs 16
• At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Length of cable • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• Unshielded max. 600 m
Input characteristic curve According to
• Shielded max. 1000 m
IEC 61131, type 1
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC BEROs max. 1.5 mA
Number of inputs that can be • Permitted bias current
triggered simultaneously Data for Selecting an Actuator
• Horizontal configuration Output voltage
Up to 40 C 16 • At signal “1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Up to 60 C 8 Output current
• Vertical configuration • At signal “1”
Up to 40 C 16 Rated value 0.5 A
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
Total current of the outputs
(per group) • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
• Horizontal configuration (leakage current)
Up to 40 C max. 4 A Output delay
Up to 60 C max. 3 A (for resistive load)

• Vertical configuration • At “0” to “1” max. 100
s

Up to 40 C max. 2 A • At “1” to “0” max. 500
s
Load resistor range 48  to 4 k
Isolation
• Between channels and Yes Lamp load max. 5 W
backplane bus Parallel connection of
• Between the channels Yes 2 outputs
Inputs in groups of 16 • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Outputs in groups of 8 a load of the same group)

Permitted potential difference • To increase performance Not possible

• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC Triggering a digital input Possible
circuits Switch rate
Insulation tested with VDC 500 • For resistive load max. 100 Hz
Current consumption • Inductive load according to max. 0.5 Hz
IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC
• From the backplane bus max. 80 mA max. 10 Hz
• From load voltage L+ max. 80 mA • For lamp load
(without load) Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.5 W circuit interruption voltage up

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic

output
Status display Green LED per channel
• Threshold on 1 A, typ.
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-112 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.32 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;

DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1323-1BH01-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A features the following characteristics:
• 8 inputs, isolated in groups of 8
• 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• 24 VDC rated load voltage
• Inputs suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity
switches)
• Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50
s
for reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-113

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

1M
24V

2L+

M
24V

Backplane bus
interface

2M

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-38 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-114 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Input voltage
(in millimeters) • Rated value 24 VDC
Weight Approx. 200 g • For signal “1” 13 to 30 V
Data for Specific Module • For signal “0” –30 to 5 V

Supports clocked No Input current

operation • At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Number of inputs 8 Input delay
Number of outputs 8 • At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms

Length of cable • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms

• Unshielded max. 600 m Input characteristic curve According to

IEC 61131, type 1
• Shielded max. 1000 m
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Connection of Two-Wire Possible
BEROs max. 1.5 mA
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC • Permitted bias current
Number of inputs that can be Data for Selecting an Actuator
triggered simultaneously
Output voltage
• Horizontal configuration
• At signal “1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Up to 60 C 8
Output current
• Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C 8 • At signal “1”
Rated value 0.5 A
Total current of the outputs
(per group) Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A

• Horizontal configuration • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA

(leakage current)
Up to 60 C max. 4 A
• Vertical configuration Output delay (for resistive load)
Up to 40 C max. 4 A • At “0” to “1” max. 100
s
Isolation • At “1” to “0” max. 500
s

• Between channels and Yes Load resistor range 48  to 4 k

backplane bus Lamp load max. 5 W
• Between the channels Yes Parallel connection of
Inputs in groups of 8 2 outputs
Outputs in groups of 8 • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Permitted potential difference a load of the same group)
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC • To increase performance Not possible
circuits
Triggering a digital input Possible
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Switch rate
Current consumption • For resistive load max. 100 Hz
• From the backplane bus max. 40 mA • Inductive load according to max. 0.5 Hz
• From load voltage L+ max. 40 mA IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC
(without load) • For lamp load max. 10 Hz
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.5 W Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics circuit interruption voltage up

Status display Green LED per channel Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
output
Interrupts None
• Threshold on 1 A, typ.
Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-115

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

3.33 Digital Input/Output Module SM 327;

DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A; parameterizable
(6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0

Characteristics
The SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 VDC 24/0.5 A features the following characteristics:
• 8 digital inputs and 8 individual parameterizable inputs or outputs, isolated in
groups of 16
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• Inputs suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity
switches)
• 0.5 A output current
• 24 VDC rated load voltage
• Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
• The parameters of the module can be dynamically changed-channel during the
RUN (CiR-capable)
• Re-readability of the outputs.

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50
s
for reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-116 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 327;

DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable

2
0
3
1 4
2 5
3 M 6
4 7
5 8
6 9
Backplane bus
7 interface

11
L+
0 12
1 13
2 14
3 15
M
4 16
L+
5 17
6 18
M
7
19
20
M
Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-39 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A,
parameterizable

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-117

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Technical data of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 Input voltage
(in millimeters) • Rated value 24 VDC
Weight Approx. 200 g • For signal “1” 15 to 30 V
Data for Specific Module • For signal “0” –30 to 5 V

Supports clocked No Input current

operation • At signal “1” typ. 6 mA
Number of inputs 8 digital Input delay
Number of inputs/outputs 8 single, • At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
parameterizable • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Length of cable Input characteristic curve According to
• Unshielded max. 600 m IEC 61131, type 1
• Shielded max. 1000 m Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Voltages, Currents, Potentials BEROs max. 1.5 mA
• Permitted bias current
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
Data for Selecting an Actuator
Number of inputs that can be
triggered simultaneously Output voltage

• Horizontal configuration
• At signal “1” min. L + (– 1,5 V)

Up to 60 C 16 Output current
• Vertical configuration • At signal “1”
Up to 40 C 16 Rated value 0.5 A
Total current of the outputs Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
(per group) • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
• Horizontal configuration (leakage current)
Up to 40 C max. 4 A Output delay (for resistive load)
Up to 60 C max. 3 A • At “0” to “1” max. 350
s
• Vertical configuration max. 2 A • At “1” to “0” max. 500
s
Up to 40 C
Load resistor range 48  to 4 k
Isolation
Lamp load max. 5 W
• Between channels and Yes
Parallel connection of
backplane bus
2 outputs
• Between the channels No
• For redundant triggering of Possible
Permitted potential difference a load
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC • To increase performance Not possible
circuits
Triggering a digital input Possible
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Switch rate
Current consumption
• For resistive load max. 100 Hz
• From the backplane bus max. 60 mA
• Inductive load according to max. 0.5 Hz
• From load voltage L+ max. 20 mA IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC
(without load)
• For lamp load max. 10 Hz
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W
Limit (internal) of the inductive typ. L + (–54 V)
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics circuit interruption voltage up
Status display Green LED per channel Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
output
Interrupts None
• Threshold on 1 A, typ.
Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-118 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

3.33.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
digital modules in Section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default
settings for the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A in the table below.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
• In STEP 7
• With SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
• with SFB 53 “WRREC” (e. g. for GSD).
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 and
the SFB 53 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table 3-28 Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 VDC 24/0.5 A

Parameter Value Default Parameter Scope Data Parameters can be

Range Settings Type Record assigned with ...
No.
SFC 55, Program
SFB 53 ming
device
Digital output Yes/no No Dynamic Channel 1 Yes Yes

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-119

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Structure of data record 1

The following figure shows the structure of data record 1 of the dynamic
parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A.

Byte 0 Not relevant

Byte 1 Not relevant

Byte 2 Not relevant

Byte 3 Not relevant

Byte 4 Not relevant

Byte 5

1: Use channel 8 as output

0: Use channel 8 as input
...
...
...
...
...
...
+1: Use channel 15 as output
0: Use channel 15 as input

Figure 3-40 Data record 1 of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-120 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Digital Modules

Re-readability of the outputs

The digital outputs can be read back into the user data area: If, e. g. A11.3 is
parameterized as an output, it can be read back via E11.3. see Figure3-41

Byte n Byte n+1

.7 .0 .7 .0
Inputs

Re–readability
.7 .0 .7 .0
Outputs 0

Byte n+1

The following applies: Channel 8: n+1.0

Channel 9: n+1.1
Channel 10: n+1.2
Channel 11: n+1.3
Channel 12: n+1.4
Channel 13: n+1.5
Channel 14: n+1.6
Channel 15: n+1.7

Figure 3-41 Re-readability of the outputs of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-121

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Digital Modules

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-122 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules 4
Structure of the chapter
The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects:
1. Chapter overview of which modules are available and described here
2. Module overview of the most important properties of the modules
3. Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module
4. Information that is generally available – in other words, affects all analog
modules (such as parameter assignment and diagnostics)
5. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics,
diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special
characteristics of the module):
a) for analog input modules
b) for analog output modules
c) for analog input/output modules

STEP 7 blocks for analog functions

You can use the blocks FC 105 “SCALE” (Scale Values) and FC 106 “UNSCALE”
(Unscale Values) for reading and outputting analog values in STEP 7. You will find
the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called
“TI-S7-Converting Blocks” (for a description, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help for
the FCs).

Additional information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and
128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in
the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

4.1 Module Overview 4-3
4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning 4-8
the Analog Module
4.3 Analog Value Representation 4-9
4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog 4-28
Input Channels
4.5 Behavior of Analog Modules 4-31
4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog 4-35
Modules
4.7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment 4-39
4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs 4-45
4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors 4-50
4.10 Connecting Current Sensors 4-51
4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors 4-53
4.12 Connecting Thermocouples 4-58
4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs 4-66
4.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs 4-67
4.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs 4-70
4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules 4-71
4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules 4-75
4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits; 4-77
(6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0)
4.19 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits 4-86
(6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0)
4.20 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; 4-97
(6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0)
4.21 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits; 4-108
(6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0)
4.22 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits; 4-115
(6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0)
4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD 4-125
(6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0)
4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC (6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0) 4-138
4.25 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits; 4-153
(6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0)
4.26 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits 4-163
(6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0)
4.27 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, synchronous; 4-169
(6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0)
4.28 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits; 4-176
(6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Section Contents Page

4.29 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits; 4-182
(6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0)
4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; 4-188
(6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0)
4.31 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x12 bits; 4-194
(6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0)

4.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the analog
modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module
for your task.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 331; SM 331; SM 331; SM 331;

AI 8 x 16 bits AI 8 x 16 bits AI 8 x 14 bits AI 8 x 13 bits
Char- High Speed
acter- (-7NF00-) (-7NF10-) (-7HF0x-) (-1KF01-)
istics
Number of 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 8
inputs channel groups channel groups channel groups channel groups
Resolution Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
channel group: channel group: channel group: channel group:
• 15 bits + sign • 15 bits + sign • 13 bits + sign • 12 bits+sign

Measuring Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
Method channel group: channel group: channel group: channel:
• Voltage • Voltage • Voltage
• Current • Current • Current • Voltage
• Current
• Resistors
• Temperature
Selection of Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary,
measuring channel group channel group channel group per channel
range
Supports No No Yes No
clocked
operation
Programmable Yes Yes Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable No
interrupt
Limit value Adjustable for Adjustable for Adjustable for No
monitoring 2 channels 8 channels 2 channels
Hardware Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable No
interrupt upon
limit violation
Hardware No Yes No No
interrupt at end
of cycle
Potential Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation
relationships to: to: to: to:
• CPU • CPU • CPU • CPU
• Load voltage (not
for 2-DMU)
Permitted 50 VDC 60 VDC 11 VDC 2.0 VDC
potential
difference
between the
inputs (ECM)
Special – - – –
Features
Sign Sign
2-DMU 2-wire transmitter

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Table 4-2 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)

Module SM 331; SM 331; SM 331; SM 331;
AI 8 x 12 bits AI 8 x RTD AI 8 x TC AI 2 x 12 bits
Char-
acter- (-7KF02-) (-7PF00-) (-7PF10-) (-7KB02-)
istics
Number of 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 2 inputs in 1
inputs channel groups channel groups channel groups channel group
Resolution Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
channel group: channel group: channel group: channel group:
• 9 bits+sign • 15 bits + sign • 15 bits + sign • 9 bits+sign
• 12 bits+sign • 12 bits+sign
• 14 bits+sign • 14 bits+sign
Measuring Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
Method channel group: channel group: channel group: channel group:
• Voltage • Resistors • Temperature • Voltage
• Current • Temperature • Current
• Resistors • Resistors
• Temperature • Temperature
Selection of Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per
measuring channel group channel group channel group channel group
range
Programmable No Yes Yes Yes
diagnostics
Supports Yes No No No
clocked
operation
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
interrupt
Limit value Adjustable for Adjustable for Adjustable for Adjustable for
monitoring 2 channels 8 channels 8 channels 1 channel

Hardware Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable

interrupt upon
limit violation
Hardware No Adjustable Adjustable No
interrupt at end
of cycle
Potential Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation
relationships to: to: to: to:
• CPU • CPU • CPU • CPU
• Load voltage (not • Load voltage (not
for 2-DMU) for 2-DMU)
Permitted 2.5 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 2.5 VDC
potential
difference
between the
inputs (ECM)
Special – – –
Features
Sign Sign
2-DMU 2-wire transmitter

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-3 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 332; SM 332; SM 332; SM 332;

AO 8 x 12 bits AO 4 x 16 bits AO 4 x 12 bits AO 2 x 12 bits
Char-
acter- (-5HF00-) (-7ND01-) (-5HD01-) (-5HB01-)
istics

Number of outputs 8 Output channels 4 outputs in 4 4 Output channels 2 Output channels

channel groups
Resolution 12 bits 16 bits 12 bits 12 bits
Output type Channel by Channel by Channel by Channel by
channel: channel: channel: channel:
• Voltage • Voltage • Voltage • Voltage
• Current • Current • Current • Current
Supports No Yes No No
clocked operation
Programmable Yes Yes Yes Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
interrupt
Substitute value No Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
output
Potential Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation
relationships between: between: to: to:
• CPU • CPU and • CPU • CPU
• Of the load channel • Of the load • Of the load
voltage • The channels voltage voltage
• Output and L+,
M
• CPU and L+, M
Special Features – – – –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Table 4-4 Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 334; SM 334;

AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits
Characteristics (-0CE01-) (-0KE00-)

Number of inputs 4 inputs in 1 channel group 4 inputs in 2 channel groups

Number of outputs 2 outputs in 1 channel group 2 outputs in 1 channel group
Resolution 8 bits 12 bits + sign
Measuring Method Adjustable for each channel Adjustable for each channel
group: group:
• Voltage • Voltage
• Current • Resistors
• Temperature
Output type Channel by channel: Channel by channel:
• Voltage • Voltage
• Current
Supports clocked No No
operation
Programmable diagnostics No No
Diagnostic interrupt No No
Limit value monitoring No No
Hardware interrupt upon limit No No
violation
Hardware interrupt at end of No No
cycle
Substitute value output No No
Potential relationships • Non-isolated to CPU Galvanic isolation to:
• Galvanic isolation to load • CPU
voltage • Of the load voltage
Special Features Not parameterizable, setting of –
measurement and output type by
means of wiring

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the

Module

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other
to commission analog modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either
earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other
modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.

Sequence of steps

Table 4-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module

Step Procedure Refer To...

1. Select the module Section 4.1 and specific module section from
Section 4.22
2. With some analog input Section 4.4
modules: set the measuring
method and measuring range by
means of the measuring range
module
3. Install the module in the ”Mounting” section in the Installation Manual for
SIMATIC S7 network the programmable logic controller being used:
• S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
4. Assign parameters to module Section 4.7
5. Connect measuring sensor or Sections 4.8 to 4.15
loads to module
6. Commission configuration ”Commissioning” section in the Installation
Manual for the programmable controller being
used:
• S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
• ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
7. If commissioning was not Section 4.16
successful, diagnose
configuration

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.3 Analog Value Representation

Introduction
This section describes the analog values for all the measuring ranges and output
ranges which you can use with the analog modules.

Converting Analog Values

The CPU processes the analog values in binary form only.
Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form.
Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal.

Analog value representation with 16-bit resolution

The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values having the
same nominal range. The analog values are represented as a fixed-point number
in two’s complement. The resulting assignment is as follows:

Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value of bits 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Sign
The sign of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15:
• “0” ³ )
• “1” ³ *

Resolution less than 16 bits

If the resolution of an analog module has fewer than 16 bits, the analog value is
stored left-justified on the module. The lower-order bit positions not used are
padded with zeros (”0”).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Example
In the following example you can see how the positions not padded with “0” are
written for low resolution.

Table 4-6 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and a 13-bit analog value

Resolution Analog value

Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
13-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

4.3.1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels

Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the measured value representations for the
various measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables
apply to all modules with the corresponding measuring ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

Tables 4-8 to 4-9 contain the binary representation of the measured values.
Since the binary representation of the measured values is always the same,
starting at 4-10 these tables only contain the measured values and the units.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-10 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Measured-value resolution
The resolution of the analog values may differ, depending on the analog module
and its parameterization. With resolutions < 15 bits, the bits indicated by “x” are set
to “0”.
Note: This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted
temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module (see Tables
4-16 to 4-31).

Table 4-7 Possible analog value resolutions

Resolution Units Analog value

in bits (+ sign)
decimal hexadecimal High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte
8 128 80H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1xxxxxxx
9 64 40H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01xxxxxx
10 32 20H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 001xxxxx
11 16 10H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0001xxxx
12 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx
13 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
14 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
15 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Binary representation of the input ranges

The input ranges shown in Tables 4-8 to 4-9 are defined in two’s complement
representation:

Table 4-8 Bipolar Input Ranges

Units Measured Data Word Range

Value
in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

32767 u118.515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over
range
27649 u100.00 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
4
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated
range
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
–27648 –100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–27649 v–100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under
range
–32512 –117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–32768 v–117.596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table 4-9 Unipolar Input Ranges

Units Measured Data Word Range

Value
in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

32767 w118.515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over-
range
27649 w100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
range
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Rated
range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under-
range
–4864 –17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
range
–32768 v–17.596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-12 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges

Table 4-10 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges ± 10 V to ± 1 V

System Voltage Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V ±5 V ±2.5 V ±1 V
32767 7FFF 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.185 V Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V
Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V 5V 2.5 V 1V
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1.875 V 0.75 V
1 1 361.7
V 180.8
V 90.4
V 36.17
V
0 0 0V 0V 0V 0V Rated range
–1 FFFF
–20736 AF00 –7.5 V –3.75 V –1.875 V –0.75 V
–27648 9400 –10 V –5 V –2.5 V –1 V
–27649 93FF
Underrange
–32512 8100 –11.759 V –5.879 V –2.940 V –1.176 V
–32513 80FF Underflow
–32768 8000 –11.851 V –5.926 V –2.963 V –1.185 V

Table 4-11 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges ± 500 mV to ± 80 mV

System Voltage Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±500 mV ±250 mV ±80 mV
32767 7FFF 592.6 mV 296.3 mV 94.8 mV Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 500 mV 250 mV 80 mV
20736 5100 375 mV 187.5 mV 60 mV
1 1 18.08
V 9.04
V 2.89
V
0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV Rated range
–1 FFFF
–20736 AF00 –375 mV –187.5 mV –60 mV
–27648 9400 –500 mV –250 mV –80 mV
–27649 93FF Underrange
–32512 8100 –587.9 mV –294.0 mV –94.1 mV
–32513 80FF Underflow
–32768 8000 –592.6 mV –296.3 mV –94.8 mV

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-12 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and

0 to 10 V

System Voltage Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
32767 7FFF 5.741 V 11.852 V
Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V
Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 5V 10 V
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
Rated range
1 1 1 V + 144.7
V 0 V + 361.7
V
0 0 1V 0V
–1 FFFF
Underrange
–4864 ED00 0.296 V
Negative values not
–4865 ECFF possible
Underflow
–32768 8000

Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges

Table 4-13 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges ± 20 mA to ± 3.2 mA

System Current Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA ±10 mA ±3.2 mA
32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 11.85 mA 3.79 mA Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 3.76 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 10 mA 3.2 mA
20736 5100 15 mA 7.5 mA 2.4 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 361.7 nA 115.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA Rated range
–1 FFFF
–20736 AF00 –15 mA –7.5 mA –2.4 mA
–27648 9400 –20 mA –10 mA –3.2 mA
–27649 93FF Underrange
–32512 8100 –23.52 mA –11.76 mA –3.76 mA
–32513 80FF Underflow
–32768 8000 –23.70 mA –11.85 mA –3.79 mA

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-14 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Table 4-14 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to

20 mA

System Current Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 22.96 mA
Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA
Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
Rated range
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
–1 FFFF
Underrange
–4864 ED00 –3.52 mA 1.185 mA
–4865 ECFF
Underflow
–32768 8000

Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Transmitters

Table 4-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters from 10 k
and from 150  to 600 

System Resistance-Type Transmitter Range

Dec. Hex. 10 k 150  300  600 
32767 7FFF 11.852 177.77 355.54  711.09  Overflow
k
32512 7F00 150.01 300.01  600.02 

32511 7EFF 11.759 176.38 352.77  705.53  Overrange
k 
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 k 150  300  600 
20736 5100 7.5 k 112.5  225  450 
1 1 361.7m 5.43 m 10.85 21.70 Rated range
m m
0 0 0 0 0 0

(negative values physically Underrange

not possible)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-15

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt x00

standard

Table 4-16 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors PT 100, 200, 500,
1000

Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units

standard standard standard
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit decimal (1 digit decimal (1 digit = decimal
=0.15C) =0.1 5F) 0.1 K)
> 1000.0 32767 7FFFH > 1832.0 32767 7FFFH > 1273.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H 1273.2 12732 31BCH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
850.1 8501 2135H 1562.1 15621 3D05H 1123.3 11233 2BE1H
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 3D04H 1123.2 11232 2BE0H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 2DCH
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH 73.1 731 2DBH
Underrang
: : : : : : : : :
e
–243.0 –2430 F682H –405.4 –4054 F02AH 30.2 302 12EH
< –243.0 –32768 8000H < –405.4 –32768 8000H < 30.2 32768 8000H Underflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt x00

climate

Table 4-17 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt 100, 200, 500,
1000

Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units

climate climate
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
>155.00 32767 7FFFH >311.00 32767 7FFFH Overflow
155.00 15500 3C8CH 311.00 31100 797CH
: : : : : : Overrange
130.01 13001 32C9H 266.01 26601 67E9H
130.00 13000 32C8H 266.00 26600 67E8H
: : : : : : Rated range
–120.00 –12000 D120H –184.00 –18400 B820H
–120.01 –12001 D11FH –184.01 –18401 B81FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–145.00 –14500 C75CH –229.00 –22900 A68CH
< –145.00 –32768 8000H < –229.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-16 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni x00

standard

Table 4-18 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni100, 120, 200, 500,
1000, LG-Ni 1000

Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units

standard standard standard
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.15C) 0.1 5F) 0.1 K)
>295.0 32767 7FFFH >563.0 32767 7FFFH >568.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295.0 2950 B86H 563.0 5630 15FEH 568.2 5682 1632H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
250.1 2501 9C5H 482.1 4821 12D5H 523.3 5233 1471H
250.0 2500 9C4H 482.0 4820 12D4H 523.2 5232 1470H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FD08H 213.2 2132 854H
–60.1 –601 FDA7H –76.1 –761 FD07H 213.1 2131 853H
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–105.0 –1050 FBE6H –157.0 –1570 F9DEH 168.2 1682 692H
< –105.0 –32768 8000H < –157.0 –32768 8000H <168.2 32768 8000H Underflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni x00

climate

Table 4-19 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni 100, 120, 200,
500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000

Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units

climate climate
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
> 295.00 32767 7FFFH >325.11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295.00 29500 733CH 327.66 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
250.01 25001 61A9H 280.01 28001 6D61H
250.00 25000 61A8H 280.00 28000 6D60H
: : : : : : Rated range
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
–60.01 –6001 E88FH –76.01 –7601 E24FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–105.00 –10500 D6FCH –157.00 –15700 C2ACH
< –105.00 –32768 8000H < –157.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-17

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

standard

Table 4-20 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units

standard standard standard
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F) 0.01 K)
> 312.0 32767 7FFFH >593.6 32767 7FFFH >585.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
312.0 3120 C30H 593.6 5936 1730H 585.2 5852 16DCH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
260.1 2601 A29H 500.1 5001 12D5H 533.3 5333 14D5H
260.0 2600 A28H 500.0 5000 1389H 533.2 5332 14D4H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 2DCH
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH 73.1 731 2DBH
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–240.0 –2400 F6A0H –400.0 –4000 F060H 33.2 332 14CH
< –240.0 –32768 8000H < –400.0 –32768 8000H <33.2 32768 8000H Underflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

climate

Table 4-21 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units
climate climate
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
> 180.00 32767 7FFFH >325.11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
180.00 18000 4650H 327.66 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
150.01 15001 3A99H 280.01 28001 6D61AH
150.00 15000 3A98H 280.00 28000 6D60H
: : : : : : Rated range
–50.00 –5000 EC78H –58.00 –5800 E958H
–50.01 –5001 EC77H –58.01 –5801 E957H
: : : : : : Underrange
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
< –60.00 –32768 8000H < –76.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-18 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Analog value representation for thermocouples type B

Table 4-22 Analog value representation for thermocouples type B

Units Units Units

Type B Type B Type B Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
>2070.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH >2343.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2070.0 20700 50DCH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH 2343.2 23432 5B88H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1821.0 18210 4722H 2786.6 27866 6CDAH 2094.2 20942 51CEH
1820.0 18200 4718H 2786.5 27865 6CD9H 2093.2 20932 51C4H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H 273.2 2732 0AACH

: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–120.0 –1200 FB50H –184.0 –1840 F8D0H 153.2 1532 05FCH
< –120.0 –32768 8000H < –184.0 –32768 8000H <153.2 32768 8000H Underflow

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type C

Table 4-23 Analog value representation for thermocouples type C

Units Units
Type C Type C Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
>2500.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2500.0 25000 61A8H 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
2315.1 23151 5A6FH 2786.6 27866 6CDAH
2315.0 23150 5A6EH 2786.5 27865 6CD9H
: : : : : : Rated range
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H
0.1 –1 FFFFH 31.9 319 013FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–120.0 –1200 FB50H –184.0 –1840 F8D0H
< –120.0 –32768 8000H < –184.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-19

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type E

Table 4-24 Analog value representation for thermocouples type E

Units Units Units

Type E Type E Type E Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1200.0 32767 7FFFH > 2192,0 32767 7FFFH > 1473.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H 1473.2 14732 398CH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1000.1 10001 2711H 1833.8 18338 47A2H 1274.2 12742 31C6H
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H 1273.2 12732 31BCH
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H <0 <0 <0000H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type J

Table 4-25 Analog value representation for thermocouples type J

Units Units Units

Type J Type J Type J Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1450.0 32767 7FFFH > 2642,0 32767 7FFFH > 1723.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1450.0 14500 38A4H 2642.0 26420 6734H 1723.2 17232 4350H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1201.0 12010 2EEAH 2193.8 21938 55B2H 1474.2 14742 3996H
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H 1473.2 14732 398CH
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–210.0 –2100 F7CCH –346.0 –3460 F27CH 63.2 632 0278H
< –210.0 < –2100 < –346.0 < –3460 <63.2 < 632 < 0278H
Underflow
H H
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F31CH and outputs 8000H. ... of EA0CH and outputs 8000H. ... of FDC8H and outputs 8000H.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-20 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Analog value representation for thermocouples type K

Table 4-26 Analog value representation for thermocouples type K

Units Units Units

Type K Type K Type K Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1622.0 32767 7FFFH >2951.6 32767 7FFFH > 1895.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1622.0 16220 3F5CH 2951.6 29516 734CH 1895.2 18952 4A08H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1373.0 13730 35A2H 2503.4 25034 61CAH 1646.2 16462 404EH
1372.0 13720 3598H 2501.6 25061 61B8H 1645.2 16452 4044H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 < F574H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H 0% 0% < 0000H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

Analog value representation for thermocouples type L

Table 4-27 Analog value representation for thermocouples type L

Units Units Units

Type L Type L Type L Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
>1150.0 32767 7FFFH >2102.0 32767 7FFFH >1423.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1150.0 11500 2CECH 2102.0 21020 521CH 1423.2 14232 3798H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
901.0 9010 2332H 1653.8 16538 409AH 1174.2 11742 2DDEH
900.0 9000 2328H 1652.0 16520 4088H 1173.2 11732 2DD4H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 02DCH
< –200.0 < –2000 < F830H < –328.0 < –3280 H <73.2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... of FE2CH and outputs 8000H.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-21

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type N

Table 4-28 Analog value representation for thermocouples type N

Units Units Units

Type N Type N Type N Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1550.0 32767 7FFFH >2822.0 32767 7FFFH > 1823.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1550.0 15500 3C8CH 2822.0 28220 6E3CH 1823.2 18232 4738H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1300.1 13001 32C9H 2373.8 23738 5CBAH 1574.2 15742 3D7EH
1300.0 13000 32C8H 2372.0 23720 5CA8H 1573.2 15732 3D74H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 < F574H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H 0% 0% < 0000H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type R, S

Table 4-29 Analog value representation for thermocouples type R, S

Units Units Units

Types R, S Types R, Types R,
decimal hexa- S decimal hexa- S decimal hexa- Range
in 5C decimal in 5F decimal in K decimal

>2019.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH >2292.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2019.0 20190 4EDEH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH 2292.2 22922 598AH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1770.0 17770 4524H 3218.0 32180 7DB4H 2043.2 20432 4FD0H
1769.0 17690 451AH 3216.2 32162 7DA2H 2042.2 20422 4FC6H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–50.0 –500 FE0CH –58.0 –580 FDBCH 223.2 2232 08B8H
–51.0 –510 FE02H –59.8 –598 FDAAH 222.2 2222 08AEH
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–170.0 –1700 F95CH –274.0 –2740 F54CH 103.2 1032 0408H
< –170.0 –32768 8000H < –274.0 –32768 8000H < 103-2 < 1032 8000H Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-22 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type T

Table 4-30 Analog value representation for thermocouples type T

Units Units Units

Type T Type T Type T Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
>540.0 32767 7FFFH >1004.0 32767 7FFFH >813.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
540.0 5400 1518H 1004.0 10040 2738H 813.2 8132 1FC4H
: : : Overrange
401.0 4010 0FAAH
400.0 4000 0FA0H 752.0 7520 1D60H 673.2 6732 1AACH
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 3.2 32 0020H
< –270.0 < –2700 H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H <3.2 < 32 < 0020H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type U

Table 4-31 Analog value representation for thermocouples type U

Units Units Units

Type U Type U Type U Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
>850.0 32767 7FFFH >1562.0 32767 7FFFH >1123.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 2738.0H 1123.2 11232 2BE0H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
601.0 6010 177AH 1113.8 11138 2B82H 874.2 8742 2226H
600.0 6000 1770H 1112.0 11120 2B70H 873.2 8732 221CH
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 02DCH
< –200.0 < –2000 H < –328.0 < –3280 H <73.2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... of FE2CH and outputs 8000H.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-23

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.3.2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels

Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the analog value representation for output
channels of the analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all
modules with the corresponding output ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

Tables 4-32 to 4-33 contain the binary representation of the output values.
Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting at
4-34 these tables only contain the output ranges and the units.

Output ranges for the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 bits

The analog input/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has output ranges
from 0 to 10 V and from 0 to 20 mA. Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334
has a lower resolution, however. Please not that the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
with product status 1 does not have overranges.

Binary representation of the output ranges

The output ranges shown in Tables 4-32 to 4-33 are defined in two’s complement
representation:

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-24 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Table 4-32 Bipolar Output Ranges

Units Output Data Word Range

Value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

w32512 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over
range
27649 w100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated
range
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
–27648 –100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–27649 v100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under
range
–32512 –117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
v32513 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow

Table 4-33 Unipolar Output Ranges

Units Output Data Word Range

Value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

w32512 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Over-
flow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over-
range
27649 w100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Rated
range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited
0.000 to rated
range
lower
–32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 limit 0 V
and
0 mA
v32513 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Under-
flow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-25

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Voltage Output Ranges

Table 4-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range ±10 V

System Voltage Output Range

Dec. hex. ±10 V
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V
75% 20736 5100 7.5 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7 µV Rated range
0% 0 0 0V
–1 FFFF –361.7 µV
–75 % –20736 AF00 –7.5 V
–100 % –27648 9400 –10 V
–27649 93FF Underrange
–117.593% –32512 8100 –11.76 V
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 V

Table 4-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V

System Voltage Output Range

Dec. hex. 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 V 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and de-
energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.70 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V
75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7µV 1V+144.7µV Rated range
0% 0 0 0V 1V
–1 FFFF Underrange
–25 % –6912 E500 0V
–6913 E4FF Not possible.
The output value is limited
–117.593% –32512 8100 to 0 V.
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and
de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-26 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Current Output Ranges

Table 4-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range ±20 mA

System Current Output Range

Dec. hex. ±20 mA
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA Rated range
–1 FFFF –723.4 nA
–75 % –20736 AF00 –15 mA
–100 % –27648 9400 –20 mA
–27649 93FF Underrange
–117.593% –32512 8100 –23.52 mA
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 mA

Table 4-37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

System Current Output Range

Dec. hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit
and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA 15 mA Rated range
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 4mA+578.7 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA 4 mA
–1 FFFF Underrange
–25 % –6912 E500 0 mA
–6913 E4FF Not possible. The
output value is limi-
–117.593% –32512 8100 ted to 0 mA.
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit
and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-27

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of

Analog Input Channels

Two procedures
There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and the measuring
ranges of the analog input channels of the analog modules:
• With measuring range module and STEP 7
• By means of wiring the analog input channel and STEP 7
Which of these two methods is used for the individual analog modules depends on
the module and is described in detail in the specific module sections.
The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the
module in STEP 7 is described in Section 4.7.
The following section describes how you set the measuring method and the
measuring range by means of measuring range modules.

Setting the Measuring Method and the Measuring Ranges with Measuring Range
Modules
If the analog modules haves measuring range modules, they are supplied with the
measuring range modules plugged in.
If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the
measuring method and the measuring range.

Note
Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input
module.
Before installing the analog input module, therefore, check whether the measuring
range modules have to be set to another measuring method and another
measuring range.

Possible settings for the measuring range modules

The measuring range modules can be set to the following positions: “A”, “B”, “C” and
“D”.
Which measuring range module positions you must select for the individual
measuring methods and measuring ranges is described in detail in the specific
module section.
The settings for the various types of measurement and measuring ranges are also
printed on the analog module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-28 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Replugging measuring range modules

If you want to replug a measuring range module, perform the following steps:
1. Use a screwdriver to ease the measuring range module out of the analog input
module.

Figure 4-1 Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-29

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

2. Insert the measuring range module (correctly positioned (1)) into the analog
input module.
The measuring range selected is the one that points to marker point on
module (2).

Figure 4-2 Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module

Perform the same steps for all other measuring range modules.
The next step is to install the module.

Caution
! If you have not set the measuring range modules correctly, the module may be
destroyed.
Make sure that the measuring range module is in the correct position before
connecting a sensor to the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-30 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.5 Behavior of the Analog Modules

Introduction
In this section, you will find information on:
• How the analog input and output values depend on the operating states of the
CPU and the supply voltage of the analog module
• The behavior of the analog modules depending on where the analog values lie
within the value range
• The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and
output value, as illustrated by an example

4.5.1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode

Effect of supply voltage and operating mode on the modules

The input and output values of the analog modules depend on the operating state
of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 4-38 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the
Supply Voltage L+

CPU Operating Supply Vol- Input Value of the Output Value of the
State tage L+ at Analog Input Module Analog Output Module
Analog Mo-
dule
POWER RUN L+ present Measured value CPU values
ON
7FFFH until first conversion Until the first conversion...
following power-up or after • after power-up has been
parameter assignment of the completed, a signal of 0 mA
module has been completed or 0 V is output.
• after parameter
assignment has been
completed, the previous
value is output.
L+ missing Overflow value 0 mA/0 V
POWER STOP L+ present Measured value Substitute value/last value
ON (default values: 0 mA/0 V)
7FFFH until first conversion
following power-up or after
parameter assignment of the
module has been completed
L+ missing Overflow value 0 mA/0 V
POWER – L+ present – 0 mA/0 V
OFF
L+ missing – 0 mA/0 V

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-31

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Behavior on failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the analog modules is always indicated by the SF
LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module
(entry in diagnostic buffer).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see
Section 4.7).

4.5.2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values

Effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability

Any errors that occur can lead to a diagnostics entry and a diagnostic interrupt with
analog modules with diagnostics capability and corresponding parameter
assignment. You will find the errors that might be involved in Section 4.16.

Effect of range of values on the analog input module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the input values lie within
the range of values.

Table 4-39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the
Analog Value within the Range of Values

Measured Input Value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt

Value In
Rated range Measured – – –
value
Overrange/und Measured – – –
errange value
Overflow 7FFFH Flashes1) Entered1) Diagnostic
interrupt1)
Underflow 8000H Flashes1) Entered1) Diagnostic
interrupt1)
Beyond the Measured – – Hardware
programmed value interrupt1)
limit
1) Only for modules with diagnostics capability and depending on parameter assignment

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-32 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Effect of range of values on the analog output module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the output values lie within
the value range.

Table 4-40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the
Analog Value within the Range of Values

Process Value Output Value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt

Lies Within
Rated range CPU value – – –
Overrange/und CPU value – – –
errange
Overflow 0 signal – – –
Underflow 0 signal – – –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-33

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.5.3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit

Operational limit
The operational limit is the measuring error or output error of the analog module
over the entire temperature range authorized for the module, referred to the rated
range of the module.

Basic error limit

The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 °C, referred to the rated range of
the module.

Note
The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the technical
specifications of the module always refer to the highest possible input and output
value in the rated range of the module.

Example of determination of the output error of a module

An analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits is being used for voltage output.
The output range from “0 to 10 V” is being used. The module is operating at an
ambient temperature of 30 °C. Thus the operational limit applies. The technical
specifications of the module state:
• Operational limit for voltage output: "0.5 %
An output error, therefore, of "0.05 V ("0.5% of 10 V) over the whole rated range
of the module must be expected.
This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95
V to 1.05 V is output by the module. The relative error is "5 % in this case.
The figure below shows for the example how the relative error becomes
increasingly less the more the output value approximates to the end of the rated
range of 10 V.

"0.05 V "0.05 V "0.05 V

(¢ "5 %) (¢ "0.625 %) (¢ "0.5 %*)

Output Value
–1 V 0V 1V 8V 10 V
* Operational limit
Figure 4-3 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-34 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog

Modules

Conversion time of analog input channels

The conversion time consists of a basic conversion time and additional processing
times of the module for:
• Resistance test
• Wire-break monitoring
The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the
analog input channel (integrating method, instantaneous value conversion).
In the case of integrating conversion methods, the integration time has a direct
influence on the conversion time. The integration time depends on the interference
frequency suppression that you set in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7.1).
For the basic conversion times and additional processing times of the different
analog modules refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned,
starting at Section 4.18.

Scan time of analog input channels

Analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to
the memory and/or to the bus backplane are performed sequentially – in other
words, the analog input channels are converted one after the other. The scan time
– in other words, the time elapsing until an analog input value is again converted, is
the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the
analog input module.
The following figure illustrates the components of the scan time for an n-channel
analog module.

Conversion time,
channel 1

Conversion time,
channel 2
Scan time

Conversion time,
channel n

Figure 4-4 Scan time of an analog input or output module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-35

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Conversion and scan times for analog input channels in channel groups
When the analog input channels are grouped in channel groups, you must take into
account the conversion time channel group by channel group.

Example
Two analog input channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 12 bits are
combined to form a channel group. You must therefore grade the scan time in
steps of 2.

Setting smoothing of analog values

You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input
modules.

Using smoothing
Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing.
It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured
values – for example, with temperature measurements.

Smoothing principle
The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished
by the module calculating average values from a defined number of converted
(digitized) analog values.
The user assigns parameters to smoothing at not more than four levels (none, low,
average, high). The level determines the number of analog signals used for
averaging.
The higher the smoothing level chosen, the more stable is the smoothed analog
value and the longer it takes until the smoothed analog signal is applied after a
step response (refer to the following example).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-36 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Example
The following figure shows the number of module cycles for a step response after
which the smoothed analog value is approximately 100% applied, as a function of
the smoothing that has been set. The figure applies to every change of signal at
the analog input.

Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal

in percent
100

63

50

0 50 100 150 200

Smoothing: low:
Module cycles
average:
high:
Figure 4-5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response

Additional information on smoothing

Refer to the specific section on the analog input module (from Section 4.22) to
determine whether smoothing can be set for the specific module and for any
special features that have to be taken into account.

Conversion time of the analog output channels

The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the transfer of the
digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital-to-analog
conversion.

Scan time of analog output channels

The analog output channels are converted sequentially – in other words, the
analog output channels are converted one after the other.
The scan time – in other words, the time elapsing until an analog output value is
again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output
channels (refer to 4-4).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-37

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Tip
You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan
time in STEP 7.

Overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules

tA

tE
tZ

t1 t2 t3

tA = Response time
tZ = Scan time corresponds to n conversion time (n = activated channels)
tE = Settling time
t1 = New digitized output value is present
t2 = Output value transferred and converted
t3 = Specified output value reached

Figure 4-6 Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels

Settling time
The settling time (t2 to t3) – in other words, the time elapsing from application the
converted value until the specified value is reached at the analog output – is
load-dependent. A distinction is made between resistive, capacitive and inductive
loads.
For the settling times of the different analog output modules as a function of load
refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at Section
4.28.

Response time
The response time (t1 to t3) – in other words, the time elapsing from application of
the digital output values in the internal memory until the specified value is reached
at the analog output – in a worst case scenario is the sum of the scan time and the
settling time.
You have a worst case situation, if, shortly prior to the transfer of a new output
value, the analog channel has been converted and is not converted again until all
other channels are converted (scan time).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-38 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.7 Analog module parameter assignment

Introduction
Analog modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics
of the modules by means of parameter assignment.

Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to analog modules with STEP 7. You must perform
parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to ³ RUN mode, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual analog modules.
In addition, if necessary you must place the measuring range modules of the
module in the necessary position (refer to Section 4.4).

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You can similarly modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program by
means of SFCs. Note, however, that after a change from RUN ³ STOP, STOP ³
RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find a
description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in
Appendix A.

Parameter Settable with CPU Operating

State
Static PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
Dynamic PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
SFC 55 in the user program RUN

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-39

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.7.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

The analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the
module concerned, starting from Section 4.22, for the subset “mastered” by the
specific analog modules.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
• Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
upon limit violation
• Hardware interrupt at Yes/no
end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware Constraint possible due to measuring
interrupt range Channel or
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 group

Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No Channel or
Static Channel
• With wire-break Yes/no No group
check

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-40 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
• Measuring method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current
(4-wire transmitter)
2DMU Current
(2-wire transmitter)
R-4L Resistance
(four-conductor
connection)
R-3L Resistance
(three-conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear,
four-conductor
connection)
RTD-3L Bulb resistor
(linear, three-conductor
connection) Channel or
TC-I1) Thermocouple Dynamic Channel
(internal comparison) group
TC-E1) Thermocouple
(external comparison)
TC-IL2) Thermocouple
(linear, internal
comparison)
TC-EL2) Thermocouple
(linear, external
comparison)
TC-L00C2) Thermocouple (linear,
reference temp. 0 °C)
TC-L50C2) Thermocouple (linear,
reference temp. 50°C)
• Measuring range For the settable measuring ranges of "10 V
the input channels, please refer to the
individual module description.
• Reaction with open Overflow; underflow Overflow
thermocouple
• Temperature unit3) Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; Degrees
Dynamic Module
degrees Kelvin Celsius
• Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8
8 channels software filter channels,
Dynamic Module
4 channels hardware filter hardware
filter

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-41

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
• Temperature Platinum (Pt) 0.00385 Dynamic Channel or
coefficient for 0.00385 / °C Channel
temperature 0.003916 / °C group
measurement with 0.003902 / °C
bulb resistor (RTD) 0.003920 / °C
0.003851 / °C
Nickel (Ni)
0.00618 / °C
0.00672 / °C
Copper (Cu)
0.00427 / °C
• Interference 400/60/50 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 50 Hz Dynamic Channel or
frequency 10 Hz Channel
suppression group
• Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel or
Low Channel
Average group
High

1) The module supplies a decimal value of the measured thermal voltage to the CPU –
for example, 27648 at 80 mV (refer to Table 4-11)
2) The module supplies a temperature value to the CPU – for example, 120°C (refer to Table 4-17)
3) 1 digit =0.1 °C; 1 digit =0.1 °F

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-42 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.7.2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

The analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the
module concerned, starting from Section 4.28, for the subset “mastered” by the
specific analog modules.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 4-42 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter Type
Enable
• Diagnostic Yes/no No Dynamic Module
interrupt
Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel
Output
• Output type Deactivated U
Voltage
Current Dynamic Channel
• Output range For the settable measuring ranges of the "10 V
output channels, please refer to the
individual module description.
Response with ASS Outputs de-energized ASS
CPU-STOP LWH Hold last value Dynamic Channel
EWS Apply substitute value

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-43

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.7.3 Parameters of the analog input/output modules

The analog input/output modules make available the parameters in the following
table. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment
in STEP 7.

Table 4-43 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Input
Measurement
• Measuring Deactivated RTD-4L
method U Voltage
R-4L Resistance
(four-conductor connection)
Dynamic Channel
RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear,
four-conductor connection)
• Measuring Range 0 to 10 V Pt 100
10000  climate
Pt 100 climate
• Integration time 20 ms; 16.6 ms 20 ms
Output
• Output type Deactivated U
Voltage Dynamic Channel
• Output range 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-44 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs

Introduction
You can connect different sensors to the analog input modules depending on the
measuring method; voltage and current sensors, and resistors.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the
connection options for sensors described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

To reduce electrical interference, you should use twisted-pair shielded cables for
the analog signals. The shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at
both cable ends.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding
current can flow over the shield, which leads to an interference of the analog
signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.

Isolated analog input modules

In the case of isolated analog input modules, there is no electrical connection
between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of
the CPU.
You must use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference UISO can
occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the
M terminal of the CPU. An equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA
terminal and the M terminal of the CPU ensures that UISO does not exceed the
permitted value.

Non-isolated analog input modules

In the case of the non-isolated analog input modules, you must establish a
connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M
terminal of the CPU or IM 153. To do so, connect the MANA terminal with the M
terminal of the CPU or IM 153. A potential difference between MANA and the M
terminal of the CPU or IM 153 can result in corruption of the analog signal.

Limited potential difference UCM

Only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur
between the measuring lines M– of the input channels and the reference point of
the measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being
exceeded, you must take different actions, described below, depending on the
potential connection of the sensors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-45

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
UCM: Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of
the MANA measuring circuit
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU
I +: Measuring lead for current input
U +: Measuring lead for voltage input

Connecting isolated measuring sensors

Isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (local ground).
They can be operated free of potential.
With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different
sensors. These potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the
local distribution of the sensors.
To prevent the permissible value for UCM being exceeded when used in
environments with a high level of EMC interference, we advise you to connect M–
with MANA.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-46 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

You can operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or
Ungrounded mode.

L+
M

M+
M–
Isolated

Logic
M+ ADC
sensors Backplane
M–
bus
Recommended
connection MANA

CPU

UISO
Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI

L+
M

M+
Isolated M–
Logic

sensors ADC
M+
M– Backplane
bus
Recommended
connection MANA
CPU

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-8 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI

Note
Do not connect M– to MANA when connecting 2-wire transmitters for current
measurement and resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are
not used.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-47

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Non-isolated sensors
The non-isolated sensors are connected with the local ground potential (local
ground). When using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to the local
ground.

Connecting non-isolated sensors

Caused by local conditions or interferences, potential differences UCM (static or
dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed individual measuring points. If
the potential difference UCM exceeds the permissible value, you must provide
equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points.
When connecting non-isolated sensors to optically isolated modules, you can
operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or Ungrounded
mode.

L+
M

M+
Non-isolat M–
ed sensors

Logic
M+ ADC
M– Backplane bus

UCM
MANA

Equipotential CPU
bonding UISO
conductor
Minterna
L+
l
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-9 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-48 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

When connecting non-isolated sensors to non-isolated modules, you can operate

the CPU only in Grounded mode.

L+
M

M+
Non-isolated M–
sensors

Logic
M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus

UCM MANA
CPU

Equipotential Minternal
bonding L+
M
conductor
Ground bus

Figure 4-10 Connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated AI

Note
You must not use non-isolated two-wire transmitters and non-isolated
resistance-type sensors with a non-isolated AI!

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-49

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
U +: Measuring lead for voltage input

Connection of voltage sensors

L+
M

+ M+
U M–
–
Logic

+ M+ ADC
U M– Backplane
– bus

MANA

Figure 4-11 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-50 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.10 Connecting Current Sensors

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
I +: Measuring lead for current input

Supply voltage of the sensors

The 2-wire transmitter receives its short-circuit-proof power supply via the
terminals of the analog input module.
This transmitter then converts the measured variable into a current. Two-wire
transmitters must be isolated sensors.
Four-wire transmitters have separate power supplies.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-51

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Connecting 2-wire transmitters

L+
Sensor,
for example, M
pressure gauge
Two-wire
P transmitter + M+
– M–

Logic
M+ ADC
Two-wire + Backplane
M–
P transmitter – bus

MANA

Figure 4-12 Connecting two-wire transmitters to an isolated AI

When the supply voltage L+ is fed from the module, you must assign parameters
to the two-wire transmitter as a four-wire transmitter in STEP 7.

Sensor,
for example, L+
pressure gauge M

2-wire +
P trans M+
mitter –
Logic
ADC
M– Backplane
bus

MANA

Figure 4-13 Connecting two-wire transmitters supplied from L+ to an

isolated AI

Connecting four-wire transmitters

L+
Sensor, M
for example,
pressure gauge
M+
+
P M–
–
transmitter
Four-wire

Logic

M+ ADC
+
P M– Backplane
–
bus

MANA
L+ M

Figure 4-14 Connecting four-wire transmitters to an isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-52 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
IC+: Constant-current lead (positive)
IC–: Constant-current lead (negative)
M+: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L+: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
S–: Detector lead (negative)

Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

The resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in a four-conductor,
three-conductor or two-conductor connection.
With four-conductor and three-conductor connections, the module supplies a
constant current via terminals IC+ and IC– so that the potential drop occurring on
the measuring cables is compensated. It is important that the connected constant
current cables are directly connected to the resistance thermometer/resistor.
Measurements with four-conductor or three-conductor connections supply a more
precise measuring result due to compensation than measurements with a
two-conductor connection.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-53

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Four-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M+ and
M– terminals. When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable
(connect IC+ and M+ as well as IC– and M– to the resistance thermometer).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC+ and M+ and the
cables IC– and M– are connected directly to the resistance thermometer.

L+
M

M+
M–

Logic
ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-15 Four-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated AI

Three-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a three-conductor connection on modules with four terminals, you must
normally insert a jumper between M– and IC– (refer to Figure 4-16). Take note of
the exception for the SM 331; AI 8 RTD (refer to Figure 4-18).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC+ and M+ are
connected directly to the resistance thermometer.

L+
M

M+
M–
Logic

ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-16 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-54 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Two-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between
M+ and IC+ and between M– and IC– .

L+
M

M+
M–

Logic
ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-17 Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI

Three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8 RTD

With a three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8 RTD you must insert a
jumper between M+ and IC+ (refer to figure4-18).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC– and M– are connected
directly to the resistance thermometer.

L+
M

M+
M–
Logic

ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-18 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x RTD

Caution
! Due to incorrect wiring of the three-conductor connection, unforeseen operation of
the module and dangerous conditions can result in the system.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-55

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.11.1 Connecting resistance thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x 13 bits

Two-conductor connection
With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between
M– and S–.

S–
Backplane

Logic
M+ ADC bus
M–

Figure 4-19 Two-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8x 13 bits

Three-conductor connection

S–
Backplane
Logic

M+ ADC
bus
M–

Figure 4-20 Three-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x 13 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-56 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Four-conductor connection
With a four-conductor connection, you must not connect the fourth conductor
(the conductor is not used at all, see Figure 4-21).

4th conductor S–
not connected Backplane

Logic
M+ ADC
bus
M–

Figure 4-21 Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x 13 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-57

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.12 Connecting Thermocouples

Design of thermocouples
A thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and
connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or
metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends.
There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the
material used – for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all
thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type.

Measuring junction
Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs

Connecting point
Compensating leads

Reference junction

Leads

Point at which thermo-e. m. f. is measured

°C

Figure 4-22 Design of Thermocouples

Principle of Operation of Thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free
ends of the thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo emf, occurs
at the free ends. The magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the
difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature
at the free ends, as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple.
Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends
must be kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine
the temperature of the measuring junction.
The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference
junction by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires consist of
the same material as the thermocouple wires. The supply leads are copper wire.
Note: Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity, otherwise
there will be considerable measuring errors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-58 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Compensation of the reference junction temperature

You can compensate for the effects of temperature fluctuations at the reference
junction by means of compensating leads.
There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference
junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the
difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point.
You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the
reference junction to be.

Table 4-44 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature

Option Explanation
No compensation If you want to acquire only the difference in temperature
between the measuring point and the reference junction.
Internal compensation If you employ internal compensation, the internal
(refer to Figure 4-23 for connection) temperature (thermocouple internal comparison) of the
module is used for comparison purposes.
External compensation with compensating You have already acquired and compensated the
box in the leads of an individual reference junction temperature (thermocouple external
thermocouple (refer to Figures 4-24 and comparison) using a compensating box, which you have
4-25 for its connection) looped into an individual thermocouple.
No further processing is necessary owing to the module.
Only for SM 331; AI 8 x TC: You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a
External compensation with resistance resistance thermometer (platinum or nickel) and have it
thermometer for acquisition of the reference calculated by the module for any thermocouple.
junction temperature
(refer to Figure 4-26 and 4-27for
connection)

Theory of operation of internal compensation

With internal compensation, you can establish the reference point across the
terminals of the analog input modules. In this case, you must run the
compensating lines right up to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor
acquires the temperature of the module and supplies a compensation voltage.
Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.

Theory of operation of external compensation with compensating box

If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of
the thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example.
The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference
junction temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connections for the
ends of the thermocouple’s compensating leads.
If the actual temperature deviates from the compensating temperature, the
temperature-sensitive bridge resistance changes. This results in a positive or
negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermo-e.m.f.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-59

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
IC+: Positive connection of constant current output
IC-: Negative connection of constant current output
COMP+: Compensating terminal (positive)
COMP –: Compensating terminal (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
P5V: Module logic power supply
KV +/KV –: Connections to the shunt comparison

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-60 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Connection of thermocouples with internal compensation

Connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module, either directly or by means
of compensating lines. Each channel group can use a thermocouple type
supported by the analog module independently of the other channel groups.

L+
Thermocouple M

M+
K0 M–

Logic
. ADC
. Backplane
. bus
M+
K7 M–

Compensating leads
(same material as COMP+
thermocouple) COMP–/MANA

Figure 4-23 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an

Isolated AI

Connecting the compensating box

Connect the compensating box to the COMP terminals of the module, locating the
compensating box at the reference junction of the thermocouples. The
compensating box must have an isolated supply. The power supply must have
adequate filtering, for example by means of a grounded shielding winding.
The terminals for connecting the thermocouple to the compensating box are not
required and must therefore be shorted (refer to Figure 4-25 for an example).
The following constraints apply:
• The parameters of a channel group are general valid for all channels of that
group (for example, input voltage, integrating time etc.)
• External compensation with connection of the compensating box to the COMP
terminals of the module can be performed only for one thermocouple type. In
other words, all channels operating with external compensation must use the
same type.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-61

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with compensating box

If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same
comparison point, you compensate as follows:

Copper L+
wire M

M+
M–
Thermo-

Logic
couples M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus
Compensating L+ M
leads (same
material as Comp. COMP+
thermocouple) Box COMP–/MANA
Ref. junction

Figure 4-24 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI

Note
Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0C for
analog input modules.

Recommended compensating box

We recommend you to use a comparison point (with integrated power supply unit)
from Siemens as a compensating box. You will find the necessary ordering data in
the table below.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-62 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Table 4-45 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point

Recommended Compensating Box Order number

Reference junction with integrated power supply M72166-
unit, for rail mounting

Auxiliary power 220 VAC B1

110 VAC B2
24 VAC B3
24 VDC B4

Connection
to thermocouple Fe-CuNi Type L 1
Fe/Cu Ni Type J 2
Ni Cr/Ni Type K 3
Pt 10% Rh/Pt Type S 4
Pt 13% Rh/Pt Type R 5
Cu/Cu Ni Type U 6
Cu/Cu Ni Type T 7

Reference temperature 0 C 00

Connecting to the comparison point (Order No. M72166-xxx00)

If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same
comparison point, you compensate as follows:

Compensating leads Copper L+

(same material as wire M
thermocouple)

M+
M–
Thermoco
Logic

uples M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus
Auxiliary power
+ –
3 1 COMP+
COMP–/MANA
The terminals for the SIEMENS
compensating wire M72166-
must be short-
circuited!
12 11

9 8
+ –

Output (Cu wires)

Figure 4-25 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an
Isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-63

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with temperature compensation to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC
All 8 inputs are available as measurement channels when the thermocouples are
connected via reference junctions that are controlled at 0 °C or 50 °C.

L+
Copper M
wire

M+
K0 M-
.
Reference junction .

Logic
controlled at ADUs Backplane
.
0C or 50C bus
M+
K6 M-
M+
K7 M-

Figure 4-26 Connecting thermocouples via a reference junction to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-64 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with resistance thermometer to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC
With this type of compensation, the reference junction terminal temperature is
determined by a bulb resistor sensor with a temperature range of -25 °C to 85 °C.

Copper L+
wire M

KV+
K0 KV–
Thermo- P5V
couples ADC

KV+

Logic
K7 KV–

Backplane
KV+ bus
Compensating KV–
leads (same Pt 100
material as IC+ M internal
thermocouple) IC–

Ref. junction

Figure 4-27 Connecting thermocouples with external compensation via resistance thermometers to the
SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-65

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to analogo output

Introduction
You can use the analog output modules to supply loads and actuators with current
and voltage.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the
connection options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

For the analog signals, you should use shielded and twisted pair cables. The cables
QV and S+ and M and S–, respectively, are to be twisted together. This reduces the
interference. Ground the screen of the analog cables at both ends of the cables.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding
current, which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog
signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.

Isolated Analog Output Modules

With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU.
You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference UISO can
occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the
M terminal of the CPU. By means of a equipotential bonding conductor between
the MANA terminal and the M terminal of the CPU, make sure that UISO does not
exceed the permitted value.

Non-Isolated Analog Output Modules

With the non-isolated analog output modules, you must establish a connection
between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of
the CPU. Therefore, connect the MANA terminal with the M terminal of the CPU. A
potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the CPU can lead to a
corruption of the analog signal.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-66 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs

Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output

Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a four-conductor and a
two-conductor connection. However, not all analog output modules allow both
types of connection.

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.13 with
its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
QV: Analog output voltage
S +: Detector lead (positive)
S–: Detector lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of analog circuit
RL: Load impedance
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
M: Ground terminal
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-67

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated Module over a

Four-Conductor Connection
A high accuracy at the load can be achieved through the four-conductor
connection. You must therefore connect the sensor leads (S– and S+) directly to
the load. The voltage is thus measured and corrected directly at the load.
Interferences or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the
sensor lead S– and the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential
difference must not exceed the permissible value. If the permissible potential
difference is exceeded, the accuracy of the analog signal is impaired.

L+
M

QV
Logic

DAC S+
Backplane
bus RL
S–

MANA

CPU
UISO

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-28 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four-Conductor Connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-68 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Connecting loads to a voltage output of a non-isolated module via a

two-conductor connection
With a two-conductor connection, the S+ and S– terminals can be left open.
However, you will not achieve the accuracy of a four-conductor connection.
Connect the load to terminals QV and the reference point of the measuring circuit,
MANA.

L+
M

QV

Logic
DAC
Backplane
bus RL

MANA

CPU

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-29 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a Two-Conductor

Connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-69

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.13 with
its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
QI: Analog output current
MANA: Reference potential of analog circuit
RL: Load impedance
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
M: Ground terminal
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU.

Connecting Loads to a Current Output

You must connect loads to QI and the reference point of the analog circuit MANA of
a current output.

L+
M

QI
Logic

DAC
Backplane
bus RL

MANA
CPU
UISO

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-30 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-70 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

L+
M

QI

Logic
DAC
Backplane
bus RL

CPU
MANA

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-31 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO

4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules

Programmable and Non-Programmable Diagnostic Messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and
non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled
diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the
“Diagnostics” parameter field in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7).
Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the analog
module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
• The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the analog module and
forwarded to the CPU.
• The error LED on the analog module lights.
• If you have programmed “Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” with STEP 7, a
diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called (refer to Section 4.17).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-71

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user
program (refer to the Appendix “Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules”).
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to
online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules

Every analog input module supplies the measured value 7FFFH irrespective of the
parameter assignment when an error is detected. This measured value means
either Overflow, Malfunction or a channel is disabled.

Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

Every analog module indicates errors for you by means of your SF LED (group
error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the
analog module. It goes out when all errors have been rectified.

Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input
modules.

Table 4-46 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules

Diagnostics Message LED Diagnostics Parameters can

Effective for be assigned
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module No
Configuring/parameter assignment SF
Channel Yes
error
Common-mode error SF Channel Yes
Wire-break SF Channel Yes
Underflow SF Channel Yes
Overflow SF Channel Yes

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-72 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Diagnostic messages of the analog output modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog
output modules.

Table 4-47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules

Diagnostics Message LED Diagnostics Ef- Parameters can

fective for be assigned
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module No
Configuring/parameter assignment SF
Channel Yes
error
Short-circuit to M SF Channel Yes
Wire-break SF Channel Yes

Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly
in STEP 7.

Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog input modules

Table 4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and
Remedial Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
External load voltage Load voltage L+ of module missing Feed supply L+
missing
Configuring/parameter Illegal parameters transferred to Check measuring range module
assignment error module
Reassign module parameter
Common-mode error Potential difference UCM between Connect M– with MANA
the inputs (M–) and reference
potential of measuring circuit (MANA)
too high
Wire-break Resistance too high in the sensor Use different type of sensor or
connection connection, e.g. use conductors with a
larger cross-sectional core area
Open circuit between module and Close circuit
sensor
Channel not connected (open) Disable channel group (“measuring
procedure” parameter
Connect channel

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-73

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and
Remedial Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Underflow Input value underflows underrange,
error may be caused:
Wrong measuring range selected
Configure other measuring range
With the measuring ranges 4 to Check terminals
20 mA and 1 to 5 V, if necessary by
polarity reversal of sensor
connection
Overflow Input value overflows overrange Configure other measuring range

Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog output modules

Table 4-49 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors and
Remedial Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
External load voltage Load voltage L+ of module Feed supply L+
missing missing
Configuring/parameter Illegal parameters transferred to Reassign module parameter
assignment error module

Short-circuit after M Overload of output Eliminate overload

Short-circuit of output QV after Eliminate short circuit
MANA
Wire-break Actuator resistance too high Use different type of actuator or connection,
e.g. use conductors with a larger
cross-sectional core area
Open circuit between module Close circuit
and actuator
Channel not used (open) Disable channel group (”output type”
parameter)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-74 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules

Introduction
In this Section, the interrupt behavior of the analog modules is described. The
following interrupts exist:
• Diagnostic interrupt
• Hardware interrupt
Note that not all analog modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable
of a subset of the interrupts described here Refer to the technical specifications of
the modules, starting at Section 4.18, to determine which analog modules have
interrupt capability.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in
STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the
diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Hardware interrupt with trigger “Upper or lower limit exceeded”

Define a working range by setting parameters for an upper and lower limit value. If
the process signal (for example, the temperature) leaves this working range, the
module triggers a hardware interrupt, provided the interrupt is enabled.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the hardware
interrupt block (OB 40).
In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable logic controller
is required to react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached.
When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-75

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Note
Note that a hardware interrupt is not triggered if you have set the upper limit above
the overrange or the lower limit below the underrange.

Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40

The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start
information of OB 40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The following figure shows
the assignment to the bits of local data double word 8.

LB 8 LB 9 LB 11
.1 .0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 17 16 1 0 Bit no.
1 1 1 1 LD 8

Value falls below lower limit in channel 0

Value falls below lower limit in channel 1
Value exceeds upper limit in channel 0
Value exceeds upper limit in channel 1

Figure 4-32 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the
Limit Value

Hardware interrupt upon trigger “Reached end of scan cycle”

By parameterizing the hardware interrupt a the end of the scan cycle, you have the
option of synchronizing a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module.
A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all enabled
channels of the analog input module. The module processes the channels one
after the other. After all the measured values have been converted, the module of
the CPU reports by means of an interrupt that there are new measured values on
all channels.
You can use the interrupt to load the currently converted analog values.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-76 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits;

(6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8x 16 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 8 inputs in 4 channel groups
• Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
• Measurement mode selectable per channel group:
– Voltage
– Current
• Arbitrary measuring range and filter/update rate selection per channel group
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Two channels with limit monitoring
• Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
• Isolated against the backplane bus interface
• Permissible common mode voltage between channels of 50 VDC maximum

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-77

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

1 21

2 22

A 250 OHM + CHO

3 23 –
Fault indicator – red
24
4
250 OHM
V
+ CH1
5 25 –
SF
ADC
6 26

250 OHM
V
+ CH2
7 27 –

Isolation 28
8
250 OHM Back- V
+ CH3
9 29 –
plane
10
bus 30
interface
11 module 31

12 SF 32

250 OHM
V
+ CH4
13 33 –
34
14
250 OHM
V
+ CH5
15 35 –
ADC 36
16
250 OHM
V
+ CH6
17 37 –
38
18
250 OHM V + CH7
19 39 –
20 40

Figure 4-33 Module view and block diagram of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Please note that in Figure 4-33, channel 0 is configured for current measurement
and channel 7 for voltage measurement.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-78 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Wiring of the module for measuring current

Current measurements are made by paralleling a channel’s voltage input terminals
with its respective current sense resistor. This is accomplished by jumpering the
channels input terminals to the adjacent terminals on the field connector.
Example: To configure channel 0 for current mode, you must jumper terminal 22 to
2 and terminal 23 to 3.
The channel being configured for current measurements must be paired with the
sense resistor connected to the channel’s adjacent terminals in order to achieve
the specified accuracy.

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Integration time/conversion
Weight Approx. 272 g time/ resolution (per channel)

Data for Specific Module • Parameters can be Yes

assigned
Supports clocked operation No

Number of inputs 8
• Integration time in 10 16.7 20 100
milliseconds
Length of cable
• Shielded max. 200 m
• Basic conversion time 35 55 65 305
per channel group
Voltages, Currents, Potentials when more than one
Isolation
channel group is
active
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus • Channel conversion 10 16.7 20 100
time per channel
Permitted potential difference group if only channel
• Between the inputs 50 VDC, 35 VAC group 0 or 1 is
(ECM) enabled
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC Channel integration time 10 16.7 20 100
Minternal (UISO) (1/f1)
in ms
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
• Resolution including 15 bits + sign
Current consumption sign
• From the backplane bus max. 130 mA
• Suppression of 100 60 50 10
Power dissipation of the typically 0.6 W interference voltage for
module interference frequency f1
in Hertz

Basic execution time of the 140 220 260 1220

module, in ms (all channels
enabled)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-79

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Noise suppression for f = n (f1 ± 1%), Interrupts

(f1 = interference frequency); n= 1, 2, ... • Hardware interrupt when Programmable
limit has been exceeded channels 0 and 2
• Common-mode noise > 100 dB
(Ucm < 50 V) • Diagnostic interrupt Programmable

• Series-mode > 90 dB Diagnostic functions Programmable

interference (peak • Group error display Red LED (SF)
value of interference • Diagnostics information Possible
< rated value of input read-out
range)
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB
Input range (rated values)/Input resistance
Operational limit (over entire UCM = 0 / UCM = ±50 V
• Voltage ±5V / 2MΩ
temperature range, referred
to input range) 1 to 5 V / 2MΩ
± 10 V / 2MΩ
• Voltage input ±0.1% / ± 0.7%
• Current 0 to 20 mA; / 250 Ω
• Current input ±0.3% / ± 0.9%
± 20 mA / 250 Ω
Basic error (operational limit at 25° C referred to input 4 to 20 mA: / 250 Ω
range)
Maximum input voltage for max. 50 V continuous
• Voltage input ±0.05% voltage input (destruction
limit)
• Current input ±0.05%
Maximum input current for max. 32 mA
Temperature error (with ±0.005%/K current input (destruction
reference to the input range) limit)
Linearity error (with reference ±0.03% Connection of the sensor
to the input range)
• For measuring voltage Possible
Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.025%
steady state at 25°C, referred • For measuring current
to the input range)
As two-wire transmitter Possible with separate
supply for the transmitter

As four-wire transmitter Possible

• Load of the two-wire max. 820 Ω

transmitter

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-80 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.18.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-50 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
• Hardware interrupt Yes/no No
upon limit violation

Trigger for hardware Constraint possible due to measuring

interrupt range.
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic
Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
• With wire-break Yes/no No
check
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter)
Channel
• Measuring Range Refer to Section 4.18.2 for the "10 V Dynamic
group
measuring ranges of the input
channels that you can set.
• Interference 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 50 Hz
Suppression

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-81

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits are arranged in four groups of two. You
can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Table 4-51 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

High Speed Update Mode

In the high speed update mode, updates for the two channels in the group occur
three times faster than with multiple channel groups enabled.
Example: If channels 0 and 1 are enabled with 2.5 ms filtering, data updates for
both channels will be available to the PLC every 10 msec. (For other filter settings,
the filter setting equals the update rate.)
The high speed update mode is only available when both channels are enabled on
channel group 0 or 1, in other words, the “measuring method” parameter is set.
However, only channel group 0 or only channel 1 (in other words, not both
together) must be enabled.

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note,
however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel
group in each case – in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-82 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.18.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 8 x 16 bits

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
• Voltage measurement
• Current measurement
You perform the setting with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
Set the “measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group
generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these
inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
• Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used
input of the same channel group.
• Current measurement 4 to 20 mA: Connect the unused input in series with an
input of the same channel group. Ensure that a current sense resistor is
connected for each active and unused channel.
• Other ranges: Short the positive to the negative input of the channel.

Measuring ranges
The measuring ranges are set with the “measuring range” parameter in STEP 7.

Table 4-52 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Method Selected Measuring Range Description

U: Voltage ±5 V You will find the digitized analog values in
1 to 5 V Section 4.3.1 in the voltage measuring
±10 V range
4DMU: Current (4-wire from 0 to 20 mA You will find the digitized analog values in
transmitter) ±20 mA Section 4.3.1 in the current measuring
from 4 to 20 mA range

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-83

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are “voltage” for the measuring method “ and
" 10 V” for the measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits in
STEP 7.

Measuring errors with common-mode voltages

The SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits can make measurements in the presence of AC or DC
common mode voltage.
For AC common mode voltages at multiples of the filter frequency setting, the
suppression of interference is accomplished by the integration period of the A/D
converter and by the common mode suppression of the input amplifiers. For AC
common mode voltages < 35 VRMS, the suppression ratio of > 100 dB results in
negligible measurement error.
For DC common mode voltages, only the interference suppression of the input
amplifier stage is available to minimize the effect of the common mode voltage.
Therefore, some accuracy degradation occurs in proportion to the common mode
voltage. The worst case error occurs with 50 VDC between one channel and the
other seven channels. The calculated worst case error is 0.7 % at 0 to 60 °C, and
measured error is typically ≤ 0.1% at 25 °C.

Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values

The parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the
SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits from the range of values contained in Table 4-50.
The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating
the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some
cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or
overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and
can vary between the lower limits shown in the table below and the value 32511
(7EFF H).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-84 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit
values shown in the table below.

Table 4-53 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Measuring Range Minimum Possible Minimum Possible

Upper Limit Value Lower Limit Value
±10 V 11.368 V –11.369 V
31430 –31433
7AC6H 8537H
±5 V 5.684 V –5.684 V
31430 –31430
7AC6H 853AH
1 to 5 V 5.684 V 0.296 V
32376 –4864
7E78H ED00H
0 to 20 mA 22.737 mA –3.519 mA
31432 –4864
7AC8H ED00H
4 to 20 mA 22.737 mA 1.185 mA
32378 –4864
7E7AH ED00H
±20 mA 22.737 mA –22.737 mA
31432 –31432
7AC8H 8538H

Wire-Break Check
The wire-break check is available for the 1 to 5 V voltage range and the 4 to 20 mA
current range.
The following applies to both measuring ranges:
Enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters a wire-break in the
diagnosis if a current falls below 3.6 mA (0.9 V).
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts during configuration, the module
additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only
indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user
program.
With a disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module
triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-85

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.19 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

(6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0

Characteristics
The isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits has the following
characteristic features:
• 8 isolated inputs in 4 channel groups
• Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign
• Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
• Measuring method selectable per channel group
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• 8 channels with limit monitoring
• Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
• Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
• Electrical isolation to the backplane bus interface

Special feature
When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits in the distributed peripheral ET 200M,
you must have one of the following IM 153-x:
• IM 153-1 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
• IM 153-2 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
• IM 153-2 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-86 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Fault indicator – red

1 21 L+
2 L M 22
SF Channel 0 M0+
3 23
M4+

Channel 4
4 24
A V DC V A
5
250 
to 25
250 
6
DC 26
M0– M4–
Channel 1 M1+ 7 27 M5+

Channel 5
8 28
A V V A
9 29
250  250 
ADC ADC
10 30
M1– M5–
Channel 2 M2+ M6+
11 31
ADC ADC Channel 6
12 32
A V V A
13 33
250  250 
14 34
M2– Interface M6–
Channel 3 M3+ module M7+
15 logic 35
and Channel 7
16 back- 36
A V plane V A
17 bus 37
250  250 
18 38
M3– SF M7–

19 39

20 40 M

Figure 4-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-87

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Dimensions and Weight Smoothing of the measured None / low/

values average/ high
Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117
(in millimeters) Basic execution time of the 190/166/144//46
module, in ms
Weight Approx. 272 g (8-channel-mode)
Data for Specific Module
Basic execution time of the 101)
Supports clocked No module, in ms
operation (4-channel-mode)

Number of inputs 8 Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

Length of cable Interference suppression for

F = n x (f1 ± 1%) (f1 = interference frequency, n = 1, 2,
• Shielded max. 200 m ...)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
• Common-mode > 100 dB
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC interference (Ucm < AC 60
electronics L+ V)

• Reverse polarity protection Yes • Series-mode interference >90 dB 3)

(peak value of interference
Isolation < rated value of input
range)
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB
• Between channels and Yes Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
power supply of the reference to the input range)
electronics
• Input voltage $0.1%
• Between the channels Yes
In groups of 2
• Input current $0.1%

Basic error (operational limit at 25 °C, referred to input

Permitted potential difference
range)
• Between the inputs (ECM) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
• Voltage input $0.05%
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
• Current input $0.05%
Minternal (UISO)
Temperature error (with $0.005%/K
Insulation tested with 500 VAC
reference to the input range)
Current consumption
Linearity error (with reference to $0.01%
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA the input range)

• From the power supply L+ max. 200 mA Repeatability (in steady state at $0.01%
25 °C, referred to the input
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.0 W range)
Analog value generation Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Measuring principle Integrating Interrupts
Integration time/conversion • Hardware interrupt if the Programmable
time/ resolution (per channel) limit value is exceeded channels 0 – 7
• Parameters can be Yes • Hardware interrupt at end Parameters can be
assigned of cycle assigned
• Basic conversion time in 95/83/72/23 • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
ms (8-channel mode) assigned
• Basic conversion time in 101) Diagnostic functions Parameters can be
ms (4-channel mode) assigned
• Resolution including sign 16 bits • Group error display Red LED (SF)
• Noise suppression for All2)/50/60/400 • Diagnostics information Possible
frequency f1 read-out
in Hz

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-88 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Data for selecting a sensor • For measuring voltage Possible

Input range (rated values) / • For measuring current
input resistance
As two-wire transmitter Possible with separate
• Voltage $ 5 V / 2 MΩ supply for the
1 to 5 V / 2 MΩ transmitter
$ 10 V / 2 MΩ
As four-wire transmitter Possible
• Current 0 to 20 mA / 250 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 250 Ω 1)
$20 mA / 250 Ω Interference frequency for 4-channel mode is “All”
2) Interference frequencies 50/60/400 Hz are designated as
Maximum input voltage for 35 VDC continuous; “All”
voltage input 75 VDC for max. 1 s 3) Series-mode rejection for
(destruction limit) (duty factor 1:20) 8-channel mode is reduced as follows:
Maximum input current for 40 mA 50 Hz > 70 dB
current input 60 Hz > 70 dB
(destruction limit) 400 Hz > 80 dB
50/60/400 Hz > 90 dB
Connection of the sensor

4.19.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

The mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits is set with STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for parameterizing the SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits, in section 4.7.

Parameterization restrictions when using the analog input module SM 331;

AI 8 x 16 bits with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 16 bits in an
ET200M PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7
master, certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do
not support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these
functions are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt
enable, hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other
parameters are permitted.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-89

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-54 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

settings meter Type
Enable
• Hardware interrupt if Yes/no No Dynamic
the limit value is
exceeded
Module
• Hardware interrupt at Yes/no No Dynamic
end of cycle Yes/no
• Diagnostic interrupt No Dynamic
Hardware interrupt trigger
• Upper limit 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit –32512 to 32511 – Dynamic Channel
Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel
• Wire-Break Check Yes/no No Channel
Measurement
• Module mode • 8 channels Yes Dynamic Module
• 4 channels No
• Interference 50 Hz Channel
Suppression 60 Hz group
400 Hz
50/60/400 Hz 50/60/400 Hz
• Smoothing • None None Dynamic Channel
• Low group
• Average
• High
• Measuring Method • Measuring Dynamic Channel
Range: group
Deactivated
Voltage • $5V $ 10 V
• 1 to 5 V
• $ 10 V
Current (4-wire • 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
transmitter) • 4 to 20 mA
• $ 20 mA

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-90 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits are arranged in groups of two inputs
each. You must assign the same parameters to both the inputs in a group. The
interrupt limits are the exception here.
Table 4-55 shows which channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits are configured as a channel group. To set the parameters by means
of SFC in the user program, you need the numbers of the channel groups. Detailed
information on this can be found in Appendix A.

Table 4-55 Assignment of the channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits to channel groups

Channels ... ... form one channel group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Operating states
The following modes are available for the isolated analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits:
• 8 channels
• 4 channels

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-91

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.19.2 8-channel mode

Description of the module cycle

In 8-channel mode, the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
switches between the two channels in each group. As the module contains four
analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs simultaneously convert for
channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been converted,
all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1, 3, 5 and 7
(see Figure 4-35).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4-35 8-channel mode cycle

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-92 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In the 8-channel mode of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, the channel conversion time
depends on the selected interference frequency. When you set an interference
frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including communication time is
76 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion
time is 65 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel
conversion time is reduced to 16 ms. When you set an interference frequency of
50, 60 and 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is 88 ms. The module must then
be switched over to the other channel of the group by means of opto-MOS relays.
Opto-MOS relays need 7 ms to switch and settle. Table 4-56 shows the scan times
of the module at certain interference frequencies.

Table 4-56 Scan times in 8-channel mode

Interference frequency Channel scan time Module scan time

(Hz) (ms) (All channels)
50 83 166
60 72 144
400 23 46
400/60/50 95 190

4.19.3 4-channel mode

Description of the module cycle

In 4-channel mode, the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits does not switch over between the
channels of the individual groups. As the module contains four analog/digital
converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4
and 6.

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 4-36 4-channel mode cycle

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-93

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In 4-channel mode, the channel conversion time including communication time of
the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits is 10 ms. As the module does not switch over between
the channels in a group, the channel scan time and the module
scan time are the same: 10 ms.

4.19.4 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 8 x16 bits

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
• Voltage measurement
• Current measurement (4-wire transmitter)
You perform the setting with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
Set the “measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group
generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these
inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
• Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used
input of the same channel group.
• Current measurement, 4 to 20 mA: Connect the unused input in series with
an input of the same channel group. Ensure that a current sense resistor is
connected for each active and unused channel.
• Other ranges: Short the positive to the negative input of the channel.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-94 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Wire–break check
The wire-break check is a module software function that is available for all the
voltage ranges and the current range of 4 to 20 mA.
• With the ± 5 V, 1 to 5 V or ± 10 V measuring ranges and an enabled wire-break
check, the isolated analog input module enters a wire-break in the diagnosis
when the process value achieves a positive full-scale deflection (32768). If you
enabled the diagnostic interrupt during configuration, the analog input module
also triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If the diagnostic interrupt has not been enabled, the illuminated SF display is
the only indication that there is a wire-break. You must then analyze the
diagnosis bytes in the user program.
• With a measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and an enabled wire-break check, the
isolated analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when the
process value falls below 3.6 mA. If you enabled the diagnostic interrupt during
configuration, the analog input module also triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If the diagnostic interrupt has not been enabled, the illuminated SF display is
the only indication that there is a wire-break. You must then assess the
diagnosis bytes in the user program.
• If the wire-break check is not enabled, the isolated analog input module triggers
a diagnostic interrupt if the limit value for underflow is not reached.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the “measuring range” parameter
in STEP 7.

Table 4-57 Measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Method Selected Output Range Description

Voltage "5V You will find the digital
From 1 to 5 V analog values from
" 10 V Section 4.3.1 in the voltage
and current output ranges
Current (4-wire transmitter) From 0 to 20 mA
From 4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-95

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Short circuit to M or L
If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage.
The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Overflow, underflow and hardware interrupt limits

The diagnosis operating limits for overflow and underflow for some of the
measuring ranges differ from those given in section 4.3.1 of the manual. In some
cases, numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process
variables prevent values up to 32511 being signaled.
Hardware interrupt limits must not be set to values greater than the smallest
possible limit value of the overflow or underflow operating limits for the
end-of-scan-cycle interrupt in section 4.3.1.

End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with
the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all
the enabled channels is complete.

Table 4-58 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware
interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
additional information
Special 2 bits per channel to identify the range
analog
Upper limit exceeded
markers 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
in channel
Lower limit exceeded
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
in channel
End-of-scan-cycle 2
X
event
Unassigned bit 3

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-96 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.20 Analog input module

SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; synchronous;
(6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7HF00-0AB0 resp.
6ES7331-7HF01-0AB0

Characteristics
The SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed has the following features:
• 8 inputs in 4 channel groups
• Measured-value resolution: 13 bits + sign
• Measuring method selectable per channel group:
– Voltage
– Current
• Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group
• Programmable hardware interrupt
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Two channels with limit monitoring
• Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
• Supports clocked operation
• Isolated against the backplane bus interface
• Isolated against the load voltage (not for 2-wire transducers)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-97

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bit High Speed

Voltage measurement
Group error display – red
Current measurement

1 L+
SF Multiplexer Meas. range
24V
M0+
2
module M0* CH0
3
4 M1+
5 M1* CH1
Internal
6 M2+
supply
7 M2* CH2
8 M3+
9 M3– CH3
10 Mana

11 Mana
ADC 12 M4+
13 M4* CH4
Isolation 14 M5+
15 M5* CH5
16 M6+
Backplane SF 17 M6* CH6
bus M7+
18
interface
19 M7* CH7
2 M
0

Figure 4-37 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-98 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bit High Speed

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Instantaneous value
(in millimeters) conversion
Weight Approx. 230 g Integration time/conversion
time/ resolution (per
Data for Specific Module channel)
Supports clocked operation Yes • Parameters can be Yes
Number of inputs 8 assigned

Length of cable • Basic conversion time 52
s

per channel
• Shielded max. 200 m
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
• Resolution (incl. 14 bits
overrange)
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC
electronics L +
• Noise suppression for None 400 60 50
frequency f1 in Hz
• Reverse polarity Yes • Basic execution time of 0.42 ms
protection the module
Power supply of the (independent of the
transmitters number of released
channels)
• Supply current max. 30 mA (per channel)
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error
• Short-circuit-proof Yes
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %),
Isolation (f1 = interference frequency) n=1.2...
• Between channels and Yes • Common-mode > 80 dB
backplane bus interference
(UCM < 11 VSS)
• Between the channels No
• Series-mode > 40 dB
• Between channels and Yes
interference(peak value
power supply of the
of interference < rated
electronics
value of input range)
Permitted potential
Crosstalk between the > 65 dB
difference VDC 11/VAC 8 V inputs
• Between inputs and
MANA (UCM) Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the input range)
– At signal = 0 V
– Not for 2-wire • Voltage input "1V " 0.3 %
transmitter " 5V " 0.4 %
• Between the inputs VDC 11/VAC 8 V " 10 V " 0.3 %
(ECM)
1 to 5 V; " 0.4 %
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Minternal (UISO) • Current input " 20 mA " 0.3 %

Insulation tested with 0 to 20 mA; " 0.3 %

• Channels against back 500 VDC 4 to 20 mA: " 0.3 %
plane bus and load
voltage L +
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
• From load voltage L + max. 50 mA
(without 2–wire
transducer)
Power dissipation of the typ. 1.5 W
module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-99

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input Data for Selecting a Sensor
range)
Input range (rated
• Voltage input "1V " 0.2 % values)/Input resistance
"5V " 0.25 % • Voltage "1 V /10 MΩ
" 10 V " 0.2 % "5V /100 kΩ
" 10 V /100 kΩ
1 to 5 V; " 0.25 %
1 to 5 V; /100 kΩ
• Current input " 20 mA " 0.2 %
• Current " 20 mA /50 Ω
0 to 20 mA; " 0.2 %
0 to 20 mA; /50 Ω
4 to 20 mA: " 0.2 % 4 to 20 mA: /50 Ω
Temperature error (with " 0.004 %/K Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
reference to the input range) voltage input (destruction 75 V for max. 1 s
Linearity error (with " 0.03% limit) (duty factor 1:20)
reference to the input range) Maximum input current for 40 mA
Repeat accuracy (in the " 0.1 % current input (destruction
steady state at 25 C, limit)
referred to the input range) Connection of the sensor
Status, interrupts, diagnostics • For measuring voltage Possible
Interrupts • For measuring current
• Hardware interrupt Parameters can be Possible
• Diagnostic interrupt assigned As two-wire transmitter
Parameters can be Possible
assigned As four-wire transmitter
Diagnostic functions • Load of the 2–wire max. 820 Ω
• Group error display Red LED (SF) measurement
• Diagnostics information Possible transducer
read-out (at L+ = DC 24 V)
Characteristic linearization None

4.20.1 Synchronicity

Characteristics
Reproducible (i.e. same length) reaction times are achieved with the SIMATIC with
an equidistant DP bus cycle and the synchronization of the following free running
single cycles:
• Free running of the user program. The length of the cycle time can vary due to
acyclic program branching.
• Free running, variable DP cycle at the PROFIBUS subnetwork
• Free running cycle at the DP slave backplane bus.
• Free running cycle during the signal processing and conversion in the electronic
modules of the DP slave.
In the case of equidistance the DP cycle runs in phase and with the same length.
In this cycle the processing levels of a CPU (OB 61 to OB 64) and the
synchronous peripheral are synchronized. The I/O data are therefore transferred at
defined and consistent time intervals (clock synchronicity).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-100 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Requirements
• The DP-Master and DP-Slave must support the synchronicity. They require
STEP 7 from Version 5.2.

Module filtering mode: Synchronicity

In synchronous operation the following conditions apply:

Standard Mode
Filter and processing time TWE between reading the current value max. 625
s
and loading it into the transfer buffer
(the specified value for TWE applies, independent of the activation of
the diagnosis)
including an input delay time of 10
s
TDPmin 3.5 ms
Diagnostic interrupt max. 4 x TDP

Fast Mode (only possible with 6ES7331-7HF01-0AB0)

Filter and processing time TWE between reading in the current value max. 625
s
and allocation in the transfer buffer
(diagnosis not selectable)
including an input delay time of 10
s
TDPmin 1 ms

Note
By using “Fast Mode” the cycle of the DP system can be accelerated. However,
this is at the expense of the diagnosis: The diagnosis is switched off in this
operating mode.

Together with the calculation and transfer times required on the IM 153, the
specified value for TWE results in the minimum settable value of HW Config of
875
s for Ti.
The specified value for TDPmin is dependent on the extent of extension of the DP
slave/IM 153: If there are a number of different plugged in modules, the slowest
module determines the time TDPmin.

Note
In “Synchronous” mode, independent of the parameterization made in STEP 7, the
module always sets itself to “Integration time: no /parasitic frequency”. The
“hardware interrupt” functionality is not possible in “Synchronous” mode.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-101

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Calculation of the filter and processing time

Independent of the number parameterized channels, the same time conditions are
always valid. The time related to the clock signal for the reading of a specific
channel is calculated according to the formula:
TWE_CH = (Channel number +1) x 52
s + tv; tv = 119 to 209
s

TWE

A/D conversion internal processing (tv)

CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0

52
s 52
s 52
s 52
s 52
s 52
s 52
s 52
s 209
s

Figure 4-38 Calculation of the filter and processing time

Explanation of the mode of operation in synchronous operation

The module begins with the A/D conversion of channel 7 and saves this result
internally. Then channels 6...0 are converted sequentially at intervals of 52
s in
the same way. After a further internal processing time the result becomes available
to all converted channels at the backplane bus for collection by the CPU.

Further information
Further information on synchronicity can be found in the Online help of STEP 7, in
the manualLocal peripheral system ET 200M and in the manual Synchronicity.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-102 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.20.2 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed by means
of measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Meas. range module

If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the
measuring method and the measuring range. You must then switch the 24 V
supply off and on at the front connector. The steps you have to perform to do this
are described in detail in the reference manual, Section 4.4.
The corresponding table in the reference manual, Section 4.20.3, tells you which
assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range.
In addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module.

Default settings for measuring range module

The measuring range modules are preset to “B” (voltage; " 10 V) when the
module is supplied.
To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only
have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting.
Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary.

Table 4-59 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed using Measuring
Range Modules

Measuring Range Measuring Method Measuring Range

Module Setting
A Voltage " 1 V*
B Voltage " 10 V
C Current, 4 to 20 mA
Four-wire transmitter
D Current, 4 to 20 mA
Two-wire transmitter

* You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in the reference manual, section 4.7.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-103

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-60 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No
Dynamic Module
• Hardware interrupt Yes/no No
upon limit violation
Fast Mode (only settable Yes/no No Static Module
if the 331-7HF01 was
registered in
synchronous operation
in the properties of the
DP slave)
Trigger for hardware Constraint possible due to measuring
interrupt range.
Dynamic Channel
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 –
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511
Diagnostics Channel
Static
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No group
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated
U Voltage U
Channel or
4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter)
Dynamic Channel
2DMU Current (2-wire transmitter) group
• Measuring Range Refer to the reference manual, section "10 V
4.20.3, for the measuring ranges of the
input channels that you can set.
• Interference none; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
Suppression

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed are arranged in four
groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
Die SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed has a measuring range module for each
channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-104 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Table 4-61 Assignment of the channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed to
channel groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note,
however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel
group in each case – in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-47 in the reference manual.

4.20.3 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
• Voltage measurement
• Current measurement
You perform the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module
and with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way,
you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the
“measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-105

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges

Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group
generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these
inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
• Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used
input of the same channel group.
• Current measurement, 2-wire transmitter:
There are two ways to use the channels:
a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this
channel group. Otherwise, if diagnostics are enabled, the analog module
triggers a single diagnostic interrupt and the SF LED of the analog module
comes on.
b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 kW. You may then
enable diagnostics for this channel group.
• Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, 4-wire transmitter: Connect the unused
input in series with an input of the same channel group.

Measuring ranges
You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range
modules on the module and with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Table 4-62 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed

Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description

(Type of Sensor) Module Setting
U: Voltage "1V A You will find the digitized
"5V B analog values in the
reference manual, section
1 to 5 V 4.3.1, in the voltage
" 10 V measuring range
4DMU: Current (4-wire 0 to 20 mA C
transmitter) You will find the digitized
4 to 20 mA analog values in the
" 20 mA reference manual, section
4.3.1, in the current
2DMU: Current (2-wire 4 to 20 mA D
measuring range
transmitter)

Default Settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the “voltage” measuring method
and the "”10 V” measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331;
AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed with STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-106 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring

range
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break
check, the analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when a current
falls below 3.6 mA.
If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module
additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only
indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user
program.
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break
check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt
when the underflow is reached.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-107

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.21 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits;

(6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 8 inputs
• Measured-value resolution 12 bits + sign
• Measuring method selectable:
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistors
– Bulb resistor
• Isolated against the backplane bus interface

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-108 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

The following figure shows some examples of connections for the different types of
measurements on channels 4 to 7. Basically, these connection examples apply to
all channels (channel 0 to 7).

Connection example

1 Multiplexer 21
U+ U+
2 22
0 0 I+ I+
3 23
1 1 S– S–
Ch 0 V Ch 4
2 2 M+ 4 24 M+
5 25
3 3 M– M–
4 4 6 26
U+ U+
5 5 7 27
I+ I+
6 6 8
Logic Electrical 28
S– S–
7 7 Ch 1 and isolation Ch 5
9
M+ back- 29 M+ A
M– 10 plane ADC 30
M–
11 bus 31
U+ ac- U+
I+ 12 32
0 0 tiva- I+
1 1
S– 13 tion 33 S–
Ch 2 Ch 6
2 2 M+ 14 34
M+
Current mV
3 3 35
M– 15 M–
4 4 source
16 36
U+ U+
5 5

6 6
I+ 17 37 I+
18 38
7 7 S– S–
Ch 3 + 5 V from Ch 7
M+ 19 39
backplane bus M+
M– 20 40
Internal supply M–

Channel
number

Figure 4-39 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13
bits

Note
When connecting the voltage and current sensors, make sure that you do not
exceed the maximum permitted common-mode voltage UCM of 2 V between the
inputs. So to prevent measuring errors, interconnect the individual M– terminals.
It is not necessary to interconnect the M– terminals when measuring resistors and
resistance temperature detectors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-109

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Integration time/resolution
Weight Approx. 250 g (per channel)
Data for Specific Module • Programmable Yes
Supports clocked No • Noise suppression 50 60
operation for frequency f1 in Hz
Number of inputs 8 • Integration time in 60 50
• For resistance-type 8 milliseconds
sensor
• Basic conversion 66 55
Length of cable time including
Integration time in
• Shielded max. 200 m
milliseconds
max. 50 m at 50 mV
Additional conversion 66 55
Voltages, Currents, Potentials time for measuring
Constant current for resistance, in ms
resistance-type sensor • Resolution in bits (incl. 13 bits 13 bits
Overrange
• Resistance ther- 0.83 mA
mometer and Suppression of interference, Limits of Error
resistance meas-
urement 0 ... 600 Ω Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %),
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2
• Resistance meas- 0.25 mA
urement 0 ... 6 kΩ • Common-mode > 86 dB
interference
Isolation (UCM < 2 V)
• Between channels and Yes • Series-mode noise > 40 dB
backplane bus (peak value of
noise < nominal
• Between the channels No
value of input
Permitted potential range)
difference
Crosstalk between the > 50 dB
• Between the inputs 2.0 VDC inputs
(ECM)

• Between the inputs 75 VDC / 60 VAC

and Minternal (UISO)

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Current consumption
• From the backplane max. 90 mA
bus

Power dissipation of the typ. 0.4 W

module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-110 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with Temperature error (with " 0.006 %/K / 0.006 K/K
reference to the input range) reference to the input
range)
• Voltage input " 5 " 0.6 %
V " 10 V Linearity error (with " 0.1 % / 0.1 K
1 to 5 V reference to the input
0 to 10 V range)

" 50 mV " 0.5 % Repeat accuracy (in the " 0.1 % / " 0.1 K
" 500 mV steady state at 25 C,
"1 V referred to the input range)

• Current input " 20 mA " 0.5 % Status, interrupts, diagnostics

0 to 20 mA Interrupts None
4 to 20 mA
Diagnostic functions None
• Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ " 0.5 %
0 to 600 Ω " 0.5 % Data for Selecting a Sensor

• Resistance Pt 100 " 1.2 K Input range (rated

thermometer Ni 100 values)/Input resistance
Standard
• Voltage " 50 mV 100 kΩ
Pt 100 "1K " 500 mV
Ni 100 "1 V
Climate
"5V
Ni 1000, LG-Ni " 1 K " 10 V
1000 Standard
1 to 5 V;
Ni 1000 "1K 0 to 10 V
LG-Ni 1000
Climate • Current " 20 mA 50 Ω
0 to 20 mA;
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input
range) 4 to 20 mA:

• Voltage input " 5 " 0.4 % • Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ 100 MΩ

V " 10 V 0 to 600 Ω
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V • Resistance Pt 100 100 MΩ
thermometer Ni 100
" 50 mV " 0.3 % Ni 1000
" 500 mV "1 LG-Ni 1000
V Standard /
Climate
• Current input " 20 mA " 0.3 %
0 to 20 mA Maximum input voltage for max. 30 V continuous
4 to 20 mA voltage input U+
(destruction limit)
• Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ " 0.3 %
0 to 600 Ω " 0.3 % Maximum input voltage for max. 12 V continuous;
voltage inputs M+, M-, S– 30 V for max. 1 s
• Resistance Pt 100 "1K
(destruction limit)
thermometer Ni 100
Standard Maximum input current for 40 mA
current input I+
Pt 100 " 0.8 K
(destruction limit)
Ni 100
Climate

Ni 1000 " 0.8 K

LG-Ni 1000
Standard

Ni 1000 LG-Ni " 0.8 K

1000
Climate

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-111

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Connection of the Characteristic Programmable

sensor linearization

• For measuring Possible • For RTD Pt 100 Standard / Climate

voltage Ni 100 Standard / Climate
Ni 1000 Standard / Climate
• For measuring current LG-Ni 1000 Standard /
Climate
As two-wire Possible, with external
transmitter supply • Technical unit for Degrees Celsius,
temperature degrees Fahrenheit, Kelvin
As four-wire Possible
measurement
transmitter

•
For measuring
resistance

with two-conductor Possible

connection

with three-conductor Possible

connection

with four-conductor Possible

connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-112 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.21.1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in the reference manual, section 4.7.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-63 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated U
U Voltage
I Current
R Resistors
RTD Bulb resistor
• Measuring Range Voltage
"50 mV; "500 mV; "1 V; "10 V
1 to 5 V;
"5 V; 0 to 10 V; "10 V
Current
0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA; "20 mA "20 mA
Resistors
0 to 600 Ω; 0 to 6 kΩ 600 Ω
Bulb resistor (linear) Pt 100 Channel
Dynamic
Pt 100 Climate / Standard standard
Ni 100 Climate / Standard
Ni 1000 Climate / Standard
LG-Ni 1000 Climate / Standard
• Temperature Pt 100
coefficient 0.003850 ΩΩ/ °C (IST-90) 0.003850
Ni 100 / Ni 1000
0.006180 Ω/Ω/ °C
LG-Ni 1000
0.005000 Ω/Ω/ °C
• Interference 50 Hz; 60 Hz 50 Hz
Frequency
Suppression Module
• Temperature unit Degrees Celsius, degrees Degrees
Fahrenheit, Kelvin* Celsius
* only Pt 100 Standard, Ni 100 Standard, Ni 1000 Standard, LG-Ni 1000 Standard

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-113

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.21.2 Measuring Methods of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
• Voltage measurement
• Current measurement
• Resistance test
You perform the setting with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
Set the “measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-114 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.22 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits;

(6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 8 inputs in 4 channel groups
• Measured-value resolution; settable per group (depending on the integration
time set)
– 9 bits + sign
– 12 bits + sign
– 14 bits + sign
• Measuring method selectable per channel group:
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistors
– Temperature
• Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Two channels with limit monitoring
• Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
• Isolated against the backplane bus interface
• Isolated against load voltage (except when at least one
coding key is inserted in position D)

Resolution
The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time
selected. In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel,
the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be (see Technical
Specifications of the module and Table 4-6 on page 4-10).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-115

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

Thermocouples, Resistance test

Voltage measurement
Fault indicator – red
Current measurement

L+ 24V
SF Internal Current Multi- Meas. range M0 + CH0 M0 + CH0
supply source plexer module
M0* M0*
M1 + CH1 IC0 +
M1* IC0*
M2 + CH2 M1 + CH2
M2 * M1*
Int. M3 + CH3 IC1 +
T Comp. M3* IC1*
+ Ext. Comp +
compensation
None
Comp

Comp–/ Mana
AD M4 + CH4 M2 + CH4
C M4* M2*
Isolation M5 + CH5 IC2 +
M5* IC2*
M6 + CH6 M3 + CH6
Backplane SF M6 * M3*
bus
M7 + CH7 IC3 +
interface
M7* IC3*
M
M

Figure 4-40 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected (see Technical
Specifications).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-116 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating
(in millimeters)
Integration time/conversion
Weight Approx. 250 g time/ resolution (per
channel)
Data for Specific Module
• Programmable Yes
Supports clocked operation No
• Integration time in 2.5 162/3 20 100
Number of inputs 8 milliseconds
• For resistance-type 4
sensor • Basic conversion time 3 17 22 102
including Integration
Length of cable max. 200 m time in milliseconds
• Shielded max. 50 m at 80 mV and Additional conversion 1 1 1 1
thermocouples time for measuring
Voltages, Currents, Potentials resistance, in ms
or
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC
electronics L + Additional conversion 10 10 10 10
time for open-circuit
• Reverse polarity Yes monitoring, in ms
protection or

Power supply of the Additional conversion 16 16 16 16

transmitters time for measuring
resistance and
• Supply current max. 60 mA (per channel) open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
• Short-circuit-proof Yes
• Resolution in bits (incl. 9 12 12 14
Constant current for typ. 1.67 mA overrange) bits bits bits bits
resistance-type sensor
• Noise suppression for 400 60 50 10
Isolation frequency f1 in Hz
• Between channels and Yes • Basic execution time of 24 136 176 816
backplane bus the module, in ms (all
channels enabled)
• Between channels and Yes
power supply of the Smoothing of the measured None
electronics values
– Not for 2-wire
transmitter
Permitted potential
difference 2.5 VDC
• Between inputs and
MANA (UCM)
– At signal = 0 V

• Between the inputs 2.5 VDC

(ECM)
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Minternal (UISO)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 50 mA
• From the backplane bus max. 30 mA
L+ (without two-wire
transmitter)
Power dissipation of the typ. 1 W
module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-117

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Noise suppression for F = n (f1 " 1 %), Interrupts
(f1 = interference frequency) • Hardware interrupt Programmable
• Common-mode > 70 dB when limit has been channels 0 and 2
interference exceeded
(UCM < 2.5 V) • Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
• Series-mode noise > 40 dB Diagnostic functions Programmable
(peak value of
noise < nominal value of • Group error display Red LED (SF)
input range) • Diagnostics information Possible
read-out
Crosstalk between the > 50 dB
inputs Data for Selecting a Sensor

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with Input range (rated
reference to the input range) values)/Input resistance

• Voltage input 80 mV "1% • Voltage " 80 mV /10 MΩ

" 250 mV /10 MΩ
250 to 1000 " 0.6 %
mV " 500 mV /10 MΩ
"1000 mV /10 MΩ
2.5 to 10 V " 0.8 %
" 2.5 V /100kΩ
• Current input 3.2 to 20 mA " 0.7 % "5V /100kΩ
• Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω; " 0. 7 % 1 to 5 V; /100kΩ
600 Ω " 10 V /100kΩ
• Thermocouple Type E, N, J, " 1. 1 % • Current " 3.2 mA /25 Ω
K, L
" 10 mA /25 Ω
• Resistance Pt 100/ " 0. 7 % " 20 mA /25 Ω
thermometer Ni 100
0 to 20 mA; /25 Ω
Pt 100 " 0. 8 % 4 to 20 mA: /25 Ω
climate
• Resistors 150 Ω /10 ΜΩ
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to input 300 Ω /10 ΜΩ
range)
600 Ω /10 ΜΩ
• Voltage input 80 mV " 0.7 %
• Thermocouples Type E, N, J, /10 ΜΩ
250 to 1000 " 0.4 % K, L
mV
• Resistance Pt 100, /10 ΜΩ
2.5 to 10 V " 0.6 % thermometer Ni 100
• Current input 3.2 to 20 mA " 0.5 % Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
voltage input (destruction 75 V for max. 1 s
• Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω; " 0.5 % limit) (duty factor 1:20)
600 Ω
Maximum input current for 40 mA
• Thermocouple Type E, N, J, " 0.7 % current input (destruction
K, L limit)
• Resistance Pt 100/ " 0.5 %
thermometer Ni 100
Pt 100 " 0.6 %
climate
Temperature error (with " 0.005 %/K
reference to the input range)
Linearity error (with " 0.05 %
reference to the input range)
Repeatability (in steady " 0.05 %
state at 25 C referred to
input range)
Temperature error of internal "1%
compensation

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-118 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Connection of the sensor Characteristic linearization Programmable

• For measuring voltage Possible • for thermocouples Type E, N, J, K, L

• For measuring current • For RTD Pt 100

(standard, climate range)
As two-wire transmitter Possible Ni 100
As four-wire transmitter Possible (standard, climate range)
• For measuring Temperature compensation Programmable
resistance
With two-conductor Possible
• Internal temperature Possible
compensation
connection
With three-conductor Possible • External temperature Possible
connection compensation with
With four-conductor Possible compensating box
connection
• Compensation for 0 C Possible
• Load of the two-wire max. 820 Ω comparison point
transmitter temperature
• Technical unit for Degrees Celsius
temperature
measurement

4.22.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits by means of

measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Meas. range module

If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the
measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do
this are described in detail in Section 4.4.
The corresponding table in Section 4.22.2 tells you which assignment you have to
select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the
necessary settings are embossed on the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-119

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Default settings for measuring range module

The measuring range modules are preset to “B” (voltage; " 10 V) when the
module is supplied.
To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only
have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting.
Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary.

Table 4-64 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits Using Measuring Range Modules

Measuring Range Measuring Method Measuring Range

Module Setting
A Voltage " 1000 mV
B Voltage " 10 V
C Current, 4 to 20 mA
Four-wire transmitter
D Current, 4 to 20 mA
Two-wire transmitter

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-65 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
• Hardware interrupt Yes/no No
upon limit violation

Trigger for hardware Constraint possible due to measuring

interrupt range.
• Upper limit value From 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
• With wire-break Yes/no No
check

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-120 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Table 4-65 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter)
2DMU Current (2-wire transmitter)
R-4L Resistance
(four-conductor connection)
RTD-4L Bulb resistor
(linear, four-conductor
connection)
TC-I Thermocouple Channel or
(internal comparison) Dynamic Channel
TC-E Thermocouple group
(external comparison)
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external comparison)
• Measuring Range Refer to Section 4.22.2 for the "10 V
measuring ranges of the input
channels that you can set.
• Interference 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 50 Hz
Suppression

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits are arranged in four groups of two. You
can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits has a measuring range module for
each channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Table 4-66 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-121

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Special characteristic of channel groups with resistance measurement

If you use the resistance measurement method, there is only one channel per
channel group. The “2nd” channel of each group is used for current injection (IC).
The measured value is obtained by accessing the “1st” channel of the group. The
“2nd” channel of the group has the default carry value “7FFFH”.

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note,
however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel
group in each case – in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

4.22.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 8 x 12 bits

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
• Voltage measurement
• Current measurement
• Resistance test
• Temperature measurement
You perform the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module
and with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way,
you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the
“measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this way you
shorten the scan time of the module.
If you do not use the COMP input, you must short-circuit it also.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-122 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges

Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group
generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these
inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
• Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used
input of the same channel group.
• Current measurement, 2-wire transmitter:
There are two ways to use the channels:
a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this
channel group. Otherwise, if diagnostics are enabled, the analog module
triggers a single diagnostic interrupt and the SF LED of the analog module
comes on.
b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 k. You may then
enable diagnostics for this channel group.
• Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, 4-wire transmitter: Connect the unused
input in series with an input of the same channel group.

Special characteristic when all channels are disabled

If you disable all input channels of the module and enable diagnostics when
parameterizing the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 12 bits, the module does
not indicate that the “external auxiliary voltage” is missing.

Measuring ranges
You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range
modules on the module and with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Table 4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description

(Type of Sensor) Module Setting
U: Voltage " 80 mV A You will find the digitized
" 250 mV analog values in Section
4.3.1 in the voltage
" 500 mV
measuring range
" 1000 mV
" 2.5 V B
"5V
1 to 5 V
" 10 V
TC-I:thermocouple Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized
(internal compensation) Type E [NiCr-CuNi] analog values in Section
(thermovoltage 4.3.1 in " 80 mV the voltage
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
measurement) measuring range
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
TC-E: Thermocouple Type L [Fe-CuNi]
(external compensation)
(thermovoltage
measurement)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-123

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits, continued

Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description

(Type of Sensor) Module Setting
2DMU: Current (2-wire 4 to 20 mA D You will find the digitized
transmitter) analog values in Section
4.3.1 in the current
4DMU: Current (4-wire " 3.2 mA C
measuring range
transmitter) " 10 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA
R-4L: Resistors 150  A You will find the digitized
(four-conductor 300  analog values in Section
connection) 4.3.1 in the resistance
600 
measuring range
TC-IL: Thermocouple Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized
(linear, internal Type E [NiCr-CuNi] analog values in Section
compensation) 4.3.1 in the temperature
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
(temperature range
measurement) Type K [NiCr-Ni]
The characteristics are
Type L [Fe-CuNi]
Fe-CuNi linearized:
TC-EL: Thermocouple
(linear, external • Pt 100 to DIN IEC 751
compensation) • Ni 100 according to IEC
(temperature DIN 43760
measurement) • Thermocouple to DIN
RTD-4L: Bulb resistor Pt 100 climate A 584, type L to
DIN 43710.
(linear, four-conductor Ni 100 climate
connection) Pt 100 standard
(temperature
Ni 100 standard
measurement)

Default Settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the “voltage” measuring method
and the “" 10 V” measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
with STEP 7.

Wire-Break Check
The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements
(thermocouples and bulb resistors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-124 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring

range
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break
check, the analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when a current
falls below 3.6 mA.
If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module
additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only
indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user
program.
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break
check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt
when the underflow is reached.

4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

(6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD has the following characteristic
features:
• 8 differential inputs for RTD resistance temperature detector in 4 channel
groups
• Optional setting of the resistance thermometer type per channel group
• Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
• Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• 8 channels with limit monitoring
• Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
• Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
• Isolated against the backplane bus interface

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-125

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Use of the module in the distributed peripheral ET 200M

When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you
must have one of the following IM 153 x:
• IM 153-1; ab 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
• IM 153-2; ab 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
• IM 153-2; ab 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Fault indicator – red

L+ 1 L+ M- 21 L+
2 22
SF M0+ M4+
3 ADC ADC 23
M0- DC M4-
4 to 24
K0 K4
Ic0+ DC Ic4+
5 25
Ic0- Ic4-
6 26
M1+ 7 27 M5+

M1- M5-
8 28
K1 Ic5+ K5
Ic1+ 9 29
Ic1- DAC DAC
10 Ic5-
30
M2+ M6+
11 31
M2- ADC ADC M6-
12 32
K2 K6
Ic2+ Ic6+
13 33
Ic2- Back- Ic6-
14 34
plane
M3+ M7+
15 bus 35
ac-
M3- 16 36 M7-
tiva- K7
K3
Ic3+ tion Ic7+
17 37
Ic3- Ic7-
18 DAC DAC 38

19 39

M 20 40 M

Figure 4-41 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-126 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Module filtering mode 8 channels, hardware
Weight Approx. 272 g
Integration/conversion time/
Data for Specific Module resolution (per channel)
Supports clocked No • Programmable Yes
operation • Basic conversion time in 80
Number of inputs 8 ms

Length of cable • Additional conversion time 185*

for measuring resistance,
• Shielded max. 200 m in ms
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
• Additional conversion time 100
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC for open-circuit monitoring,
electronics L+ in ms

• Reverse polarity protection Yes • Resolution including sign 16 bits

Constant measured current for max. 5 mA • Noise suppression 400 / 60 / 50

resistance-type sensor for interference frequency
f1 in Hz
Isolation
Smoothing of the measured None / low/
• Between channels and Yes
values average/ high
backplane bus
Conversion time (per channel) 100 ms
• Between channels and Yes
power supply of the Basic response time of module 200 ms
electronics (all channels enabled)
• Between the channels Yes Module filtering mode 8 channels, software
In groups of 2
Integration/conversion time/
Permitted potential difference resolution (per channel)

• Between the inputs (UCM ) 75 VDC / 60 VAC

• Programmable Yes

• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC

• Basic conversion time in 8 / 25 / 30
ms
Minternal (UISO)

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

• Additional conversion time 45 / 79 / 89*
for measuring resistance,
Current consumption in ms
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA • Additional conversion time 20 / 37 / 42
• From the power supply L+ max. 240 mA for open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.6 W
• Resolution including sign 16 bits

• Noise suppres 400 / 60 / 50

sion for interference
frequency f1 in Hz

Smoothing of the measured None / low/

values average/ high

Conversion time (per channel) 20 / 37 / 42 ms

Basic response time of module 40 / 79 / 84 ms

(all channels enabled)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-127

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Module filtering mode 4 channels, hardware Linearity error (with reference to "0.02 %
the input range)
Integration/conversion time/
resolution (per channel) Repeat accuracy (in the steady "0.01 %
• Programmable Yes state at 25 °C, referred to the
input range)
• Basic conversion time in 3.3
ms Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Interrupts
• Additional conversion time 185*
for measuring resistance, • Hardware interrupt Programmable
in ms (channels 0 – 7)
• Additional conversion time 85** • Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
for open-circuit monitoring,
in ms Diagnostic functions Programmable

• Resolution including sign 16 bits • Group error display Red LED (SF)

• Noise suppres 400 / 60 / 50 • Diagnostic information can Possible

sion for interference be displayed
frequency f1 in Hz Data for Selecting a Sensor
Smoothing of the measured None / low/ Input range (rated values) input
values average/ high resistance
Basic response time of module 10 ms • Resistance thermometer Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500,
(all channels enabled) Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni
120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error
1000, Cu 10
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 1%),
• Resistors 150, 300, 600 
”(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.
Maximum input voltage for 35 VDC continuous;
• Common-mode > 100 dB voltage input (destruction limit) 75 VDC for max. 1 s
interference (duty factor 1:20)
(UCM < 60 VAC)
Connection of the sensor
• Series-mode interference > 90 dB
(peak value of interference • For measuring resistance
< rated value of input
With two-conductor Possible (without
range)
connection resistance correction)
Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB
With three-conductor Possible
Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred connection
to 0 to 60 C input range)
With four-conductor Possible
• Resistance thermometer "1.0 °C connection

• Resistors "0.1 % Characteristic linearization

Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input

• Resistance thermometer Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500,
Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni
range)
120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni
• Resistance thermometer "0.5 °C 1000, Cu 10 (standard
and climatic range)
• Resistors "0.05 %
• Technical unit for Degrees Celsius;
Temperature error (with "0.005 %/K temperature measurement degrees Fahrenheit
reference to the input range)

* The resistance measurement for a three-conductor connection is performed every 5 minutes.

** Open-circuit monitoring in module filtering mode 4 Channels, Hardware is performed every 3 seconds.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-128 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.23.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.

Parameterization restrictions when using the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD with

PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in an ET 200M
PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7 master,
certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do not
support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these functions
are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt enable,
hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other
parameters are permitted.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-68 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
• Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
upon limit violation
• Hardware interrupt at Yes/no
end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware
interrupt
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 32767 Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 -32768

Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
• With wire-break Yes/no No
check

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-129

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-68 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated RTD-4L
R-4L Resistance
(four-conductor connection)
R-3L Resistance,
three-conductor connection
RTD-4L Bulb resistor
(linear, four-conductor Channel
connection) Dynamic
group
RTD-3L Bulb resistor
(linear, three-conductor
connection)
• Measuring Range Refer to Section 4.23.2 for the Pt 100
measuring ranges of the input climate
channels that you can set. 0.003850
(IPTS-68)
• Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit Degrees
Dynamic Module
Celsius
• Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8
Dynamic Module
8 channels software filter channels,
4 channels hardware filter hardware
filter
• Temperature Platinum (Pt) 0.003850
coefficient for 0,003850 / °C
temperature 0.003916 / °C
measurement with 0.003902 / °C
bulb resistor (RTD) 0.003920 / °C
0,003850 / °C (ITS-90) Channel
Dynamic
Nickel (Ni) group
0.006180 / °C
0.006720 / °C
Copper (Cu)
0.00427 / °C
• Interference 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50/60/400
Dynamic Channel
suppression* Hz
group

• Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel

Low group
Average
High
* 50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes;
50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-130 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD are arranged in four groups of two. You
can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Table 4-69 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit

violation
You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in
STEP 7.

Module filtering mode

The SM 331; AI 8 RTD operates in one of the following modes:
• “Hardware filter, 8 channels”
• “Software filter, 8 channels”
• “Hardware filter, 4 channels”
The operating mode affects the scan time of the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-131

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

”Hardware filter 8 channels” mode

In “Hardware filter 8 channels” mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x RTD
switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains
four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously
for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been
converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-42).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4-42 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time

Scan time of the module

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD is 85 ms. The
module must then be switched over to the other channel in the group by means of
opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 12 ms to switch and settle. Each
channel needs a time of 97 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 194 ms.
Scan time = (tK + tU) x 2
Scan time = (85 ms + 12 ms) x 2
Scan time = 194 ms
tK: channel conversion time for one channel
tU: time for switching to the other channel in the channel group

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-132 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

”Software filter 8 channels” mode

In “Software filter 8 channels” mode, the analog/digital conversion occurs in exactly
the same way as in “hardware filter 8 channels” mode. That is to say, as the
module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert
simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels are
converted, all the ADCs convert simultaneously for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-43).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4-43 Software filter 8 channels scan time

Scan time of the module

The channel conversion time depends, however, on the programmed interference
frequency suppression. When you set an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the
channel conversion time including communication time is 30 ms. When you set an
interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion time is 25 ms. When you
set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to
8 ms. As with 8-channel hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over
by means of opto MOS relays with a time of 12 ms for switching to the other
channel of the group. This relationship is shown in the table that follows.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-133

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-70 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode

Programmed Channel Scan Time* Module Scan Time (All

Interference Frequency Channels)
Suppression
50 Hz 42 ms 84 ms
60 Hz 37 ms 74 ms
400 Hz 20 ms 40 ms

* Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 12 ms switching time to the other channel
in the channel group

Scan time in “Hardware Filter, 4 Channels” mode

In this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different
groups. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the
ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 4-44 Hardware filter 4 channels scan time

Scan time of the module

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD is 10 ms. As
the module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel
scan time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.
Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-134 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check

The wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all
operating modes.
In the 8-channel hardware and software filter operating modes, the scan time
of the module is doubled, irrespective of the number of channels for which
wire-break has been enabled.
In the 4-channel hardware filter operating mode, the module interrupts
processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other
words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 170 ms.

Smoothing of the measured values

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog
values in Section 4.6.

Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L

If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage.
The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

4.23.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the

SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
• RTD 4-conductor measurement
• RTD 3-conductor measurement
• Resistor 4-conductor measurement
• Resistor 3-conductor measurement
You perform the setting with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-135

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Unused Channels
Set the “measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
You must terminate an unused channel of an enabled channel group with a
nominal resistance in order to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel (refer
to the block diagram, Figure 4-41, for the connection).
In the “4-Channel Hardware Filter” operating mode, termination is not necessary
provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and
7 are not monitored in this mode.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the “measuring range” parameter
in STEP 7.

Table 4-71 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD

Method Selected Measuring Range Description

Resistors: 150  You will find the digital analog values in
(Three-conductor/four-cond 300  Section 4.3.1
uctor terminal) 600 
Resistance RTD Pt 100 climate
(Three-conductor/four-cond Pt 200 climate
uctor terminal) Pt 500 climate
Pt 1000 climate
Ni 100 climate
Ni 120 climate
Ni 200 climate
Ni 500 climate
Ni 1000 climate
Cu 10 climate
Pt 100 standard
Pt 200 standard
Pt 500 standard
Pt 1000 standard
Ni 100 standard
Ni 120 standard
Ni 200 standard
Ni 500 standard
Ni 1000 standard
Cu 10 standard

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-136 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values

The programmable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the AI 8
RTD from the range of values shown in Table 4-68.
The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating
the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some
cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or
overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and
can vary between the lower limits shown in the table below and 32511 (7EFFH).
Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit
values shown in the table below.

End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with
the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all
the enabled channels is complete.

Table 4-72 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware
interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
additional information
Special 2 bits per channel to identify the range
analog
Upper limit exceeded in
markers 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
channel
Lower limit exceeded in
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
channel
End-of-scan-cycle event X 2
Unassigned bit 3

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-137

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

(6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC has the following features:
• 8 differential inputs for thermocouples (TC) in 4 channel groups
• Optional setting of the thermocouple type per channel group
• Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
• Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• 8 channels with limit monitoring
• Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
• Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
• Programmable reaction to open thermocouple
• Isolated against the backplane bus interface

Use of the module in the distributed peripheral ET 200M

When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x TC in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you
must have one of the following IM 153-x:
• IM 153-1; as of 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
• IM 153-2; as of 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
• IM 153-2; as of 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-138 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Fault indicator – red

SF 1 L- M+ 21 L+
2 22
3 23
DC
4 to 24
DC
5 25

6 26
TC+0 TC+4
Channel 7 27
0 TC-4 K4
TC-0 8 28
TC+1 TC+5
Channel 9 29
1 ADC ADC TC-5 K5
TC-1
10 30
TC+2 TC+6
Channel 11 31
2 TC-2 ADC ADC K6
12 32 TC-6
TC+3 TC+7
Channel 13 Back- 33
3 TC-3 plane TC-7 K7
14 bus 34
inter- 35
KV+
15
face
16 36 KV-
Ext KV
lc+
17 37
Ext lc-
18 38
KV

19 39

20 40 M

Channel
number

Figure 4-45 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-139

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Module filtering mode 8 channels, hardware
Weight Approx. 272 g
Integration time/conversion
Data for Specific Module time/ resolution (per
channel)
Supports clocked No
operation • Programmable Yes
Length of cable • Basic conversion time in 95
• Shielded max. 100 m ms

Voltages, Currents, Potentials • Additional conversion 4

time for open-circuit
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC monitoring, in ms
electronics L+
• Resolution including 16 bits
• Reverse polarity protection Yes sign
Constant measured current for typ. 0.7 mA • Noise suppression 400/60/50
resistance-type sensor for interference
frequency f1 in Hz
Isolation
Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high
• Between channels and Yes values
backplane bus
Basic response time of 190 ms
• Between channels and Yes module (all channels
power supply of the enabled)
electronics
Module filtering mode 8 channels, software
• Between the channels Yes
In groups of 2 Integration time/conversion
time/ resolution (per
Permitted potential difference channel)
• Between the inputs (UCM ) 75 VDC / 60 VAC • Programmable Yes
• Between MANA and 75 VDC 60 VAC • Basic conversion time in 23/72/83
Minternal (UISO) ms
Insulation tested with 500 VDC • Additional conversion 4
time for open-circuit
Current consumption monitoring, in ms
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA • Resolution including 16 bits
• From supply voltage max. 240 mA sign
L+
• Noise suppression 400/60/50
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.0 W for interference
frequency f1 in Hz

Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high

values

Basic response time of 46/144/166 ms

module (all channels
enabled)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-140 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Analog Value Generation (Cont’d) -230 °C to -200 °C ±3.0 °C

Measuring principle Integrating Type R +100 °C to +1769 °C ±1.5 °C
Module filtering mode 4 channels, hardware -50 °C to +100 °C ±1.8 °C
Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Type S +100 °C to +1769 °C ±1.7 °C
• Programmable Yes -50 °C to +100 °C ±2.0 °C
• Basic conversion time in 1.0 Type B 4) +200 °C to +1820 °C ±2.3 °C
ms
+45 °C +200 °C ±2.5 °C
• Additional conversion 93 1)
time for open-circuit Type C +100 °C to +2315 °C ±2.3 °C
monitoring, in ms
0 °C +100 °C ±2.5 °C
• Resolution including 16 bits
Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input
sign
range)
• Noise suppression for 400/60/50
• Thermocouple
frequency f1 in Hz
Type T -200 °C to +400 °C ±0.2 °C
Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high
values -230 °C to -200 °C ±0.5 °C
Basic response time of 10 ms Type U -150 °C to +400 °C ±0.2 °C
module (all channels
enabled) -200 °C to -150 °C ±0.5 °C

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Type E -200 °C to +1000 °C ±0.2 °C

Noise suppression for f = n (f1 ± 1%), -230 °C to -200 °C ±0.5 °C
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.
Type J -150 °C to +1200 °C ±0.2 °C
• Common-mode > 100 dB
interference (Ucm < 60 -210 °C to -150 °C ±0.5 °C
VAC)
Type L -150 °C to +900 °C ±0.2 °C
• Series-mode > 90 dB 2)
-200 °C to -150 °C ±0.5 °C
interference (peak value
of interference < rated Type K -200 °C to +1372 °C ±0.2 °C
value of input range)
-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C
Crosstalk between the > 100 dB
inputs Type N -200 °C to +1300 °C ±0.2 °C
Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred -230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C
to 0 to 60 °C input range) Note: This limit does not cover
the error cold connection point3) Type R +100 °C to +1769 °C ±0.2 °C

• Thermocouple -50 °C to +100 °C ±0.5 °C

Type T -200 °C to +400 °C ±0.7 °C Type S +100 °C to +1769 °C ±0.2 °C

-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C -50 °C to +100 °C ±0.5 °C

Type U -150 °C to +400 °C ±0.9 °C Type B 4) +200 °C to +1820 °C ±0.3 °C

-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.2 °C +45 °C to +200 °C ±0.5 °C

Type E -200 °C to +1000 °C ±1.2 °C Type C +100 °C to +2315 °C ±0.3 °C

-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.5 °C 0 °C +100 °C ±0.5 °C

Type J -150 °C to +1200 °C ±1.4 °C

-210 °C to -150 °C ±1.7 °C

Type L -150 °C to +900 °C ±1.5 °C

-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.8 °C

Type K -200 °C to +1372 °C ±2.1 °C

-230 °C to -200 °C ±2.9 °C

Type N -200 °C to +1300 °C ±2.2 °C

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-141

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Temperature error (with ±0.005%/K Data for Selecting a Sensor

reference to the input range)
Input ranges (rated values)/
Linearity error (with ± 0.02% input resistance
reference to the input range) • Thermocouples Type B, C, N, E, R, S, J, L,
Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.01% T, K, U
steady state at 25 °C, Maximum input voltage for 20 VDC continuous; 75
referred to the output range voltage input (destruction VDC for max. 1 s (duty
3)
limit) factor 1:20)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Characteristic linearization Programmable
Interrupts Temperature compensation Programmable
• Hardware interrupt Programmable • Internal temperature Possible
(channels 0 to 7) compensation

• Diagnostic interrupt Programmable • External temperature Possible

compensation with
Diagnostic functions Programmable Pt 100
• Group error display Red LED (SF) • Compensation for 0°C Possible
• Diagnostics information Possible comparison point
read-out temperature
• Compensation for 50°C Possible
comparison point
temperature
• Technical unit for Degrees Celsius/
temperature degrees Fahrenheit
measurement

1) Open-circuit monitoring in 4 channels, Hardware operating mode is performed every 3 seconds.

2) Series-mode rejection in 8 channels, software mode is reduced as follows:
50 Hz > 70 dB
60 Hz > 70 dB
400 Hz > 80 dB
3) The operational limit comprises only the basic error of the analog input at Ta = 25 °C and the total
temperature error. The total error must cover the error for the compensation of the cold connection
point. Internal compensation of the cold connection point = max. 1.5 °C
External compensation of the cold connection point = accuracy of the used external RTD is +0.1 °C
External compensation of the cold connection point, where the connection point is held at 0 °C or 50
°C = accuracy of the connection point temperature control.

4) Because of the slight rise over the range of approx. 0 °C to 85 °C, the lack of compensation of the
comparison point temperature only has a negligible effect on a type B thermocouple. If there is no
compensation and the measuring method “Compensation to 0 °C” is set, the deviation in the type B
thermocouple duringtemperature measurement is: 200 °C to 1802 °C <0.5 °C

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-142 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.24.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC bits in STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.

Parameterization restrictions when using the analog input module SM 331;

AI 8 x TC with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC in an ET 200M
PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7 master,
certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do not
support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these functions
are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt enable,
hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other
parameters are permitted.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-73 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
• Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
upon limit violation
• Hardware interrupt Yes/no
at end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware
interrupt
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 32767 Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 -32768

Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
• With wire-break Yes/no No
check

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-143

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-73 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated TC-IL
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal
comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external
comparison)
TC-L00C Thermocouple (linear, ref. Channel
Dynamic
temperature 0°C) group
TC-L50C Thermocouple (linear, ref.
temperature 50°C)
• Measuring Range For the settable measuring ranges of Type K
the input channels, please refer to
the individual module description.
• Reaction to open Overflow; underflow Overflow
thermocouple
• Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Degrees Dynamic Module
Fahrenheit Celsius
• Module filtering 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels, Dynamic Module
mode 8 channels software filter hardware
4 channels hardware filter filter
• Interference 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 50/60/400 Dynamic Channel
suppression* Hz group
• Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel
Low group
Average
High
* 50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes;
50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-144 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC are arranged in four groups of two. You
can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Table 4-74 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit

violation
You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in
STEP 7.

Module filtering mode

The SM 331; AI 8 x TC operates in one of the following modes:
• “Hardware filter, 8 channels”
• “Software filter, 8 channels”
• “Hardware filter, 4 channels”
The operating mode affects the scan time of the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-145

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

“Hardware filter 8 channels” mode

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC
switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains
four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously
for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been
converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-35).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4-46 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time

Scan time in the mode

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC is 91 ms. The
module must then be switched over to the other channel in the group by means of
opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 7 ms to switch and settle. Each channel
needs a time of 98 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 196 ms.
Scan time = (tK + tU) x 2
Scan time = (91 ms + 7 ms) x 2
Scan time = 196 ms
tK: channel conversion time for one channel
tU: time for switching to the other channel in the channel group

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-146 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

“Software filter 8 channels” mode

In 8-channel software filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC
switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains
four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously
for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been
converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-47).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4-47 Software filter 8 channels scan time

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-147

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In the 8-channel software filter mode of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC, the
channel conversion time is guided by the interference frequency set. When you set
an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including
communication time is 76 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz,
the channel conversion time is 65 ms. When you set an interference frequency of
400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to 16 ms. As with 8-channel
hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over by means of opto MOS
relays with a switchover time of 7 ms to the other channel of the group. Table 4-75
shows the scan time of the module at a certain interference frequency.

Table 4-75 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode

Programmed Channel Scan Time* Module Scan Time (All

Interference Frequency Channels)
Suppression
50 Hz 83 ms 166 ms
60 Hz 72 ms 144 ms
400 Hz 23 ms 46 ms

* Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 7 ms switching time to the other channel
in the channel group

“Hardware filter 4 channels” mode

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC does
not switch over between the channels of the individual groups. As the module
contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert
simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 4-48 Hardware filter 4 channels scan time

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-148 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC is 10 ms. As the
module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel scan
time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.
Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms

Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check

The wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all
operating modes.
In the 8-Channel Hardware and Software Filter operating mode prolongs the
scan time of the module by 4 ms, irrespective of the number of channels for which
wire-break has been enabled.
In the 4-Channel Hardware Filter operating mode, the module interrupts
processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other
words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 93 ms.

Smoothing of the measured values

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog
values in Section 4.6.

Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L

If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage.
The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-149

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.24.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 8 x TC

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
• Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 0 °C
• Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 50 °C
• Thermocouples, linearization with internal comparison
• Thermocouple, linearization with external comparison
You perform the setting with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
Set the “measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
You must terminate an unused channel in an enabled channel group to avoid
diagnostic errors for the unused channel. To do this, short the Plus input and Minus
input of the channel.
In the “4-Channel Hardware Filter” operating mode, termination is not necessary
provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and
7 are not monitored in this mode.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the “measuring range” parameter
in STEP 7.

Table 4-76 Measuring Ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x TC

Method Selected Measuring Range Description

TC-L00C: Type B You will find the digitized analog values
(thermocouple, linear, Type C in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range
reference temperature
Type E
0 °C)
Type J
TC-L50C:
(thermocouple, linear, Type K
reference temperature Type L
50 °C) Type N
TC-IL: Type R
(thermocouple, linear,
internal compensation) Type S
TC-EL: Type T
(thermocouple, linear, Type U
external compensation)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-150 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values

The programmable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the
AI 8 x TC from the range of values shown in Table 4-73.
The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating
the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some
cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or
overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and
can vary between the lower limits shown in the Table below and 32511 (7EFFH).
Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit
values shown in the tables below.

Table 4-77 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x TC in °C

Thermo- Minimum Possible Minimum Possible

couple Upper Limit Value Lower Limit Value
in °C Dec. Hex. in °C Dec. Hex.
Type B 1820.1 18201 471AH 0 0 0
Type C --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type E --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type J 1200.1 12001 2EE1H <-210.0 <-2100

Type K 1372.1 13721 3599H <-270.0 <-2700

Type L 900.1 9001 2329H <-200.0 <-2000 < F830H

Type N --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type R, S 1769.1 1769.1 451BH -50.1 -501 FE0BH
Type T 400.1 4001 0FA1H <-270.0 <-2700

Type U 600.1 6001 1771H <-200.0 <-2000 < F830H

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-151

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Table 4-78 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x TC in °F

Thermo- Minimum Possible Minimum Possible

couple Upper Limit Value Lower Limit Value
in °F Dec. Hex. in °F Dec. Hex.
Type B 2786.6 27866 6CDAH 0 0 0
Type C --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type E --- --- -- --- --- --
Type J 2192.2 21922 55A2H <-346.0 <-3460

Type K 2501.8 25018 61BAH <454.0 <-4540 <EE44H

Type L 1652.2 16522 408AH <-328.0 <-3280 F330H
Type N --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type R, S 3216.4 3216.4 7DA4H -58.2 -582 FDBAH
Type T 752.2 7522 1062H <454.0 <-4540 <EE44H
Type U 1112.2 11122 2B72H <-328.0 <-3280

End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with
the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all
the enabled channels is complete.

Table 4-79 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware
interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
additional information
Analog 2 bits per channel to identify the range
special
Upper limit exceeded in
marker 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
channel
s
Lower limit exceeded in
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
channel
End-of-scan-cycle event X 2
Unassigned byte 3

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-152 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.25 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits;

(6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1 331-7KB02-2AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• Two inputs in one channel group
• Measured-value resolution (depending on the integration time set)
– 9 bits + sign
– 12 bits + sign
– 14 bits + sign
• Measuring method selectable per channel group:
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistors
– Temperature
• Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• One channel with limit monitoring
• Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
• Isolated against the backplane bus interface
• Isolated against load voltage (except when at least one
coding key is inserted in position D)

Resolution
The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time
selected. In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel,
the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be (see Technical
Specifications of the module and Table 4-6 on page 4-10).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-153

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

Thermocouples, Resistance test

Fault indicator – red Voltage measurement
Current measurement

L+ 24V
SF Internal Current Multi- Meas. range M0 + CH0 M0 + CH0
supply source plexer module
M0* M0*
M1 + CH1 IC0 +
M1* IC0*

Internal
T compensation

+ External Comp +
compensation
None
Comp
Comp–/ Mana
ADC

Isolation

Backplane SF
bus
interface
M

Figure 4-49 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected (refer to the
technical specifications for the module).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-154 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating
(in millimeters)
Integration time/conversion
Weight Approx. 250 g time/ resolution (per
channel)
Data for Specific Module
• Parameters can be Yes
Supports clocked operation No assigned
Number of inputs 2 • Integration time in 2.5 162/3 20 100
• For resistance-type 1 milliseconds
sensor
• Basic conversion time 6 34 44 204
Length of cable max. 200 m including Integration
• Shielded max. 50 m at 80 mV and time in milliseconds
thermocouples Additional conversion 1 1 1 1
Voltages, Currents, Potentials time for measuring
resistance, in ms
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC or
electronics L +
Additional conversion 10 10 10 10
• Reverse polarity Yes time for open-circuit
protection monitoring, in ms
Power supply of the or
transmitters Additional conversion 16 16 16 16
• Supply current max. 60 mA (per channel) time for measuring
resistance and
• Short-circuit-proof Yes open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
Constant current for typ. 1.67 mA
resistance-type sensor • Resolution in bits (incl. 9 12 12 14
overrange) bits bits bits bits
Isolation
• Noise suppression for 400 60 50 10
• Between channels and Yes frequency f1 in Hz
backplane bus
• Basic response time of 6 34 44 204
• Between channels and Yes module, in ms (all
power supply of the channels enabled)
electronics
– Not for 2-wire Smoothing of the measured None
transmitter values

Permitted potential
difference 2.5 VDC
• Between inputs and
MANA (UCM)
– At signal = 0 V
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Minternal (UISO)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 50 mA
• From the backplane bus max. 30 mA (without
L+ two-wire transmitter)
Power dissipation of the typ. 1.3 W
module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-155

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %), Interrupts
(f1 = interference frequency) n=1.2... • Hardware interrupt Programmable
• Common-mode > 70 dB when limit has been channel 0
interference exceeded
(UCM < 2.5 V) • Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
• Series-mode noise > 40 dB Diagnostic functions Programmable
(peak value of
noise < nominal value of • Group error display Red LED (SF)
input range) • Diagnostics information Possible
read-out
Crosstalk between the > 50 dB
inputs Data for Selecting a Sensor

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with Input range (rated
reference to the input range) values)/Input resistance

• Voltage input 80 mV "1% • Voltage " 80 mV /10 MΩ

250 to 1000 " 0.6 % " 250 mV /10 MΩ

mV " 500 mV /10 MΩ

2.5 to 10 V " 0.8 % "1000 mV /10 MΩ

" 2.5 V /100kΩ
• Current input 3.2 to 20 mA " 0.7 %
"5V /100kΩ
• Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω; " 0, 7 % 1 to 5 V; /100kΩ
600 Ω
" 10 V /100kΩ
• Thermocouple Type E, N, J, " 1, 1 %
K, L • Current " 3.2 mA /25 Ω
" 10 mA /25 Ω
• Resistance Pt 100/ " 0, 7 %
thermometer Ni 100 " 20 mA /25 Ω
0 to 20 mA; /25 Ω
Pt 100 " 0, 8 %
climate 4 to 20 mA: /25 Ω

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to input • Resistors 150 Ω /10 ΜΩ

range) 300 Ω /10 ΜΩ
• Voltage input 80 mV " 0.6 % 600 Ω /10 ΜΩ

250 to 1000 " 0.4 % • Thermocouples Type E, N, J, /10 ΜΩ

mV K, L

2.5 to 10 V " 0.6 % • Resistance Pt 100, /10 ΜΩ

thermometer Ni 100
• Current input 3.2 to 20 mA " 0.5 %
Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
• Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω; " 0.5 % voltage input (destruction 75 V for max. 1 s
600 Ω limit) (duty factor 1:20)
• Thermocouple Type E, N, J, " 0.7 % Maximum input current for 40 mA
K, L current input (destruction
• Resistance Pt 100/ " 0.5 % limit)
thermometer Ni 100
Pt 100 " 0.6 %
climate
Temperature error (with " 0.005 %/K
reference to the input range)
Linearity error (with " 0.05 %
reference to the input range)
Repeatability (in steady " 0.05 %
state at 25 C referred to
input range)
Temperature error of internal "1%
compensation

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-156 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Connection of the sensor Characteristic linearization Parameters can be

• For measuring voltage Possible • for thermocouples assigned
Type E, N, J, K, L
• For measuring current
• For RTD Pt 100
Possible (standard, climate range)
As two-wire transmitter Ni 100
Possible (standard, climate range)
As four-wire transmitter
Temperature compensation Parameters can be
• assigned
For measuring
resistance • Internal temperature Possible
Possible compensation
With two-conductor Possible
connection • External temperature Possible
Possible compensation with
With three-conductor
connection compensating box
With four-conductor • Compensation for 0 C Possible
connection comparison point
temperature
• Load of the two-wire max. 820 Ω
transmitter • Technical unit for Degrees Celsius
temperature
measurement

4.25.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits by means of a

measuring range module on the module and in STEP 7.

Measuring range module

If necessary, the measuring range module must be replugged to change the
measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do
this are described in detail in Section 4.4.
The corresponding table in Section 4.25.2 tells you which assignment you have to
select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the
necessary settings are embossed on the module.

Default settings for measuring range module

The measuring range module is preset to “B” (voltage; " 10 V) when the module
is supplied.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-157

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only
have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting.
Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary.

Table 4-80 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits Using Measuring Range Module

Measuring Range Measuring Method Measuring Range

Module Setting
A Voltage "1000 mV
B Voltage "10 V
C Current, 4 to 20 mA
Four-wire transmitter
D Current, 4 to 20 mA
Two-wire transmitter

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-81 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope
Settings meter
Type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
• Hardware interrupt Yes/no No
upon limit violation

Trigger for hardware

interrupt
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
• With wire-break Yes/no No
check

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-158 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Table 4-81 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope
Settings meter
Type
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter)
2DMU Current (2-wire transmitter)
R-4L Resistance (four-conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Bulb resistor
(linear, four-conductor
connection)
TC-I Thermocouple Channel or
(internal comparison) Dynamic Channel
TC-E Thermocouple group
(external comparison)
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external comparison)
• Measuring Range Refer to Section 4.25.2 for the "10 V
measuring ranges of the input
channels that you can set.
• Interference 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 50 Hz
Suppression

Channel groups
The two channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits are combined
to a channel group. You can only ever assign parameters to the channel group.
The SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits has a measuring range module for the channel group 0.

Special characteristic of channel groups with resistance measurement

If you use the resistance measurement method, the analog input module has only
one channel. The “2nd” channel is used for current injection (IC).
The measured value is obtained by accessing the “1st” channel. The “2nd” channel
has the default carry value “7FFFH”.

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set a hardware interrupt in STEP 7 for the channel group. Note, however,
that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in
each case – in other words, for channel 0.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-159

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.25.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 2 x 12 bits

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
• Voltage measurement
• Current measurement
• Resistance test
• Temperature measurement
You perform the setting by means of the measuring range module on the module
and with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way,
you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the
“measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this way you
shorten the scan time of the module.
If you do not use the COMP input, you must short-circuit it also.

Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges

Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group
generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these
inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
• Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used
input of the same channel group.
• Current measurement, 2-wire transmitter:
There are two ways to use the channels:
a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this
channel group. Otherwise, if diagnostics are enabled, the analog module
triggers a single diagnostic interrupt and the SF LED of the analog module
comes on.
b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 k You may then
enable diagnostics for this channel group.
• Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, 4-wire transmitter: Connect the unused
input in series with an input of the same channel group.

Measuring ranges
You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range
module on the module and with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-160 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Table 4-82 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description

(Type of Sensor) Module Setting
U: Voltage " 80 mV A You will find the digitized analog
" 250 mV values in Section 4.3.1 in the
voltage measuring range
" 500 mV
" 1000 mV
" 2.5 V B
"5V
1 to 5 V
" 10 V
TC-I: Thermocouple Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized analog
(internal compensation) Type E [NiCr-CuNi] values in Section 4.3.1 in " 80 mV
(thermovoltage the voltage measuring range
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
measurement)
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
TC-E: Thermocouples Type L [Fe-CuNi]
(external compensation)
(thermovoltage
measurement)
2DMU: Current (2-wire 4 to 20 mA D You will find the digitized analog
transmitter) values in Section 4.3.1 in the
current measuring range
4DMU: Current (4-wire " 3.2 mA C
transmitter) " 10 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA
R-4L: Resistors 150  A You will find the digitized analog
(four-conductor connection) 300  values in Section 4.3.1 in the
resistance measuring range
600 
TC-IL: thermocouples Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized analog
(linear, internal Type E [NiCr-CuNi] values in Section 4.3.1 in the
compensation) temperature range
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
(temperature measurement) The characteristics are linearized:
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
• Pt 100 to DIN IEC 751
Type L [Fe-CuNi]
• Ni 100 according to IEC DIN
TC-EL: Thermocouples Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A 43760
(linear, external Type E [NiCr-CuNi] • Thermocouple to DIN 584,
compensation) Type J [Fe-CuNi] type L to DIN 43710.
(temperature measurement)
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
Type L [Fe-CuNi]
RTD-4L: Bulb resistor Pt 100 climate A
(linear, four-conductor Ni 100 climate
connection) Pt 100 standard
(temperature measurement)
Ni 100 standard

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-161

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Default Settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the “voltage” measuring method
and the “" 10 V” measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 12 bits
with STEP 7.

Wire-Break Check
The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements
(thermocouples and bulb resistors.

Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring

range
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break
check, the analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when a current
falls below 3.6 mA.
If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module
additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only
indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user
program.
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break
check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt
when the underflow is reached.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-162 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.26 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits;

(6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits has the following characteristic
features
• 8 Output channels
• The individual output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
• Resolution 12 bits
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-163

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332;

AO 8 x 12 bits

Voltage outputs
Fault indicator – red Voltage outputs
Current outputs Current outputs

DAC DAC
Internal
supply

Isolation
Backplane
bus
interface

Figure 4-50 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 12 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-164 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • Resolution including sign

(in millimeters)
• ± 10 V; ± 20 mA; 11 bits +
Weight Approx. 272 g 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V sign
Data for Specific Module • 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA; 12 bits
• Conversion time (per channel) max. 0.8 ms
Supports clocked No
operation Settling time
• For resistive load 0.2 ms
Number of inputs 8 3.3 ms
• For capacitive load
Length of cable • For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
• Shielded max. 200 m 3.3 ms (10 mH)

Voltages, Currents, Potentials Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC • Crosstalk between the > 40 dB

• Reverse polarity protection Yes outputs
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
Isolation reference to the output range)
• Between channels and Yes • Voltage outputs ±0.5 %
backplane bus
• Between channels and Yes
• Current outputs ±0.6 %
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25 °C referred to the
electronics output range)
• Between the channels No • Output voltage ± 0.4 %
• Between channels and load Yes • Output current ± 0.5 %
voltage L+
• Temperature error (with ±0.002 % /K
Permitted potential difference reference to the output
range)
• Between S– and MANA 3 VDC
(UCM) • Linearity error (with + 0.05 %
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC reference to the output
Minternal (UISO) range)
• Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.05 %
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
steady state at 25°C,
Current consumption referred to the output
range)
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
• Output ripple; band ± 0.05 %
• From supply voltage L+ (no max. 340 mA width 0 to 50 kHz (with
load) reference to the output
Power dissipation of the module typically 6.0 W range)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-165

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Voltage outputs

Interrupts • Short-circuit protection Yes

• Diagnostic Interrupt Programmable • Short-circuit current max. 25 mA

Current outputs
Diagnostic functions Parameters can be
• Group error display assigned • No-load voltage max. 18 V

• Diagnostics information Red LED (SF) Destruction limit for

read-out Possible voltages/currents connected
from outside
Data for Selecting an Actuator
• Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 18 V continuous;
Output ranges (rated values) 75 V for max. 1 s
• Voltage ± 10 V (mark-to-space ratio
0 to 10 V 1:20)
1 to 5 V
• Current max. 50 mA DC
• Current ± 20 mA
0 to 20 mA Connection of actuators
4 to 20 mA • For voltage output
Impedance (in the nominal Four-conductor connection Possible
output range)
• For current output
• For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ Two-conductor connection Possible
– capacitive load max. 1
F
• For current outputs max. 500 Ω
– At UCM < 1 V max. 600 Ω
– For inductive load max. 10 mH

4.26.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits

Note
If the load voltage (L+) is switched off and on, this may result in incorrect output
values at the output for approx. 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-42, on page 4-43.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-166 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits individually.
You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel.
When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are
assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits is
assigned to a channel group in this instance – in other words, for example output
channel 0 = channel group0.

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12
bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-47, on page 4-73.

4.26.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 8 x 12 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You
perform connection of the outputs with the “output type” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the “output type” parameter to “disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-167

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.

Table 4-83 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits

Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 1 to 5 V You will find the digital
0 to 10 V analog values in Section
" 10 V 4.3.2 in the voltage and
current output ranges
Current From 0 to 20 mA
From 4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are “Voltage” for the output type and “" 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range
without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits in STEP 7.

Wire-Break Check
The analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits carries out a wire-break check
only for current outputs.

Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits carries out a short-circuit test
only for voltage outputs.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-168 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.27 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit;

synchronous; (6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 6 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 4 outputs in 4 channel groups
• The individual output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
• Resolution of 16 bits
• Supports clocked operation
• Supports the “parameter changing during the RUN” function
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Programmable substitute value output
• Galvanic isolation between:
– Backplane bus interface and analog output channel
– The different analog output channels
– Analog output and L+, M
– Backplane bus interface and L+, M

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-169

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332;

AO 4 x 16 bit

Fault indicator – red

Current Voltage
Outputs Outputs
1 L+
24 V
SF

Isolation
3 QI0 QV 0

4 S 0+
5 CH0 S 0 – CH0

6 MANA 0 M ANA 0

7 QI1 QV 1

8 S 1+
9 CH1 S 1 – CH1
MANA 1 M ANA 1
10

11 QI2 QV 2

12 S 2+

13 CH2 S 2 – CH2
Back-
plane 14 MANA 2 M ANA 2
bus
inter- 15 QI3 QV 3
face S 3+
16
17 CH3 S 3 – CH3
18 MANA 3 M ANA 3

M
20

Figure 4-51 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits

Note
Switching the rated load voltage (L+) off and on for approx. 10 ms can lead to
incorrect intermediate values at the output.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-170 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit

Dimensions and Weight • 0 to 20 mAV 14 bits
Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • 4 to 20 mA 14 bits
(in millimeters)
Conversion time (per channel)
Weight Approx. 220 g • in standard operation max. 0.8 ms
Data for Specific Module • in clocked operation 1.6 ms
Supports clocked Yes Basic response time of module
operation (independent of number of
released channels)
Changing parameters during Yes
the RUN • in standard operation 3.2 ms
possible • in clocked operation 2.4 ms
• Behavior of the non outputs the last valid Settling time
parameterized outputs output value before the
parameterization
• For resistive load 0.2 ms
• For capacitive load 3.3 ms
Number of outputs 4
• For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
Length of cable 3.3 ms (10 mH)

• Shielded max. 200 m Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

Voltages, Currents, and Potentials Crosstalk between > 100 dB
outputs
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
• Reverse polarity protection Yes Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the output range)
Isolation
• Voltage outputs "0.12%
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus • Current outputs "0.18%

• Between channels and Yes Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to output
power supply of the range)
electronics
• Voltage outputs
• Between the channels Yes " 10 V "0.02%
Permitted potential difference 0 to 10 V "0.02%
1 to 5 V "0.04%
• Between the outputs (ECM) 200 VDC / 120 VAC
• Current outputs
• Between MANA and 200 VDC / 120 VAC
Minternal (UISO) " 20 mA "0.02%
0 to 20 mA; "0.02%
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
4 to 20 mA "0.04%
Current consumption
Temperature error (with
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA reference to the output range)

• From the load voltage L+ max. 240 mA • Voltage outputs "0.0025% / K

(no load) • Current outputs "0.004% / K

Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W Linearity error (with reference to "0.004%
the output range)
Analog value generation
Repeat accuracy (in the steady "0.002 %
Resolution state at 25° C, referred to the
(incl. sign) output range)
• "10 V 16 bits Output ripple; band width 0 to "0.05%
• 0 to 10 V 15 bits 50 kHz (with reference to the
output range)
• 1 to 5 V 14 bits

• " 20 mA 15 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-171

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Voltage outputs

Interrupts • Short-circuit protection Yes
• Diagnostic interrupt Programmable • Short-circuit current max. 40 mA

Diagnostic functions Programmable Current outputs

• No-load voltage max. 18 V
• Group error display Red LED (SF)
Destruction limit against
• Diagnostic information Possible voltages/currents applied from
readable outside
Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable • Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 15 V continuous
Data for Selecting an Actuator 75 VDC for no more than
0.1 s
Output ranges (rated values) (pulse duty factor 1 : 20)
• Voltage ±10 V • Current max. 50 mA DC
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V Connection of actuators

• Current ±20 mA • For voltage output

0 to 20 mA – Four-conductor Possible
4 to 20 mA connection (measuring
circuit)
Load resistance (in the nominal
range of the output) • For current output
• For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ – Two-conductor Possible
connection
– capacitive load max. 1 µF

• For current outputs max. 500 Ω

– Inductive load max. 1 mH

4.27.1 Synchronicity

Characteristics
Reproducible (i.e. same length) reaction times are achieved with the SIMATIC with
an equidistant DP bus cycle and the synchronization of the following free running
single cycles:
• Free running of the user program. The length of the cycle time can vary due to
acyclic program branching.
• Free running, variable DP cycle at the PROFIBUS subnetwork
• Free running cycle at the DP-Slave back plane bus.
• Free running cycle during the signal conditioning and conversion in the
electronic modules of the DP-Slave.
In the case of equidistance the DP cycle runs in phase and with the same length.
In this cycle the processing levels of a CPU (OB 61 to OB 64) and the
synchronous peripheral are synchronized. The I/O data are therefore transferred at
defined and consistent time intervals (clock synchronicity).

Requirements
• The DP-Master and DP-Slave must support the synchronicity. They require
STEP 7 from Version 5.2.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-172 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Module filtering mode: Synchronicity

In synchronous operation the following conditions apply:

Processing and activation time TWA between reading the output 1.6 ms
value into the output buffer and loading it into the D/A converter for
the output
TDPmin 2.4 ms
Diagnostic interrupt max. 4 x TDP

Calculation of the filter and processing time

Independent of the number parameterized channels the same time conditions are
always valid.

TWA

Updating of the
D/A conversion and internal processing output
CH3

CH2

CH1

CH0

1400
s 200
s

TO

Figure 4-52 Calculation of the processing time and the time for updating the output

Explanation of the mode of operation in synchronous operation

During the time TO - TWA, the module reads the output data and saves the data
internally. After the internal processing time of each channel the results are written
in the individual D/A converters.

Further information
Further information on clock synchronicity can be found in the Online help of
STEP 7, in the manualLocal Peripheral System ET 200M and in the manual
Clock Synchronicity.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-173

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.27.2 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit

Note
When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values
can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in the reference manual, section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-42 in the reference manual.

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits individually.
You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel.
When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are
assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits is
assigned to a channel group in this instance – in other words, for example output
channel 0 = channel group0.

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332;
AO 4 x 16 bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the
output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-47 in the reference manual.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-174 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

4.27.3 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 4 x 16 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You
perform connection of the outputs with the “output type” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the “output type” parameter to “disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.

Table 4-84 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 4 x 16 bits

Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 1 to 5 V You will find the digital
0 to 10 V analog values in section
" 10 V 4.3.2 in the reference
manual in the voltage and
Current From 0 to 20 mA
current output ranges
From 4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are “Voltage” for the output type and “" 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range
without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits in STEP 7.

Substitute values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits for the CPU operating mode STOP
as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If
you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-175

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.28 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits;

(6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 4 Output channels
• The individual output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
• Resolution 12 bits
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Programmable substitute value output
• Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-176 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332;

AO 4 x 12 bits

Fault indicator – red Current Voltage

output outputs

L+
SF 24V
Internal DAC
supply QI0 QV0
S0 +
CH0 S0* CH0
MANA MANA
QI1 QV1
Isolation
S1 +
CH1 S1* CH1
MANA MANA

QI2 QV2
Backplane
SF S2 +
bus CH2 S2* CH2
interface MANA MANA
QI3 QV3
S3 +
CH3 S3* CH3
MANA MANA

M M

Figure 4-53 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-177

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Resolution including sign
(in millimeters)
• " 10 V; " 20 mA; 11 bits + sign
Weight Approx. 220 g 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V
Data for Specific Module • 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA 12 bits
Supports clocked No Conversion time (per channel) max. 0.8 ms
operation
Settling time
Number of outputs 4 • For resistive load 0.2 ms
Length of cable • For capacitive load 3.3 ms
• Shielded max. 200 m • For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials 3.3 ms (10 mH)

Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

• Reverse polarity protection Yes Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB
Isolation Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the output range)
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus • Voltage outputs " 0.5 %
• Between channels and Yes • Current outputs " 0.6 %
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to output
electronics range)
• Between the channels No • Voltage outputs " 0.4 %
• Between channels and load Yes • Current outputs " 0.5 %
voltage L+
Temperature error (with " 0.002 %/K
Permitted potential difference reference to the output range)
• Between S– and MANA 3 VDC Linearity error (with reference to " 0.05 %
(UCM) the output range)
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC Repeatability (in steady state at " 0.05 %
Minternal (UISO) 25 C, referred to output range)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz " 0.05 %
(referred to output range)
Current consumption
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
• From the backplane bus max. 60 mA
Interrupts
• From the load voltage L+ max. 240 mA
(no load) • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
assigned
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W
Diagnostic functions Programmable
• Group error display Red LED (SF)
• Diagnostic information Possible
readable
Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-178 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator Destruction limit against

voltages/currents applied from
Output ranges (rated values) outside
• Voltage ±10 V • Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 18 V continuous;
0 to 10 V 75 V for max. 1 s (duty
1 to 5 V factor 1:20)
• Current ±20 mA • Current max. 50 mA DC
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA Connection of actuators

Load resistance (in the nominal • For voltage output

range of the output) – Four-conductor Possible
• For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ connection (measuring
circuit)
– capacitive load max. 1 µF
• For current output
• For current outputs max. 500 Ω
– Two-conductor Possible
– At UCM< 1V max. 600  connection
– Inductive load max. 10 mH

Voltage outputs
• Short-circuit protection Yes
• Short-circuit current max. 25 mA

Current outputs
• No-load voltage max. 18 V

4.28.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Note
When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values
can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-42, on page 4-43.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-179

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits individually.
You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel.
When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are
assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits is
assigned to a channel group in this instance – in other words, for example output
channel 0 = channel group0.

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12
bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-47, on page 4-73.

4.28.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 4 x 12 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You
perform connection of the outputs with the “output type” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the “output type” parameter to “disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-180 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.

Table 4-85 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 1 to 5 V You will find the digital
0 to 10 V analog values in Section
" 10 V 4.3.2 in the voltage and
current output ranges
Current From 0 to 20 mA
From 4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are “Voltage” for the output type and “" 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range
without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits in STEP 7.

Wire-Break Check
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits carries out a wire-break check
only for current outputs.

Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits carries out a short-circuit test
only for voltage outputs.

Substitute values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits for the CPU operating mode STOP
as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If
you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

Special characteristic of substitute values for output ranges 1 to 5 V and

4 to 20 mA
The following special characteristic applies to output ranges 1 to 5 V and
4 to 20 mA:
You have to set the substitute value E500H for the output to become de-energized
(refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-26 and 4-27).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-181

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.29 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits;

(6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1 332-5HB01-2AB0

Characteristics
The analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 2 Output channels
• The individual output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
• Resolution 12 bits
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Programmable substitute value output
• Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-182 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits

Fault indicator – red Current Voltage

output outputs

L+
SF 24V
Internal DAC
supply QI0 QV0
S0 +
CH0 S0* CH0
MANA MANA
QI1 QV1
Isolation
S1 +
CH1 S1* CH1
MANA MANA

SF
Backplane
bus
interface

M M

Figure 4-54 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-183

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Resolution including sign
(in millimeters)
• " 10 V; " 20 mA; 11 bits + sign
Weight Approx. 220 g 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V
Data for Specific Module • 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA 12 bits
Supports clocked No Conversion time (per channel) max. 0.8 ms
operation
Settling time
Number of outputs 2 • For resistive load 0.2 ms
Length of cable • For capacitive load 3.3 ms
• Shielded max. 200 m • For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials 3.3 ms (10 mH)

Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

• Reverse polarity protection Yes Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB
Isolation Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the output range)
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus • Voltage outputs " 0.5 %
• Between channels and Yes • Current outputs " 0.6 %
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to output
electronics range)
• Between the channels No • Voltage outputs " 0.4 %
• Between channels and load Yes • Current outputs " 0.5 %
voltage L+
Temperature error (with " 0.002 %/K
Permitted potential difference reference to the output range)
• Between S– and MANA 3 VDC Linearity error (with reference to " 0.05 %
(UCM) the output range)
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC Repeatability (in steady state at " 0.05 %
Minternal (UISO) 25 C, referred to output range)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz " 0.05 %
(referred to output range)
Current consumption
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
• From the backplane bus max. 60 mA
Interrupts
• From the load voltage L+ max. 135 mA
(no load) • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
assigned
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W
Diagnostic functions Programmable
• Group error display Red LED (SF)
• Diagnostic information Possible
readable
Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-184 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator Destruction limit against

voltages/currents applied from
Output ranges (rated values) outside
• Voltage ±10 V • Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 18 V continuous;
0 to 10 V 75 V for max. 1 s (duty
1 to 5 V factor 1:20)
• Current ±20 mA • Current max. 50 mA DC
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA Connection of actuators

Load resistance (in the nominal • For voltage output

range of the output) – Two-conductor Possible
• For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ connection Possible
– capacitive load max. 1 µF – Four-conductor
connection
• For current outputs max. 500 Ω (measuring circuit)
– At UCM< 1V max. 600  • For current output
– Inductive load max. 10 mH – Two-conductor Possible
Voltage outputs connection

• Short-circuit protection Yes

• Short-circuit current max. 25 mA

Current outputs
• No-load voltage max. 18 V

4.29.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits

Note
When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values
can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-42, on page 4-43.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-185

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits individually.
You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel.
When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are
assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits is
assigned to a channel group in this instance – in other words, for example output
channel 0 = channel group0.

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO
2 12 bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values can arise across the
output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-47, on page 4-73.

4.29.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 2 x 12 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You
perform connection of the outputs with the “output type” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the “output type” parameter to “disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-186 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.

Table 4-86 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits

Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 1 to 5 V You will find the digital
0 to 10 V analog values in Section
" 10 V 4.3.2 in the voltage and
current output ranges
Current From 0 to 20 mA
From 4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are “Voltage” for the output type and “" 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range
without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits in STEP 7.

Wire-Break Check
The analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits carries out a wire-break check
only for current outputs.

Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits carries out a short-circuit check
only for voltage outputs.

Substitute values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits for the CPU operating mode STOP
as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If
you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

Special characteristic of substitute values for output ranges 1 to 5 V and

4 to 20 mA
The following special characteristic applies to output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20
mA:
You have to set the substitute value E500H for the output to remain de-energized
(refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-26 and 4-27).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-187

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM334;

AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; (6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0

Characteristics
The analog input/output module SM 334: AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has the following
characteristic features:
• Four inputs, two outputs
• Resolution 8 bits
• Not parameterizable, setting of measurement and output type by means of
wiring
• Measuring range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
• Output range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
• Both voltage and current output options
• Non-isolated against the backplane bus interface
• Isolated from load voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-188 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
Select the measuring method of the input channels and the output type of the
output channels via the wiring.

L+
24V
Internal MV0 +
supply V
M0* CH0

Current measurement
A MI0 +
ADC MV1 +
V
M1* CH1
MI1 +

Voltage
A
MV2 +
V
M2* CH2
A MI2 +

MV3 +
V
Backplane M3*
bus MI3 + CH3
A
interface QV0
DAC V MANA CH0

Current outputs
MANA A QI0
QV1

Voltage
V MANA
CH1
MANA A QI1
M M

Figure 4-55 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits

Note
Note when connecting the SM 334 that:
• the analog chassis ground MANA (terminal 15 or 18) is connected to the
chassis ground M of the CPU and/or the interface module (IM). Use a wire
with a minimum cross-section of 1 mm2 for this.
If there is no ground connection between MANA and M, the module switches
off. Inputs are read with 7FFFH; outputs return a value of 0. If the module is run
without a ground connection for some time, it may be destroyed.
• The supply voltage for the CPU and/or the interface module (IM) must not
be connected with reversed polarity. Reverse polarity causes the
destruction of the module because MANA is subjected to an unauthorized high
potential (+24 V).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-189

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits

Dimensions and Weight Time constant of the input max. 0.8 ms

filter
Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117
(in millimeters) Basic execution time of the max. 5 ms
module (all channels enabled)
Weight Approx. 285 g
Analog Value Generation for the Outputs
Data for Specific Module
Resolution including sign 8 bits
Supports clocked No
operation Conversion time (per channel) max. 500
s
Number of inputs 4 Settling time
Number of outputs 2 • For resistive load 0.3 ms
• For capacitive load 3.0 ms
Length of cable
• For inductive load 0.3 ms
• Shielded max. 200 m
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error for the
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Inputs
Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %)
Power rated voltage of the rated 24 VDC (f1 = interference frequency)
electronics voltage and rated
load voltage L+
• Common-mode > 60 dB
interference (Upp
Isolation < 1 V)

• Between channels and No Crosstalk between the outputs > 50 dB

backplane bus
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
• Between channels and Yes reference to the input range)
power supply of the
electronics
• Voltage input " 0.9 %
• Current input " 0.8 %
Between the channels No
Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to input
Permitted potential difference range)
• Between inputs and MANA 1 VDC • Voltage input " 0.7 %
(UCM)
• Current input " 0.6 %
• Between the inputs (ECM) 1 VDC
Temperature error (with " 0.005 %/K
Insulation tested with 500 VDC reference to the input range)

Current consumption Linearity error (with reference to " 0.05 %

the input range)
• From the backplane bus max. 55 mA
Repeatability (in steady state at " 0.05 %
• From power supply and max. 110 mA 25 C referred to input range)
load voltage L+ (no load)
Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz " 0.05 %
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W (referred to output range)
Analog Value Generation for the Inputs
Measuring principle Instantaneous value
conversion
Integration/conversion time (per
channel)
• Parameters can be No
assigned
• Integration time in 500
milliseconds
• Basic conversion time 100
including Integration time in
milliseconds
• Resolution including sign 8 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-190 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Data for Selecting an Actuator

Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB Output ranges (rated values)
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with • Voltage 0 to 10 V
reference to the output range) • Current 0 to 20 mA
• Voltage outputs "0.6 % Impedance (in the nominal
• Current outputs "1.0 % output range)

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to the • For voltage outputs min. 5 k
output range) – capacitive load max. 1
F
• Voltage outputs "0.5 % • For current outputs max. 300 
• Current outputs "0.5 % – Inductive load max. 1 m

Temperature error (with refe- "0.02 %/K Voltage outputs

rence to the output range) • Short-circuit protection Yes
Linearity error (with reference to " 0.05 % • Short-circuit current max. 11 mA
the output range) Current outputs
Repeat accuracy (in the steady " 0.05 % • No-load voltage max. 15 V
state at 25 C referred to the
output range) Destruction limit against
voltages/currents applied from
Output ripple (bandwidth " 0.05 % outside
referred to the output range)
• Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 15 V continuous;
Status, interrupts, diagnostics • Current
Interrupts None max. 50 mA DC

Diagnostic functions None Connection of actuators

Data for Selecting a Sensor

• For voltage output
Two-conductor connection Possible
Input range (rated values)/Input
Four-conductor connection Not possible
resistance
(measuring circuit)
• Voltage 0 to 10 V/100 k 
Connection of the sensor
• Current 0 to 20 mA/50 
• For measuring current
Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous; Two-conductor connection Possible
voltage input (destruction limit) 75 V for max. 1 s
(duty factor 1:20)
Maximum input current for 40 mA
current input (destruction limit)

Connection of the sensor

• For measuring voltage Possible
• For measuring current
As two-wire transmitter Not possible
As four-wire transmitter Possible

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-191

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.30.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits

The analog/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits is a non-isolated module.

You cannot program the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits.

Important information on connecting the module

Note
Note when connecting the SM 334 that:
• the analog chassis ground MANA (terminal 15 or 18) is connected to the
chassis ground M of the CPU and/or the interface module (IM). Use a wire
with a minimum cross-section of 1 mm2 for this.
If there is no ground connection between MANA and M, the module switches
off. Inputs are read with 7FFFH; outputs return a value of 0. If the module is run
without a ground connection for some time, it may be destroyed.
• the supply voltage for the CPU and/or the interface module (IM) must not
be connected with reversed polarity. Reverse polarity causes the
destruction of the module because MANA is subjected to an unauthorized high
potential (+24 V).

Addressing
The inputs and outputs of the module are addressed as of the initial module
address.
The address of a channel is obtained from the module start address and an
address offset.

Input Addresses
The following addresses apply to the inputs:

Chan- Address
nel
0 Initial module address
1 Module start address + 2 bytes address offset
2 Module start address + 4 bytes address offset
3 Module start address + 6 bytes address offset

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-192 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Output Addresses
The following channel addresses apply to the module outputs:

Chan- Address
nel
0 Initial module address
1 Module start address + 2 bytes address offset

4.30.2 Measuring/output method and measuring/output range of the

SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits

You cannot program the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits.

Selecting the Measurement Method and the Type of Output

Select the measuring method of an input channel (voltage, current) by wiring the
input channel appropriately.
Select the type of output of an output channel (voltage, current) by wiring the
output channel appropriately.

Unused Channels
You must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to
MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum noise immunity for the analog module.
Unused output channels must be left open.

Measuring ranges
The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has the measuring ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20
mA.
Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution and no
negative measuring ranges. Take this into account when you read measured value
tables 4-10 and 4-14 on pages 4-13 and 4-15.

Output ranges
The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has the output ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA.
Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution the analog
outputs do not have underranges. Take this into account when you read tables
4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-26 and 4-27.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-193

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.31 Analog Input/Output Module SM 334;

AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits; (6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1 334-0KE00-2AB0

Characteristics
The SM 334 has the following characteristic features:
• Four inputs in two groups
• 2 outputs (voltage outputs)
• Resolution of 12 bits + sign
• Measuring method selectable
– Voltage
– Resistors
– Temperature
• Isolated against the backplane bus interface
• Isolated from load voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-194 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of the SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Voltage input Resistance test

L+ 24V
Current IC01+ CH0
source M0 +
Internal M0*
supply Multiplexer M1 + CH1
M1*
IC01*
MANA
IC23+
Back-
plane M2+ CH2
bus M2 +
inter-
face U
M2* M2*
M3 +
M3 + CH3
U M3* M3*
MANA IC23*
DAC QV0
V MANA CH0
MANA
QV1
V MANA CH1
MANA
M
M

Voltage
outputs

Figure 4-56 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-195

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation for the Inputs

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating
(in millimeters)
Integration/conversion time (per
Weight Approx. 200 g channel)
Data for Specific Module • Parameters can be Yes
assigned
Supports clocked No
operation • Integration time in 162/3 20
milliseconds
Number of inputs 4
• For resistance-type sensor 4
• Basic conversion time 72 85
including Integration time in
Number of outputs 2 milliseconds
Shielded line length max. 100 m • Additional conversion time 72 85
for measuring resistance, in
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
ms
Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC
• Resolution in bits (incl.) 12 bits 12 bits
• Reverse polarity protection Yes overrange)
Supply voltage of the rated 24 VDC • Suppression of interference 60 50
electronics voltage and rated voltage for interference
load voltage L+ frequency f1 in Hertz
Power supply of the Smoothing of the measured Programmable,
transmitters values in 2 stages
• Short-circuit-proof Yes Time constant of the input 0.9 ms
filter
Constant measured current for
resistance-type sensor Basic response time of module 350 ms
(all channels enabled)
• For PT 100 typ. 490
A
Analog Value Generation for the Outputs
• At 10 k at 105
A
Resolution (incl. Overrange 12 bits
Isolation
• Between channels and Yes Conversion time (per channel) 500
s
backplane bus Settling time
• Between channels and Yes • For resistive load max. 0.8 ms
power supply of the
electronics
• For capacitive load max. 0.8 ms

Between the channels No

Permitted potential difference
• Between inputs and MANA 1V
(UCM)
• Between the inputs (ECM) 1V
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Minternal-(UISO)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 60 mA
• From power supply and max. 80 mA
load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 2 W

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-196 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error for the Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Inputs
Interrupts None
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %)
Diagnostic functions None
(f1 = interference frequency)
Data for Selecting a Sensor
• Common-mode > 38 dB
interference Input range (rated values)/Input
(Upp < 1 V) resistance
• Series-mode interference > 36 dB • Voltage 0 to 10 V 100 k 
(peak value of interference
< rated value of input
• Resistors 10 k 10 m
range) • Temperature PT 100 10 m
Crosstalk between the inputs > 88 dB Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
voltage input (destruction limit) 75 V for max. 1 s
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
(duty factor 1:20)
reference to the input range)
Connection of the sensor
• Voltage input 0 to 10 V "0.7 %
• Resistor input 10 k  "3.5 %
• For measuring voltage Possible

• Temperature input Pt 100 "1%

• For measuring resistance
With two-conductor Possible
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input
connection Possible
range)
With three-conductor Possible
• Voltage input 0 to 10 V "0.5 % connection
• Resistor input 10 k  "2.8 % With four-conductor
• Temperature input Pt 100 "0.8 % connection

Temperature error (with "0.01 %/K Characteristic linearization Parameters can be

reference to the input range) assigned

Linearity error (with reference to "0.05 % • For RTD PT 100 (climate range)
the input range) User data in engineering Degrees Celsius
Repeat accuracy (in the steady " 0.05 % format
state at 25 C, referred to the Data for Selecting an Actuator
input range)
Output range (rated value)
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error
• Voltage 0 to 10 V
Crosstalk between the outputs > 88 dB
Impedance (in the nominal output range)
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the output range) • For voltage outputs min. 2.5 k

• Voltage outputs "1.0 % – capacitive load max. 1.0
F

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to output Voltage outputs

range) • Short-circuit protection Yes
• Voltage outputs "0.85 % • Short-circuit current max. 10 mA
Temperature error (with "0.01 %/K Destruction limit for voltages/
reference to the output range) currents connected from
Linearity error (with reference to " 0.01 % outside
the output range) • Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 15 V continuous;
Repeat accuracy (in the steady " 0.01 % Connection of actuators
state at 25C, referred to the
output range) • For voltage output

Output ripple; band width 0 to " 0.1 % Two-conductor connection Possible

50 kHz (with reference to the Four-conductor connection Not possible
output range) (measuring circuit)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-197

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

4.31.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Note
Below the rated load voltage range, incorrect intermediate values occur at the
output when the rated load voltage supply (L+) is switched on/off.

STEP 7 V 4.0 tool for parameter assignment

The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits is contained in the module catalog in STEP 7
V 4.0 or higher.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-43, on page 4-44.

4.31.2 Measuring/output method and measuring/output range of the

SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Connecting the inputs and outputs

You can connect the inputs as voltage, resistance or temperature measurement
inputs, or deactivate them.
You can connect the outputs as voltage, or disable them.
Perform connection of the inputs and outputs with the parameters “measuring
method” and “output method” in STEP 7.

Connection options for the input channels

You can connect the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits in the following combinations:

Channel Wiring Versions

Channels 0 • 2 x temperature or
and 1 • 2 x resistance
Channels 2 • 2 x voltage,
and 3 • 2 x resistance,
• 2 x temperature,
• 1 x temperature and 1 x voltage, or
• 1 x resistance and 1 x voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-198 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Modules

Note
Simultaneous connection of a temperature sensor and a resistor to channels 0 and
1 and 2 and 3 is not allowed.
The reason common current source for both channels.

Unused Channels
Set the “measuring method” parameter for unused input channels to “disabled”. In
this way you shorten the scan time of the module.
You must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to
MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog
input module.
So that unused output channels of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the “output type” parameter to “disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

Measuring ranges
Use STEP 7 for programming the measuring ranges.

Table 4-87 Measuring ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Method Selected Measuring Range Description

U: Voltage 0 to 10 V You will find the digital
analog values in Section
R-4L: Resistance (four-conductor 10 k
4.3.1
connection)
RTD-4L: Bulb resistor Pt 100 climate
(linear, four-conductor connection)
(temperature measurement)

Default settings of inputs

The default settings of the module are the “Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor
connection)” measuring method and the “Pt 100 climate” measuring range. You
can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without
parameterizing the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits in STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-199

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Modules

Output ranges
Use STEP 7 for programming the output ranges.

Table 4-88 Output ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 0 to 10 V You will find the digital
analog values in Section
4.3.2 in the voltage output
range

Default settings of outputs

The default settings of the module are “Voltage” for the output type and “0 to 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of measuring method and
measuring range without parameterizing the SM 334; AI4/AO 2 x 2 bits in STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-200 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules 5
In this Appendix

Section Contents Page

5.1 Module Overview 5-2
5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16; 5-3
(6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0)
5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0) 5-5
5.4 Position Decoder Module SM 338; POS-INPUT; 5-7
(6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

5.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following table summarizes the most important features of the signal modules
described in this chapter. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the
suitable module for your task.

Table 5-1 Special signal modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module Simulator module Dummy module DM 370 Position decoder

Char- SM 374; IN/OUT 16 module
acter- SM 338; POS-INPUT
istics
Number of • max. 16 inputs or 1 slot reserved for 1 • 3 inputs for connection
inputs/outputs outputs non-parameterized of absolute value
module encoders (SSI)
• 2 digital inputs for
freezing the encoder
values
Suitable for... Simulation of: Placeholder for: Position decoding with up
• 16 inputs or • Interface Modules to 3 absolute value
encoders (SSI)
• 16 outputs or • Non-parameterized
signal modules Encoder types: Absolute
• 8 in– and outputs value encoder (SSI)
• Modules which occupy
with 13-bit, 21-bit or 25-bit
2 slots
message lengths
Data format: Gray code or
binary code
Supports clocked No No Yes
operation
Programmable No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No Adjustable
interrupt
Special Features Function adjustable with When replacing the Absolute value encoders
screwdriver DM 370 with another with a monoflop time
module, the mechanical greater than 64
s cannot
assembly and address be used on the SM 338
assignment/address
location of the entire
assembly remain
unchanged

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Special Signal modules

5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16;

(6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0

Characteristics
The simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 is distinguished by the following
features:
• Simulation of:
– 16 inputs or
– 16 outputs or
– 8 inputs and 8 outputs (each with the same start addresses!)
• Status displays for simulation of inputs and outputs
• Function adjustable with screwdriver

Note
Do not activate the switch for setting the function in RUN!

Configuration with STEP 7

The simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 is not included in the module catalog of
STEP 7 i.e., the order number of the SM 374 is not recognized by STEP 7. You
must therefore “simulate” the function of the simulator module required for the
configuration as follows:
• If you want to use SM 374 with 16 inputs, enter the order number of a digital
input module with 16 inputs in STEP 7;
e.g.: 6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0
• If you want to use SM 374 with 16 outputs, enter the order number of a digital
output module with 16 outputs in STEP 7;
e.g.: 6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0
• If you want to use SM 374 with 8 inputs and 8 outputs, enter the order
number of a digital input/output module with 8 inputs and 8 outputs in STEP 7;
e.g.: 6ES7323-1BH02-0AA0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

Module view (without front door)

Switch for input status

Switch for setting the function

Channel number

Status display – green

Figure 5-1 Module view of the simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16

Technical specifications of the SM 374; IN/OUT 16

Dimensions and Weight Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Dimensions W x H x D 40 125 110 Current consumption from the max. 80 mA
(in millimeters) backplane bus
Weight Approx. 190 g Power dissipation of the module type. 0.35 W
Data for Specific Module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Optional simulation of 16 inputs Status display yes, green LED per
16 outputs channel
8 in– and outputs
Interrupts No
Diagnostic functions No

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Special Signal modules

5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0

Characteristics
The dummy module DM 370 reserves a slot for a non-parameterized module. They
can be used as placeholders for:
• Interface modules (without reservation of address space)
• Non-parameterized signal modules (with reservation of address space)
• Modules which occupy 2 slots (with reservation of address space)
When replacing the dummy module with another module from S7-300, the
mechanical assembly and the address assignment/address allocation of the entire
assembly remain unchanged.

Configuration with STEP 7

You must only configure the dummy module DM 370 with STEP 7 if the module of
the slot is to be reserved for a parameterized signal module. If the module is
reserving the slot for an interface module, the configuration cannot be carried out
with STEP 7.

Modules which occupy 2 slots

For modules which occupy 2 slots, you must plug in 2 dummy modules. Only the
dummy module in slot “x” reserves the address space (not the dummy module in
slot “x + 1”; for details of the procedure, see table 5-2).
A maximum of 8 modules may be plugged into a module carrier (SM/FM/CP). If
you, for example, reserve a slot for an 80 mm wide module with 2 dummy
modules, you may still plug in 7 other modules (SM/FM/CP) because the dummy
module only occupies the address space for 1 module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

Module view

NA
A

Switch for address

assignment

Front View Rear view

Figure 5-2 Module view of the dummy module DM 370

Switch settings for address assignment

The following table shows how to set the switch on the rear side of the module
according to the module type.

Table 5-2 Meaning of the switch settings of the dummy module DM 370

Switch setting Meaning Use

The dummy module reserves one • Without active backplane bus:
slot. In configurations for which a purely
NA The module is not configured and physical single slot should be reserved,
does not occupy any address with electrical connection to the S7 300
A space. bus.
• With active backplane bus: No
The dummy module reserves one In configurations for which a slot with an
slot. address should be reserved.
NA The module must be configured
A and occupies 1 byte input address
space (with system default outside
the process image).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Special Signal modules

Technical specifications of the DM 370

Dimensions and Weight Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 Current consumption from the ca. 5 mA
(in millimeters) backplane bus
Weight Approx. 180 g Power loss typ. 0.03 W

5.4 Position Decoder Module SM 338; POS-INPUT;

(6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0

Characteristics
The position decoder module SM 338; POS-INPUT is distinguished by the
following features:
• 3 inputs for the connection of maximum three absolute value encoders (SSI)
and 2 digital inputs to freeze the encoder values
• Direct reaction possible to encoder values in moving systems
• Processing of acquired encoder values of the SM 338 in user program
• Supports clocked operation
• Type of encoder value acquisition (see chapter 5.4.4) can be selected:
– Free running
– Clocked
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• Non-isolated against the CPU

Supported encoder types

The following encoder types are supported by the SM 338; POS-INPUT:
• Absolute value encoder (SSI) with 13-bit message length
• Absolute value encoder (SSI) with 21-bit message length
• Absolute value encoder (SSI) with 25-bit message length

Supported data formats

The SM 338; POS-INPUT supports the gray code and binary code data formats.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

5.4.1 Synchronous Operation

Note
The basics of synchronous operation are described in a separate manual.

Hardware requirements
For the synchronous operation of the SM 338, you require:
• CPU which supports clocked operation
• DP master which supports the equidistant bus cycle
• Slave interface (IM 153-x) which supports synchronous operation

Characteristics
Depending on the system parameterization, the SM 338 works in either
non-synchronous or synchronous mode.
In synchronous operation, the data exchange between DP master and SM 338 is
synchronous to the PROFIBUS DP cycle.
In synchronous operation all 16 bytes of the checkback interface are consistent.
If synchronicity is lost due to faults or failure or delay of Global Control (GC), the
SM 338 goes back into synchronous operation in the next cycle without error
response.
If synchronicity is lost, the checkback interface is not updated.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Special Signal modules

5.4.2 Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram

Connection to the
Fault indicator – red ground of the CPU

Voltage monito- Short-circuit 1 L+ 24V

SF ring protection
2 M
3 OD (Data)
S7–300 Backplane bus
4 OD (Data)
RS 422
5 OC (Clock)
SSI
6 OC (Clock)
7 1D (Data)
8 1D (Data)
9 1C (Clock)
SSI
Logic
10 1C (Clock)
11 2D (Data)
12 2D (Data)
13 2C (Clock)
SSI
14 2C (Clock)
15 DI 0 (Digital-
DI 0 16 DI 1 input)
DI 1 17 DC24V (encoder)
18 DC24V (encoder)
19 M (encoder)
20 M (encoder)

Twisted pair cables

Figure 5-3 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Wiring rules
Please observe the following important rules of the wiring of the module:
• The ground of the encoder supply is connected non-isolated to the ground of
the CPU. Thus, connect pin 2 of the SM 338 (M) with low impedance with the
ground of the CPU.
• The encoder lines (pins 3 to 14) must be twisted pairs and shielded. Apply the
shield to both sides.
For the shield connection to the SM 338, use the shield connection element
(order number 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0).
• If the output current (900 mA) of the encoder supply is exceeded, then you
must connect an external power supply.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

5.4.3 Functions of the SM 338; POS INPUT

5.4.4 Encoder value acquisition

The absolute value encoder transfers its encoder values in messages to the
SM 338. The transfer of the message is initiated by the SM 338.
• In non-synchronous operation, the encoder values are acquired while it is free
running.
• In synchronous operation the encoder values are acquired synchronized to the
PROFIBUS DP cycle at each Ti.

Free running encoder value acquisition

The SM 338 always initiates the transfer of a message after the end of the
parameterized monoflop time.
Asynchronous to these free running messages, the SM 338 processes the
acquired encoder values during the cycle of its updating rate (see Technical Data).
Thus, in the case of free running encoder value acquisition, encoder values of
different ages result. The difference between the maximum and minimum age is
the jitter (see Technical Data).

Synchronous encoder values acquisition

Synchronous encoder values acquisition is automatically set if, in the DP master
system, the equidistant bus cycle is activated and the DP Slave is synchronized to
the DP cycle.
The SM 338 initiates the transfer of a message in each PROFIBUS DP cycle
at the time Ti.
Synchronous to the PROFIBUS DP cycle, the SM 338 processes the transferred
encoder values.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-10 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Special Signal modules

5.4.5 Gray/Dual Converter

In the Gray setting, the encoder values provided by the absolute value encoder in
gray code is converted into Dual code. In the Dual setting, encoder values
provided by the absolute value encoder remain unchanged.

Note
If you have selected the Gray setting, the SM 338 always converts the entire
encoder value (13, 21, 25 bits). As a result, preceding special bits affect the
encoder values and following bits could be falsified under certain circumstances.

5.4.6 Transferred Encoder Value and Normalization

The transferred encoder value contains the encoder position of the absolute value
encoder. Depending on the encoder used, additional bits which are located before
and after the encoder position are also transferred in addition to the encoder
position.
So that the SM 338 can detect the encoder position, make the following settings:
• Normalization, places (0..12), or
• Normalization, units / revolution

Normalization, places
The normalization determines the position of the encoder values in the checkback
interface.
• If “Places” = 1, 2....12, this indicates that the following non relevant bits in the
encoder values are removed and the encoder value is right justified in the
address range (see following example).
• If “Places” = 0, this indicates that the following bits are retained and available
for evaluation.
This can be useful if you use an absolute value encoder which transfers
information in the following bits (see manufacturer information) and you want to
evaluate these (see also chapter 5.4.5).

Parameter units / revolution

A maximum of 13 bits are available for the units/revolution. According to the
“Places” data, the resulting number of units/revolution is automatically displayed.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

Example of normalization of an encoder value

You are using a single-turn encoder with 29 units= 512 units/ revolution
(resolution/360°).
In STEP 7 you have set the following parameters:
• Absolute encoder: 13 bits
• Normalization: 4 places
• Units / revolution: 512

Before the normalization: cyclically acquired encoder values 100

31 Double data word
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 X X X X
Relevant bits 0

Transferred bits

After the normalization: encoder values 100

31 Double data word 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
Relevant bits

Result: Bits 0 to 3 (4 places, marked with “x”) are omitted.

5.4.7 Freeze Function

The freeze function “freezes” the current encoder values of the SM 338. The
freeze function is coupled to the digital inputs DI 0 and DI 1 of the SM 338.
The freeze is triggered by an edge change (rising edge) on DI 0 or DI 1. A frozen
encoder value is identified by the bit 31 (output address) being set. With a digital
input you can freeze one, two or three encoder values.
You must switch on the freeze function, i.e. set the corresponding parameters in
STEP 7 .
The encoder values are retained until the freeze function is ended and can thus be
evaluated dependent on the event.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-12 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Special Signal modules

Ending the freeze function

The freeze function must be ended at every encoder input. You acknowledge the
function in the user program by setting the bit 0, 1 or 2 depending on the channel
with the STEP 7-Operation T PAB “xyz” (for a program example, see chapter
5.4.9).
After exiting, bit 31 of the corresponding encoder value is again deleted and the
encoder values are again updated. A renewed freezing of the encoder values is
again possible as soon as you have deleted the acknowledgment bit in the output
address of the module.
In synchronous operation the acknowledgment is processed at time To. From this
point in time a renewed freezing of the encoder values can take place via the
digital inputs.

Note
The freeze function is automatically acknowledged if you newly parameterize the
corresponding channel with different parameters (see 5.4.8 chapter).
If the parameters remain identical, the freeze function remains unaffected.

5.4.8 SM 338; POS-INPUT Parameterization

You parameterize the SM 338; POS-INPUT with STEP 7. You must perform
parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
As soon as you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to ³ RUN mode, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the SM 338.
The parameters cannot be changed by the user program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default
settings for the SM 338 in the table below.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7 (default setting bold).

Table 5-3 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Parameter values Range Note

Enable Release parameter.
• Diagnosis interrupt Yes/no Affects all 3 channels.
Absolute value encoder none; 13 bits; 21 bits; 25 bits none: The encoder input is
(SSI) 1) switched off.
Code type 1) Gray; Binary Code provided by encoder.
Baud rate 1) ,3) 125 kHz; 250 kHz; 500 kHz; 1 MHz Data transfer rate of the SSI
position decoder. Observe the
relationship between the cable
length and baud rate (see
Technical Data)
Monoflop time 1),2),3) 16
s; 32
s; 48
s; 64 ms The monoflop time is the
minimum time interval between 2
SSI message frames.
The parameterized monoflop
time must always be greater than
the monoflop time of the absolute
value encoder.
Normalization Normalizing right justifies the
• Places 0 to 12 encoder values of the encoder
absolute; non-relevant places are
• Units / revolution 4) 2 to 8192
discarded.
Switching on freeze off; 0; 1 Designation of the digital input
whose rising edge causes a
freezing of the encoder value.
1) See technical data of the absolute value encoder
2) The monoflop time is the time interval between 2 SSI message frames. The parameterized monoflop
time must be greater than the monoflop time of the absolute value encoder (see technical data of the
manufacturer). The time 2 (1 / baud rate) is added to the value parameterized in HW config. At a
baud rate of 125 kHz with a parameterized monoflop time of 16
s, an effective monoflop time of 32
s
is actually achieved.
3) The following restriction applies to the monoflop time of the absolute value encoder:
(1 / baud rate) < Monoflop time of the absolute value encoder < 64
s + 2 (1 / baud rate)
4) to the power of two

Note
Please note that in non synchronous operation the baud rate and the monoflop
time affect the accuracy and actuality of the encoder values.
In synchronous operation the baud rate and the monoflop time affect the accuracy
of the freeze function.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-14 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Special Signal modules

5.4.9 SM 338; POS-INPUT Addressing

Data range for the encoder values

The inputs and outputs of the SM 338 are addressed as of the initial module
address. The input and output address is determined at the configuration of the
SM 338 in STEP 7.

Input Addresses

Table 5-4 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses

Encoder input Input address (from the configuration) + address offset

0 ”Initial module address”
1 ”Module start address” + 4 bytes address offset
2 ”Module start address” + 8 bytes address offset

Structure of the double data word

For each encoder input the double data word is made up as follows:

31 0

Encoder value in gray or binary code

Freeze
0 = encoder value is not frozen. The value is constantly updated.
1 = encoder value is frozen. The value remains constant until
acknowledgment.

Output Address

7 0
Initial module address

Acknowledging the freeze function:

Bit 0 = encoder input 0
Bit 1 = encoder input 1
Bit 2 = encoder input 2

Reading out data areas

You can read out the data areas in your user program with the STEP 7-Operation L
PED “xyz”.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-15

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

Example of access to encoder values and use of the freeze function

You want to read out and evaluate the value of the encoder at the encoder inputs.
The module start address is 256.

AWL Explanation
L PED 256 // Read encoder value in the address range for
encoder input 0
T MD 100 // Store encoder value in marker double word
U M 100.7 // Acquire and store freeze status for later
= M 99.0 // acknowledgment

L PED 260 // Read encoder value in the address range for

encoder input 1
T MD 104 // Store encoder value in marker double word
U M 104.7 // Acquire and store freeze status for later
= M 99.1 // acknowledgment

L PED 264 // Read encoder value in the address range for

encoder input 2
T MD 108 // Store encoder value in marker double word
U M 108.7 // Acquire and store freeze status for later
= M 99.2 // acknowledgment

L MB 99 // Load and acknowledge freeze condition

T PAB 256 // (SM 338: output address 256)

Afterwards you can further process the encoder values from the marker range MD
100, MD 104 and MD 108. The encoder value is contained in bits 0 to 30 of the
marker double word.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-16 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Special Signal modules

5.4.10 Diagnosis of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

The SM 338 makes diagnostic messages available, i.e., all diagnostic messages
are always provided by the SM 338 without your assistance.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
• The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the module and
forwarded to the CPU.
• The SF LED on the module lights.
• If you have programmed “Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” in STEP 7 , a diagnostic
interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called.

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user
program (refer to the Appendix “Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules”).
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to
online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message via SF LED

The SM 338 indicate errors for you by means of their SF LED (group error LED).
The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the SM 338. It
goes out when all errors have been rectified.
The group fault (SF) LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of
encoder supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on).
The SF LED lights up temporarily at startup during the self test of the SM 338.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-17

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS INPUT

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the SM 338.

Table 5-5 Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS INPUT

Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Diagno-

stics
Module problem SF Module
Internal malfunction SF Module
External malfunction SF Module
Channel error present SF Module
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module
Module not parameterized. SF Module
Wrong parameters SF Module
Channel information available SF Module
Time monitoring triggered SF Module
Channel error present SF Channel
(encoder input)
Configuring/parameter assignment error SF Channel
(encoder input)
External channel error (encoder fault) SF Channel
(encoder input)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-18 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Special Signal modules

Causes of errors and remedial measures

Table 5-6 Diagnostics Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Module fault An error detected by the module has
occurred.
Internal error Module has detected an error within
the automation system.
External error Module has detected an error outside
of the automation system.
Channel error present Indicates that only specific channels
are faulty.
External auxiliary The power supply L+ to the module is Feed supply L+
supply missing missing
Module not Module requires information whether it Message present after network active
parameterized should work with parameters preset by until transfer of the parameters by the
the system or with your parameters. CPU complete; parameterize module if
necessary.
Wrong parameters One parameter or the combination of Reassign module parameter
parameters is not plausible
Channel information Channel error present; module can
present provide additional channel information.
Watchdog tripped Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference
interference
Channel error present An error detected by the module has
occurred at the encoder input.
Configuration / Illegal parameter had been transferred Reassign module parameter
parameterization error to module
External channel error Broken wire in encoder cable, encoder Check connected encoder
(encoder error) cable not connected or encoder
defective.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-19

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

5.4.11 Interrupts of the SM 338; POS INPUT

Introduction
In this Section, the interrupt behavior of the SM 338; POS-INPUT is described.
The SM 338 can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in
STEP 7 (refer to Section 5.4.8).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then incoming active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of interrupts.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic
interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-20 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Special Signal modules

5.4.12 Technical Specifications of the 338; POS-INPUT

Dimensions and Weight Maximum repeat frequency 1 kHz

Dimensions B x H x T 40 x 125 x 120 Connection of a two–wire Possible
(mm) BEROS, type 2
Weight Approx. 235 g Shielded line length 600 m
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Unshielded line length 32 m
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
• Range 20.4 ... 28.8 V Interrupts
• Reverse polarity No • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
protection assigned
Isolation no, only against shield Status display of digital LED (green)
Permitted potential inputs
difference 1 VDC Group error/fault LED (red)
• between input Inaccuracy of the encoder value
(M connection) and Free running encoder value acquisition
central grounding point
of the CPU
• maximum age 1) (2 × Message duration)
+ monoflop time
Encoder supply
+ 580
s
• Output voltage L+ –0.8 V
• minimum age 1) Message duration
• Output current max. 900 mA, short + 130
s
circuit–proof
• Jitter Message duration
Current dissipation
+ monoflop time
• From the backplane max. 160 mA + 450
s
bus max. 10 mA Update rate Evaluation of the message
• From the load voltage every 450
s
L+ (no load)
Synchronous encoder value acquisition
Power dissipation of the typ. 3 W
module • Age Encoder value at time Ti
Encoder inputs POS INPUT 0 to 2
of the current
PROFIBUS DP cycle
Position decoding absolute
Inaccuracy of the frozen encoder value (freeze)
Difference signals for SSI according to RS422
data and SSI clock Free running encoder value acquisition
Data transfer rate and cable • 125 kHz max. 320 m • maximum age 1) (2 × Message duration)
length of absolute value • 250 kHz max. 160 m + monoflop time + 580
encoders (twisted pair and
s
• 500 kHz max. 60 m
shielded) • minimum age 1) Message duration + 130
• 1 MHz max. 20 m
s
Message duration of the 13 bits 21 bits 25 bits
SSI transmission
• Jitter Message duration +
monoflop time + 450
s
• 125 kHz 112
s 176
s 208
s
Synchronous encoder value acquisition
• 250 kHz 56
s 88
s 104
s
• Jitter Max (message
• 500 kHz 28
s 44
s 52
s
durationn + param.
• 1 MHz 14
s 22
s 26
s Monoflop time n)
Monoflop time2 16
s, 32
s, 48
s, 64
s
n = 0, 1, 2, (Channel)
Digital inputs DI 0, DI 1
Isolation no, only against shield 1) Age of the encoder values determined by the
Input voltage 0-Signal: –3 V ... 5 V transfer process and the processing
2) The following restriction applies to the monoflop
1-Signal: 11 V ... 30.2 V
Input current 0-Signal: v2 mA time of the absolute value encoder:
(quiescent current) (1 / baud rate) < Monoflop time of the absolute
1-Signal: 9 mA (typ.) value encoder < 64
s + 2 x (1 / baud rate)
Input delay 0 > 1: max. 300
s
1 > 0: max. 300
s

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 5-21

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Special Signal modules

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

5-22 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Interface Modules 6
Interface modules
In this chapter you will find the technical specifications and characteristic features
of the interface modules for the S7-300.

Contents
The following interface modules are described in this chapter:

Section Contents Page

6.1 Module Overview 6-2
6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0) 6-3
6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7361 3CA01-0AA0) 6-5
6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0) 6-7

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 6-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Interface Modules

6.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following table summarizes the most important characteristics of the interface
modules described in this chapter. This overview is intended to make it easy to
choose the suitable module for your task.

Table 6-1 Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module Interface Module IM 360 Interface Module IM 361 Interface Module IM 365
Char-
acter-
istics
Suitable for • 0 • 1 to 3 • 0 and 1
plugging into
S7-300 mounting
racks
Data transmission • From IM 360 to IM 361 • From the IM 360 to the • From IM 365 to IM 365
over the connecting IM 361 or from the IM via connecting cable
cable 386 361 to the IM 361 via 386
connecting cable 386
Distance • Max. 10 m • Max. 10 m • 1 m, permanently
between... connected

Special Features --- --- • Preassembled module

pair
• Install only signal
modules in rack 1
• IM 365 does not route
the communication
bus to subrack 1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

6-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Interface Modules

6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0

Characteristics
The interface module IM 360 has the following characteristic features:
• Interface for rack 0 of the S7-300
• Data transfer from IM 360 to IM 361 over the connecting cable 368
• Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m (32.8 ft.)

Status and fault LEDs

The interface module IM 360 has the following status and fault LEDs.

LED Meaning Explanation

SF Group error/fault The LED lights up if
• the connecting cable is missing.
• IM 361 is switched off.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 6-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Interface Modules

Front View
Figure 6-1 shows the front view of the interface module IM 360.

X1 OUT
SF

Front View

Figure 6-1 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module
IM 360.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120
(in millimeters)
Weight Approx. 250 g
Data for Specific Module
Length of cable
• Maximum length to 10 m
next IM
Current consumption
• From the backplane 350 mA
bus
Power loss typ. 2 W
Status and fault LEDs Yes

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

6-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Interface Modules

6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7361-3CA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7361-3CA01-0AA0

Characteristics
The interface module IM 361 has the following characteristic features:
• 24 VDC power supply
• Interface for racks 1 to 3 of the S7-300
• Current output via the S7-300 backplane bus max. 0.8 A
• Data transfer from the IM 360 to the IM 361 or from the IM 361 to the IM 361
via connecting cable 368
• Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m (32.8 ft.)
• Maximum distance between IM 361 and IM 361 is 10 m

Status and fault LEDs

The interface module IM 361 has the following status and fault LEDs.

LED Meaning Explanation

SF Group error/fault The LED lights up if
• the connecting cable is
missing
• the series-connected
IM 361 is switched off
• the CPU is in the
POWER OFF state
5 VDC 5 VDC supply for the S7-300 –
backplane bus

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 6-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Interface Modules

Front View
Figure 6-2 shows the front view of the interface module IM 361.

X1 OUT
SF

5 VDC

M
L+
M

X2 IN

Figure 6-2 Front View of the Interface Module IM 361

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

6-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Interface Modules

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module
IM 361.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D 80 x 125 x 120
(in millimeters)
Weight 505 g
Data for Specific Module
Length of cable
Maximum length to next IM 10 m
Current consumption
From 24 VDC 0.5 A
Power loss typ. 5 W
Current output
To backplane bus 0.8 A
Status and fault LEDs Yes

6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1365-0BA01-2AA0

Characteristics
The interface module IM 365 has the following characteristic features:
• Pre-assembled pair of modules for rack 0 and rack 1
• Total power supply of 1.2 A, of which up to 0.8 A can be used per rack.
• Connecting cable with a length of 1 m already permanently connected
• Install only signal modules in rack 1
• IM 365 does not forward the C bus to rack 1, i.e. you cannot plug FMs with a
C bus function in rack 1.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 6-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Interface Modules

Front View
Figure 6-3 shows the front view of the interface module IM 365.

IM 365 IM 365
RECEIVE SEND

In rack 1 In rack 0

Figure 6-3 Front View of the Interface Module IM 365

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module
IM 365.

Dimensions and Weight Data for Specific Module

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 Length of cable
per rack (in millimeters) Maximum length to next IM 1m
Total weight 580 g Current consumption
From the backplane bus 100 mA
Power loss typ. 0.5 W
Current output max. 1.2 A
Per rack 0.8 A
Status and fault LEDs No

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

6-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
RS 485 Repeater 7
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find a detailed description of the RS 485-Repeater.
Included in the description are:
• The purpose of the RS 485 repeater
• The maximum cable lengths possible between two RS 485 repeaters
• The functions of the individual operating elements and terminals
• Information about grounded and non-grounded operation
• Technical specifications and the block diagram

Further information
You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the manuals Hardware
and Installation in the Chapter “Configuring of an MPI or PROFIBUS-DP network”.

Diagnostic repeater
Compared to the RS 485 repeater, the diagnostic repeater has new characteristics:
Diagnostic function and modeling as the DP slave. For additional information, refer
to the Diagnostic Repeater for PROFIBUS-DP manual, order no.
6ES7972-0AB00-8xA0.

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

7.1 Application and Characteristics; 7-2
(6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
7.2 Appearance of the RS-485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) 7-3
7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation 7-4
7.4 Technical Specification 7-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 7-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
RS 485 Repeater

7.1 Application and Characteristics;

(6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

Order number
6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0

What is an RS 485 repeater?

The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus
segments.

Application of the RS 485 repeater

You need an RS 485 repeater if:
• More than 32 nodes are connected to the bus
• Bus segments are to be operated non-grounded on the bus, or
• The maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded. (See table 7-1).

Table 7-1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment

Baud Rate Max. Cable Length of a Segment (in m)

9.6 to 187.5 kbd 1000
500 kbaud 400
1.5 Mbaud 200
3 to 12 Mbaud 100

Rules
If you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters:
• Up to 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series.
• The maximum cable length between two nodes must not exceed the values in
Table 7-2.

Table 7-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters

Baud Rate Maximum Length of Cable between 2 Nodes (in m) with

RS 485 Repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 10000
500 kbaud 4000
1.5 Mbaud 2000
3 to 12 Mbaud 1000

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

7-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 RS 485 Repeater

7.2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater;

(6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
The table below shows the appearance of the RS 485 repeater and lists its
functions.

Table 7-3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater

Repeater Design No. Function

Connection for the RS 485 repeater power supply (pin “M5.2” is
the ground reference, if you want to measure the voltage
10
24 VDC
L+ M PE M 5.2

difference between terminals “A2” and “B2”).
 Shield clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable

of bus segment 1 or bus segment 2
 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 1

A1 B1 A1 B1
 Terminating resistance for bus segment 1
ON  Switch for OFF operating mode

11 (= isolate bus segments from each other – for example, for

DP1
PG
OFF
startup
OP 12
DP2
  Terminating resistance for bus segment 2
ON
 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2
SIEMENS
RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2  Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the
 standard rail
Interface for programming device/OP in bus segment 1

10 LED 24 V supply voltage
 11 LED for bus segment 1
12 LED for bus segment 2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 7-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
RS 485 Repeater

7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and

Grounded Operation

Grounded or ungrounded
The RS 485 repeater is ...
• Grounded, if all other nodes in the segment are also operated with a grounded
potential
• Ungrounded, if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded
potential

Note
The bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device to the
PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater. Ground connection is effected since the
MPI in the programming device is grounded and the PG/OP socket is connected
internally with bus segment 1 in the RS 485 repeater.

Grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, you must jump terminals “M” and
“PE” on the top of the RS 485 repeater.

Ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, “M” and “PE” on the top of the
RS 485 repeater must not be interconnected. In addition, the supply voltage of the
RS 485 repeater must be ungrounded.

Terminal connection diagram

In the case of a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential
(ungrounded operation), any interference currents and static charges are
discharged by means of an RC network integrated in the repeater (refer to
Figure 7-1) to the protective conductor.

PE
24 VDC
L+ M PE M 5.2

22 nF 10 MΩ

A1 B1 A1 B1

Ground bus

Figure 7-1 RC Network with 10 MΩ for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference

Potential

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

7-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 RS 485 Repeater

Isolation between bus segments

Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other. The
PG/OP interface is connected internally to the port for bus segment 1. Figure 7-2
shows the front panel of the RS 485 repeater.

24 VDC
L+ M PE M 5.2

Terminals for bus segment 1

A1 B1 A1 B1

ON

PG/OP PG
DP1

interface OP
OFF

DP2

ON
Isolation SIEMENS
RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2 Terminals for bus segment 2

Figure 7-2 Isolation between the Bus Segments

Amplification of the bus signals

The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment
1 or the PG/OP interface and the port for bus segment 2.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 7-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
RS 485 Repeater

7.4 Technical Specifications

Technical specifications of the RS 485 repeater

Technical Specification
Power supply
• Rated voltage 24 VDC
• Ripple 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current consumption at rated voltage
• Without node at PG/OP socket 100 mA
• Node at PG/OP socket (5 V/90 mA) 130 mA
• Node at PG/OP socket (24 V/100 mA) 200 mA

Isolation Yes, 500 VAC

Connection of fiber optic cables Yes, via repeater adapters
Redundancy operation No
Transmission rate (automatically detected by the repeater) 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, 45.45 kbaud,
93.75 kbaud, 187.5 kbaud, 500 kbaud.
1.5 Mbaud. 3 Mbaud, 6 Mbaud, 12
Mbaud
Degree of protection IP 20
Dimensions W x H x D 45 x 128 x 67
Weight (incl. packaging) 350 g

Pin assignment of the sub-D connector (PG/OP socket)

View Pin No. Signal Name Designation

1 – –
2 M24V Ground 24 V
5 3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
9 4 RTS Request To Send
4
8 5 M5V2 Data reference potential (from station)
3
7 6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)
2
6 7 P24V 24 V
1
8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
9 – –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

7-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 RS 485 Repeater

Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

• Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other.
• Bus segment 2 and the PG/OP socket are galvanically isolated from each
other.
• Signals are amplified
– between bus segment 1 and bus segment 2
– between PG/OP socket and bus segment 2

Segment 1 Segment 2
A1 A2
Logic
B1 B2
A1 A2
B1 B2

PG/OP- 5V 1M 5V 1M
socket
24V 24V
L+ (24 V) L+ (24 V)
M M
A1
B1 PE
5V M 5.2
M5 V

Figure 7-3 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 7-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
RS 485 Repeater

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

7-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP
Connect TPA 8
In this chapter

Section Contents Page

8.1 Module Overview 8-2
8.2 Wiring Components 8-4
8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect with Digital Modules 8-12
8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA with Analog Modules 8-20

Structure of the chapter

Sections 8.1 and 8.2 apply to SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect
TPA.
Section 8.3 contains specific information on SIMATIC TOP connect and thus
supplements the preceding sections.
Section 8.4 contains specific information on SIMATIC TOP connect TPA and thus
supplements Sections 8.1 and 8.2.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.1 Module Overview

Introduction
“SIMATIC TOP connect” denotes components for wiring digital modules.
“SIMATIC TOP connect TPA” denotes components for wiring analog modules.

Wiring
Wiring with SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA is a fast and cost-effective alternative to
conventional wiring of the actuators and sensors directly at the front connector of
the module. When using these components, you wire actuators and sensors “in
situ” on one more terminal blocks. You establish the connection to the module by
means of a connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable).

Configuration of SIMATIC TOP connect with a S7-300

A SIMATIC TOP connect and a SIMATIC TOP connect TPA always consist of:
• A front connector module with flat ribbon connection
,
• One or more terminal blocks  and
• One or more connecting cables with plug-and-socket connectors at ends 



Figure 8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Advantages
Use of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA features the following advantages:
• Fast, low-cost wiring (the use of central terminal blocks is no longer necessary)
• Simple mounting of the components (front connector module, connecting cable,
terminal block)
• Each component can be replaced separately
• Connecting cable configurable without waste
• Wiring errors are drastically reduced
• Neat and tidy cabinet wiring
• The supply voltage for the module can be connected to components of
SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA
• Simplification of the terminals for M- and L+ connection

Range of modules
The table below lists all the modules which you can wire with SIMATIC TOP
connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA.
You will find a detailed list of the components of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA
with their order numbers in Table 8-5 on page 8-12 and Table 8-13 on page 8-20.

Table 8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: Connectable Modules

Component Front view of terminal block Wiring possible with module...

SM 321; DI 32 x DC 24 V
SIMATIC TOP SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V
connect SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input
SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic
interrupt
SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/2 A
SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 331 analog input module; AI 2 x 12 bits
SIMATIC TOP SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
connect TPA SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits
SM 332 analog output module; AO 2 x 12 bits
A B C D E F G H I K
SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits
Y YK K A A A A Z Z SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
Y Z
SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits
SM 335; AI 4/AO 4 x 14 bits;

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.2 Wiring Components

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other
to commission SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion but you can perform individual steps sooner
or later.

Sequence of steps for wiring

Table 8-2 Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA

Step Procedure Refer to Section...

1. Cut connecting cable to length and terminate 8.2.1
2. Wire the front connector module 8.2.2 and 8.3 or 8.4
3. Connect the connecting cable to the terminal 8.2.3 and 8.3 or 8.4
block
4. Wire actuators/sensors to the terminal block 8.2.4

8.2.1 Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate

Maximum length of cable

The length of the connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable) between the
SIMATIC S7 and the terminal blocks must not be more than 30 m.

Using the connectors

You must attach connectors to either end of the round-sheath ribbon cable, for
connection to the front connector module and the terminal block.

Connect the round-sheath ribbon cable to connector

1. Cut the round-sheath ribbon cable to the length required and remove part of the
cable sheath at both ends.
You will find the length of the cable sheath that has to be removed in the
following table:

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

external internal external internal

Cable sheath to ribbon ribbon ribbon ribbon
be removed cable cable cable cable
Cable end to ...
20-pin 40-pin
front front 20-pin 40-pin
connec- connec- front connector front connector
tor tor
... top connector of front
connector module 1 x 16 core 110 mm 115 mm
shielded/uns
... bottom connector of
hielded
front connector module 70 mm 75 mm
... top connector of front
connector module 95 mm 115 mm
... bottom connector of 2 x 16 core 95 mm 115 mm
front connector module unshielded
40 mm 75 mm
... socket of terminal 40 mm 100 mm
block

2. Thread the cable into the 16-pin connector.

It is important that you note the position of the details marked in the following
figure.

Triangle
Marked Core
Nose

Figure 8-2 Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector

3. Clamp the end of the cable into the connector with the crimping tool.
4. Attach the strain relief device to the connector of the terminal block as follows:
– Fold back the cable over the connector
– Push the enclosed strain relief device over the cable
– Snap the strain relief device into place on the connector

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.2.2 Wiring the Front Connector Module

Introduction
This chapter describes the principle of wiring the front connector modules. Note
also the special sections for SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect
TPA (Section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). In those sections, you will find, among
other things, selection criteria for the front connector modules and specific
connection examples.

Using the front connector module

You require the front connector module to connect the connecting cable to the
module. In addition, you can connect the supply voltage of the module to the front
connector module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Wiring rules for connecting the supply voltage

The following table shows you what you have to consider when connecting the
module supply voltage to the terminal block or front connector module.
The terminals for the supply voltage are screws or spring-loaded terminals (refer to
Section 8.2.4 for handling spring-loaded terminals).

Table 8-3 Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage

Rules for ... Terminal block Front connector

Spring-loaded Screw-type Up to 4 Up to 8
connection connection Terminals Terminals
Conductor
cross-sections suitable
for connection:
Solid conductors No No No
Stranded conductors
• Without end ferrules 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 0.25 to
1.5 mm2 0.75 mm2
• With end ferrules 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 0.25 to
1.5 mm2 0.75 mm2
No of conductors per 1 or combination of 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm2 (sum) in a common
terminal end ferrule
Max. diameter of ∅ 3.1 mm ∅ 3.1 mm ∅ 2.0 mm
conductor insulation
Length of conductor
insulation to be stripped
• Without insulation 11 mm 6 mm
collar 11 mm –
• With insulation collar
End ferrules to
DIN 46228
• Without insulation Model A; up to 12 mm Model A; up to 12 mm Model A; 5 to 7 mm long
collar long long –
• With insulation collar
– 0.25 to 1.0 mm2 Model E; up to 12 mm Model E; up to 12 mm
– 1.5 mm2 long long
Model E; 12 mm long Model E; 18 mm long

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Connect the connecting cable and the supply voltage to the front connector
module
1. Open the front door of the module.
2. Bring the front connector into the wiring position.
3. If necessary, connect the cables for the incoming supply of the module supply
voltage.
4. Insert the connecting cable into the front connector module as shown in the
following figure:

Figure 8-3 Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module

5. Twist every connecting cable 90 downwards and turn through one whole turn
to the extent possible.

Additional steps for wiring for 32-channel digital modules

Note
When using 32-channel digital modules, you must observe the assignment of the
supply connections to the connecting cable terminals and the assignment of the
connecting cable terminals to the address bytes of the module (refer to Figure 8-4
and Table 8-4).

6. Thread a strain relief assembly into the middle of the front connector. This
strain relief assembly is used to fix the connecting cables in the narrow cable
stowage area of the module.
7. Thread the strain relief assembly into the front connector.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules

The following figure shows the front view of the front connector module for
32-channel digital modules.

Opening for the cable to be connected + Opening for the
_ screwdriver
+
_ Supply terminals
for
Supply terminals for

Supply terminals for

+
_ Supply terminals
+ for
Legend: _

Openings for strain relief


to : Terminals for connecting cable;
refer to Table 8-4 for the address assignment

Figure 8-4 Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules

Assignment of connecting cable terminals to address bytes of 32-channel digital

modules

Table 8-4 Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes of 32-Channel

Digital Modules

Refer to Address Assignment for

Figure 8-4:
Connecting Digital Input Digital Output Digital Input/Output
Cable Terminal Module Module Module

IB x QB x IB x
IB (x+1) QB (x+1) IB (x+1)
IB (x+2) QB (x+2) QB x
IB (x+3) QB (x+3) QB (x+1)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.2.3 Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block

Introduction
A description of how to mount the terminal blocks is presented in the following.
Note also the special sections for SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP
connect TPA (Section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). In those sections, you will find,
among other things, selection criteria for the different terminal blocks and specific
connection examples.

Mounting the terminal block and connecting cable

1. Attach the terminal block to a 35 mm standard rail in accordance with
EN 50 022.
2. Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block as shown in the following
figure:

Figure 8-5 Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block

8.2.4 Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block

Screw-type or spring-loaded terminals

To mount the signal leads of the actuators/sensors to the terminal block and the
supply lines to the terminal block and front connector module, you can choose
between screw-type and spring-loaded components.
The principle of spring-loaded components is dealt with in greater detail in the
following, since it allows fast and simple connection of the signal lines and supply
cables.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-10 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Spring-loaded terminal block

Opening for the cable to

be connected

Opening for the

screwdriver for pressing
the spring-loaded contact

Figure 8-6 Spring-loaded terminal block

Caution
! The spring-loaded contact will be damaged, if you insert the screwdriver into the
opening for the cable.
Make sure that you insert the screwdriver only into the rectangular opening of the
terminal block.

Attaching the cable to the spring-loaded contact

Attach the cables to the spring-loaded contacts as follows:
1. Use a screwdriver
to press down the spring-loaded terminal in the
rectangular opening and to hold it down.
2. Insert the cable  into the round opening of the corresponding spring-loaded
terminal as far as it will go.
3. Remove the screwdriver  from the spring-loaded terminal. The cable is held
by the spring-loaded contact.




Figure 8-7 Principle of Spring-Loaded Connections

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect with Digital Modules

Introduction
For wiring the module with actuators/sensors using SIMATIC TOP connect, you
must first select the components as a function of the module and method of
connection (screw type or spring-loaded terminal, one-conductor, three-conductor
or 2A connection; relay).

8.3.1 SIMATIC TOP Connect Components and Selection Aid

Components
The following table contains all the component of SIMATIC TOP connect.

Table 8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect

Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Order number

Terminal ... for one-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0AA00-0AB0
block connection 6ES7924-0AA00-0AA0
... for one-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0AA00-1AB0
connection (10 items) 6ES7924-0AA00-1AA0
... for three-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0CA00-0AB0
connection 6ES7924-0CA00-0AA0
... for three-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0CA00-1AB0
connection (10 items) 6ES7924-0CA00-1AA0
... for 2A modules Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0BB00-0AB0
6ES7924-0BB00-0AA0
... for 2A modules (10 items) Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0BB00-1AB0
6ES7924-0BB00-1AA0
... for relays Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0CD00-0AB0
6ES7924-0CD00-0AA0
Front for 32-channel modules Voltage supply via:
connector (refer to Figure 8-4) Spring-loaded terminals 6ES7921 3AA20-0AA0
for 16-channel modules Voltage supply via:
spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7921-3AA00-0AA0
6ES7921-3AB00-0AA0
for 16-channel 2A modules Voltage supply via:
spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7921-3AC00-0AA0
6ES7921-3AD00-0AA0
Connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation displacement 6ES7921-3BE10-0AA0
connectors)
Round-sheath Unshielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0AA0
ribbon cable 60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0AA0
1 x 16
Shielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0BA0
60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0BA0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-12 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Table 8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect, continued

Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Order number

Round-sheath Unshielded 30 m 6ES7923-2CD00-0AA0
ribbon cable 60 m 6ES7923-2CG00-0AA0
2 x 16
Crimping tool for 16-pin connector 6ES7928-0AA00-0AA0

Selection aid
In the following table you will find the components of SIMATIC TOP connect with
which you can wire the digital modules.

Table 8-6 Selection Table for SIMATIC TOP connect Components

Digital Modules Terminal block for... Front connector

module for...
One-con- Three-con- 2A Relays SM; 16 or 2A
ductor ductor module 32 modules
connection connection s channels
SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC   – –  –
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC   – –  –
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC;   – –  –
source input
SM 322; DO 32 x   –   –
24 VDC/0.5 V
SM 322; DO 16 x   –   –
24 VDC/0.5 V
SM 322; DO 8 x   – –  –
24VDC/0.5 V; with diagnostic
interrupt
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A – –  – – 
SM 323;   – –  –
DI 16/DO 16 x 24VDC/ 0.5 A
SM323;   – –  –
DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

One-conductor or three-conductor connection

With the three-conductor connection, you can optionally apply the supply voltage
for the module to the front connector module or to the terminal block. With the
one-conductor connection, this can only be done to the front connector module.

2A module connection
You require the following information on wiring 2A modules only when you want to
use the SM 322; 8 x DO 24 VDC/2 A with SIMATIC TOP connect.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.3.2 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor

Connection

Connection Notes

Table 8-7 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with One-Conductor Connection

Digital Modules Connection Notes

Supply Voltage Feed-In Additional Descrip-
jumper tion on
At front Add. At front required at terminal
connector ground connector power block not
only conn. at or terminal supply in line with
terminal block descrip-
block tion on SM
SM 321; DI 32 x DC 24 V  – – – –
SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V  – – – –
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source  – – – –
input
SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A  – – – –
SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A  – – – –
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with  – – – 
diagnostic interrupt
SM 323;  – – – –
DI 16/DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A  – – – –

Assignments of the terminal block for one-conductor connection

Table 8-8 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection

Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals

Top row:
Terminals 0 to 7: inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-14 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Connecting the power supply

Always connect the supply voltage to the front connector module Observe the
wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.
In the following example, you must connect L+ to Plus of the upper terminal and M
to Minus of the lower terminal.

Connecting the terminal block for one-conductor connection

–
+
L+1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
M 20

–
+
Front connector
module

Terminal block Terminal block

Figure 8-8 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a One-Conductor Connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-15

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.3.3 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor

Connection

Connection Notes

Table 8-9 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with Three-Conductor Connection

Digital Modules Connection Notes

Supply Voltage Feed-In Additional Descrip-
jumper tion on
At front Add. At front required at terminal
connec- ground connector power block not
tor only conn. at or terminal supply in line with
terminal block descrip-
block tion on SM
SM 321; DI 32 x DC 24 V – –   –
SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V – –   –
SM 321; DI 16 x 4 VDC; source input – –   –
SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A – –  – –
SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A – –  – –
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with – –   
diagnostic interrupt
SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A – –  – –
SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A – –  – –

Assignment of the terminal block for three-conductor connection

Table 8-10 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection

Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals

Top row:
Terminals 0to 7:inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7

Center row:
All terminals: M potential

Bottom row:
All terminals: L + potential

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-16 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Connecting the power supply

Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.
With some digital modules, two jumpers are generally required for connecting the
supply voltage (refer to Table 8-9 on page 8-16).
You can wire the jumpers either in the front connector or in the terminal block.
Irrespective of this, you must interconnect the two Plus terminals and the two
Minus terminals.

Connecting the terminal block for three-conductor connection

– +

L+ 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
M 20

–
+
Front connector

Jumper (1)

Terminal block Terminal block

Jumper (2)
Jumper (1) or jumper (2) required

Figure 8-9 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a Three-Conductor Connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-17

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.3.4 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules

You can use the terminal block for 2A modules to wire the SM 322;
8 x DO 24 VDC/2A.

Connection Notes

Table 8-11 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection

Digital Modules Connection Notes

Supply Voltage Feed-In Add. Descr. on
jumper terminal
At front Add. At front
required block not
connector ground connector
for power in line with
only conn. at or terminal
supply descr. on
terminal block
SM
block
SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/2 A   – – –

Assignment of the Terminal Block for Connection of 2A Modules

Table 8-12 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules

Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Assignments of the

Terminals (left) Terminals (right)
Top row: Top row, on right:
Terminals 0 to 3: Terminals 0 to 3:
outputs x.0 to x.3 outputs x.4 to x.7
Center row: Center row, on right:
Terminals 0 to 3: Terminals 0 to 3:
potential M1 for x.0 to potential M2 for x.4 to
x.3 x.7
M1 M2
Bottom row: Bottom row:
two-terminal two-terminal
connection for M1 connection for M2

Connecting the power supply

Please observe the following when connecting the power supply:
• Apply the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.
• Connect the supply voltage at the front connector module to the potential
terminals using separate cables.
• You must equip each terminal block with a cable for M1 or M2, in addition to the
connecting cable.
• Connect M1 or M2 via a separate line with the front connector and the terminal
block. You may jumper the potential of M1 and M2.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-18 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Connection to terminal block for 2A modules

M
– + 1
1 L+ 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 M 10
2 L+ 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2 M 20

–
+ M
2
Front connector

Terminal
block

Figure 8-10 Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-19

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA with Analog Modules

Introduction
For wiring the module with actuators/sensors using SIMATIC TOP connect TPA,
you must first select the components as a function of the method of connection
(screw-type or spring-loaded terminal).

8.4.1 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Components and Selection Aid

Components
The following table contains all the component of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA.

Table 8-13 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Components of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Order number

Terminal block Quantity: 1 Spring-loaded terminals 6ES7924-0CC00-0AB0
Screw-type terminals 6ES7924-0CC00-0AA0
Quantity: 10 Spring-loaded terminals 6ES7924-0CC00-1AB0
Screw-type terminals 6ES7924-0CC00-1AA0
Front connector Voltage supply via:
Spring-loaded terminals
Screw-type terminals 6ES7921-3AF00-0AA0
6ES7921-3AG00-0AA0
Connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation 6ES7921-3BE10-0AA0
displacement connectors)
Shielding plate for terminal block, set of 4 6ES7928-1BA00-0AA0
Terminal element for:
2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm 6ES7390-5AB00-0AA0
1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0
1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm 6ES7390-5CA00-0AA0
Round-sheath ribbon cable, shielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0BA0
∅ 8 mm 60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0BA0
Crimping tool for 16-pin connector 6ES7928-0AA00-0AA0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-20 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.4.2 SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Terminal Assignment and Terminal

Allocation

Terminal marking
On the TPA terminal block, the terminals are identified by letters. This simplifies
the allocation of the terminals on the analog module to the terminals on the
terminal block.

Terminal block assignment

Table 8-14 Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals

Terminals Z and Y can be used for multiplying arbitrary
potentials and signals.

A B C D E F G H I K
The terminals having identical letters are electrically
Y YK K A A A A Z Z interconnected, with the exception of terminals Z and
Y Z Z, and also Y and Y.

Multiplier terminal
The lower tier of terminals on the terminal block is designed as 2 x 5 multiplier
terminals.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-21

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Terminal allocation of an analog module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Terminal Terminal assignment on

number on terminal block TPA
module
Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2

1 1 Y Y
2 2 B
3 3 C
4 4 D
5 5 E
6 6 F
7 7 G
8 8 H
9 9 I
10 10 K K

11 11 A A
12 12 B
13 13 C
14 14 D
15 15 E
16 16 F
17 17 G
18 18 H
19 19 I
20 20 Z Z

Figure 8-11 Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-22 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.4.3 Connecting the Signal-Line Shield

Two options for connecting the shield

You can connect the signal line shield to ground as follows:
• On the analog module by means of a shield-support element
(refer to the manual Hardware and Installation for the S7-300 or the manual
Distributed I/O device ET 200M in the section on wiring)
• Directly to the terminal block by means of a shielding plate

Connecting the shield to the terminal block using a shielding plate

1. Before mounting, attach a shielding plate to the terminal block.
2. Mount the terminal block on the DIN rail.
(In the figure below, you can see that the shielding plate is applied to the rear of
the terminal block and thus there is a connection to the grounded rail.)
3. Place the signal-line shield with the shield terminals on the shielding plate.

Shield support for shield terminal and

Loosen connecting cable to analog module
shielding plate

Press down lightly on the

release to loosen the
shielding plate Terminal block

Shielding plate

Snap the
shielding plate Shield support fro shield terminal
into place and signal lines from
actuators/sensors

Snap the shielding plate into place at the rear of the terminal block.

Figure 8-12 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 8-23

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.4.4 Connection Example

Connecting the load voltage supply

You can connect the load voltage supply of the analog module to the front
connector module. There are separate terminals on the front connector module for
the load voltage L+ and M. Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.

Allocation of front connector to terminal block

The upper socket of the front connector module is the connection for terminal
block 1 and the lower socket of the front connector module is the connection for
terminal block 2.

Connection example
The illustration below shows an example of connecting the analog input module
SM 321; AI 8 x 12 bits in “Resistance Test” mode.

Resistance Terminal assignment

test on terminal block TPA
Terminal number Terminal Terminal
on module block 1 block 2

L+ L+ 1 Y Y
SF
M0 + CH0 2 B
M0* 3 C
IC0 + 4 D
IC0* 5 E
M1 + CH2 6 F
M1* 7 G
IC1 + 8 H
IC1* 9 I
Comp + 10 K K

Comp

Comp–/ Mana 11 A A
M2 + CH4 12 B
M2* 13 C
IC2 + 14 D
IC2* 15 E
M3 + CH6 16 F
M3* 17 G
IC3 + 18 H
IC3* 19 I
M M 20 Z Z
M

Figure 8-13 Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to SM 321; AI 8 x 12 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

8-24 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A
In this chapter

Section Contents Page

A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User A-1
Program
A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules A-3
A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules A-5
A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules A-7
A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD A-11
A.6 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC A-19
A.7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits A-27
A.8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits A-30
A.9 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules A-36
A.10 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits A-39
A.11 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules A-41

A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the

User Program

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7.
In the user program, you can use a SFC:
• To reassign parameters to the module and
• To transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Parameters stored in data records
The parameters of the signal modules are located in data records 0 and 1; for
some other analog input modules, in data record 128 as well.

Modifiable parameters
You can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the signal module
using SFC 55. The parameters set on the CPU are not changed when you do this!
You cannot modify the parameters of data record 0 in the user program.

SFCs for parameter assignment

The following SFCs are available for assigning parameters to the signal modules in
the user program:

Table A-1 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules

SFC Identifier Application

No.
55 WR_PARM Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1 and 28)
to the addressed signal module.
56 WR_DPARM Transfer parameters (data record 0, 1 or 128) from the
CPU to the addressed signal module.
57 PARM_MOD Transfer all parameters (data record 0, 1 and 128)
from the CPU to the addressed signal module.

Description of the parameters

The following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the various module
classes. The parameters of the signal modules are described:
• In the on-line help of STEP 7
• In this reference manual
You will find the parameters that can be adjusted for the signal module
concerned in the specific sections for the different signal modules.

Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules
in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that
purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital input modules.

Note
For details of the parameters of parameterized digital input/output modules, see
the respective chapter of the module concerned.

You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
• In STEP 7
• With SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
• With SFB 53 “WRREC” (e. g. for GSD).
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 and
the SFB 53 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55, ...
SFB 53 Programming
Device
Input delay No Yes
Diagnosis of missing sensor supply 0 No Yes
Diagnosis of broken wire No Yes
Hardware interrupt enable Yes Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
1
Hardware interrupt with rising edge Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt with falling edge Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Data record 1 structure
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
digital input modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to “1”.

7 6 0
Byte 0

Diagnostics interrupt enable

Hardware interrupt enable
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Hardware interrupt

on rising edge at channel group 0

on falling edge at channel group 0
on rising edge at channel group 1
on falling edge at channel group 1
on rising edge at channel group 2
on falling edge at channel group 2
on rising edge at channel group 3
on falling edge at channel group 3

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 Hardware interrupt

on rising edge at channel group 4

on falling edge at channel group 4
on rising edge at channel group 5
on falling edge at channel group 5
on rising edge at channel group 6
on falling edge at channel group 6
on rising edge at channel group 7
on falling edge at channel group 7

Byte 3 Not relevant

Figure A-1 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital output modules.

Note
For details of the parameters of parameterized digital input/output modules, see
the respective chapter of the module concerned.

You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
• In STEP 7
• With SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
• With SFB 53 “WRREC” (e. g. for GSD).
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 and
the SFB 53 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55, ...
SFB 53 Programming
Device
Diagnosis of missing load voltage L+ No Yes
Diagnosis of broken wire No Yes
0
Diagnosis of short–circuit to M No Yes
Diagnosis of short–circuit to L+ No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Behavior on CPU STOP 1 Yes Yes
Enable substitute value “1” Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Data record 1 structure
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
digital output modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to “1”.

7 6 1 0
Byte 0
Behavior on CPU STOP
Hold last valid value
Apply substitute value
Diagnostics interrupt enable

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Substitute value

Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0

Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 Substitute value

Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8

Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15

Byte 3 Not relevant

Figure A-2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

Note
You should only enable the parameters in byte 0, “Hold last valid value” and
“Enable substitute value” as an alternative.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input modules.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
• In STEP 7
• With SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics No Yes
Diagnostics: With wire-break check No Yes
Temperature unit 0 No Yes
Temperature coefficient No Yes
Smoothing No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes
Cycle end interrupt enable Yes Yes
Interference Suppression Yes Yes
1
Measuring Method Yes Yes
Measuring Range Yes Yes
Upper limit value Yes Yes
Lower limit value Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Data record 1 structure
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
analog input modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 and 1 to “1”.

7 6 2 0
Byte 0

Cycle end interrupt enable

Diagnostics interrupt enable
Limit value interrupt enable

Byte 1 Interference suppression

Channel group 0
Channel group 1
Channel group 2 See Table A-5
Channel group 3

7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Measurement channel group 0
Byte 3 Measurement channel group 1
Byte 4 Measurement channel group 2
Byte 5 Measurement channel group 3

Measuring
See Table A-6
Measuring Method Range

Byte 6 High-Order Byte Upper limit value channel

Byte 7 Low-Order Byte group 0; channel 0
Byte 8 High-Order Byte Lower limit value channel
Byte 9 Low-Order Byte group 0; channel 0
Byte 10 High-Order Byte Upper limit value channel
Byte 11 Low-Order Byte group 1; channel 2
Byte 12 High-Order Byte Lower limit value channel
Byte 13 Low-Order Byte group 1; channel 2
Note: For the channel groups, only one limit value
for channel 1 is ever set.

Figure A-3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Note
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation
(see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Interference frequency suppression

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in
byte 1 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-3). You must count the resulting
integration time separately for each channel!

Table A-5 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules

Interference Suppression Integration Code

Time
400 Hz 2.5 ms 2#00
60 Hz 16.7 ms 2#01
50 Hz 20 ms 2#10
10 Hz 100 ms 2#11

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
analog input modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5
of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-3).

Note
Please note that a measuring range module may need to be reconnected,
depending on the measuring range (see Chapter 4)!

Table A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules

Measuring Code Measuring Range Code

Method
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 " 80 mV 2#0001
" 250 mV 2#0010
" 500 mV 2#0011
"1V 2#0100
" 2.5 V 2#0101
"5V 2#0110
1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
" 10 V 2#1001
" 25 mV 2#1010
" 50 mV 2#1011

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Table A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules

Measuring Code Measuring Range Code

Method
Four-wire 2#0010 " 3.2 mA 2#0000
transmitter " 10 mA 2#0001
0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
" 20 mA 2#0100
" 5 mA 2#0101
Two-wire 2#0011 4 to 20 mA 2#0011
transmitter
Resistance, 2#0100 150  2#0010
four-conductor 300  2#0100
connection 600  2#0110
10 k 2#1001
Resistor 2#0110 52 to 148  2#0001
four-conductor 250  2#0011
connection; 100  400  2#0101
compensation 700  2#0111
Thermal 2#1000 Pt 100 climate 2#0000
resistance + lineari Ni 100 climate 2#0001
zation Pt 100 standard range 2#0010
four-conductor Pt 200 standard range 2#0011
connection Pt 500 standard range 2#0100
Pt 1000 standard range 2#0101
Ni 1000 standard range 2#0110
Pt 200 climate 2#0111
Pt 500 climate 2#1000
Pt 1000 climate 2#1001
Ni 1000 climate 2#1001
Ni 100 standard range 2#1011
Thermocouples 2#1010 Type B [PtRh – PtRh] 2#0000
internal Type N [NiCrSi – NiSi] 2#0001
comparison Type E [NiCr – CuNi] 2#0010
Type R [PtRh –Pt] 2#0011
Thermocouples 2#1011
Type S [PtRh –Pt] 2#0100
external
Type J [Fe – CuNi IEC] 2#0101
comparison
Type L [Fe – CuNi] 2#0110
Thermocouples 2#1101 Type T [Cu – CuNi] 2#0111
+ linearization Type K [NiCr – Ni] 2#1000
internal Type U [Cu –Cu Ni] 2#1001
comparison
Thermocouples 2#1110
+ linearization
external
comparison

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-10 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input
module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
• In STEP 7
• With SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics No Yes
0
Diagnostics: With wire-break check No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes
1
Cycle end interrupt enable Yes Yes
Temperature unit Yes Yes
Measuring Method Yes Yes
Measuring Range Yes Yes
Module filtering mode Yes Yes
Temperature coefficient Yes Yes
128
Interference Suppression Yes Yes
Smoothing Yes Yes
Upper limit value Yes Yes
Lower limit value Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Structure of data record 1
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for SM 331;
AI 8 xRTD. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to “1”.

7 6 2 0
Byte 0

Temperature unit 0: degrees Celsius

1: degrees Fahrenheit
Cycle end interrupt enable
Diagnostics interrupt enable
Limit value interrupt enable

Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned

Figure A-4 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-12 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 128

The figure below shows the structure of data record 128 for SM 331;
AI 8 x RTD.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Module filtering mode (refer to Table A-8)
Byte 0
Byte 1 Interference suppression

Channel group 0
Channel group 1
(refer to Table A-9)
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

Measuring method, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 3

Measuring range, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-10)
Byte 4

Temperature coefficient, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-11)
Smoothing, channel group 0
(refer to Table A-12)
Byte 5

Measuring method, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 6

Measuring range, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 7

Temperature coefficient, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-11)
Smoothing, channel group 1
(refer to Table A-12)

Figure A-5 Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Byte 8

Measuring method, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 9

Measuring range, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 10

Temperature coefficient, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-11)
Smoothing, channel group 2
(refer to Table A-12)

Byte 11

Measuring method, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 12

Measuring range, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 13

Temperature coefficient, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-11)
Smoothing, channel group 3
(refer to Table A-12)

Byte 14 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 0;
Byte 15 Low Byte channel 0
Byte 16 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 0;
Byte 17 Low Byte channel 0

Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 19 Low Byte channel 1

Byte 20 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 21 Low Byte channel 1

Figure A-6 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-14 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 22 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 1;
Byte 23 Low Byte channel 2

Byte 24 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 1;
Byte 25 Low Byte channel 2

Upper limit value

Byte 26 High Byte channel group 1;
channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Lower limit value
Byte 28 High Byte channel group 1;
Byte 29 Low Byte channel 3

Byte 30 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 2;
Byte 31 Low Byte channel 4
Byte 32 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 2;
Byte 33 Low Byte channel 4

Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
channel group 2
Byte 35 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 36 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 2;
Byte 37 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 38 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 3;
Byte 39 Low Byte channel 6
Byte 40 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 3;
Byte 41 Low Byte channel 6

Upper limit value

Byte 42 High Byte
channel group 3;
Byte 43 Low Byte channel 7

Byte 44 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 3;
Byte 45 Low Byte channel 7

Figure A-7 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued)

Note
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation
(see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-15

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Operating modes of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD
The table below contains the codes for the different operating modes, which you
enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).

Table A-8 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Module filtering mode Code

8 channels hardware filter 2#00000000
8 channels software filter 2#00000001
4 channels hardware filter 2#00000010

Interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in
byte 1 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5). Note that the settings 50 Hz, 60 Hz
and 400 Hz only apply to 8-channel software filter mode. The setting 50, 60 and
400 Hz only applies to 8-channel and 4-channel hardware filter mode.

Table A-9 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Interference Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50/60/400 Hz 2#11

Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
module and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of
data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3).

Table A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Measuring Method Code Measuring Range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Resistance, four-conductor 2#0100 150  2#0010
connection 300  2#0100
600  2#0110
Resistance, three-conductor 2#0101 150  2#0010
connection 300  2#0100
600  2#0110

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-16 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Table A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, continued

Measuring Method Code Measuring Range Code

Thermal 2#1000 Pt 100 climate 2#00000000
resistance + linearization Ni 100 climate 2#00000001
four-conductor connection Pt 100 standard 2#00000010
Ni 100 standard 2#00000011
Pt 500 standard 2#00000100
Pt 1000 standard 2#00000101
Ni 1000 standard 2#00000110
Pt 200 climate 2#00000111
Pt 500 climate 2#00001000
Pt 1000 climate 2#00001001
Ni 1000 climate 2#00001010
Pt 200 standard 2#00001011
Ni 120 standard 2#00001100
Ni 120 climate 2#00001101
Cu 10 climate 2#00001110
Cu 10 standard 2#00001111
Ni 200 standard 2#00010000
Ni 200 climate 2#00010001
Ni 500 standard 2#00010010
Ni 500 climate 2#00010011
Thermal resistance + 2#1001 Pt 100 climate 2#00000000
linearization three-conductor Ni 100 climate 2#00000001
connection Pt 100 standard 2#00000010
Ni 100 standard 2#00000011
Pt 500 standard 2#00000100
Pt 1000 standard 2#00000101
Ni 1000 standard 2#00000110
Pt 200 climate 2#00000111
Pt 500 climate 2#00001000
Pt 1000 climate 2#00001001
Ni 1000 climate 2#00001010
Pt 200 standard 2#00001011
Ni 120 standard 2#00001100
Ni 120 climate 2#00001101
Cu 10 climate 2#00001110
Cu 10 standard 2#00001111
Ni 200 standard 2#00010000
Ni 200 climate 2#00010001
Ni 500 standard 2#00010010
Ni 500 climate 2#00010011

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-17

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Temperature coefficient of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
The table below contains the codes for the temperature coefficient which you enter
in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).

Table A-11 Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Temperature coefficient Code

Pt0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (IPTS-68) 2#0000
Pt0.003916 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0001
Pt0.003902 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0010
Pt0.003920 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0011
Pt0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (ITS-90) 2#0100
Ni 0.006180 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1000
Ni 0.006720 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1001
Cu0.00427 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1100

Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

The table below contains the codes for all smoothing modes, which you enter in
the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).

Table A-12 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Smoothing Code
None 2#00
Low 2#01
Average 2#10
High 2#11

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-18 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.6 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input
module SM 331; AI 8 x TC.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
• In STEP 7
• With SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-13 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics No Yes
0
Diagnostics: With wire-break check No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes
1
Cycle end interrupt enable Yes Yes
Temperature unit Yes Yes
Measuring Method Yes Yes
128
Measuring Range Yes Yes
Module filtering mode Yes Yes
Reaction to open thermocouple Yes Yes
Interference Suppression Yes Yes
128
Smoothing Yes Yes
Upper limit value Yes Yes
Lower limit value Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-19

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Structure of data record 1
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to “1”.

7 6 2 0
Byte 0

Temperature unit 0: degrees Celsius

1: degrees Fahrenheit
Cycle end interrupt enable
Diagnostics interrupt enable
Limit value interrupt enable

Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned

Figure A-8 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-20 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 128

The figure below shows the structure of data record 128 for SM 331;
AI 8 x TC.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Module filtering mode (refer to Table A-14)
Byte 0
Byte 1 Interference suppression

Channel group 0
Channel group 1
(refer to Table A-15)
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

Measuring method, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 3

Measuring range, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 4

Smoothing, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-18)

Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 0
(refer to Table A-17)

Byte 5

Measuring method, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 6

Measuring range, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 7

Smoothing, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-18)

Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 1
(refer to Table A-17)

Figure A-9 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-21

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Byte 8

Measuring method, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 9

Measuring range, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 10

Smoothing, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-18)

Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 2
(refer to Table A-17)

Byte 11

Measuring method, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 12

Measuring range, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 13

Smoothing, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-18)

Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 3
(refer to Table A-17)

Byte 14 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 0;
Byte 15 Low Byte channel 0
Byte 16 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 0;
Byte 17 Low Byte channel 0

Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 19 Low Byte channel 1

Byte 20 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 21 Low Byte channel 1

Figure A-10 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-22 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 22 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 1;
Byte 23 Low Byte channel 2

Byte 24 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 1;
Byte 25 Low Byte channel 2

Upper limit value

Byte 26 High Byte channel group 1;
channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Lower limit value
Byte 28 High Byte channel group 1;
Byte 29 Low Byte channel 3

Byte 30 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 2;
Byte 31 Low Byte channel 4
Byte 32 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 2;
Byte 33 Low Byte channel 4

Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
channel group 2
Byte 35 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 36 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 2;
Byte 37 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 38 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 3;
Byte 39 Low Byte channel 6
Byte 40 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 3;
Byte 41 Low Byte channel 6

Upper limit value

Byte 42 High Byte
channel group 3;
Byte 43 Low Byte channel 7

Byte 44 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 3;
Byte 45 Low Byte channel 7

Figure A-11 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued)

Note
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation
(see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-23

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Operating modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
The table below contains the codes for the different operating modes, which you
enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).

Table A-14 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Module filtering mode Code

8 channels hardware filter 2#00000000
8 channels software filter 2#00000001
4 channels hardware filter 2#00000010

Interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in
byte 1 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9). Note that the settings 400 Hz,
60 Hz and 50 Hz only apply to 8-channel software filter mode. The setting 50, 60
and 400 Hz only applies to 8-channel and 4-channel hardware filter mode.

Table A-15 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Interference Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50/60/400 Hz 2#11

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-24 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
module and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of
data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3).

Table A-16 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Measuring Method Code Measuring Code

Range
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Thermocouple, linear, 2#1010 B 2#0000
reference temperature 0 °C N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
Thermocouple, linear, 2#1011 B 2#0000
reference temperature 50 °C N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
Thermocouple, linear, internal comparison 2#1101 B 2#0000
N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
Thermocouple, linear, external comparison 2#1110 B 2#0000
N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-25

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Reaction to open thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
The table below contains the codes for the reactions to an open thermocouple,
which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).

Table A-17 Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Reaction to open thermocouple Code

Overflow 2#0
Underflow 2#1

Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

The table below contains the codes for all smoothing modes, which you enter in
the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).

Table A-18 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Smoothing Code
None 2#00
Low 2#01
Average 2#10
High 2#11

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-26 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
analog input module.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte to “1”.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 0 Temperature measurement

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Interference suppression

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 Measuring method and measuring range channel 0
Byte 3 Measuring method and measuring range channel 1
Byte 4 Measuring method and measuring range channel 2
Byte 5 Measuring method and measuring range channel 3
Byte 6 Measuring method and measuring range channel 4
Byte 7 Measuring method and measuring range channel 5
Byte 8 Measuring method and measuring range channel 6
Byte 9 Measuring method and measuring range channel 7

Measuring Range
Measuring Method

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 10 Temperature coefficient channel 0 and 1
Byte 11 Temperature coefficient channel 2 and 3
Byte 12 Temperature coefficient channel 4 and 5
Byte 13 Temperature coefficient channel 6 and 7

Channel 1, 3, 5, 7
Channel 0, 2, 4, 6

Figure A-12 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-27

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Temperature measurement
The table below contains the codes for the different temperature measurements,
which you enter in byte 0 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12).

Table A-19 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module

Temperature unit for linearization Code

Degrees Celsius 2#0000 0000
Degrees Fahrenheit 2#0000 1000
Kelvin 2#0001 0000

Interference frequency suppression

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in
byte 1 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12). You must work out the resulting
integration time separately for each module!

Table A-20 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Module

Interference Suppression Integration Time Code

60 Hz 50 ms 2#01
50 Hz 60 ms 2#10

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
analog input module and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 13
of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12).

Note
Please note that the analog input module must be wired in accordance with the
measuring range and at the front connector correspondingly!

Table A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module

Measuring Code Measuring Range Code

Method
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 " 50 mV 2#1011
" 500 mV 2#0011
"1V 2#0100
"5V 2# 0110
1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
" 10 V 2#1001

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-28 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Table A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module

Measuring Code Measuring Range Code

Method
Current 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
" 20 mA 2#0100
Resistors 2#0101 600 Ω 2#0110
6 kΩ 2#1000
Bulb resistor 2#1001 Pt 100 Climate 2#0000
(linear) Pt 100 Standard 2#0010
Ni 100 Climate 2#0001
Ni 100 Standard 2#0011
Ni 1000 / LG-Ni 1000 Climate 2#1010
Ni 1000 / LG-Ni 1000 Standard 2#0110

Temperature coefficient
The table below contains the codes for the temperature coefficient which you enter
in the corresponding byte of data record (refer to Figure A-12).

Table A-22 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module

Temperature coefficient Measuring Range Code

Pt0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (ITS-90) Pt 100 2#0100
Ni 0.006180 Ω/Ω/°C Ni 100 / Ni 1000 2#1000
Ni 0.005000 Ω/Ω/°C LG-Ni 1000 2#1010

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-29

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
A.8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Parameters
Table A-23contains all the parameters which you can set for the isolated analog
input module SM 331; AI 8 x bits. This comparison indicates which methods you
can use for the configuration of the individual parameters:
• SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
• STEP 7 programming device
The parameters that you have set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the
module by means of SFC 56 or SFC 57.

Table A-23 Parameters for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Data Record Configurable with...

Parameter
No. ... SFC 55 ...programming device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics No Yes
Diagnostics: With wire-break 0 No Yes
check
Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Cycle end interrupt enable Yes Yes
Module mode Yes Yes
Interference Suppression Yes Yes
Measuring Method Yes Yes
Measuring Range Yes Yes
128
Smoothing Yes Yes
Upper limit value Yes Yes
Lower limit value Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-30 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 1

Figure A-13 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the isolated
analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits.
You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to “1”.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number

Byte 0

Cycle end interrupt enable

Diagnostics interrupt enable

Limit value interrupt enable

Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned

Figure A-13 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-31

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Structure of data record 128
Figure shows the structure of data record 128 for the parameters of the isolated
analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Module mode (see Table A-24)
Byte 0
Byte 1 Interference
frequency suppression

Channel group 0
Channel group 1
Refer to Table A-25
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

Measuring method, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-26)

Byte 3

Measuring range, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-26)

Byte 4

Smoothing, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-12)

Byte 5

Measuring method, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-26)

Byte 6

Measuring range, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-26)

Byte 7

Smoothing, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-12)

Figure A-14 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-32 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 8

Measuring method, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-26)

Byte 9

Measuring range, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-26)

Byte 10

Smoothing, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-12)

Byte 11

Measuring method, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-26)

Byte 12

Measuring range, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-26)

Byte 13

Smoothing, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-12)

Upper limit value

Byte 14 High Byte channel group 0;
channel 0
Byte 15 Low Byte
Byte 16 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 0;
Byte 17 Low Byte channel 0

Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 19 Low Byte channel 1

Byte 20 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 0;
Byte 21 Low Byte channel 1

Figure A-15 Data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (continued)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-33

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Upper limit value
Byte 22 High Byte channel group 1;
channel 2
Byte 23 Low Byte
Byte 24 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 1;
Byte 25 Low Byte channel 2

Upper limit value

Byte 26 High Byte channel group 1;
channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Byte 28 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 1;
Byte 29 Low Byte channel 3

Upper limit value

Byte 30 High Byte
channel group 2;
Byte 31 Low Byte channel 4

Byte 32 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 2;
Byte 33 Low Byte channel 4

Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
channel group 2
Byte 35 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 36 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 2;
Byte 37 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 38 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 3;
Byte 39 Low Byte channel 6
Byte 40 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 3;
Byte 41 Low Byte channel 6

High Byte Upper limit value

Byte 42
channel group 3;
Byte 43 Low Byte channel 7

Byte 44 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 3;
Byte 45 Low Byte channel 7

Figure A-16 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (continued)

Note
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation
(see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-34 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Module modes
Table A-24 contains the codes for the module modes, which you enter in byte 0 of
data record 128 (see Figure A-14).

Table A-24 Codes for the modes of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Module mode Code

8 channels 2#00000000
4 channels 2#00000001

Interference suppression
Table A-25 contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte
1 of data record 128 (see Figure A-14). Note that 4-channel mode only functions if
interference frequency suppression of 50, 60 and 400 Hz is set.

Table A-25 Codes for interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Interference Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50, 60 and 400 Hz 2#11

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

Table A-26 contains all the measuring ranges for the isolated analog input module
SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits. Table A-26 also shows the codes for measuring methods
and measuring ranges. You must enter these codes in accordance with the
required measuring range in the relevant byte of data record 128
(see Figure A-14).

Table A-26 Codes for the measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits
Measuring Method Code Measuring Range Code
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 ±5V 2#0110
1 to 5 V 2#0111
± 10 V 2#1001
Current (4-wire transmitter) 2#0002 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
± 20 mA 2#0100

Settings for input smoothing

Table A-27 contains all the smoothing settings for the isolated analog input module
SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits. According to the smoothing required, you must enter these
codes in the corresponding byte of data set 128 (see imag eA-14.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-35

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Table A-27 Codes for the smoothing mode settings of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits

Smoothing mode setting Code

None 2#00
Low 2#01
Average 2#10
High 2#11

A.9 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Parameters
Table A-28 contains all the parameters you can set for analog output modules..
The comparison shows:
• Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and
• Which parameters you can change with SFC 55 “WR_PARM”.

The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module
with SFCs 56 and 57.

Table A-28 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics 0 No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Behavior on CPU STOP Yes Yes
Output type 1 Yes Yes
Output Range Yes Yes
Substitute value Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-36 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Data record 1 structure

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
analog output modules.
You activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in
byte 0 to “1”.

7 6 0
Byte 0

Diagnostics interrupt enable

7 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Behavior on CPU STOP

Channel group 0
Channel group 1 0 = Outputs
Channel group 2 de-energized
Channel group 3 1 = Hold last value

7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Output channel group 0
Byte 3 Output channel group 1
Byte 4 Output channel group 2
Byte 5 Output channel group 3

Output Range
Output type Refer to Table A-29

Byte 6 High-Order Byte

Substitute value channel
Byte 7 Low-Order Byte
group 0
Byte 8 High-Order Byte
Substitute value channel
Byte 9 Low-Order Byte
group 1
Byte 10 High-Order Byte
Substitute value channel
Byte 11 Low-Order Byte
group 2
Byte 12 High-Order Byte
Substitute value channel
Byte 13 Low-Order Byte
group 3

Figure A-17 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-37

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Setting substitute values

Note
For output ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V you must set the substitute value
E500H so that the output remains de-energized (refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on
pages 4-26 and 4-27).
The representation of the substitute values corresponds to the analog value
representation. You should observe the relevant range limits when setting the
substitute values.

Output methods and output ranges

The table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog
output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of
data record 1 (refer to FigureA-17).

Table A-29 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules

Output type Code Output Range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
" 10 V 2#1001
Current 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
" 20 mA 2#0100

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-38 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.10 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits

Parameters
Table A-28 contains all the parameters that you can set for the analog output
module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits. The comparison shows:
• Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and
• Which parameters you can change with SFC 55 “WR_PARM”.

The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module
with SFCs 56 and 57.

Table A-30 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits.

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics 0 No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Behavior on CPU STOP Yes Yes
1
Output type Yes Yes
Output Range Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-39

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Structure of data record 1
The diagram below shows the structure of data record 1 of the parameters of the
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits.
You activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in
byte 0 to “1”.

7 6 0
Byte 0

Diagnostics interrupt enable

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Behavior on CPU STOP

Channel 4 Channel 0
Channel 5 Channel 1 0 = Outputs
Channel 6 Channel 2 de-energized
Channel 7 Channel 3 1 = Hold last value

7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Output channel 0
Byte 3 Output channel 1
Byte 4 Output channel 2
Byte 5 Output channel 3
Byte 6 Output channel 4
Byte 7 Output channel 5
Byte 8 Output channel 6
Byte 9 Output channel 7

Output Range
Output type See Table A-31

Bytes 10 to 13 are not assigned

Figure A-18 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-40 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Output method and output range

The following table contains all the output methods and output ranges of the
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits , with their coding. You must enter these codes in bytes 2
to 9 of data record 1 (refer to FigureA-18).

Table A-31 Codes for the output ranges of the analog output module SM332;
AO 8 x 12 bits
Output type Code Output range Code
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
± 10 V 2#1001
Current 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
± 20 mA 2#0100

A.11 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input/output
modules.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
• In STEP 7
• With SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-32 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Measuring Method Yes Yes
Measuring Range Yes Yes
Integration Time 1 Yes Yes
Output type Yes Yes
Output Range Yes Yes

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-41

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Structure of data record 1
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
analog input/output modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 and 1 to “1”.

7 0
Byte 0 Not relevant

7 0
Byte 1 Reset Time
Set the same parameters for
all channels.
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3

7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Meas. channel 0
Byte 3 Meas. channel 1
Byte 4 Meas. channel 2
Byte 5 Meas. channel 3

Measuring Measuring
Method Range
7 4 3 0
Byte 6 Output channel 0
Byte 7 Output channel 1

Output type Output Range

Byte 8

: : Not relevant
Byte 13

Figure A-19 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-42 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
analog input/output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes
2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-19).

Table A-33 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Measuring Method Code Measuring Range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 0 to 10 V 2#1000
Resistance, four-conductor connection 2#0100 10 k 2#1001
Thermal resistance + linearization 2#1000 Pt 100 climate 2#0000
four-conductor connection

Output methods and output ranges

The table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog
input/output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 6 and 7
of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-19).

Table A-34 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Output type Code Output Range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 0 to 10 V 2#1000

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 A-43

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data
A-44 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules B
In this Appendix

Section Contents Page

B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the B-1
User Program
B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 B-2
B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 7 B-5
B.4 Diagnostic data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT B-7

B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the

User Program

In this Appendix
This Appendix describes the structure of the diagnostic data in the system data.
You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostics
data of the signal module in the STEP 7 user program.

Diagnostic data are contained in data records

The diagnostic data of a module can be up to 16 bytes long and are contained in
data records 0 and 1:
• Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data that describe the current
status of a programmable logic controller.
• Data record 1 contains the four bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained
in data record 0 and as many as 12 bytes of module specific diagnostic data.

Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal
modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for
that purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 B-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data are
described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit
concerned is set to “1”.

Bytes 0 and 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 0

Module problem
Internal malfunction
External malfunction
Channel error present
External auxiliary supply missing
Front connector missing
Module not parameterized.
Incorrect parameter in the module

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 0 0

Module type (see Table B-1)

Channel information available
User information available

Figure B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data

Module types
The following table contains the IDs of the module classes (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1).

Table B-1 Codes of the Module Types

Code Module Type

0101 Analog module
0110 CPU
1000 Function module
1100 CP
1111 Digital module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

B-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

Bytes 2 and 3

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 0

Memory module or measuring range module

(for analog modules) incorrect or missing
Communication fault
Operating status 0: RUN
1: STOP
Scan time-out
Module-internal supply voltage failure
Battery empty
Complete backup supply failure

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 3 0

Rack failure
Processor failure
EPROM error
RAM error
ADC/DAC error
Fuse blown
Hardware interrupt lost

Figure B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 B-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Bytes 4 to 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 4

Channel type
B#16#70: Digital input
B#16#71: Analog input
B#16#72: Digital output
B#16#73: Analog output
Further channel type available?
0: no
1: yes
7 0
Byte 5 Number of diagnostics bits that
the module outputs per channel
7 0
Byte 6 Number of channels of the same
type in one module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 7

Channel error channel 0 / channel group 0

Channel error channel 1 / channel group 1
...
...
...
...
Channel
... error channel 6 / channel group 6
Channel error channel 7 / channel group 7

Figure B-3 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

B-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8

From byte 8 up to byte 15, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic
data. The figures below show the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel
or a channel group of the specific module. The following general rule applies:
When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to “1”.
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the
section called “Diagnostics of the Modules”.

Digital input channel of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; with hardware and

diagnostic interrupts

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0

Configuring/parameter assignment error

Ground fault
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
Sensor supply missing

Figure B-4 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Digital output channel of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; with diagnostic

interrupt

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0

Configuring/parameter assignment error

Ground fault
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
External auxiliary supply missing
Overtemperature

Figure B-5 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the SM 322;
DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 B-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog input channel of the SM 331 modules with diagnostics capability

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Configuring/parameter assignment error

Common mode error
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
Reference channel error
Underflow
Overflow

Figure B-6 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a SM 331 with Diagnostics
Capability

Analog output channel of the SM 332 modules with diagnostics capability

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0

Configuring/parameter assignment error

Common mode error
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
External auxiliary supply missing

Figure B-7 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a SM 332 with Diagnostics
Capability

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

B-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

B.4 Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for position
detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT are described below. The following general
rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to “1”.
Section 5.4 includes a description of possible error causes and appropriate
remedies.

Bytes 0 and 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 0 0 0

Module problem
Internal malfunction
External malfunction
Channel error present
Module not parameterized.
Incorrect parameter in the module

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 0 0 0

Module class 05H

Channel information available

Figure B-8 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 B-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Bytes 2 to 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 0

Scan time-out

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 3 Not relevant

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 4 0

Channel type
79H: SM POS-INPUT
7 0
Byte 5 Number of diagnostics bits that the module
outputs per channel: 8 bits long
7 0
Byte 6 Number of channels of the same
type in one module: 3 channels

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 0

Channel error, channel 0

Channel error, channel 1
Channel error, channel 2

Figure B-9 Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Bytes 8 to 10
From byte 8 up to byte 10, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic
data. The figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel
of the SM 338; POS-INPUT.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0

Configuration/parameterization error
(internal channel error)
Encoder error (external channel error)

Figure B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

B-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Dimension Drawings C
Introduction
In this appendix you will find the dimension drawings for the most important
components of an S7-300. The specifications in these dimension drawings are
required for dimensioning the S7-300 configuration. The dimensions of an S7-300
configuration must be taken into account when installing an S7-300 in cabinets,
switchgear rooms, etc. This appendix does not contain any dimension drawings of
the CPUs of the S7-300 or M7-300 or of the IM 153-1. These dimension drawings
are contained in the relevant manuals.

Contents
In this appendix, you will find the dimension drawings of the following S7-300
components.

Section Contents Page

C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails C-2
C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules C-8
C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules C-13
C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules C-13
C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories C-15

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 C-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails

483 mm standard rail

Figure C-1 shows the dimension drawing of the 483 mm standard rail.

8.7 465.2

163.9 155

7
24

19
35

15 11
482.6

Figure C-1 Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail

530 mm standard rail

Figure C-2 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm standard rail.

15 20 25 = 500

25
5.2
24

19
35

15 18
530

Figure C-2 Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

C-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dimension Drawings

830 mm standard rail

Figure C-3 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm standard rail.

15 32 25 = 800

25

5.2
24

19
35

15 18
830

Figure C-3 Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail

2000 mm standard rail

Figure C-4 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm standard rail.
24

19
35

15 2000

Figure C-4 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 C-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
160 mm rail
Figure C-5 shows the dimension drawing of the 160 mm rail.

32.5

7
M6
57.2

122
10

10 140 6
160 15

Figure C-5 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width

482.6 mm rail
Figure C-6 shows the dimension drawing of the 482.6 mm rail.
32.5

M6
57.2

122

10

8.3 466 6
482.6 15

Figure C-6 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

C-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dimension Drawings

530 mm rail
Figure C-7 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm rail.

32.5

7
M6
57.2

122
10

15 500 6
530 15

Figure C-7 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width

830 mm rail
Figure C-8 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm rail.
32.5

M6
57.2

122

10

15 800 6
830 15

Figure C-8 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Width

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 C-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
2000 mm rail
Figure C-9 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm rail.

122
2000 6
15

Figure C-9 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

C-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dimension Drawings

Rail for “Insert and Remove” function

Figure C-10 shows the dimension drawing of the rail for the “Insert and Remove”
function with active bus module, S7-300 module and explosion-proof partition. The
rail is 482.6 mm or 530 mm long.

Explosion-proof
partition

S7-300 module

166
152
Active bus module

59
Rail for the ”Insert
and Remove”
function
122
125
155

Figure C-10 Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for “Insert and Remove” Function with Active
Bus Module, S7-300 Module and Explosion-proof Partition

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 C-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Bus modules (Expansion buses)
Figure C-11 shows the dimension drawing of the active bus module for the “Insert
and Remove” function.

Bus modules
BM PS/IM (...7HA)
BM IM/IM (...7HD)
BM 2 40 (...7HB)
BM 1 80 (...7HC)

97
92

Figure C-11 Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules

C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules

PS 307; 2 A
Figure C-12 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 2 A power supply
module.

127.5

50 120
125

Figure C-12 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

C-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dimension Drawings

PS 307; 5A
Figure C-13 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 5 A power supply
module.

127.5

80 120

125

Figure C-13 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 C-9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
PS 307; 10 A
Figure C-14 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 10 A power supply
module.

127.5
200 120

125

Figure C-14 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

C-10 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dimension Drawings

PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP

Figures C-15 and C-16 show the dimension drawings of the configuration of a
power supply module PS 307; 5 A with the CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Observe
the dimensions that result from the use of the power connector for wiring the
PS 307; 5 A with the CPU.

132
27

68

Figure C-15 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs
313/314/315/315-2 DP. Front View

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 C-11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP
Figure C-16 shows the dimension drawing of the power supply module PS 307; 5 A
with the CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP in the side view.

130

120

125

6 13

Figure C-16 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs
313/314/315/315-2 DP. Side View

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

C-12 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dimension Drawings

C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules

IM 360
Figure C-17 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 360.

40 120

125
Figure C-17 Interface Module IM 360

IM 361
Figure C-18 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 361.

80 120
125

Figure C-18 Interface Module IM 361

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 C-13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
IM 365
Figure C-19 shows the dimension drawing of interface module IM 365.

40 120

125
9
120

125

Figure C-19 Interface Module IM 365

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

C-14 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dimension Drawings

C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules

Signal Module
Figure C-20 shows the dimension drawing of the signal module.
A signal module might look slightly different than the example below. The
dimensions however are always the same.

40 120

130
Figure C-20 Signal Module 125

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 C-15

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories

Shield connecting element

Figure C-21 shows the dimension drawing of the shield connecting element in
connection with two signal modules.

120

190
40

80

Figure C-21 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

C-16 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dimension Drawings

SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier

Figure C-22 shows the dimension drawing of the 3-tier SIMATIC TOP connect.

35

70
60 40.5

35.5

Figure C-22 SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier

SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier

Figure C-23 shows the dimension drawing of the 2-tier SIMATIC TOP connect.
35

70

60 40.5

35.5

Figure C-23 SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 C-17

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier
Figure C-24 shows the dimension drawing of the 1-tier SIMATIC TOP connect.

35

55
52 40.5

35.5

Figure C-24 SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier

RS 485 repeater on standard rail

Figure C-25 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the standard
rail.

45 73

128
125

Figure C-25 RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

C-18 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dimension Drawings

RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail

Figure C-26 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the S7-300
rail.

45 70

125
Figure C-26 RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 C-19

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data
C-20 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Spare Parts and Accessories for
S7-300 Modules D
Spare parts
Table D-1 lists all the parts you can order separately or later for S7-300
programmable controllers.

Table D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts

S7-300 Parts Order number

Bus connector 6ES7390-0AA00-0AA0
Power connector between power supply unit 6ES7390-7BA00-0AA0
and CPU
Labeling strip (Qty 10)
• For 8/16-channel modules 6ES7392-2XX00-0AA0
• For 32-channel modules 6ES7392-2XX10-0AA0
Labeling strips to be printed
• For 16-channel modules (petrol) 6ES7392-2AX00-0AA0
(light beige) 6ES7392-2BX00-0AA0
(yellow) 6ES7392-2CX00-0AA0
(red) 6ES7392-2DX00-0AA0
• For 32-channel modules (petrol) 6ES7392-2AX10-0AA0
(light beige) 6ES7392-2BX10-0AA0
(yellow) 6ES7392-2CX10-0AA0
(red) 6ES7392-2DX10-0AA0
• Instructions for printing labeling strips with www.siemens.de/automation/csi/
artwork product
Contribution ID No.: 11978022
Slot numbering label 6ES7912-0AA00-0AA0
Front connector 20-pin
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7392-1BJ00-0AA0
Front connector 40-pin
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7392-1AM00-0AA0
Front connector for 2 flat ribbon terminals
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7921-3AB00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7921-3AA00-0AA0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 D-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Table D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts, continued

S7-300 Parts Order number

Front connector for 4 flat ribbon terminals
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7921-3AA20-0AA0
SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier, with
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7924-0AA00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7924-0AA00-0AB0
SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier, with
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7924-0BB00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7924-0BB00-0AB0
SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier, with
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7924-0CA00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7924-0CA00-0AB0
Round-sheath ribbon cable (16-pin)
• Unshielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0AA0
• Unshielded 60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0AA0
• Shielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0BA0
• Shielded 60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0BA0
Plug-in connectors, 16-pin, set of 8 (insulation 6ES7921-3BE10-0AA0
displacement connectors)
Shield connecting element 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0
Shield connection terminals for
• 2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 6ES7390-5AB00-0AA0
to 6 mm
• 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0
mm
• 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 6ES7390-5CA00-0AA0
mm
Measuring range module for analog modules 6ES7974-0AA00-0AA0
Fuse set for 120/230 VAC digital output 6ES7973-1HD00-0AA0
modules (contains 10 fuses and 2 fuse
carriers)
Interconnecting cable between IM 360 and
IM 361 or IM 361 and IM 361
• 1m 6ES7368-3BB01-0AA0
• 2.5 m 6ES7368-3BC51-0AA0
• 5m 6ES7368-3BF01-0AA0
• 10 m 6ES7368-3CB01-0AA0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

D-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic
Sensitive Devices (ESD) E
Introduction
In this appendix, we explain
• what is meant by “electrostatic sensitive devices”
• the precautions you must observe when handling and working with electrostatic
sensitive devices.

Contents
This chapter contains the following sections on electrostatic sensitive devices:

Section Contents Page

E.1 What is ESD? E-2
E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons E-3
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge E-4
Damage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 E-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
E.1 What is ESD?

Definition
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components.
Due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages
and thus to any electrostatic discharge.
The abbreviation ESD has been introduced for these Electrostatic Sensitive
Devices/Modules. The designation ESD is used internationally for electrostatic
sensitive device.
Electrostatic sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:

Caution
! Electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the
voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. These voltages are
present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without
previously being electrostatically discharged. In most cases, the damage caused
by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only
after a prolonged period of operation.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

E-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons

Charging
Every person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its
surroundings can be charged electrostatically.
Figure E-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can
build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure.
These values are in conformity with the specifications of IEC 801-2.

Voltage in kV
(kV)
16 1 Synthetic material
15
14 2 Wool
13
3 Antistatic material,
12 for example, wood
11 1 or concrete
10
9
8
7
6
5
4 2
3
2
3
1
5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Relative air
humidity in %

Figure E-1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 E-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge
Damage

Ensure sufficient grounding

Make sure that the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently
grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices. You thus avoid
electrostatic charging.

Avoid direct contact

You should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable
(for example, during maintenance work). Hold modules without touching the pins of
components or printed conductors. In this way, the discharged energy cannot
affect the sensitive devices.
If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your
body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. Use
grounded measuring devices only.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

E-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
List of Abbreviations F
Abbreviation Explanation
AC Alternating current
ADC Analog-to digital converter
AI Analog input
AO Analog output
PLC Programmable logic controller
COMP Compensating terminal
CP Communications processor
CPU Central processing unit of a PLC
DAC Digital-to-analog converter
DB Data block
DC Direct current
DI Digital input
DO Digital output
ESD Electrostatic sensitive devices
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory
EWS Apply substitute value
FB Function block
FC Function
FEPROM Flash erasable programmable read only memory
ES Encoder supply
I+ Measuring lead for current input
IC Constant-current lead
KV Shunt comparison
L+ Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
LWH Hold last valid value
FOC Fiber-optic cable
M Ground terminal
M+ Measuring lead (positive)
M– Measuring lead (negative)
MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
MPI Multipoint interface

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 F-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
OB Organization block
OP Operator panel
OS Operator system
PIQ Process-image output table
PII Process-image input table
Programming Programming device
device
PS Power supply
QI Analog output current
QV Analog output voltage
RAM Random access memory
RL Load impedance
S+ Detector lead (positive)
S– Detector lead (negative)
SF ”Group error” error LED
SFB System function block
SFC System function
SM Signal module
PLC Programmable logic control
SSI Synchronous serial interface
TD Text display
U+ Measuring lead for voltage input
UCM Common mode voltage
Uiso Potential difference between MANA and local ground
Sign Sign

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

F-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Glossary

Address
An address denotes a specific operand or address area; examples of this are:
input I 12.1; memory word MW 25; data block DB 3.

Aggregate current→
Sum of the currents of all output channels on a digital output module.

Backplane bus →
→ The backplane bus is a serial data bus that is used by the modules to com-
municate with each other and to supply them with the voltage they require. The
interconnection of the modules is established by the bus connector.

Basic conversion time

Time for the actual encoding of a channel (integration time) plus the required
times for the internal control; i. e. after this time a channel is completely pro-
cessed.

Basic error limit

The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 °C, referred to the rated range
of the analog module.

Basic response time

Time which an analog input/output module requires for a cycle if all channels are
released; it corresponds to the “number of all channels x basic conversion time”.

Bus
A bus is a transmission medium that interconnects several nodes. Data transmis-
sion can be serial or parallel, and be performed over electric conductors or fiber-
optic cables.

Bus segment
A bus segment is a self-contained section of a serial bus system. Bus segments
are interconnected by means of →repeaters.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 Glossary-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Glossary

CiR
Equipment changes in running operations (Configuration in RUN)

Common mode voltage

A voltage that is common to all inputs/outputs of a group and is measured be-
tween this group and any reference point (usually to ground).

Communication processor
Programmable module for communication tasks, such as networking, point-to-
point connection.

Comparison point
When using thermocouples on analog input modules: point of known tempera-
ture (for example, → compensating box).

Compensating box
Compensating boxes can be used for measuring temperatures with thermocou-
ples on analog input modules. The compensating box is a compensation circuit
for compensating temperature fluctuations at the → Comparison point.

Complete restart
When a CPU starts up (say, when the mode selector switch is moved from
STOP to RUN or when the mains supply is turned on), OB 100 (Restart) is pro-
cessed before cyclic programming processing (OB 1).
With a complete restart, the → Process input image is read in and the STEP 7
user program is processed, starting with the first instruction in OB1.

Configure
Select and put together different components on a programmable logic controller
and install the requisite software and adapt to the specific use (for example, by
assigning parameters to the modules).

CP
→Communications processor

CPU
The CPU (central processing unit) is a CPU module of the →programmable
logic controller that stores and runs the user program. It contains the operating
system, memory, processing unit and communication interface.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Glossary-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Glossary

Default setting
The default setting is a sensible basic setting that is used whenever no other
value is used.

Destruction limit
Limit of permitted input voltage / input current.
If this limit is exceeded, the measuring accuracy may deteriorate. If the destruc-
tion limit is exceeded by a vast amount, this may destroy the internal measuring
circuit.

Diagnostic buffer
The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU which stores the
diagnostics events in the order in which they occurred.
For troubleshooting, the user can read out the exact error cause in STEP 7
(PLC –> Module State) from the diagnostic buffer.

Diagnostic data
All the diagnostics events that occurred are collected in the CPU and entered in
the → Diagnostic buffer. If there is an error OB, it is started.

Diagnostic Interrupt
Modules with diagnostics capability report system errors by means of diagnostic
interrupts to the → CPU. The operating system of the CPU calls OB 82 in the
course of a diagnostic interrupt.

Diagnostics
Generic term for → System diagnostics, process error diagnosis and user-de-
fined diagnostics.

Direct access
A direct access is the direct accessing of the CPU by means of the → Backplane
bus to modules while avoiding the → Process image.

Encoder absolute
An encoder absolute determines the path traveled during position detection by
reading a numerical value. In the case of encoders absolute with a serial inter-
face (SSI), path information is transferred synchronously and serially according
to the SSI protocol (synchronous serial interface).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 Glossary-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Glossary

Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor), which brings the bodies
of electrical resources and foreign conductive bodies to an identical or approxi-
mately identical potential in order to avoid interfering or hazardous voltages be-
tween these bodies.

FREEZE
Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. The
FREEZE function is a control command for freezing current encoder values of
the SM 338 to the instantaneous value.

Ground
The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every
point.
In the proximity of grounding electrodes, the ground can have a potential differing
from zero. The term “reference ground” is frequently used to describe such cir-
cumstances.

Ground, to
To ground means connect an electrically conductive part by means of a ground-
ing system to the grounding electrode (one or more conductive parts having a
very good contact to ground).

Hardware interrupt
A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules as a result of a
certain event in the process (overshooting or undershooting of a limit value; a
module has completed the cyclic conversion of its channels).
The hardware interrupt is reported to the CPU. In accordance with the priority of
this interrupt, the →Organization block assigned to it is scanned.

Hold last value (LWH)

The module retains the last value read out before STOP mode.

Input delay
Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules. The input delay is used to sup-
press injected interference. Interfering pulses from 0 ms to the set input delay
are suppressed.
The set input delay is subject to a tolerance, which can be taken from the techni-
cal specifications of the module. A high input delay suppresses long interfering
pulses, whereas a low input delay suppresses short ones.
The permissible input delay depends on the length of the cable between the en-
coder and the module. For example, a high input delay has to be set for long un-
shielded supply conductors to the encoder (longer than 100m).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Glossary-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Glossary

Integration time
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The integration time is the in-
verse value of the → Interference frequency suppression in ms.

Interface, multipoint
→ MPI

Interference frequency suppression

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The frequency of the AC net-
work can interfere with the measured value, especially with measurements in low
voltage ranges and with thermocouples. This parameter is used by the user to
specify the prevailing line frequency on his system.

Interrupt
The SIMATIC S7 is familiar with 28 different run-time level, which govern running
of the user program. These run-time levels include interrupts such as hardware
interrupts, among other things. When an interrupt occurs, the operating system
automatically calls an assigned organization block in which the user can program
the reaction he wants (for example, in an FB).

Interrupt, diagnostic
→ Diagnostic Interrupt

Interrupt, end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

→ Hardware interrupt

Interrupt, hardware
→ Hardware interrupt

Linearity error
The linearity error identifies the maximum deviation of the measured/output value
from the ideal linear relationship between the measuring/output signal and the
digital value. The data is a percentage and relates to the rated range of the ana-
log module.

Logic block
In a SIMATIC S7 context, a logic block is a block that contains a part of the
STEP 7 user program. By contrast, a data block only contains data. There are
the following logic blocks: organization blocks (OBs), function blocks (FBs), func-
tions (FCs), system function block (SFBs), system functions (SFCs).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 Glossary-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Glossary

Measuring range module

Measuring range modules are plugged into the analog input modules for adapta-
tion to different measuring ranges.

Module filtering mode

By operating mode we mean:
1. The selection of an operating mode of the CPU using the mode switch or the
PG
2. The type of program execution in the CPU
3. A parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules

Monoflop time
Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. The
monoflop time is the time interval between 2 SSI message frames (→ Encoder
absolute).

MPI
The multipoint interface (MPI) is the programmer port of the SIMATIC S7. It is
used to access programmable modules ((CPUs, CPs), text displays and operator
panel from a central point. The nodes on the MPI can communicate with each
other.

Non-isolated
In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the
control and load circuit are electrically connected.

Normalizing
Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT.
Normalizing right justifies the encoder value of the → encoder absolute; non-rel-
evant places are discarded.

OB
→ Organization block

Operational limit
The operational limit is the measuring or output error of the analog module over
the entire temperature range, referred to the rated range of the analog module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Glossary-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Glossary

Optically isolated
With optically isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the con-
trol and load circuit are galvanically isolated; for example, by an optocoupler,
contact assembly or repeater. Input/output circuits can be connected to common
potential.

Organization block
Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system of
the CPU and the user program. The order in which the user program is pro-
cessed is defined in the organization blocks.

Parameters
1. Tag of a → Logic block
2. Tag for setting the characteristics of a module (one or more per module).
When delivered to the customer, each module has a practical basic setting for its
parameters, which the user can modify in STEP 7.

Process image
The signal states of the digital input and output modules are stored in the CPU in
process image.
A distinction is made between the process-image of inputs and of outputs. The
process input image (PII) is read by the input modules before the operating sys-
tem scans the user program. The process output image (PIQ) is transferred to
the output modules at the end of program scanning.

Product status
Products having an identical order number are distinguished by their product sta-
tus. The product status is incremented for upwards compatible extensions, modi-
fications due to production reasons (use of new component parts and compo-
nents) and troubleshooting.

Programming device
→Programming device

Programming device
A programming device (PG) is a personal computer in a specific industry-stan-
dard and compact design. A PG is completely equipped for programming
SIMATIC programmable logic controllers.

Reaction to open thermocouple

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when using Thermocouples. This
parameter defines whether “Overflow” (7FFF0H0) or “Underflow” (80000H0) is
output by the module in the event of an open thermocouple.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 Glossary-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Glossary

Reference potential
Potential from the point of view of which the voltages of the involved circuits are
analyzed and measured.

Repeat accuracy
The repeat accuracy identifies the maximum deviation among the measured/out-
put values that then occurs, when the same input signal is again applied or the
same input value specified. The repeat accuracy relates to the rated range of the
module and applies to the settled temperature state.

Repeater
Equipment for the amplification of bus signals and connection of →bus seg-
ments over long distances.

Resolution
With analog modules, the number of bits which represent the digitized analog
value in binary. Resolution depends on the module and with analog input mod-
ules on the →integration time. The precision of the resolution of a measured
value increases with the length of the integration time. The resolution can be as
many as 16 bits, including sign.

Retentivity
Data areas in data blocks, and also timers, counters and memory markers are
retentive when their contents are not lost upon a complete restart or POWER
DOWN.

Scan time
The scan time is the time required by the → CPU to scan the → user program
once.

Segment
→ Bus segment

SFC
→ System function

Signal module
Signal modules (SM) form the interface between the process and the program-
mable logic controller. There are input modules, output modules, input/output
modules (both digital and analog).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Glossary-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Glossary

Smoothing
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The measured values are
smoothed by digital filtering. For specific modules it is possible to choose be-
tween no, low, medium and high smoothing. The higher the smoothing, the
greater is the time constant of the digital filter.

STARTUP
The STARTUP mode is transvered during the transition from STOP mode to
RUN mode. STARTUP can be triggered by the → Mode switch or following pow-
er-on or by means of an operator input on the programming device. With the
S7-300 and M7-300, a → Complete restart is performed.

Status mode
The SIMATIC S7 programmable logic controllers are familiar with the following of
status modes: STOP, → STARTUP, RUN and STOP.

Substitute value
Substitute values are values that can be output to the process when signal out-
put modules have failed or be used in the user program instead of a process
value when signal input modules have failed.
The substitute values can be assigned parameters by the user in STEP 7 (old
value retained, substitute value 0 or 1). They are values which the output(s) have
to output in the event of a CPU STOP.

System diagnostics
System diagnostics is the detection, analysis and reporting of errors that occur
within the programmable logic controller. Examples of such errors are: program
errors or failures on modules. System errors can be indicated with LED displays
or in STEP 7.

System function
A system function (SFC) is a function that is integrated in the operating system
of the CPU a function that can be triggered in the STEP 7 user program, if nec-
essary.

Temperature coefficient
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when measuring temperatures
with a resistance thermometer (RTD). The temperature coefficient you select
depends on the resistance thermometer being used (to DIN standard).

Temperature error
The temperature error identifies the drift of the measured/output value caused by
the change in the ambient temperature of the analog module. It is specified as a
percentage per Kelvin and relates to the rated range of the analog module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 Glossary-9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Glossary

Temperature errors of internal compensation

The temperature error of internal compensation only occurs during thermocouple
measurement. It identifies the additional error which is to be taken into account
and added to the actual temperature error when “internal comparison” mode is
selected. The data is either given as a percentage relative to the physical rated
range of the analog module or as an absolute value in °C.

Two-conductor/three-conductor/four-conductor connection
Method of connection to the module – for example, of resistance thermometers/
resistors to the front connector of the analog input module or of loads at the volt-
age output of an analog output module.

Two-wire transmitter/four-wire transmitter

Kind of transmitter (two-wire transmitter: supply (via terminals of the analog input
module; 4-wire transmitter: supply via separate terminals of the transmitter)

Ungrounded
Without galvanic connection to ground

User program
The user program contains all the statements, tags and data for signal process-
ing used to control a system or a process. It is assigned to a programmable
module (CPU, FM, for example) and can be structured in smaller units (blocks).

Wire-break
Parameter in STEP 7. A wire-break test is used for monitoring the connection
from the input to the encoder and from the output to the actuator. With wire-
break, the module detects a flow of current at the appropriately parameterized
input/output.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Glossary-10 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Index
Numbers potential difference, 4-45
reaction with open thermocouple, 4-41
2-wire transmitters, 4-52
SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits, 4-115
SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed, 4-97
SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, 4-86
A SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, 4-125
Absolute value encoder (SSI), SM 338; SM 331; AI 8 x TC, 4-138
POS-INPUT, 5-14 smoothing of analog input values, 4-42
Accessories, D-1 structure of data record 1, A-8
Active bus module, dimension drawing, C-8 temperature coefficient, 4-42
Actuator connection, to analog output module, temperature unit, 4-41
4-66 underflow, 4-74
Address, Glossary-1 wire-break, 4-73, 4-74
Addressing, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-15 wire-break check, 4-40
Aggregate current, Glossary-1 Analog Input Module
Ambient conditions SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits, 4-153
mechanical, 1-10, 1-16 SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, 4-77
SIPLUS S7-300-modules, 1-16 Analog input modules
Analog functions, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1 causes of errors and remedies, 4-73
Analog Input Module, SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, diagnostic messages, 4-72
4-108 Analog input modules, SM 331,
Analog input module channel-specific diagnostic data, B-6
common-mode error, 4-73 Analog input/module, structure of data record
configuring error, 4-73 1, A-42
connecting resistance thermometers, 4-53 Analog input/output module
connecting resistors, 4-53 integration time, 4-44
connecting sensor, 4-45 measurement, 4-44
connecting thermocouple, 4-58 measuring method, 4-44
diagnostic interrupt, 4-40 measuring range, 4-44
diagnostic message in measured value, output range, 4-44
4-72 output type, 4-44
diagnostics, 4-40 parameters, 4-44, A-41
group diagnostics, 4-40 SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits, 4-188
interference frequency suppression, 4-42, Analog Input/Output Module , SM 334; AI 4/AO
A-9 2 x 12 bits, 4-194
isolated, 4-45 Analog module
limit value, 4-40 assigning parameters, 4-39
load voltage missing, 4-73 behavior, 4-31
measurement, 4-41 Determination of measuring error/output
measuring method, 4-41 error, 4-34
measuring methods and measuring ranges, diagnostics, 4-71
A-9 dimension drawing, C-15
measuring range, 4-41 group error LED, 4-72
module filtering mode, 4-41 interrupts, 4-75
non-isolated, 4-45 sequence of steps for commissioning, 4-8
Overflow, 4-74 SF LED, 4-72
parameter assignment error, 4-73 supply voltage failure, 4-32
parameters, 4-40, A-7 Analog output channel, conversion time, 4-37

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 Index-1

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Index

Analog Output Module, SM 332; Auxiliary supply missing, SM 338; POS-INPUT,

AO 2 x 12 bits, 4-182 5-19
Analog output module
connecting loads and actuators, 4-66
connecting loads to current output, 4-70 B
connecting loads to voltage output, 4-67
Backplane bus, Glossary-1
diagnostic interrupt, 4-43
Backup battery, 1-9
diagnostic messages, 4-73
shipping and storage conditions, 1-8
diagnostics, 4-43
Basic conversion time, Glossary-1
group diagnostics, 4-43
Basic error limit, 4-34
isolated, 4-66
Basic response time, Glossary-1
load voltage missing, 4-74
Battery. See backup battery
M short-circuit, 4-74
Baud rate, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-14
non-isolated, 4-66
Behavior, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-29
output methods and output ranges, A-38
Bus segment, Glossary-1
output range, 4-43
Bytes 0 and 1
output type, 4-43
of diagnostic data, B-2
parameter assignment error, 4-74
of diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT,
parameters, 4-43
B-7
response with CPU-STOP, 4-43
Bytes 2 and 3, of diagnostic data, B-3
setting substitute values, A-38
Bytes 2 to 7, of diagnostic data for SM 338;
settling time, 4-38
POS-INPUT, B-8
SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits, 4-176
Bytes 4 to 7, of diagnostic data, B-4
SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit, 4-169
Bytes 8 to 10, of diagnostic data for SM 338;
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, 4-163
POS-INPUT, B-8
structure of data record 1, A-37
analog output module, response time, 4-38
Analog output modules
causes of errors and remedies, 4-74 C
parameters, A-36 Cables, for analog signals, 4-45, 4-66
Analog output modules, SM 332, Causes of error and remedial action, SM 322;
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-6 DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
Analog value Causes of error and remedial measures,
conversion, 4-9 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
sign, 4-9 Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures,
Analog value representation, 4-9 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
binary representation of input ranges, 4-12 Causes of errors and remedies
binary representation of output ranges, 4-24 analog input module, 4-73
for current measuring ranges, 4-14–4-17 analog output module, 4-74
for current output ranges, 4-27–4-30 CE, Approval, 1-2
for resistance type transmitters, 4-15 Channel error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors, Channel information present, SM 338;
4-16, 4-17, 4-19, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23 POS-INPUT, 5-19
for RTD resistance temperature detectors, Channel-specific diagnostics, B-5
4-18 Climatic conditions, 1-11
for voltage measuring ranges, 4-13–4-15 Code type, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-14
for voltage output ranges, 4-26–4-29 Commissioning analog modules, sequence of
Analog-to-digital conversion, 4-35 steps, 4-8
Approval Commissioning digital modules, sequence of
CE, 1-2 steps, 3-10
CSA, 1-3 Common mode voltage, Glossary-2
FM, 1-4 Common-mode error, analog input module,
Shipbuilding, 1-4 4-73
UL, 1-3 Communication processor, Glossary-2
Approvals, Standards, 1-2 Comparison point, 4-62, Glossary-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Index-2 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Index

Compensating box, 4-59 channel-specific, for SM 321;

connecting, 4-61 DI 16 x 24 VDC, B-5
Compensation channel-specific, for SM 322;
external, 4-59 DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, B-5
internal, 4-59, 4-61 channel-specific, for SM 338; POS-INPUT,
Complete restart, Glossary-2 B-8
Configuration error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 data record, B-1
Configure, Glossary-2 SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-7
Configuring error, analog input module, 4-73 Diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT,
Conversion time bytes 0 and 1, B-7
analog input channels, 4-35 Diagnostic data of SM 338; POS-INPUT
analog output channel, 4-37 Bytes 2 to 7, B-8
Converting, analog values, 4-9 Bytes 8 to 10, B-8
CP, Glossary-2 Diagnostic interrupt
CPU, Glossary-2 analog input module, 4-40
CSA, Approval, 1-3 analog output module, 4-43
Current sensors, connecting, 4-51 of analog modules, 4-75
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27, 3-32
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-80
D SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20
Diagnostic messages, 3-12, 4-71, 5-17
Data record, for diagnostic data, B-1
of analog input modules, 4-72
Data record 1
of analog output modules, 4-73
analog input module configuration, A-8
reading out, 3-13, 4-72, 5-17
analog output module configuration, A-37
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-78
Configuration SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, A-40
Diagnostics
digital input module configuration, A-4
analog input module, 4-40
digital output module configuration, A-6
analog output module, 4-43
structure for SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-27
of analog modules, 4-71
structure for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-12
of digital modules, 3-12
structure for SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-20
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27, 3-29
structure of analog input/output module,
system, Glossary-9
A-42
Diagnostics entry, 4-32
Structure of digital input-/output module,
Digital Input Module
3-120
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed, 3-20
Data record 128
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input,
structure for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-13
3-34
structure for SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-21
SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24, 3-18
Data records, for parameters, A-2
Digital input module
Default setting, Glossary-3
SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V, 3-36
Degree of protection, 1-12
SM 321; DI 32 x 120/230 VAC ISOL, 3-44
IP 20, 1-12
structure of data record 1, A-4
Destruction limit, Glossary-3
Digital Input Module
Diagnosis, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17, 5-18
SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; with process and
Diagnosis interrupt release, SM 338;
diagnostic interrupt, 3-22
POS-INPUT, 5-14
SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125, 3-38
Diagnostic buffer, Glossary-3
SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24, 3-13
Diagnostic data, Glossary-3
SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230, 3-42
bytes 0 and 1, B-2
Digital input module
bytes 2 and 3, B-3
SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V, 3-40
bytes 4 to 7, B-4
SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC, 3-16
channel-specific, B-5
Digital input modules, parameters, A-3
channel-specific, for analog input modules
Digital Input/Output Module, SM 323;
of SM 331, B-6
DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A, 3-113
channel-specific, for analog output modules
Digital input-/output module
of SM 332, B-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 Index-3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Index

SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, EPROM error

3-110 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
parameterizable, 3-116 Equipotential bonding, Glossary-4
Structure of data record 1, 3-120 Error, of an analog module, 4-34
Digital module Extended environmental conditions, 1-14
assigning parameters, 3-11 External auxiliary voltage missing, SM 321;
diagnostics, 3-12 DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
dimension drawing, C-15
group error LED, 3-13
sequence of steps for commissioning, 3-10 F
SF LED, 3-13
FM, Approval, 1-4
Digital Output Module
Four-conductor connection, 4-54, Glossary-10
SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A , 3-49
Four-wire transmitter, Glossary-10
SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A with
Four-wire transmitters, 4-52
diagnostic interrupt, 3-72
FREEZE, Glossary-4
Digital output module
Freeze-function, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-12,
parameters, A-5
5-14
SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High
Fuse blown
Speed, 3-56
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
SM 322; DO 32 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL ,
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
3-87
SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-46
structure of data record 1, A-6
Digital Output Module G
SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC, 3-59 Ground, Glossary-4
SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 3-53 Grounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 7-4
SM 322; DO 16 x VAC 120/230/1 A, 3-66 Group diagnostics
SM 322; DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A , 3-84 analog input module, 4-40
SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48–125/1,5 A , 3-81 analog output module, 4-43
Digital output module , SM 322; Group error LED
DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A, 3-69 analog module, 4-72
Dimension drawing, active bus module, C-8 digital module, 3-13
Dimension drawings, C-1 Group fault-LED, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17
analog module, C-15
digital module, C-15
IM 361, C-13 H
interface module, C-13
Hardware interrupt, Glossary-4
power supply module PS 307, C-8
End of scan cycle, 4-76
PS 307, C-8
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27, 3-32
rail, C-2
when limit exceeded, 4-75
RS 485 repeater, C-18
Hardware interrupt lost, SM 321; DI 16 x 24
shield connecting element, C-16
DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31, 3-33
signal module, C-15
Hold last value, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5
SIMATIC TOP connect, C-17
A, 3-76
Direct access, Glossary-3
Dummy module , DM 370, 5-5
I
E Identifiers for Australia, 1-4
IEC 61131, 1-4
Electromagnetic compatibility, 1-6
IM 360
Encoder absolute, Glossary-3
dimension drawing, C-13
encoder error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
interface module, 6-3
Environmental conditions, 1-9
IM 361, interface module, 6-5
extended, 1-14

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Index-4 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Index

IM 365 Logic block, Glossary-5

dimension drawing, C-14 LWH, Glossary-4
Interface Module , 6-7
Input delay, Glossary-4
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27 M
Insulation test, 1-12
M short-circuit, analog output module, 4-74
Integration time, Glossary-5
Measurement
analog input/output module, 4-44
analog input module, 4-41
Interface module, 6-1
analog input/output module, 4-44
dimension drawing, C-13
Measuring method
IM 360, 6-3
analog input channels, 4-28
IM 361, 6-5
analog input module, 4-41, A-9
Interface Module , IM 365, 6-7
analog input/output module, 4-44
Interference
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28
pulse-shaped, 1-6
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
sinusoidal, 1-7
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-25
Interference frequency suppression,
Measuring range
Glossary-5
analog input module, 4-41, A-9
analog input module, 4-42, A-9
analog input/output module, 4-44
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-24
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-25
Internal auxiliary voltage missing, SM 321;
Measuring range module, 4-28
DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
replugging, 4-29
Internal compensation, Temperature error,
Measuring ranges, analog input channels, 4-28
Glossary-10
Measuring sensors, isolated, 4-46
Internal error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
Module Classes, ID, B-2
Interrupt, Glossary-5
Module fault, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
Interrupt-triggering channels, SM 321;
Module filtering mode, Glossary-6
DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-33
analog input module, 4-41
Interrupts
Module not parameterized, SM 321;
enabling, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75, 5-20
DI 16 x DC 24 V , 3-31
of analog modules, 4-75
Module overview, 4-3
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-32
digital modules, 3-4
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-80
SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA, 8-2
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20
special signal modules, 5-2
IP 20, 1-12
Modules, shipping and storage conditions, 1-8
Isolated measuring sensors, 4-46
Monoflop time, Glossary-6
connecting, 4-46
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-14
MPI, Glossary-6
L
Lack of encoder supply, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 N
VDC, 3-31
No external auxiliary voltage, SM 322;
Limit value, analog input module, 4-40
DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
Linearity error, Glossary-5
No internal auxiliary voltage, SM 322;
Load connection, to analog output module,
DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
4-66
No load voltage L+, SM 322; DO 8 x 24
Load connection to current output, to analog
VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-79
output module, 4-70
Non-isolated, Glossary-6
Load connection to voltage output, to analog
Non-isolated sensors, 4-48
output module, 4-67
connecting, 4-48
Load voltage missing
Normalization, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11,
analog input module, 4-73
5-14
analog output module, 4-74

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 Index-5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Index

Normalizing, Glossary-6 6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0, 3-96

6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0, 3-106
6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0, 3-93
O 6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0, 3-87
6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0, 3-59
OB, Glossary-7
6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0, 3-100
OB 40, 3-32, 4-75
6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0, 3-72
start information, 4-76
6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0, 3-113
OB 82, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75
6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0, 3-110
Operating conditions, 1-9
6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0, 3-116
Operating mode
6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0, 4-108
of CPU, 4-31
6ES7331-7HF00-0AB0, 4-97
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
6ES7331-7HF01-0AB0, 4-97
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-24
6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0, 4-153
operational limit, 4-34, Glossary-6
6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0, 4-115
Optically isolated, Glossary-7
6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0, 4-77
Order number
6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0, 4-86
6AG1 321-1BH02-2AA0, 3-18
6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0, 4-125
6AG1 321-1BL00-2AA0, 3-13
6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0, 4-138
6AG1 321-1CH20-2AA0, 3-38
6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0, 4-182
6AG1 321-1FF01-2AA0, 3-42
6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0, 4-176
6AG1 321-7BH01-2AB0, 3-22
6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0, 4-163
6AG1 322-1BH01-2AA0, 3-53
6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0, 4-169
6AG1 322-1CF00-2AA0, 3-81
6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0, 4-188
6AG1 322-1FF01-2AA0, 3-84
6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0, 4-194
6AG1 322-1HF10-2AA0, 3-106
6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0, 5-7
6AG1 322-8BF00-2AB0, 3-72
6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0, 6-3
6AG1 323-1BH01-2AA0, 3-113
6ES7361 3CA01-0AA0, 6-5
6AG1 331-7KB02-2AB0, 4-153
6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0, 6-7
6AG1 332-5HB01-2AB0, 4-182
6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0, 5-5
6AG1 334-0KE00-2AB0, 4-194
6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0, 5-3
6AG1 365-0BA01-2AA0, 6-7
6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0, 7-2
6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0, 2-2
Organization block (OB), Glossary-7
6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0, 2-6
Output analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1
6ES7307-1EA00-0AA0, 2-9
Output method, analog output module, A-38
6ES7307-1EA80-0AA0, 2-9
Output range
6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0, 2-14
analog input/output module, 4-44
6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0, 3-18
analog output module, 4-43, A-38
6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0, 3-20
Output type
6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0, 3-34
analog input/output module, 4-44
6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0, 3-13
analog output module, 4-43
6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0, 3-36
Overflow, analog input module, 4-74
6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0, 3-38
6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0, 3-16
6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0, 3-42
6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0, 3-44 P
6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0, 3-40 Parameter assignment
6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0, 3-22 for analog modules, 4-39
6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0, 3-69 for digital modules, 3-11
6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0, 3-53 in user program, A-1
6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0, 3-56 Parameter assignment error
6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0, 3-46 analog input module, 4-73
6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0, 3-81 analog output module, 4-74
6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0, 3-84 Parameterization error, SM 338; POS-INPUT,
6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0, 3-66 5-19
6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0, 3-49

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Index-6 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Index

Parameterization missing, SM 338; Reaction to open thermocouple, SM 331;

POS-INPUT, 5-19 AI 8 x TC, A-26
Parameters, Glossary-7 Read analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1
analog input module, 4-40, A-7 Reference junction temperature with
analog input/output module, 4-44, A-41 thermocouples, compensating, 4-59
analog output module, 4-43 Reference potential, Glossary-8
analog output modules, A-36 Relay output module
data records, A-2 SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC, 3-93
digital input modules, A-3 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A, 3-100
digital output module, A-5 Relay Output Module , SM 322; DO 8 x Rel.
dynamic, 3-11, 4-39 VAC 230/5 A, 3-106
modifying in user program, 3-11, 4-39 Relay output module , SM 322; DO 8 x Rel.
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27 230 VAC, 3-96
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76 Repeat accuracy, Glossary-8
SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, Repeater, Glossary-8
parameterizable, 3-119 See RS 485-Repeater
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-11 Resistance thermometer connection, to
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-19 analog input module, 4-53
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, A-39 Resistor connection, to analog input module,
SM 338; POS-INPUT , 5-14 4-53
static, 3-11, 4-39 Resolution, 4-9, Glossary-8
Parameters, wrong Response time, 4-38
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 Response with CPU-STOP, analog output
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 module, 4-43
PARM_MOD, SFC 57, A-2 Retentivity, Glossary-8
Pin assignment, RS 485 repeater, 7-6 RS 485 repeater
POS-Input module SM 338, 5-7 Appearance, 7-3
Position decoder module, SM 338; application, 7-2
POS-INPUT, 5-7 definition, 7-2
Potential difference, with analog input modules, dimension drawing, C-18
4-45 grounded operation, 7-4
Power supply module, 2-1 rules, 7-2
dimension drawing, C-8 ungrounded operation, 7-4
PS 305 2 A, 2-2 RS 485-Repeater, 7-1
PS 307 10 A, 2-14 grounded, 7-4
PS 307 2 A, 2-6 ungrounded, 7-4
PS 307 5 A, 2-9
Process image, Glossary-7
Product status, Glossary-7 S
Programming device (PG), Glossary-7
Scan time, Glossary-8
Protection class, 1-12
analog input channels, 4-35
PS 307, dimension drawing, C-8
analog output channels, 4-37
Pulse edge, 3-27
Screw-type terminals, SIMATIC TOP
Pulse-shaped interference, 1-6
connect/...TPA, 8-10
Sensor connection, to analog input module,
4-45
R Sensors, non-isolated, 4-48
Radio interference, emission of, 1-7 Settling time, 4-38
Rail for the ”Insert and Remove” function, SF LED
dimension drawing, C-7 analog module, 4-72
Rails, dimension drawing, C-2 digital module, 3-13
RAM error SF-LED, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 SFC, Glossary-8, Glossary-9
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79 SFC 51, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75
Rated voltages, 1-13 SFC 55 WR_PARM, A-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 Index-7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Index

SFC 56 WR_DPARM, A-2 internal auxiliary voltage missing, 3-31

SFC 57 PARM_MOD, A-2 interrupts, 3-32
SFC 59, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75 lack of encoder supply, 3-31
Shield connecting element, dimension drawing, redundant encoder supply, 3-24
C-16 voltage type, 3-27
Shipbuilding, Approval, 1-4 watchdog, 3-31
Short-circuit to L+, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC
VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-79 causes of error and remedial measures,
Short-circuit to M, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 3-31
A, 3-76, 3-79 diagnostic interrupt, 3-27
Sign, analog value, 4-9 hardware interrupt, 3-27, 3-32
Signal module, Glossary-8 hardware interrupt lost, 3-31, 3-33
dimension drawing, C-15 interrupt-triggering channels, 3-33
SIMATIC TOP connect parameters, wrong, 3-31
components, 8-12 RAM error, 3-31
connection for 2A modules, 8-18 SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V
dimension drawing, C-17 Resistive circuit of the encoder, 3-24
one-conductor connection, 8-14 Synchronous operation, 3-26
selecting components, 8-13 SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V , Module not
three-conductor connection, 8-16 parameterized, 3-31
wiring 32-channel digital modules, 8-8 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
SIMATIC TOP connect TPA apply substitute value ”1”, 3-76
component selection, 8-20 causes of error and remedial action, 3-79
connection example, 8-24 channel-specific diagnostic data, B-5
multiplier terminal, 8-21 diagnostic interrupt, 3-76, 3-80
shield connection, 8-23 diagnostic messages, 3-78
terminal allocation to analog module, 8-22 EPROM error, 3-79
terminal assignment, 8-21 fuse blown, 3-79
SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA hold last value, 3-76
advantages of using, 8-3 interrupts, 3-80
components, 8-3 no external auxiliary voltage, 3-79
Configuration, 8-2 no internal auxiliary voltage, 3-79
connecting cable, 8-4 no load voltage L+, 3-76, 3-79
connectors, 8-4 parameters, 3-76
mounting terminal block and connecting RAM error, 3-79
cable, 8-10 short-circuit to L+, 3-76, 3-79
screw-type terminals, 8-10 short-circuit to M, 3-76, 3-79
spring-loaded terminals, 8-10 substitute value application, 3-76
wiring, 8-4 watchdog, 3-79
wiring actuators/sensors to terminal block, wire-break, 3-76, 3-79
8-10 SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A,
wiring rules, 8-7 parameterizable, Parameters, 3-119
wiring the front connector module, 8-6 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bit, Parasitic frequency
wiring with modules..., 8-3 suppression, A-29
Simulator module, SM 374; IN/OUT 16, 5-3 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits
Sinusoidal interference, 1-7 Interference frequency suppression, A-28
SIPLUS S7-300-modules, 1-14 Measuring methods and measuring ranges,
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC A-28
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-5 structure of data record 1, A-27
diagnostic interrupt, 3-32 SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed,
diagnostics, 3-27 Synchronous operation, 4-101
EPROM error, 3-31 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
external auxiliary voltage missing, 3-31 interference frequency suppression, A-16
fuse blown, 3-31 operating modes, A-16
input delay, 3-27 parameters, A-11

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Index-8 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Index

smoothing, A-18 Watchdog tripped, 5-19

structure of data record 1, A-12 Wrong parameters, 5-19
structure of data record 128, A-13 Smoothing, Glossary-9
Temperature coefficient, A-18 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-18
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD x 24 bits, measuring SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-26
methods and measuring ranges, A-16 Smoothing analog input values, 4-36
SM 331; AI 8 x TC Smoothing of analog input values, analog input
interference frequency suppression, A-24 module, 4-42
measuring methods and measuring ranges, Spare parts, D-1
A-25 Spring-loaded terminals, SIMATIC TOP
operating modes, A-24 connect/...TPA, 8-10
parameters, A-19 Standards and approvals, 1-2
reaction to open thermocouple, A-26 Startup, Glossary-9
smoothing, A-26 Status mode, Glossary-9
structure of data record 1, A-20 STEP 7 blocks, for analog functions, 4-1
structure of data record 128, A-21 Substitute value, Glossary-9
SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, Synchronous analog output module, A-38
operation, 4-173 Substitute value ”1” application, SM 322; DO 8
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76
Parameters, A-39 Substitute value application, SM 322; DO 8 x
Structure of data record 1, A-40 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76
SM 338 Supply voltage failure, of the analog module,
Encoder value acquisition, 5-10 4-32
Free running encoder value acquisition, Synchronous operation
5-10 SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V, 3-26
POS-Input module, 5-7 SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed, 4-101
Synchronous operation, 5-8 SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, 4-173
SM 338; POS-INPUT SM 338, 5-8
Absolute value encoder (SSI), 5-14 System diagnostics, Glossary-9
Addressing, 5-15 System function (SFC), Glossary-9
Auxiliary supply missing, 5-19
Baud rate, 5-14
Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures, T
5-19
Technical specifications, RS 485 repeater, 7-6
Channel error, 5-19
Temperature coefficient, Glossary-9
Channel information present, 5-19
analog input module, 4-42
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-8
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bit, A-29
Code type, 5-14
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-18
Configuration error, 5-19
Temperature error, Glossary-9
Diagnosis, 5-17
Temperature errors of internal compensation,
Diagnosis interrupt release, 5-14
Glossary-10
diagnostic data, B-7
Temperature measurement, SM 331; AI 8 x 13
Diagnostic interrupt, 5-20
bit, A-28
encoder error, 5-19
Temperature unit, Analog input module, 4-41
External error, 5-19
Test voltages, 1-12
Freeze-function, 5-12, 5-14
Thermo emf, 4-58
Group fault-LED, 5-17
Thermocouple
Internal error, 5-19
design, 4-58
Interrupts, 5-20
open, reaction to, Glossary-7
Module fault, 5-19
principle of operation, 4-58
Monoflop time, 5-14
Thermocouple connection, to analog input
Normalization, 5-11, 5-14
module, 4-58
Parameterization error, 5-19
Three-conductor connection, 4-54,
Parameterization missing, 5-19
Glossary-10
SF-LED, 5-17
Two-conductor connection, 4-55, Glossary-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 Index-9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Index

Two-wire transmitter, Glossary-10 W

Watchdog
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
U SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
UL, Approval, 1-3 Watchdog tripped, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
Underflow, analog input module, 4-74 Wire-break, Glossary-10
Ungrounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 7-4 Analog input module, 4-73
Use in an industrial environment, 1-5 analog input module, 4-74
Use in residential environments, 1-5 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-79
Use of the ET 200 / S7-300 in Zone 2, 1-17 wire-break check, analog input module, 4-40
User program, Glossary-10 WR_DPARM, SFC 56, A-2
parameter assignment in, A-1 WR_PARM, SFC 55, A-2

V
Vibrations, 1-10
Voltage sensors, connecting, 4-50
Voltage type, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Index-10 A5E00105505-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Product Information on the Manual
Edition 12.2004

w S7-300 Programmable Controller; Module Specifications, as of Edition 02/2004

(A5E00105505)

w ET 200M Distributed I/O Device Signal Modules for Process Automation,

as of Edition 10/2004 (A5E00085262)

w S7-300, ET 200M Programmable Controller, Modules with Intrinsically-Safe

Signals, as of Edition 08/2003 (A5E00172008)

Introduction
Parameterizable signal modules of the S7-300 product family mentioned in this
product information document can be reparameterized online using
STEP7 HWCONFIG in RUN mode of the CPU.
In other words, the module parameters can be changed without switching the CPU
to STOP mode or affecting other modules.
The following prerequisites must be met in order to use this function:
• STEP7 as of Version 5.2
• Distributed use of the S7-300 modules described in the S7-400 programmable
controller (CPUs as of V3.1 or CP 443-5 extended as of V5.0).
• Use of the ET 200M with the IM 153-2 as of 6ES7153-2BA00-0XB0 or
6ES7153-2BB00-0XB0
• Use of the IM 157 as of 6ES7157-0AA82-0XA00
You will find a detailed description of the prerequisites and principles of operation in
the manual Modifying the System during Operation via CiR
(visit http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support and enter
the entry ID: 14044916).

Copyright 2004 by Siemens AG

A5E00201782-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Reparameterization steps in RUN mode
Observe the reparameterization steps described in the above manual.
Note the peculiarities of certain modules described in the table.
Example 1:
To change a measuring range for modules, proceed as follows:
1. Change the user program so that the channel to be reparameterized is no
longer evaluated, and download it to the CPU.
2. Change the measuring range for the module in HWCONFIG, and download the
changed configuration to the CPU.
3. Adapt the user program to the changed channel, and download it to the CPU.
Example 2:
When reparameterizing certain modules (see the table), you should ensure that
there is no pending diagnostic event (e.g. a wire break message) before carrying
out reparameterization, since otherwise it may happen in some cases that outgoing
diagnostic events are no longer reported. As a result, the SF LEDs on the CPU,
IM, or module will continue to shine, for example, although the reparameterized
module is working correctly. If such a situation does arise, however, the module
must be removed and then plugged in again.

Product Information on the Manual

2 A5E00201782-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Notes on the table
There is a separate table for each manual that describes the technical
specifications of the signal modules of the S7-300 product family.
The “Behavior of the Inputs/Outputs” column indicates the behavior of the
inputs/outputs when reparameterization is carried out in RUN mode, provided they
are not affected by reparameterization.

Behavior of the Peculiarities when reparameterizing

Module inputs/outputs
S7-300 module specifications
6ES7 321-7BH00-0AB0
6ES7 321-7BH80-0AB0
SM 321; DI 16 DC 24 V; Supply the last valid
with hardware interrupt and process value before ---
diagnostic interrupt parameterization
6ES7 321-7BH01-0AB0
SM 321; DI 16 DC 24 V;
with hardware interrupt and
diagnostic interrupt, clocked
6ES7 322-8BF00-0AB0
6ES7 322-8BF80-0AB0
SM 322; DO 8 DC 24 V/
0.5 A; with diagnostic
Output the last valid
interrupt
output value before ---
6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0 parameterization
SM 322;DO 8 AC 120/230V/
2A ISOL
6ES7 322-5GH00-0AB0
SM 322;
DO 16 UC 24/48V
6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0
SM 322;
DO 8 Rel. AC 230V/5A
6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0 SF LED shines:
SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit If there was a pending diagnosis before
reparameterization,
p , the SF LEDs (on( the
6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0 C
CPU, IM, or module)) may still be shining
Supply the last valid although there is no longer a pending
SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit process value before diagnosis and the module is working
parameterization correctly
correctly.
6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0
Remedy:
SM 331; AI 8 RTD
• Only reparameterize when there is no
pending diagnosis on the module,
module or
6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0
• Remove the module, and then plug it in
SM 331; AI 8 TC again

Product Information on the Manual

A5E00201782-03 3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Behavior of the Peculiarities when reparameterizing
Module inputs/outputs
6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0 SF LED shines:
SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit If there was a pending diagnosis before
reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the
CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining
Output the last valid
although there is no longer a pending
output value before
diagnosis and the module is working
parameterization
t i ti
6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0 correctly.
6ES7 332-5HB81-0AB0 Remedy:
SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit • Only reparameterize when there is no
pending diagnosis on the module, or
• Remove the module, and then plug it in
again
6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0 ---
SM 332; AO 8 12 Bit

6ES7 332-7ND00-0AB0
6ES7 332-7ND01-0AB0 ---
SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit

Behavior of the Peculiarities when reparameterizing

Module inputs/outputs
ET 200M signal modules for process automation (PCS7)
6ES7 321-7TH00-0AB0 Supply the last valid SF LED shines:
SM 321; DI 16 NAMUR process value (including If there was a pending diagnosis before
the value status) before reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the
parameterization CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining
although there is no longer a pending
diagnosis and the module is working
correctly.
Remedy:
6ES7 322-8BH00-0AB0 Output the last valid • Only reparameterize when there is no
SM 322; DO 16 DC 24 output value before pending diagnosis on the module, or
V/0,5A parameterization
• Remove the module, and then plug it in
again

Product Information on the Manual

4 A5E00201782-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Behavior of the Peculiarities when reparameterizing
Module inputs/outputs
S7-300, ET 200, I/O modules with intrinsically-safe signals
6ES7 321-7RD00-0AB0 Supply the last valid SF LED shines:
SM 321; DI 4 NAMUR process value before If there was a pending diagnosis before
parameterization reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the
CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining
although there is no longer a pending
diagnosis and the module is working
correctly.
Remedy:
• Only reparameterize when there is no
pending diagnosis on the module, or
• Remove the module, and then plug it in
again
6ES7 322 5RD00-0AB0 Output the last valid
SM 322; DO 4 15V/20mA output value before
parameterization
6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0 ---
SM 322; DO 4 24V/10mA
6ES7 331-7RD00-0AB0
SM 331; AI 4 0/4...20mA ---
6ES7 331-7SF00-0AB0 Supply the last valid ---
process value before
SM 331; AI 8 TC/4 RTD
parameterization
6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0
SM 331; AI 2 0/4...20mA
HART ---
6ES7 332-5RD00-0AB0 SF LED shines:
SM 332; AO 4 0/4...20mA If there was a pending diagnosis before
reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the
CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining
although there is no longer a pending
Output the last valid diagnosis and the module is working
output value before correctly.
parameterization
Remedy:
• Only reparameterize when there is no
pending diagnosis on the module, or
• Remove the module, and then plug it in
again
6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0
SM 332; AO 2 0/4...20mA ---
HART

Product Information on the Manual

A5E00201782-03 5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Product Information on the Manual
6 A5E00201782-03

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Product Information

SIMATIC S7-300
X 2
Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
16 Bit as of Version 3 4

New Analog Output Module Available

The S7-300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit has been added to the
S7-300 family. The order number for this module is 6ES7 332-7ND02-0AB0.
This product information includes details about the characteristics and technical
specifications of the Analog Output module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit. Refer to the
S7-300 Installation and Hardware Manual for more information about the S7-300
product family.
You will also learn:
S How to start up the analog output module
S The output ranges available for the analog output module
S How to configure the analog output module

Additional Assistance
For assistance in answering technical questions, for training on this product, or for
ordering, contact your Siemens distributor or sales office.

Copyright by Siemens AG 2004

A5E0033348892-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
16 Bit; (6ES7 332-7ND02-0AB0)

Order No.
6ES7 332-7ND02-0AB0

Characteristic Features
The Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit has the following characteristic
features:
S 4 outputs in 4 channel groups
S Individual output channels can be programmed as
– voltage outputs
– current outputs
S Resolution of 16 bits
S Supports clocked operation
S Programmable diagnostics
S Programmable diagnostic interrupt
S Programmable substitute value output
S Galvanic Isolation between:
– backplane bus interface and analog output channels
– the different analog output channels
– analog output and L+, M
– backplane bus interface and L+, M

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

2 A5E0033348892-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Terminal Connection Diagram
Figure 1 shows the analog terminal connection diagram and the wiring diagram for
the Output Analog Module SM 332 AO 4 × 16 Bit.
The detailed technical specifications for this analog output module are on the
following page.

Fault Indicator – red

Current Voltage
Outputs Outputs
SM332 1 L+
AO 4x16 BIT SF 24 V

Galvanic Isolation
3 QI0 QV 0

4 S 0+
5 CH0 S 0 – CH0

6 MANA 0 M ANA 0

7 QI1 QV 1
Internal
8 S 1+
supply
9 CH1 S 1 – CH1

10 MANA 1 M ANA 1

11 QI2 QV 2

12 S 2+

13 CH2 S 2 – CH2

14 MANA 2 M ANA 2

15 QI3 QV 3
Back– S 3+
plane 16
bus 17 CH3 S 3 – CH3
IM
18 MANA 3 M ANA 3

M
20
M
332–7ND02–0AB0

Figure 1 Connection Diagram of Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

Note
Switching the rated load voltage (L+) on and off, can cause wrong intermediate
values at the output for approximately 10 ms.

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

A5E0033348892-01
3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Hazardous Location Information
“Power, input and output (I/O) wiring must be in accordance with Class I, Division 2
wiring methods [Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electric Code, NFPA 70] and in
accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.”
Peripheral equipment must be suitable for the location it is used in.
The equipment must be suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only.

Warning
! Explosion Hazard
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Div. 2 Hazardous Locations.
Different or lesser quality components may cause an explosion or other hazardous situation,
which could result in death or serious injury, and/or damage to equipment.
To avoid potentially hazardous situations, always use the appropriate components.

Warning
! Explosion Hazard
Never disconnect equipment before powering off or before ascertaining that the area is
nonhazardous. Disconnecting equipment before powering off or in a hazardous area may cause
an explosion, which could result in death or serious injury, and/or damage to equipment.
To avoid potentially hazardous situations, always power off equipment and assure that the area
is nonhazardous before disconnecting.

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

4 A5E0033348892-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation
Dimensions W × H × D (in 40 × 125 × 117 Resolution including sign
millimeters) S ± 10 V 16 bits
Weight Approx. 220 g S 0 to 10 V 15 bits
Data for Specific Module S 1 to 5 V 14 bits

Supports clocked operation Yes

S ± 20 mA 16 bits

Number of outputs 4
S 0 to 20 mA 15 bits
S 4 to 20 mA 15 bits
Length of cable
S Shielded max. 200 m Conversion time (per
channel)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
S In standard mode < 200 ms
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC S In clocked mode 640 ms
electronics L+
S Reverse polarity Yes Basic response time of
protection module (all channels
enabled)
Isolation S In standard mode < 800 ms
S Between channels and Yes S In clocked mode 750 ms
backplane bus
S Between channels and Yes Settling time
power supply of the S For resistive load 0.2 ms
electronics
S For capacitive load 3.3 ms
S Between the channels Yes
S For inductive load 0.5 ms
(1 mH)
Permitted potential
difference S For inductive load 3.3 ms
(10 mH)
S Between the outputs DC 200 V/AC 120 V
(ECM)
S Between MANA and DC 200 V/AC 120 V
Minternal (EISO)
Insulation tested with DC 1500 V
Current consumption
S From the backplane bus max. 120 mA
S From the power supply max. 290 mA
L+
Power dissipation of the typ. 3 W
module

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

A5E0033348892-01
5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Crosstalk between the > 100 dB Interrupts
outputs S Diagnostics interrupt Parameters can be
Operational limit (in the assigned
entire temperature Diagnostics functions Parameters can be
range, with reference to assigned
the output range)
S Group error display Red LED (SF)
S Voltage output ±0.12%
S Diagnostics information Possible
S Current output ±0.18% can be displayed
Basic error
(operational limit at Substitute value can be Yes. Parameters
25° C, with reference to applied can be assigned
the output range) Data for Selecting an Actuator
S Voltage output Output ranges (rated
± 10 V ± 0.02% values)
0 to 10 V ± 0.02% S Voltage ± 10 V
1 to 5 V ± 0.04% 0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
S Current output
S Current ± 20 mA
± 20 mA ± 0.02% 0 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA ± 0.02% 4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA ± 0.04% Load resistance (in the
nominal range of the
Temperature error (with output)
reference to the output
range) S For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ
S Voltage output ± 0.0025% / K Capacitive load max. 1 µF
S Current output ± 0.004% / K S For current outputs max. 500 Ω
Inductive load max. 1 mH
Linearity error (with ± 0.004%
Voltage output
reference to the output
range) S Short-circuit protection Yes

Repeatability (in steady ±0.002%

S Short-circuit current max. 40 mA
state at 25° C, with
Current output
reference to the output
range) S No-load voltage max. 18 V

Output ripple; bandwidth ±0.05%

0 to 50Khz (with
reference to the output
range)

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

6 A5E0033348892-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Destruction limit against
voltages/currents applied
from outside
S Voltage to the outputs max. 15 V
against MANA continuous; 75 V for
max. 1 s (pulse duty
factor 1:20)
S Current max. DC 50 mA

Connection of actuators Possible

S For voltage output
Four–conductor
connection (measuring
circuit)
S For current output Possible
Two–conductor
connection

Synchronous Operation

Characteristics
Reproducible response times (i.e., of equal length) are achieved in SIMATIC with
an equidistant DP bus cycle and synchronization of the following individual
asynchronous cycles:
S Asynchronous cycle of the user program. Cycle length can vary, due to
acyclical program branches.
S Asynchronous, variable DP cycle on the PROFIBUS subnet
S Asynchronous cycle on the DP slave backplane bus
S Asynchronous cycle during signal conditioning and conversion in the electronic
modules of the DP slaves
With equidistance, the DP cycle operates in the same clock cycle, with the same
length. The execution levels of a CPU (OB61 to OB64) and the synchronous I/O
are synchronized with this clock cycle. Thus, I/O data are transferred in defined,
constant time intervals (synchronous operation). The maximum “jitter” is "50 µs.

Requirements
S The DP master and DP slave must support synchronous operation. You must
have Step 7 Version 5.2 or higher.

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

A5E0033348892-01
7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Operating Mode: Synchronous Operation
The following conditions are applicable for synchronous operation:

Table 1 Conditions for Synchronous Operation

Processing and activation time TWA between read in 750ms

of output value in the transfer buffer and loading in
the output DAC
TDPmin 1100ms
Diagnostic interrupt 4 x TDP, max

Processing and Output Update Time

The same time conditions are always applicable, irrespective of the number of
channels programmed.

TWA

D/A-Conversion and Internal Processing Output Update

CH3

CH2

CH1

CH0

640ms 110ms

TO

Figure 2 Calculation of the Processing Time and Output Update Time

Description of the Method of Functioning in Synchronous Operation

At time T0 – TWA, the module reads in the output data and saves the data
internally. Following internal processing time for each channel, the results are
written to each D/A converter.

Additional Information
You will find additional information about synchronous operation in the STEP 7
online Help, the ET 200M Distributed I/O System manual and the Synchronous
Operation Manual.

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

8 A5E0033348892-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Starting Up the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
16 Bit

Parameter Assignment
The Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit is set using one of the following
methods.
S With STEP 7 (see the STEP 7 User Manual)
S In the user program by means of SFCs (see the STEP 7 System and Standard
Functions Reference Manual)

Note
If you modify output ranges when the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16
Bit is in operation, intermediate values can appear at the output.

Default Setting
The Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit has default settings for the type
of output, diagnostics, interrupts, etc. (see Table 1).
These default settings apply if you do not re-initialize the module with STEP 7.

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

A5E0033348892-01
9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Table 1 Parameters and Default Settings for the Analog Output Module
SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit.

Parameter SM 332; AO 4
16 Bit Parameter Scope

Type
Value Range Default
Settings
Enable
S Diagnostics interrupt Yes/No No Dynamic Module
Diagnostics
S Channel Diagnostics Yes/No No Static Channel
Response with CPU-STOP LWH Hold last value ASS Dynamic Channel
ASS
Output de-energized
Output
S Output Type Deactivated U Dynamic Channel
Voltage
Current
S Output Range 0 to 20 mA ± 10 V Dynamic Channel
4 to 20 mA
± 20 mA
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
± 10 V

Parameter Assignment in the User Program

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit individually.
This allows you to assign individual parameters for each output channel. When you
set the parameters in the user program, the parameters are assigned to channel
groups. Each output channel of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit
is then assigned to one channel group, i.e. output channel 0 = channel group 0.

Unused Output Channels

To ensure the unused output channels of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 4 × 16 Bit are not active. You must deactivate them and leave them open.
Deactivate the output channel using the “Output” parameter block when you
program with STEP 7.

Substitute Values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit for the CPU operating mode STOP
as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If
you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

10 A5E0033348892-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Output Ranges for the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

Analog Outputs
You can use the outputs of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit as:
S Voltage outputs
S Current outputs
Set the outputs group-wise, using STEP 7 for programming the output type.

Output Ranges
Set the output ranges for the voltage and/or current outputs with STEP 7.
Table 2 lists all the possible output ranges for the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 4 × 16 Bit.

Table 2 Output Ranges for Analog Output Module

Selected Type Description Output Range

of Output
Voltage Table 3 and Table 4 show the digital 1 to 5V
analog values in the analog output 0 to 10 V
range. ± 10 V
Current Table 3 and Table 4 show the digital 0 to 20 mA
analog values in the analog output 4 to 20 mA
measuring range. ± 20 mA

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are “Voltage” for the output type and
“± 10 V” for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and
output range without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit in STEP 7.

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

A5E0033348892-01
11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Value Representation of the Output Ranges for the Analog Output
Module SM 332; AO 4
16 Bit

Introduction
The tables in this section contain the digitized analog values for the various output
ranges of the analog output module.

How to Read the Output-Value Tables

Tables 3 and 4 contain the digital analog values for the various ouput ranges.
Since the binary representation for the analog values is always the same, these
tables only contain the output values and the units.

Voltage and Current Output Ranges

Table 3 shows the representation of the digitized output value:
S For the voltage output ranges ±10 V and
S For the current output range ± 20 mA.

Table 3 Representation of the Digital Output Value of the Analog Output Module
(Voltage and Current Output Ranges)

System Word Units Output Range

Output Range
Range ± 20 mA
Decimal Hexadecimal ± 10 V

Overflow 32767 7FFFH 0.0000 0.0000

Overrange 32511 7EFFH 11.7589 23.515
: : : :
27649 6C01H 10.0004 20.0007
Nominal Range 27648 6C00H 10.00 20.000
20736 5100H 7.5 14.998
: : : :
–20736 AF00H –7.5 –14.998
–27648 9400H –10.00 –20.000
Underrange –27649 93FFH –10.0004 –20.0007
: : : :
–32512 8100H –11.7589 –23.515
Underflow –32768 8000H 0.0000 0.0000

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

12 A5E0033348892-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Table 4 shows the representation of the digitized output value:
S For the voltage output ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to10 V and
S For the current output ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

Table 4 Representation of the Digital Output Value of the Analog Output Module
(Voltage and Current Output Ranges)

System Word Units Output Output Output Output

Range Range Range Range Range
Decimal Hexadecimal 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
Overflow 32767 7FFFH 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Overrange 32511 7EFFH 5.8794 11.7589 23.515 22.810
: : : : : :
27649 6C01H 5.0002 10.0004 20.0007 20.0005
Nominal 27648 6C00H 5.000 10.00 20.000 20.000
Range 20736 5100H 4.000 7.50 14.998 16.000
: : : : : :

0 0H 1.000 0.000 0.000 4.000

Under- –1 FFFFH 0.9999 0.0000 0.0000 3.9995
range : : : : : :
–6912 E500H 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Underflow –32768 8000H 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

A5E0033348892-01
13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit
14 A5E0033348892-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
s
SIMATIC

Product Information
01/2005

Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

Language Titel Page

Deutsch Einsatz der Baugruppen/Module im explosionsgeschützten Bereich Zone 2 3

English Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 5

Français Utilisation des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à risque d'explosion 2 7

Español Aplicación de los módulos / tarjetas en áreas con peligro de explosión, zona 2 9

Italiano Impiego delle unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2 11

Nederlands Gebruik van de componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied zone 2 13

Dansk Brug af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige område zone 2 15

Suomi Rakenneryhmien/moduulien käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2 17

Svenska Användning av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i explosionsriskområde zon 2 19

Português Uso de grupos construtivos/módulos em área exposta ao perigo de explosão 2 21

Ελληνικά Χρήση των δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων/µονάδων σε επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη περιοχή, ζώνη 2 23

Česky Použití konstrukčních skupin / modulů v prostředí s nebezpečím výbuchu Zóna 2 25

Estnisch Sõlmede/moodulite kasutamine plahvatusohtliku piirkonna tsoonis 2 27

Latviski Ierīču/moduļu pielietojums sprādzienbīstamas teritorijas zonā 2 29

Lietuviška Konstrukcinių grupių/modulių panaudojimas sprogioje 2 zonos aplinkoje 31

Magya A főegységek/modulok alkalmazása a 2. zóna robbanásveszélyes környezetben 33

Malti Tqegħid tal-Komponenti / Modules fiż-Żona 2, fejn hemm Riskju ta' Splużjoni 35

Polski Zastosowanie grup konstrukcyjnych / modułów w 2 strefie zagrożenia wybuchem 37

Slovensky Použitie konštrukčných skupín / modulov v prostredí s nebezpečenstvom výbuchu zóny 2 39

Slovensko Uporaba sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem območju cone 2 41

Türkçe Patlama tehlikesi olan Alan 2 bölgesinde ünite gruplarının/modüllerin kullanılması 43

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
2 A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Deutsch

Einsatz der Baugruppen/Module im explosions-

gefährdeten Bereich Zone 2

Zone 2
Explosionsgefährdete Bereiche werden in Zonen eingeteilt. Die Zonen werden
nach der Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorhandenseins einer explosionsfähigen
Atmosphäre unterschieden.
Zone Explosionsgefahr Beispiel
2 explosive Gasatmosphäre tritt Bereiche um Flanschverbindungen mit
nur selten und kurzzeitig auf Flachdichtungen bei Rohrleitungen in
geschlossenen Räumen
sicherer nein • außerhalb der Zone 2
Bereich • Standardanwendungen von dezentraler
Peripherie

Nachfolgend finden Sie wichtige Hinweise für die Installation der

Baugruppen/Module im explosionsgefährdeten Bereich.

Weitere Informationen
Weitere Informationen zu den Baugruppen/Modulen finden Sie im dazugehörigen
Handbuch.

Fertigungsort / Zulassung

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 nach EN 50021 : 1999

Prüfnummer: siehe Tabelle

Fertigungsort Baugruppen/Module Prüfnummer

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Fehlersichere Module ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Buskopplung DP/PA
Diagnoserepeater
S7-300 Fehlersichere Baugruppen
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Hinweis
Baugruppen/Module mit der Zulassung II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 dürfen nur in
SIMATIC-Systemen der Gerätekategorie 3 eingesetzt werden.

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 3

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Deutsch

Instandhaltung
Für eine Reparatur müssen die betroffene Baugruppen/Module an den
Fertigungsort geschickt werden. Nur dort darf die Reparatur durchgeführt werden.

Besondere Bedingungen
1. Baugruppen/Module müssen in einen Schaltschrank oder ein metallisches
Gehäuse eingebaut werden. Diese müssen mindestens die Schutzart IP 54
(nach EN 60529) gewährleisten. Dabei sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zu
berücksichtigen, in denen das Gerät installiert wird. Für das Gehäuse muss
eine Herstellererklärung für Zone 2 vorliegen (gemäß EN 50021).
2. Wenn am Kabel bzw. an der Kabeleinführung dieses Gehäuses unter Betriebs-
bedingungen eine Temperatur > 70 °C erreicht wird oder wenn unter Betriebs-
bedingungen die Temperatur an der Aderverzweigung > 80 °C sein kann,
müssen die Temperatureigenschaften der Kabel mit den tatsächlich
gemessenen Temperaturen übereinstimmen.
3. Die eingesetzten Kabeleinführungen müssen der geforderten IP-Schutzart und
dem Abschnitt 7.2 (gemäß EN 50021) entsprechen.
4. Alle Geräte, einschließlich Schalter etc., die an den Ein- und Ausgängen von
SIMATIC-Systemen angeschlossen werden, müssen für den Explosionsschutz
Typ EEx nA oder EEx nC genehmigt sein.
5. Es müssen Maßnahmen getroffen werden, dass die Nennspannung durch
Transienten um nicht mehr als 40 % überschritten werden kann.
6. Umgebungstemperaturbereich: 0° C bis 60° C
7. Innerhalb des Gehäuses ist an einem nach dem Öffnen gut sichtbaren Platz ein
Schild mit folgender Warnung anzubringen:

! Warnung
Das Gehäuse darf nur kurze Zeit geöffnet werden, z. B. für visuelle Diagnose.
Betätigen Sie dabei keine Schalter, ziehen oder stecken keine Baugruppen und
trennen keine elektrischen Leitungen (Steckverbindungen).
Diese Warnung kann unberücksichtigt bleiben, wenn bekannt ist, dass keine
explosionsgefährdete Atmosphäre herrscht.

Liste der zugelassenen Baugruppen/Module

Die Liste mit den zugelassenen Baugruppen/Module finden Sie im Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

unter der Beitrags-ID 13702947.

4 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 English

Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous

Area

Zone 2
Hazardous areas are divided up into zones. The zones are distinguished according
to the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.
Zone Explosion Hazard Example
2 Explosive gas atmosphere Areas around flange joints with flat
occurs only seldom and for a gaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces
short time
Safe area No • Outside zone 2
• Standard distributed I/O applications

Below you will find important information on the installation of the

subassemblies/modules in a hazardous area.

Further Information
You will find further information on the subassemblies/modules in the
corresponding manual.

Production Location / Certification

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 to EN 50021 : 1999

Test number: see table below

Production Location Subassemblies/Modules Test Number

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET-200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S fault-tolerant modules ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany ET-200M ATEX 1096X
DP/PA bus interface
Diagnostics repeater
S7-300 fault-tolerant modules
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Note
Subassemblies/modules with II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 certification can only be
used in SIMATIC systems rated as category 3 equipment.

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 5

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 English

Maintenance
If repair is necessary, the affected subassemblies/modules must be sent to the
production location. Repairs can only be carried out there.

Special Conditions
1. Subassemblies/modules must be installed in a cabinet or metal housing. These
must comply with the IP 54 degree of protection as a minimum. The
environmental conditions under which the equipment is installed must be taken
into account. There must be a manufacturer's declaration for zone 2 available
for the housing (in accordance with EN 50021).
2. If a temperature of > 70 °C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this
housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 °C can be
reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the
temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the
temperatures actually measured.
3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection
and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021).
4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and
outputs of SIMATIC systems must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC explosion
protection.
5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot
be exceeded by more than 40 %.
6. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to 60° C
7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an
easily visible position when the housing is opened:

Warning
! The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If
you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or
disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections).
You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not hazardous
(i.e. there is no risk of explosion).

List of Approved Subassemblies/Modules

You will find the list of approved subassemblies/modules under the ID 13702947
on the Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.

6 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Français

Utilisation des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à

risque d'explosion 2

Zone 2
Les environnements à risque d'explosion sont répartis en zones. Les zones se
distinguent par la probabilité de présence d'une atmosphère explosive.
Zone Risque d'explosion Exemple
2 Formation rare et brève d'une Environnement de raccords à joints plats
atmosphère gazeuse explosive dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux
fermés
Zone sûre Non • A l'extérieur de la zone 2
• Utilisation standard de périphérie
décentralisée

Vous trouverez ci-après des remarques importantes pour l'installation de la station

de périphérie décentralisée des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à risque
d'explosion.

Informations complémentaires
Des informations complémentaires sur les modules / cartouches se trouvent dans
le manuel correspondant.

Lieu de fabrication / Homologation

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 selon EN 50021 : 1999

Numéro de contrôle : voir tableau
Lieu de fabrication Modules / coupleurs Numéro de
contrôle
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 Modules à sécurité intrinsèque ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg ET 200S
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Couplage de bus DP/PA
Répéteur de diagnostic
Modules à sécurité intrinsèque
S7-300
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 7

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Français

Nota
Les modules / coupleurs homologués II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuvent
être utilisés que dans des systèmes SIMATIC de catégorie 3.

Entretien
Si une réparation est nécessaire, le module / coupleur concerné doit être expédié
au lieu de production. La réparation ne doit être effectuée qu'en ce lieu.

Conditions particulières
1. Les modules / coupleurs doivent être installés dans une armoire ou un boîtier
métallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il faut
alors tenir compte des conditions d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil est
installé. Le boîtier doit faire l’objet d’une déclaration de conformité du fabricant
pour la zone 2 (selon EN 50021).
2. Si dans les conditions d’exploitation, une température > 70 °C est atteinte au
niveau du câble ou de l’entrée du câble dans ce boîtier, ou bien si la
température au niveau de la dérivation des conducteurs peut être > 80 °C, les
capacités de résistance thermique des câbles doivent corespondre aux
températures effectivement mesurées.
3. Les entrées de câbles utilisées doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exigé et
être conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021).
4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccordés aux entrées
et sorties de systèmes SIMATIC doivent être homologués pour la protection
antidéflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas être
dépassée de plus de 40% sous l’influence de transitoires.
6. Plage de température ambiante : 0° C à 60° C
7. A l’intérieur du boîtier, il faut placer, à un endroit bien visible après ouverture,
une plaquette comportant l’avertissement suivant :

Avertissement
! Ouvir le boîtier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer un
diagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, n’actionnez aucun commutateur, ne déconnectez
aucun module et ne débanchez pas de câbles électriques (connexions).
Le respect de cet avertissement n’est pas impératif s’il est certain que
l’environnement ne présente pas de risque d’explosion.

Liste des modules / coupleurs homologués

Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules / coupleurs homologués :
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
référence ID 13702947.

8 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Español

Aplicación de los módulos / tarjetas en áreas con

peligro de explosión, zona 2

Zona 2
Las áreas con peligro de explosión se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas se
diferencian según la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmósfera capaz de sufrir
una explosión.
Zona Peligro de explosión Ejemplo
2 La atmósfera explosiva de gas Áreas alrededor de uniones abridadas con juntas
sólo se presenta rara vez y muy planas en tuberías en locales cerrados
brevemente
Área segura no • fuera de la zona 2
• Aplicaciones estándar de la periferia
descentralizada

A continuación encontrará importantes informaciones para la instalación de los

módulos / tarjetas en áreas con peligro de explosión.

Otras informaciones
Encontrará otras informaciones relativas a los módulos / tarjetas en el Manual
correspondiente.

Lugar de fabricación / Homologación

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 según norma EN 50021 : 1999

Número de comprobación: véase tabla

Lugar de fabricación Módulos / tarjetas Número de

comprobación

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01

Werner-von-Siemens- Grupos ET 200S a prueba de fallos ATEX 1238 X
Straße 50
S7-300 KEMA 02
92224 Amberg
ET 200M ATEX 1096 X
Germany
Acoplamiento de bus DP/PA
Repetidor de diagnóstico
Grupos S7-300 a prueba de fallos

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03

Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. ATEX 1125 X
50 76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter ATEX 1228 X

SIMATIC NET KEMA 03

ATEX 1226 X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 9

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Español

Nota
Los módulos / tarjetas con la homologación II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pueden
utilizarse únicamente en los sistemas SIMATIC de la categoría de equipo 3.

Mantenimiento
Para una reparación se ha de remitir el módulo / tarjeta afectado al lugar de
fabricación. Sólo allí se puede realizar la reparación.

Condiciones especiales
1. Los módulos / tarjetas se han de montar en un armario eléctrico de distribución
o en una carcasa metálica. Éstos deben garantizar como mínimo el grado de
protección IP 54 (conforme a EN 60529). Para ello se han de tener en cuenta
las condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el equipo. La caja deberá
contar con una declaración del fabricante para la zona 2 (conforme a
EN 50021).
2. Si durante la operación se alcanzara una temperatura > 70° C en el cable o la
entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80° C en la
bifurcación de hilos, deberán adaptarse las propiedades térmicas de los cables
a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente.
3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de protección IP
exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021).
4. Todos los dispositivos –inclusive interruptores, etc.– conectados a las entradas
y salidas de sistemas SIMATIC deben estar homologados para la protección
contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensión
nominal pueda rebasar en más del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios.
6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0° C hasta 60° C
7. Dentro de la caja deberá colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su
apertura un rótulo con la siguiente advertencia:

! Precaución
Abrir la caja sólo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnóstico visual. Durante este
tiempo Ud. no deberá activar ningún interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar módulos
ni separar conductores eléctricos (conexiones enchufables).
Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmósfera existente no
hay peligro de explosión.

Lista de los módulos / tarjetas homologados

En la internet hallará Ud. una lista con los módulos / tarjetas homologados:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
bajo el ID de asignación 13702947.

10 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Italiano

Impiego delle unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di

esplosione zona 2

Zona 2
Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengono
distinte secondo la probabilità della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva.
Zona Pericolo di esplosione Esempio
2 L'atmosfera esplosiva si Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con
presente solo raramente e guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in ambienti
brevemente chiusi
Area sicura No • Al di fuori della zona 2
• Applicazioni standard di periferia
decentrata

Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione delle
unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione.

Ulteriori informazioni
Ulteriori informazioni sulle unità/moduli si trovano nel corrispondente manuale.

Luogo di produzione / Omologazione

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 secondo EN 50021 : 1999

Numero di controllo: vedi tabella
Luogo di produzione Unità/moduli Numero di controllo

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01

Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 Unità ad elevata sicurezza ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg ET 200S
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Accoppiamento di bus DP/PA
Repeater di diagnostica
Unità ad elevata sicurezza
S7-300

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03

Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET KEMA 03

ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 11

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Italiano

Avvertenza
Le unità/moduli con l'omologazione II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essere
impiegati solo nei sistemi SIMATIC della categoria di apparecchiature 3.

Manutenzione
Per una riparazione, le unità/i moduli interessati devono essere inviati al luogo di
produzione. La riparazione può essere effettuata solo lì.

Condizioni particolari
1. Le unità/i moduli devono essere montati in un armadio elettrico o in un
contenitore metallico. Questi devono assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione
IP 54. In questo caso bisogna tenere conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle
quali l'apparecchiatura viene installata. Per il contenitore deve essere presente
una dichiarazione del costruttore per la zona 2 (secondo EN 50021).
2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in
condizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 °C o se in condizioni di esercizio la
temperatura nella derivazione dei fili può essere > 80 °C, le caratteristiche di
temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente
misurata.
3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione richiesto
e alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021).
4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati agli
ingressi/uscite di sistemi SIMATIC, devono essere stati omologati per la
protezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa
essere superata per più del 40% da parte di transienti.
6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0° C a 60° C
7. All’interno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo l’apertura,
una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento:

! Attenzione
Il contenitore può rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per una
diagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare o
innestare unità e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori).
Non è necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se è noto che non c’è
un’atmosfera a rischio di esplosione

Elenco delle unità/moduli omologati

L'elenco con le unità/moduli omologati si trova in Internet al sito:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
all’ID di voce 13702947.

12 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Nederlands

Gebruik van de componenten/modulen in het explosief

gebied zone 2

Zone 2
Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordt
onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een
explosieve atmosfeer.
Zone Explosiegevaar Voorbeeld
2 Een explosieve gasatmosfeer Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met
treedt maar zelden op en voor pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten
korte duur vertrekken
Veilig neen • Buiten de zone 2
gebied • Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale
periferie
Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van de
componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied.

Verdere informatie
In het bijhorende handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de
componenten/modulen

Productieplaats / Vergunning

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 conform EN 50021 : 1999

Keuringsnummer: zie tabel

Productieplaats Componenten/modulen Keuringsnummer

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01

Werner-von-Siemens- ET 200S tegen fouten ATEX 1238X
Strasse 50 beveiligde componenten
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200 M ATEX 1096X
Buskoppeling DP/PA
Diagnoserepeater
S7-300 tegen fouten beveiligde
componenten

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03

Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET KEMA 03

ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 13

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Nederlands

Opmerking
Componenten/modulen met de vergunning II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogen
slechts worden gebruikt in SIMATIC-systemen van de apparaatcategorie 3.

Instandhouding
Voor een reparatie moeten de betreffende componenten/modulen naar de plaats
van vervaardiging worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden
uitgevoerd.

Speciale voorwaarden
1. Componenten/modulen moeten worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een
behuizing van metaal. Deze moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54
waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening te worden gehouden met de
omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt geïnstalleerd. Voor de
behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor zone 2 te worden
ingediend (volgens EN 50021).
2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 °C of als onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 °C kan
zijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met
de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen.
3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraad
hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021).
4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de in-
en uitgangen van SIMATIC-systemen, moeten zijn goedgekeurd voor de
explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC.
5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door
transiënten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden.
6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0° C tot 60° C
7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een
bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing:

! Waarschuwing
De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuele
diagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en
ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen).
Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat er
geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.

Lijst van de toegelaten componenten/modulen

De lijst met de toegelaten componenten/modulen vindt u in het internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947.

14 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dansk

Brug af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige

område zone 2

Zone 2
Eksplosionsfarlige områder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter
hvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfære.
Zone Eksplosionsfare Eksempel
2 Eksplosiv gasatmosfære Områder rundt om flangeforbindelser med
optræder kun sjældent og varer flade pakninger ved rørledninger i lukkede
kort rum
Sikkert Nej • Uden for zone 2
område • Standardanvendelser decentral periferi

I det følgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af komponenter/moduler

i det eksplosionsfarlige område.

Yderligere informationer
Yderligere informationer om komponenterne/modulerne findes i den pågældende
manual.

Produktionssted / Godkendelse

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 efter EN 50021 : 1999

Kontrolnummer: se tabel
Produktionssted Komponenter/moduler Kontrolnummer
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S fejlsikre ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg komponenter
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Buskobling DP/PA
Diagnoserepeater
S7-300 fejlsikre komponenter

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03

Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Bemærk
Komponenter/moduler med godkendelsen II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 må kun
monteres i SIMATIC-systemer for udstyrskategori 3.

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 15

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Dansk

Vedligeholdelse
Hvis de pågældende komponenter/moduler skal repareres, bedes De sende dem
til produktionsstedet. Reparation må kun udføres der.

Særlige betingelser
1. Komponenterne/modulerne skal monteres i et kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet.
Disse skal mindst kunne sikre beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelse
skal der tages højde for de omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret er
installeret. Der skal være udarbejdet en erklæring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet
for zone 2 (iht. EN 50021).
2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindføringen på dette hus når op på en temperatur på
> 70 °C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen på åreforegreningen kan
være > 80 °C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber
stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk måles.
3. De benyttede kabelindføringer skal være i overensstemmelse med den
krævede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021).
4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene til
SIMATIC-systemerne, skal være godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af
type EEx nA eller EEx nC.
5. Der skal træffes foranstaltninger, der sørger for, at den nominelle spænding via
transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %.
6. Omgivelsestemperaturområde: 0° C til 60° C
7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, når kabinettet åbnes.
Dette skilt skal have følgende advarsel:

Advarsel
! Kabinettet må kun åbnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denne
forbindelse ikke på kontakter, træk eller isæt ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke
elektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser).
Der skal ikke tages højde for denne advarsel, hvis man ved, at der ikke er nogen
eksplosionsfarlig atmosfære.

Liste over godkendte komponenter/moduler

Listen med de godkendte komponenter/moduler findes på internettet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
under bidrags-ID 13702947.

16 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Suomi

Rakenneryhmien/moduulien käyttö
räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2

Vyöhyke 2
Räjähdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyöhykkeisiin. Vyöhykkeet erotellaan
räjähdyskelpoisen ilmakehän olemassa olon todennäköisyyden mukaan.
Vyöhyke Räjähdysvaara Esimerkki
2 Räjähtävä kaasuilmakehä Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteillä varustuilla
ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa
lyhytaikaisesti
turvallinen ei • vyöhykkeen 2 ulkopuolella
alue • Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset

Seuraavasta löydätte tärkeitä ohjeita rakenneryhmien/moduulien asennukseen

räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.

Lisätietoja
Lisätietoja rakenneryhmiin/moduuleihin löydätte niihin kuuluvista ohjekirjasta.

Valmistuspaikka / Hyväksyntä

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 mukaan: 1999

Tarkastusnumero: katso taulukko
Valmistuspaikka Rakenneryhmät/moduulit Tarkastusnumero
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S läpi-iskuvarmat ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg rakenneryhmät
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Väyläkytkin DP/PA
Dignoositoistin
S7-300 läpi-iskuvarmat
rakenneryhmät
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Ohje
Rakenneryhmät/moduulit hyväksynnän II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssa
saadaan käyttää ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 SIMATIC-järjestelmissä.

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 17

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Suomi

Kunnossapito
Korjausta varten täytyy kyseinen rakenneryhmä/moduuli lähettää
valmistuspaikkaan. Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siellä.

Erityiset vaatimukset
1. Rakenneryhmät/moduulit täytyy asentaa kytkentäkaappiin tai metalliseen
koteloon. Näiden täytyy olla vähintään kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tällöin
on huomioitava ympäristöolosuhteet, johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle täytyy
olla valmistajaselvitys vyöhykettä 2 varten (EN 50021 mukaan).
2. Kun johdolla tai tämän kotelon johdon sisäänviennillä saavutetaan > 70 °C
lämpötila tai kun käyttöolosuhteissa lämpötila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 °C,
täytyy johdon lämpötilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lämpötiloja.
3. Käytettyjen johtojen sisäänohjauksien täytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan ja
kohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia.
4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetään SIMATIC-
järjestelmien tuloille ja lähdöille, täytyy olla hyväksyttyjä tyypin EEx nA tai
EEx nC räjähdyssuojausta varten.
5. Toimenpiteet täytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjännite voi transienttien kautta ylittyä
enemmän kuin 40 %.
6. Ympäristölämpötila-alue: 0° C ... 60° C
7. Kotelon sisälle, avauksen jälkeen näkyvälle paikalle, on kiinnitettävä kilpi, jossa
on seuraava varoitus:

! Varoitus
Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosia
varten. Älä tällöin käytä mitään kytkimiä, vedä tai liitä mitään rakenneryhmiä,
äläkä erota mitään sähköjohtoja (pistoliittimiä).
Tätä varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, että minkäänlaista
räjähdysvaarannettua ilmakehää ei ole olemassa.

Hyväksyttyjen rakenneryhmien/moduulien lista

Lista hyväksytyistä rakennesarjoista/moduuleista löytyy internetistä osoitteesta:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
käyttäjätunnuksella 13702947.

18 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Svenska

Användning av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i
explosionsriskområde zon 2

Zon 2
Explosionsriskområden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att
en atmosfär med explosionsfara föreligger.
Zon Explosionsfara Exempel
2 Explosiv gasatmosfär uppstår Områden kring flänsförbindelser med
endast sällan eller kortvarigt packningar vid rörledningar i slutna
utrymmen
Säkert Nej • Utanför zon 2
område • Standardanvändning av decentral
periferi

Nedan följer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av

komponentgrupperna/modulerna i ett explosionsriskområde.

Ytterligare information
Ytterligare information om komponentgrupperna/modulerna finner du i tillhörande
handbok.

Tillverkningsort / Godkännande

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 enligt EN 50021 : 1999

Kontrollnummer: se tabell
Tillverkningsort Komponentgrupper/ Kontrollnummer
moduler
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Felsäkra ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
komponentgrupper
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Busskoppling DP/PA
Diagnosrepeater
S7-300 Felsäkra
komponentgrupper
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 19

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Svenska

Anvisning
Komponentgrupper/moduler med godkännande II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 får
endast användas i SIMATIC-system i apparatgrupp 3.

Underhåll
Vid reparation måste den aktuella komponentgrupperna/modulerna insändas till
tillverkaren. Reparationer får endast genomföras där.

Särskilda villkor
1. Komponentgrupperna/modulerna måste monteras i ett kopplingsskåp eller
metallhus. Dessa måste minst vara av skyddsklass IP 54. Därvid ska
omgivningsvillkoren där enheten installeras beaktas. För kåpan måste en
tillverkardeklaration för zon 2 föreligga (enligt EN 50021).
2. Om en temperatur på > 70°C uppnås vid husets kabel resp kabelinföring under
driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trådförgreningen kan vara > 80°C under
driftvillkor, måste kabelns temperaturegenskaper överensstämma med den
verkligen uppmätta temperaturen.
3. De använda kabelinföringarna måste uppfylla kraven i det krävda IP-
skyddsutförandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021).
4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts till in- och utgångarna på
SIMATIC-system, måste vara godkända för explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA
eller EEx nC.
5. Åtgärder måste vidtas så, att märkspänningen ej kan överskridas med mer än
40 % genom transienter.
6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0° C till 60° C
7. När huset öppnats ska en skylt med följande varning monteras på ett tydligt
synligt ställe huset:

! Varning
Huset får endast öppnas under kort tid, t ex för visuell diagnos. Använd därvid
inga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frånskilj inga elektriska ledningar
(insticksanslutningar).
Ingen hänsyn måste tas till denna varning om det är säkert att det inte råder
någon explosionsfarlig atmosfär.

Lista över godkända komponentgrupper/moduler

Lista över godkända komponentgrupper/moduler finns på Internetadressen:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
under bidrags-ID 13702947.

20 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Português

Uso de grupos construtivos/módulos em área exposta

ao perigo de explosão 2

Zona 2
As áreas expostas ao perigo de explosão são divididas em zonas. As zonas são
diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existência de uma atmosfera
explosiva.
Zona Perigo de explosão Exemplo
2 Só raramente e por um breve Áreas em torno de ligações flangeadas
período de tempo surgem com vedações chatas em tubulações em
atmosferas explosivas recintos fechados
Área segura não • fora da zona 2
• Aplicações descentralizadas de
periferia descentralizada

A seguir, o encontrará avisos importantes para a instalação de grupos

construtivos/ módulos em área exposta ao perigo de explosão.

Mais informações
Para obter mais informações sobre grupos construtivos/módulos, consulte o
respectivo manual.

Local de produção / Licença

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 seg. EN 50021 : 1999

Número de ensaio: veja a tabela

Local de produção Grupos N° de ensaio

construtivos/módulos
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Grupos construtivos ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg protegidos contra erro
Alemanha
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Acoplador bus DP/PA
Repetidor de diagnóstico
S7-300 Grupos construtivos
protegidos contra erro
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Alemanha
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 21

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Português

Aviso
Os grupos construtivos/módulos com a licença II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 só
podem ser aplicados em sistemas SIMATIC da categoria de aparelho 3.

Reparo
Os grupos construtivos/módulos em questão devem ser remetidos para o local de
produção a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas lá deve ser efetuado o
reparo.

Condições especiais
1. Os grupos construtivos/módulos devem ser montados em um armário de
distribuição ou em uma caixa metálica. Estes devem garantir no mínimo o tipo
de protecção IP 54. Durante este trabalho deverão ser levados em
consideração as condições locais, nas quais o aparelho será instalado. Para a
caixa deverá ser apresentada uma declaração do fabricante para a zona 2 (de
acordo com EN 50021).
2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta carcaça sob as condições
operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 °C, ou caso sob condições
operacionais a temperatura na ramificação do fio poderá atingir > 80 °C, as
caraterísticas de temperatura deverão corresponder às temperaturas realmente
medidas.
3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de
protecção IP e à seção 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021).
4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas em
entradas e saídas dos sistemas SIMATIC devem possuir a licença para a
protecção de explosão do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tensão nominal através de
transitórios não possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %.
6. Área de temperatura ambiente: 0° C até 60° C
7. No âmbito da carcaça deve ser colocada, após a abertura, em um ponto bem
visível uma placa com a seguinte advertência:

! Advertência
A carcaça deve ser aberta apenas por um breve período de tempo, por ex. para
diagnóstico visual. Não acione nenhum interruptor, não retire ou conecte nenhum
módulo e não separe nenhum fio elétrico (ligações de tomada).
Esta advertência poderá ser ignorada caso se saiba que não há nenhuma
atmosfera sujeita ao perigo de explosão.

Lista dos grupos construtivos/módulos autorizados

A lista com os grupos construtivos/módulos autorizados encontram-se na Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
sob o número de ID 13702947.

22 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Ελληνικά

Χρήση των δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων/µονάδων σε

επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη περιοχή, ζώνη 2

Ζώνη 2
Οι επικίνδυνες για έκρηξη περιοχές χωρίζονται σε ζώνες. Οι ζώνες διαφέρουν
σύµφωνα µε την πιθανότητα ύπαρξης ενός ικανού για έκρηξη περιβάλλοντος.
Ζώνη Κίνδυνος έκρηξης Παράδειγµα
2 Εκρηκτικό περιβάλλον αερίου Περιοχές γύρω από φλαντζωτές
παρουσιάζεται µόνο σπάνια και συνδέσεις µε τσιµούχες σε σωληνώσεις σε
για σύντοµο χρονικό διάστηµα κλειστούς χώρους
Ασφαλής όχι • Εκτός της ζώνης 2
περιοχή • Τυπικές εφαρµογές αποκεντρωµένης
περιφέρειας

Στη συνέχεια θα βρείτε σηµαντικές υποδείξεις για την εγκατάσταση των δοµικών
συγκροτηµάτων/µονάδων σε επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη περιοχή.

Επιπλέον πληροφορίες
Επιπλέον πληροφορίες για τα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα/µονάδες θα βρείτε στο
αντίστοιχο εγχειρίδιο.

Τόπος κατασκευής / Άδεια

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο

EN 50021 : 1999
Αριθµός ελέγχου: βλέπε πίνακα

Τόπος κατασκευής ∆οµικά συγκροτήµατα/µονάδες Αιθµ. ελέγχου

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
ET 200S Ασφαλή σε περίπτωση ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
Germany βλάβης δοµικά συγκροτήµατα
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Σύζευξη διαύλου DP/PA
Επαναλήπτης διάγνωσης
S7-300 Ασφαλή σε περίπτωση
βλάβης δοµικά συγκροτήµατα
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET KEMA 03

ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 23

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Ελληνικά

Υπόδειξη
Τα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα/οι µονάδες µε την άδεια II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6
επιτρέπεται να τοποθετηθούν µόνο σε συστήµατα αυτοµατισµού SIMATIC της
κατηγορίας συσκευής 3.

Συντήρηση
Για µια επισκευή πρέπει να σταλθούν τα αντίστοιχα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα/µονάδες
στον τόπο κατασκευής. Μόνο εκεί επιτρέπεται να γίνει η επισκευή.

Ιδιαίτερες προϋποθέσεις
1. Τα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα/µονάδες πρέπει να ενσωµατωθούν σε ένα ερµάριο
ζεύξης ή σε ένα µεταλλικό περίβληµα. Αυτά πρέπει να εξασφαλίζουν το
λιγότερο το βαθµό προστασίας IP 54 (κατά EN 60529). Σε αυτήν την
περίπτωση πρέπει να ληφθούν υπόψη οι περιβαλλοντικές συνθήκες, στις
οποίες θα εγκατασταθεί η συσκευή. Για το περίβληµα πρέπει να προβλέπεται
δήλωση του κατασκευαστή για τη ζώνη 2 (σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο EN 50021).
2. Εάν στο καλώδιο ή στην είσοδο του καλωδίου αυτού του περιβλήµατος κάτω
από συνθήκες λειτουργίας η θερµοκρασία ξεπεράσει τους 70 °C ή όταν κάτω
από συνθήκες λειτουργίας η θερµοκρασία στη διακλάδωση του σύρµατος
µπορεί να είναι µεγαλύτερη από 80 °C, πρέπει οι θερµοκρασιακές ιδιότητες των
καλωδίων να ταυτίζονται µε τις πραγµατικά µετρηµένες θερµοκρασίες.
3. Οι χρησιµοποιούµενες εισόδοι καλωδίων πρέπει να συµµορφώνονται µε το
βαθµό προστασίας IP 54 στην ενότητα 7.2 (σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο
EN 50021).
4. Όλες οι συσκευές, συµπεριλαµβανοµένων διακοπτών κ.α., που συνδέονται στις
εισόδους και εξόδους των συστηµάτων SIMATIC, πρέπει να φέρουν εγκριµένη
προστασία κατά έκρηξης τύπου EEx nA ή EEx nC.
5. Πρέπει να ληφθούν µέτρα, να µην µπορεί να γίνει υπέρβαση της ονοµαστικής
τάσης µέσω αιφνίδιας µεταβολής της τάσης πάνω από 40 %.
6. Περιοχή θερµοκρασίας περιβάλλοντος: 0° C έως 60° C
7. Πρέπει να τοποθετηθεί µέσα στο περίβληµα σε ευδιάκριτο σηµείο µετά το
άνοιγµα µία πινακίδα µε την ακόλουθη προειδοποίηση:

! Προειδοποίηση
Το περίβληµα επιτρέπεται να ανοίγει µόνο για µικρό χρονικό διάστηµα, π.χ. για τη
διενέργεια οπτικής διάγνωσης. Μην κάνετε χρήση διακοπτών, µην τραβάτε ή
εµβυσµατώνετε δοµικά συγκροτήµατα και µη διαχωρίζετε ηλεκτροφόρους
αγωγούς (εµβσυµατώσιµες συνδέσεις).
Η προειδοποίηση αυτή δε χρειάζεται να ληφθεί υπ’ όψιν, εάν είναι γνωστό ότι δεν
υφίσταται ατµόσφαιρα παρουσιάζουσα κίνδυνο έκρηξης.

Κατάλογος των εγκεκριµένων δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων/µονάδων

Η λίστα µε τα εγκριµένα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα/µονάδες υπάρχει στο διαδίκτυο:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
µε τον κωδικό συνδροµής 13702947.
24 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Česky

Použití konstrukčních skupin / modulů v prostředí s

nebezpečím výbuchu Zóna 2

Zóna 2
Oblasti s nebezpečím výbuchu jsou rozděleny do zón. Zóny jsou rozlišeny podle
pravděpodobnosti výskytu explosivní atmosféry.
Zóna Nebezpečí exploze Příklad
2 Explosivní plynová atmosféra Oblasti kolem přírubových spojů s
se vyskytuje pouze zřídka a plochým těsněním u potrubí v uzavřených
krátkodobě prostorech
Bezpečná není • Mimo zónu 2
oblast • Standardní aplikace necentrálních
periferií

Dále naleznete důležité pokyny pro instalaci konstrukčních skupin/modulů v

oblastech s nebezpečím výbuchu.

Další informace
Další informace ke konstrukčním skupinám/modulům naleznete v příslušné
příručce.

Místo výroby / Registrace

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 dle EN 50021 : 1999

Zkušební číslo: viz tabulka

Místo výroby Konstrukční skupiny/Moduly Kontrolní číslo

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Konstrukční skupiny ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg odolné proti chybám
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Spojka sběrnice DP/PA
Diagnostické translační relé
S7-300 Konstrukční skupiny odolné
proti chybám
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 25

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Česky

Upozornění
Konstrukční skupiny/Moduly s osvědčením II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 smějí být
použity pouze v systémech SIMATIC, přístrojové kategorie 3.

Údržba
K opravě musí být příslušné konstrukční skupiny/moduly zaslány do výrobního
místa. Oprava smí být provedena pouze zde.

Zvláštní podmínky
1. Konstrukční skupiny/moduly musí být zabudovány v rozvaděči nebo kovovém
krytu. Ty musí minimálně zajišťovat druh ochrany IP 54 (dle EN 60529). Přitom
je nutno respektovat okolní podmínky, v nichž je přístroj instalován. Pro kryt
musí být k dispozici prohlášení výrobce pro zónu 2 (dle EN 50021).
2. Pokud je na kabelu popř. kabelovém vedení tohoto krytu dosaženo za
provozních podmínek teploty > 70 °C, nebo když za provozních podmínek
může být na kabelových větvích teplota > 80 °C, musí teplotní vlastnosti kabelu
souhlasit se skutečně naměřenými teplotami.
3. Použité kabelové přívody musí odpovídat požadovanému druhu ochrany IP a
odstavci 7.2 (dle EN 50021).
4. Všechny přístroje, včetně spínačů atd. napojených na vstupy a výstupy systémů
SIMATIC, musí mít osvědčení vůči výbuchu typu EEx nA nebo EEx nC.
5. Musí být provedena opatření k zamezení přechodného překročení jmenovitého
napětí, nepřesahující více než 40 %.
6. Rozsah teploty okolí: 0° C do 60° C
7. Uvnitř krytu je nutno na dobře viditelném místě po otevření připevnit štítek s
následujícím varováním:

! Varování
Kryt smí být otevřen pouze krátce, např. pro vizuální diagnostiku. Nepoužívejte
přitom žádný spínač, nevytahujte ani nezasunujte žádné konstrukční skupiny a
neoddělujte žádná elektrická vedení (konektorové spoje).
Toto varování nemusíte respektovat, pokud je známo, že se na místě nevyskytuje
explozivní atmosféra.

Seznam konstrukčních skupin/modulů s osvědčením

Seznam konstrukčních skupin/modulů s osvědčením naleznete na Internetu:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

pod identifikací příspěvku ID 13702947.

26 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Estnisch

Sõlmede/moodulite kasutamine plahvatusohtliku

piirkonna tsoonis 2

Tsoon 2
Plahvatusohtlikud piirkonnad jagatakse tsoonideks. Tsoone eristatakse vastavalt
plahvatusohtliku keskkonna esinemise tõenäosusele.
Tsoon Plahvatusoht Näide
2 üldine plahvatav keskkond Piirkonnad lamedate rõngastihenditega
esineb ainult harva ja torustike äärikliidete ümbruses suletud
lühiajaliselt ruumides
ohutu ei • väljaspool tsooni 2
piirkond • Mittstsentraalse välisseadme
standardsed rakendused

Järgnevalt leaite Te olulisi juhiseid sõlmede/moodulite paigaldamiseks

plahvatusohtlikus piirkonnas.

Täiendav info
Üksikasjalik info sõlmede/moodulite kohta on toodud seadme juurde kuuluvas
käsiraamatus.

Valmistamiskoht / Kasutusluba

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 vastavalt standardile EN 50021 : 1999

Katsetusnumber: vaadake tabelit

Valmistamiskoht Sõlmed/moodulid Katsetusnumber

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Rikkekindlad sõlmed ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Siinühendus DP/PA
Diagnostikarepiiter
S7-300 Rikkekindlad sõlmed
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Juhis
Sõlmi/mooduleid kasutusloaga II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 tohib kasutada ainult
SIMATIC-süsteemides, mille seadmeklass on 3.

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 27

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Estnisch

Korrashoid
Parandamiseks tuleb sõlmed/moodulid saata valmistamiskohta. Parandustöid tohib
teha ainult seal.

Eritingimused
1. Sõlmed/moodulid tuleb monteerida jaotuskarpi või metallkorpusesse. Need
peavad tagama kaitseastme vähemalt IP 54 (vastavalt standardile EN 60529).
Seejuures peab arvesse võtma seadme paigaldamise keskkonna tingimusi.
Korpuse jaoks peab tsooni 2 jaoks olema tootja juhis (vastavalt standardile
EN 50021).
2. Kui selle korpuse kaabli juures või kaabelvaheliku (kaabelsisestuse) juures
töötingimustes saavutatakse temperatuur > 70 °C või, kui töötingimustes
temperatuur soone hargnemiskoha juures võib olla > 80 °C, peavad kaabli
termilised omadusd olema vastavuses tegelikult mõõdetud temperatuuridega.
3. Kasutatavad kaabelvahelikud (kaabelsisestused) peavad vastama nõutud IP-
kaitseastmele ja osas 7.2 toodud nõuetele (vastavalt standardile EN 50021).
4. Kõik seadmed, kaasa arvatud lülitid, jt., mis SIMATIC-süsteemide sisendite ja
väljundite külge ühendatakse, peavad võimaldama plahvatuskaitse
tüüpi EEx nA või EEx nC.
5. Peab rakendama abinõusid, et nimipinget üleminekute tõttu ei saaks ületatada
üle 40 %.
6. Ümbritseva keskkona temperatuurivahemik: 0° C kuni 60° C
7. Korpuse sisse tuleb sellisesse kohta, mis pärast avamist on hästi nähtav, panna
silt järgmise hoiatusega:

! Ettevaatust
Korpust tohib avada ainult lühikeseks ajals, näiteks visuaalse diagnostika jaoks.
Seejuures ärge kasutage ühtegi lülitit ega võtke välja ega pange sisse ühtegi
sõlme ega lahutage ühtegi elektrijuhet (pistikühendused).
Seda hoiatust võib mitte arvesse võtta, kui on teada, et ei esine mingit
plahvatusohtlikku keskkonda.

Lubatud sõlmede/moodulite loetelu

Lubatud sõlmede/modulite loetelu leiate Te internetist:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
lisas-ID 13702947.

28 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Latviski

Ierīču/moduļu pielietojums sprādzienbīstamas

teritorijas zonā 2

Zona 2
Sprādzienbīstamās teritorijas ir sadalītas zonās. Šīs zonas atšķir pēc
sprādzienbīstamas atmosfēras pastāvēšanas iespējamības.
Zona Sprādzienbīstamība Piemērs
2 eksplozīva gāzes atmosfēra Teritorijas ap atloku savienojumiem ar
izveidojas reti un uz īsu laiku plakaniem blīvējumiem uz cauruļvadiem
slēgtās telpās
droša nē • Ārpus zonas 2
teritorija • Decentralizētas perifērijas ierīces
standartlietojumi

Turpmāk atrodamas svarīgas norādes par ierīču/moduļu uzstādīšanu

sprādzienbīstamajā zonā.

Turpmāka informācija
Turpmāka informācija par ierīcēm/moduļiem ir atrodama attiecīgajā rokasgrāmatā.

Izgatavošanas vieta / Atļauja

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 saskaņā ar EN 50021 : 1999

Pārbaudes numurs: skatīt tabulu

Izgatavošanas vieta Ierīces/moduļi Pārbaudes

numurs
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Kopnes savienotājs DP/PA
Diagnostikas atkārtotājs
S7-300 Pret kļūdām aizsargātas
ierīces
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 29

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Latviski

Norāde
Ierīces/moduļi ar atļauju II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 var tikt pielietotas tikai
3.kategorijas SIMATIC sistēmās.

Tehniskā apkope
Attiecīgu ierīču/moduļu remontam tie ir jānosūta ražotājam. Remontu drīkst veikt
tikai tur.

Īpaši apstākļi
1. Ierīces/moduļi jāiebūvē sadales skapī vai metāla korpusā. Tiem jānodrošina
aizsardzības līmenis ne mazāks kā IP 54 (saskaņā ar EN 60529). Turklāt,
ierīces uzstādīšanā jāievēro apkārtējas vides apstākļi. Korpusam ir
nepieciešams izgatavotāja apliecinājums zonai 2 (saskaņā ar EN 50021).
2. Ja uz kabeļa vai šī korpusa kabeļu ievades ekspluatācijas apstākļos tiek
sasniegta temperatūra > 70 °C vai ja ekspluatācijas apstākļos uz kabeļa
atzariem var būt temperatūra > 80 °C, kabeļu temperatūras īpašībām jāatbilst
faktiski nomērītām temperatūrām.
3. Pielietojamām kabeļu ievadēm jāatbilst nepieciešamajam aizsardzības veidam
IP un sadaļai 7.2 (saskaņā ar EN 50021).
4. Visām ierīcēm, ieskaitot pārslēgus utt., kas tiek pieslēgti pie SIMATIC sistēmu
ievadēm un izvadēm, jābūt atļaujām EEx nA vai EEx nC tipa
sprādzienaizsardzībai.
5. Nepieciešams veikt pasākumus, lai pārejas spriegums nepārsniegtu nominālo
spriegumu vairāk kā par 40 %.
6. Apkārtējas temperatūras diapazons: 0° C līdz 60° C
7. Korpusa iekšpusē, vietā, kas ir labi redzama, atverot to, ir jāizvieto plāksne ar
sekojošo brīdinājumu:

! Brīdinājums
Korpusu var atvērt tikai īslaicīgi, piemēram, vizuālai diagnostikai. Pie tam
nenospiediet nekādus slēdžus, neievietojiet un neizņemiet nekādas ierīces un
nepārtrauciet elektriskās līnijas (spraudsavienojumus).
Šis brīdinājums var tikt neņemts vērā, ja ir zināms, ka nepastāv sprādzienbīstama
atmosfēra.

Pieļaujamo ierīču/moduļu saraksts

Pieļaujamo ierīču/moduļu saraksts ir atrodams Internetā:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
zem datu ID 13702947.

30 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Lietuviška

Konstrukcinių grupių/modulių panaudojimas

sprogioje 2 zonos aplinkoje

Zona 2
Sprogi aplinka yra apibūdinama keliomis zonomis. Zonos skirstomos pagal galimos
sprogios terpės atsiradimo tikimybę.
Zona Sprogimo pavojus Pavyzdys
2 sprogi atmosfera būna retai ir Uždarų patalpų vamzdynuose - flanšo su
trumpai tarpikliais sujungimų vietose
saugioji nėra • ne zonoje 2
sritis • Standartinė periferinė sistema

Toliau pateikiamas informacija apie konstrukcinių grupių ir modulių montavimą

sprogioje aplinkoje.

Papildoma informacija
Papildomos informacijos apie konstrukcines grupes/modulius rasite eksploatacijos
vadove.

Pagaminimo vieta / Saugos reikalavimai

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pagal EN 50021 : 1999

Patikros numeris: žiūr. lentelėje

Pagaminimo vieta Konstrukcinės grupės/moduliai Patikros

numeris
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S nuo trukdžių apsaugotos ATEX 1238X
92224 Ambergas konstrukcinės grupės
Vokietija
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Magistralinė jungtis DP/PA
Diagnozės retransliatorius
S7-300 nuo trukdžių apsaugotos
konstrukcinės grupės
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Vokietija
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 31

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Lietuviška

Nuoroda
Konstrukcines grupes/modulius, kurių leidimas eksploatuoti yra II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6 galima naudoti tik 3 kategorijos sistemose "SIMATIC".

Priežiūra
Esant gedimams, konstrukcinę grupę/modulį išsiųskite gamintojui. Tik jis gali
kvalifikuotai suremontuoti įtaisą.

Specialiosios sąlygos
1. Konstrukcines grupes/modulius montuokite jungimo spintoje arba metaliniame
korpuse. Korpuso ar jungimo spintos saugos klasė turi būti mažiausiai "IP 54"
(pagal EN 60529). Būtina atsižvelgti į kitas aplinkos sąlygas. Norint korpusą
eksploatuoti zonoje 2, būtinas gamintojo pažymėjimas (pagal EN 50021).
2. Jei korpuso kabelio arba kabelio prijungimo temperatūra pakyla daugiau nei
70 °C arba laidų atšakoje temperatūra padidėja daugiau nei 80 °C, reikia
naudoti kabelius, kurių terminės savybės atitinka išmatuotas temperatūros
vertes.
3. Kabelių sujungimai turi būti saugos klasės IP ir atitikti 7.2 skyriaus (pagal
EN 50021) reikalavimus.
4. Visi prietaisai, įskaitant ir jungiklius, jungiami sistemų "SIMATIC" įeigose ir
išeigose, turi būti tipo "EEx nA" arba "EEx nC" - apsaugoti nuo sprogimo.
5. Būtina imtis priemonių, kad pereinamųjų grandžių vardinė įtampa neviršytų
40 %.
6. Leistina aplinkos temperatūra: 0° C iki 60° C
7. Atidarę korpusą, jo viduje gerai matomoje vietoje, įtaisykite lentelę su įspėjimu:

Įspėjimas
! Korpusą` atidaryti tik trumpam laikui, pvz., patikrai. Neliesti jungiklių,
konstrukcinių grupių neištraukti ir nekišti, neatjungti elektrinių sujungimų
(kištukinių sujungimų).
Šio įspėjimo galima nepaisyti, kai yra žinoma, jog darbinė aplinka yra nesprogi.

Leistinų konstrukcinių grupių/modulių sąrašas

Leistinų konstrukcinių grupių/modulių sąrašą rasite interneto puslapyje:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

įvedę kodą 13702947.

32 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Magya

A főegységek/modulok alkalmazása a 2. zóna

robbanásveszélyes környezetben

2. zóna
A robbanásveszélyes környezeteket zónákba sorolják be. A robbanásveszélyes
légkör előfordulásának valószínűsége alapján különböztetik meg a zónákat.
Zóna Robbanásveszély Példa
2 robbanásveszélyes gázat zárt helységekben elhelyezett
tartalmazó légkör csak ritkán és csővezetékeknél a lapos tömítéssel
rövid ideig lép fel rendelkező karimás kötések
környezetében
biztonságos nem • a 2. zónán kívül
környezet • a decentrális periféria készülékek
standard alkalmazásai

A következőkben fontos utasításokat talál a főegységek/modulok telepítéséhez a

robbanásveszélyes környezetbe.

További információk
A további információkat a főegységekhez/modulokhoz megtalálja a hozzátartozó
kézikönyvben.

Gyártási hely / Engedélyezés

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 az EN 50021 : 1999 szerint

Ellenőrző szám: lásd a táblázatot

Gyártási hely Főegységek/modulok Ellenőrző szám

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S hibabiztos főegységek ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
DP/PA buszcsatoló
Diagnózisrepeater
S7-300 hibabiztos főegységek
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 33

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Magya

Utasítás
Az II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 engedélyezéssel rendelkező
főegységeket/modulokat alkalmazhatja csak a 3. felszerelés-kategóriába tartozó
SIMATIC rendszerekbe.

Karbantartás
Javítás esetén küldje az érintett főegységeket/modulokat a gyártási helyre. Csak itt
hajthatják végre a javítást.

Különleges feltételek
1. A főegységeket/modulokat egy kapcsolószekrénybe vagy egy fém házba kell
beszerelni. Ezeknek kell biztosítaniuk legalább az IP 54 védettségi fokozatot
(EN 60529 szerint). Itt figyelembe kell venni azokat a környezeti feltételeket,
amelyek fellépnek a készülék telepítésekor. A házhoz meg kell legyen a gyártói
nyilatkozat a 2. zónához (az EN 50021 szerint).
2. Ha a jelen ház kábelén ill. kábelvezetésen üzemi feltételek mellett a
hőmérséklet > 70 °C, vagy ha az üzemi feltételek mellett a hőmérséklet > 80 °C
az érelágazásokon, akkor meg kell egyezzenek a kábel hőmérsékleti
tulajdonságai a ténylegesen mért hőmérsékletekkel.
3. Az alkalmazott kábelvezetések meg kell feleljenek a követelt IP védettségi
fokozatnak és a 7.2. bekezdésnek (EN 50021 szerint).
4. Minden készülék, kapcsolót stb. beleértve, amelyeket a SIMATIC rendszerek
be- és kimeneteire csatlakoztattak, engedélyezve kell legyen az EEx nA vagy
EEx nC típusú robbanásvédelemhez.
5. Intézkedéseket kell hozni, hogy a tranziensek ne lépjék túl a névleges
feszültséget több mint 40 %-al.
6. Környezeti hőmérséklet tartomány: 0° C ... 60° C
7. A házon belül -a nyitáskor jól látható helyen- helyezzen el egy táblát a
következő figyelmeztetéssel:

Figyelmeztetés
! A házat csak rövid ideig szabad nyitani, pl. optikai diagnózishoz. Eközben ne
működtessen egy kapcsolót sem, ne húzzon ki vagy dugjon be egy főegységet
sem és ne válasszon le villamos vezetékeket (dugós csatlakozók).
Ez a figyelmeztetés mellőzhető, ha tudott, hogy nem áll fenn robbanásveszélyes
légkör.

A megengedett főegységek/modulok listája

A megengedett főegységek/modulok listáját megtalálja az interneten:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

a 13702947 cikk azonosító szám alatt.

34 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Malti

Tqegħid tal-Komponenti / Modules fiż-Żona 2, fejn

hemm Riskju ta' Splużjoni

Żona 2
Sezzjonijiet fejn hemm riskju ta' splużjoni jitqassmu f'żoni. Tagħmel distinzjoni bejn
żona u oħra skond il-probabbiltà li jkun hemm ambjent li jista' jwassal għal
splużjoni.
Żona Periklu ta' Splużjoni Eżempju
2 ambjent gassuż li jista' jisplodi Żoni madwar flanġ ġojnts b'gaskits ċatti
jfeġġ rarament u għal żmien f'kanni ġewwa spazji magħluqin
qasir
żona ż- le • barra miż-żona 2
żgura • użu normali ta' devices periferali
deċentralizzati

Issib hawn taħt indikazzjonijiet importanti għall-installazzjoni ta' komponenti /

modules fiż-żona fejn hemm riskju ta' splużjoni.

Aktar Tagħrif
Aktar tagħrif fuq il-komponenti / modules jinstab fil-manwal ikkonċernat.

Post ta' Manifattura / Approvazzjoni

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 skond EN 50021 : 1999

Numru taċ-Ċertifikat: ara t-tabella

Post ta' Manifattura Komponenti / Modules Numru taċ-

Ċertifikat
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S modules ma jistgħux ifallu ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
bus coupling DP/PA
Ripetitur ta' dijanjosi
S7-300 modules ma jistgħux ifallu
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Nota
Komponenti / modules bl-approvazzjoni II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 jistgħu
jintużaw biss ġewwa sistemi SIMATIC tal-kategorija 3.
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 35
A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Malti

Manutenzjoni
Fil-każ li jkun hemm bżonn ta' tiswija, il-komponenti / modules ikkonċernati
għandhom jintbagħtu fil-post ta' manifattura. It-tiswijiet jistgħu jsiru biss f'dan il-post.

Kundizzjonijiet Speċjali
1. Komponenti / modules għandhom jiġu mmontati ġewwa swiċċ kabinett jew
kaxxa tal-metall. Dawn iridu jiggarantixxu protezzjoni mill-inqas tat-tip IP 54
(skond EN 60529). Inti u tagħmel hekk, trid taħseb għall-kundizzjonijiet
ambjentali ta' waqt l-installazzjoni tad-device. Irid ikun hemm dikjarazzjoni tal-
manifatturier għall-kaxxa għaż-żona 2 (skond EN 50021).
2. Jekk fil-kejbil, jew fil-kaxxa mad-daħla għall-kejbil, tintlaħaq temperatura ta'
aktar minn 70 °C taħt kundizzjonijiet ta' ħidma, jew jekk fil-post fejn jinfirdu l-
wajers jista' jkun li hemm temperatura ta' aktar minn 80 °C, il-kejbil irid ikollu
proprjetajiet ta' temperatura xierqa għat-temperaturi tabilħaqq imkejlin.
3. Id-daħliet għall-kejbil li jintużaw iridu jikkonformaw mat-tip ta' protezzjoni IP
mitlub u t-taqsima 7.2 (skond EN 50021).
4. Id-devices kollha, swiċċijiet etc. inklużi, li jitqabbdu ma' l-inputs u l-outputs ta'
sistemi SIMATIC, iridu jkunu approvati għal protezzjoni kontra splużjoni tat-tip
EEx nA jew EEx nC.
5. Iridu jittieħdu miżuri biex il-vultaġġ nominali ma jitqabbiżx b'aktar minn 40%
minħabba transitorji.
6. Varjazzjoni tat-temperatura ambjentali: 0° C sa 60° C
7. Għandha titqiegħed tabella bit-twissija li ġejja ġewwa l-kaxxa, f'post li jidher sew
wara li tinfetaħ il-kaxxa:

Twissija
! Il-kaxxa tista' tinfetaħ biss għal żmien qasir, per eżempju għal dijanjosi viżwali. Inti
u tagħmel hekk, ma tista' tmiss l-ebda swiċċ, ddaħħal jew tneħħi l-ebda module u
tneħħi l-ebda kejbil elettriku (konnessjonijiet li tipplaggjahom).
Tista' ma tagħtix każ ta' din it-twissija meta taf li m'hemmx riskju ta' splużjoni fl-
ambjent.

Lista ta' Komponenti / Modules Approvati

Issib il-lista ta' komponenti / modules approvati fl-internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

bin-numru ta' identifikazzjoni 13702947.

36 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Polski

Zastosowanie grup konstrukcyjnych / modułów w 2

strefie zagrożenia wybuchem

Strefa 2
Otoczenie zagrożone wybuchem dzielone jest na strefy. Strefy dzielą się ze
względu na stopień prawdopodobieństwa powstania atmosfery stwarzającej
możliwość powstania wybuchu.
Strefa Niebezpieczeństwo eksplozji Przykład
2 atmosfera gazowa z miejsca wokół łącz w kanałach
zagrożeniem wybuchem technicznych z opaskami przy
występuje rzadko i na krótki przewodach instalacyjnych w
okres czasu pomieszczeniach zamkniętych
obszar nie • poza 2 strefą
bezpieczny • standardowe zastosowanie
decentralnych urządzeń peryferyjnych

Dalej znajdą Państwo informacje dotyczące instalacji grup konstrukcyjnych /

modułów w otoczeniu zagrożonym wybuchem.

Pozostałe informacje
Dalsze informacje dotyczące grup konstrukcyjnych / modułów znajdą państwo w
odpowiedniej instrukcji.

Miejsce produkcji / Rejestracja

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 stosownie do EN 50021 : 1999

Nr testu: zobacz tabela

Miejsce produkcji Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduły Nr testu

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S grupy konstrukcyjne ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg odporne na uszkodzenia
Niemcy
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Zbierające łącze sprzężające
DP/PA
powtarzacz diagnozy
S7-300 grupy konstrukcyjne
odporne na uszkodzenia
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Niemcy
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 37

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Polski

Uwaga
Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduły zarejestrowane jako II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6
wolno stosować jedynie w systemach SIMATIC o 3 kategorii urządzenia.

Konserwacja
W celu naprawy należy odpowiednie grupy konstrukcyjne / moduły przesłać do
miejsca produkcji. Jedynie serwis producenta jest upoważniony do dokonywania
napraw.

Warunki szczególne
1. Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduły muszą zostać zamontowane do skrzynki
ochronnej lub metalowej puszki ochronnej. Muszą one spełniać wymagania co
najmniej stopnia IP 54 (stosownie do EN 60529). Należy brać pod uwagę
warunki otoczenia, w którym urządzenie będzie instalowane. Należy posiadać
oświadczenie producenta dopuszczające puszkę do użytku w strefie 2
(stosownie do EN 50021).
2. W przypadku, gdyby na przewodzie tej puszki podczas pracy temperatura
mogła przekroczyć > 70 °C, lub żyła przewodu mogłaby osiągnąć temperaturę
> 80 °C, właściwości cieplne przewodu muszą zostać dobrane do takich
wartości.
3. Wszystkie stosowane przewody muszą odpowiadać właściwemu stopniowi
ochrony IP oraz warunkom określonym w punkcie 7.2 (stosownie do EN
50021).
4. Wszystkie urządzenia włączając w to przełączniki itp., które podłączane są do
wejść lub wyjść systemów SIMATIC muszą być dopuszczone do ochrony
przeciw wybuchom typu EEx nA lub EEx nC.
5. Muszą zostać spełnione takie warunki, aby napięcie miana w przejściach nie
mogło przekroczyć więcej niż 40 %.
6. Temperatura otoczenia: od 0° C do 60° C
7. W puszce w dobrze widocznym po otwarciu miejscu należy umieścić
ostrzeżenie następującej treści:
Uwaga
! Puszkę wolno otworzyć jedynie na krótki okres czasu na przykład w celu kontroli
optycznej. Nie wolno przy tym naciskać na żaden z przełączników, nie wolno
wyciągać ani montować żadnej grupy konstrukcyjnej ani też odłączać żadnych
przewodów elektrycznych (łącza wsuwkowe).
Powyższego ostrzeżenia nie trzeba przestrzegać jeśli wiadomo jest, iż na miejscu
nie ma zagrożenia wybuchem.

Lista dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / modułów

Wykaz dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / modułów znajduje się na stronie
internetowej:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

w części ID 13702947.

38 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Slovensky

Použitie konštrukčných skupín / modulov v prostredí s

nebezpečenstvom výbuchu zóny 2

Zóna 2
Prostredia s nebezpečenstvom výbuchu sa rozdeľujú do zón. Zóny sa rozlišujú
podľa pravdepodobnosti prítomnosti atmosféry so schopnosťou výbuchu.
Zóna Nebezpečenstvo explózie Príklad
2 plynová atmosféra s priestory okolo prírubových spojov s
nebezpečenstvom výbuchu sa plochými tesneniami pri potrubných
vyskytuje len zriedka a vedeniach v uzavretých priestoroch
krátkodobo
bezpečná nie • mino zóny 2
oblasť • štandardné použitia decentrálnej
periférie

Ďalej nájdete dôležité pokyny pre inštaláciu konštrukčných skupín / modulov v

prostredí s nebezpečenstvom výbuchu.

Ďalšie informácie
Ďalšie informácie ku konštrukčným skupinám / modulom nájdete v príslušnej
príručke.

Miesto vyhotovenia / Osvedčenie

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 podľa EN 50021 : 1999

Číslo skúšky : pozri tabuľka
Miesto vyhotovenia Konštrukčné skupiny / moduly Číslo skúšky
Siemens AG, divízia A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S konštrukčné skupiny ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg odolné voči poruchám
Nemecko
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Zbernicový väzbový člen DP/PA
opakovač diagnózy
S7-300 konštrukčné skupiny
odolné voči poruchám
Siemens AG, divízia A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Nemecko
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 39

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Slovensky

Upozornenie
Konštrukčné skupiny / moduly s osvedčením II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 sa smú
používať len v systémoch SIMATIC kategórie zariadenia 3.

Údržba
Za účelom opravy sa musia príslušné konštrukčné skupiny / moduly zaslať na
miesto vyhotovenia. Oprava sa smie vykonávať len na tomto mieste !

Špeciálne podmienky
1. Konštrukčné skupiny / moduly sa musia vmontovať do spínacej skrine alebo do
kovového puzdra schránky. Tie musia zabezpečovať druh ochrany minimálne
IP 54 (podľa EN 60529). Pritom je potrebné zohľadniť podmienky prostredia, do
ktorého sa bude zariadenie inštalovať. V prípade puzdra musí existovať
vyhlásenie výrobcu pre zónu 2 (podľa EN 50021).
2. V prípade, že na kábli, prípadne na káblovom prívode tohto puzdra presiahne
teplota pri prevádzkových podmienkach hodnotu > 70 °C, alebo ak na vetve žily
môže byť pri prevádzkových podmienkach teplota > 80 °C, musia tepelné
vlastnosti kábla vyhovovať skutočne nameraným hodnotám.
3. Všetky použité káblové prívody musia zodpovedať požadovanému druhu
ochrany IP a odseku 7.2 (podľa EN 50021).
4. Všetky zariadenia, vrátane prepínača, atď., ktoré sa pripoja na vstupy a výstupy
systémov SIMATIC, musia byť schválené pre ochranu voči výbuchu
typu EEx nA alebo EEx nC.
5. Musia sa splniť také opatrenia, aby sa menovité napätie cez prechody nemohlo
prekročiť o viac ako 40 %.
6. Rozsah okolitých teplôt: 0° C až 60° C
7. V puzdre je na dobre viditeľné miesto po otvorení potrebné umiestniť štítok s
nasledovnou výstrahou:

Výstraha
! Puzdro sa môže otvoriť len počas krátkej doby, napríklad pre vizuálnu diagnózu.
Nestlačte pritom žiadny prepínač, nevytiahnite alebo nezasuňte žiadnu
konštrukčnú skupinu a neoddeľte žiadne elektrické vedenia (zástrčkové
spojenia).
Túto výstrahu si nemusíte všímať v takom prípade, ak je známe, že sa na mieste
nevyskytuje atmosféra s nebezpečenstvom výbuchu.

Zoznam dovolených konštrukčných skupín / modulov

Zoznam dovolených konštrukčných skupín / modulov sa nachádza na internete :
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

v článku ID 13702947.

40 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Slovensko

Uporaba sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem

območju cone 2

Cona 2
Eksplozivno ogrožena območja se delijo na cone. Cone se ločijo po verjetnosti
prisotnosti eksplozivne atmosfere.
Cona Nevarnost eksplozije Primer
2 eksplozivna zmes plinov v Območja okoli prirobnih spojev z ploskimi
atmosferi je redka in traja le tesnili pri cevnih napeljavah v zaprtih
kratko. prostorih.
sigurno ne • izven cone 2
območje • Standardna uporaba decentralne
periferije.

Sledijo pomembni napotki o inštalaciji sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem

območju.

Nadaljnje informacije
Nadaljnje informacije o sklopih/modulih najdete v priloženem priročniku.

Mesto izdelave / Dovoljenje - Atest

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 po EN 50021 : 1999

kontrolna številka: glej tabelo

Mesto izdelave Sklopi/moduli kontrolna

številka:
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Sklopi varovani proti ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg okvari
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
bus vezava DP/PA
Diagnozni repeater
S7-300 Sklopi varovani proti okvari
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Opozorilo
Sklopi/moduli z dovoljenjem II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 se lahko uporabijo samo
v SIMATIC-Sistemih kategorije 3 .
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 41
A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Slovensko

Vzdrževanje
V primeru popravila pošljete sklope/module na kraj izdelave. Popravila lahko
izvajajo samo na tem naslovu!

Posebni pogoji
1. Sklopi/moduli se morajo vgraditi v elektro omaro ali metalno ohišje.
Omara/ohišje mora zadostiti varovanju IP 54 (po EN 60529). Pri tem je
potrebno upoštevati tudi pogoje okolice, v kateri se naprava nahaja. Ohišje
mora imeti izjavo (atest) proizvajalca za uporabo v coni 2 (po EN 50021).
2. Če na kablu oz. uvodnici tega ohišja v režimu obratovanja temperatura doseže
vrednost > 70 °C ali če doseže na razcepih vodnikov v obratovanju temperatura
vrednost > 80 °C, se morajo temperaturne lastnosti kablov skladati z dejansko
namerjenimi.
3. Uporabljene uvodnice morajo ustrezati predpisani IP zaščiti in poglavju 7.2 (po
EN 50021).
4. Vse naprave, vključno s stikali itd., ki so priklopljene na vhodih oz. izhodih
sistemov SIMATIC, morajo biti odobrene za zaščito proti eksplozijam tipa
EEx nA ali EEx nC.
5. Zagotoviti se mora, da nazivna napetost ne prekorači več kot 40% pri
tranzienci (preklopih, vklopih,...).
6. Temperaturno območje okolice: 0° C do 60° C
7. V notranjosti ohišja, na odprtem dobro vidljivem mestu, se pritrdi napis z
naslednjim opozorilom:

Opozorilo
! Ohišje se lahko odpre samo za kratek čas, npr. za vizualno diagnozo. Pri tem ne
vklapljajte/izklaplajte stikal, sklopov ali električnih vodnikov (vtičnih spojev).
Opozorilo ne velja, kadar je znano, da ni eksplozivne atmosfere.

Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov

Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov najdete na internetu na spletni strani:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

pod ID prispevka 13702947.

42 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Türkçe

Patlama tehlikesi olan Alan 2 bölgesinde ünite

gruplarının/modüllerin kullanılması

Alan 2
Patlama tehlikesi olan bölgeler alanlara ayrılır. Alanlar, patlayabilecek atmosfere
sahip ortam ihtimaline göre farklı derecelere ayrılır.
Alan Patlama tehlikesi Örnek
2 Patlayıcı gaz atmosferi sadece Kapalı alanlardaki boru bağlantılarında
nadir ve kısa bir süre için söz yassı contalı flanş bağlantıları civarındaki
konusu bölgeler
Güvenli hayır • Alan 2 haricinde
bölge • Merkezi olmayan periferi standart
uygulamaları

Aşağıda, ünite gruplarının/modüllerin patlama tehlikesi olan bölgelerde kurulması

için önemli bilgiler bulacaksınız.

Daha başka bilgiler

Ünite grupları/modüller hakkında daha fazla bilgi için ilgili kılavuza bakınız.

İmalat yeri / Lisans

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 standartına göre: 1999

Test numarası: bkz. Tablo

İmalat yeri Ünite grupları/Modüller Kontrol

numarası
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Hataya karşı emniyetli ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg ünite grupları
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Bus kuplajı DP/PA
Diyagnoz repeater ünitesi
S7-300 Hataya karşı emniyetli
ünite grupları
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 43

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Türkçe

Bilgi
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 lisanslı ünite grupları/modüller sadece 3 numaralı
cihaz kategorisine ait SIMATIC sistemlerine kullanılabilir.

Bakım ve koruma
Bir onarım gerekli olması halinde, ilgili ünite grupları/modüller imalat yerine
gönderilmelidir. Onarım sadece orada yapılabilir ve yapılmalıdır.

Özel koşullar
1. Ünite grupları/modüller bir şalter dolabı içine veya metal kasa içine monte
edilmelidir. Bu kasalar en az IP 54 (EN 60529 standartına göre) koruma türüne
ait olmalıdır. Burada, cihazın kurulduğu çevre koşulları dikkate alınmalıdır.
Kullanılacak kasa için, alan 2 için geçerli bir üretici beyanı mevcut olmalıdır
(EN 50021 standartına istinaden).
2. Kabloda ya da bu kasanın kablo girişindeki işletme koşullarında sıcaklık > 70 °C
oluyorsa veya işletme koşullarında kablo telleri (damarları) ayrılma noktasında
sıcaklık > 80 °C olma ihtimali varsa, kablonun sıcaklık ile ilgili özellikleri,
gerçekten ölçülmüş sıcaklıklara uygun olmalıdır.
3. Kullanılmış olan kablo girişleri, talep edilen IP koruma türüne ve bölüm 7.2
(EN 50021 standartına göre) dahilindeki taleplere uygun olmalıdır.
4. SIMATIC sistemlerinin giriş ve çıkışlarına bağlanan tüm cihazlar (şalterler vs.
dahil) için, EEx nA veya EEx nC patlamaya karşı koruma tipine istinaden izin
alınmış olmalıdır.
5. Nominal gerilimin transiyentlerden (hatlardaki dalgalanmalardan dolayı ani
gerilim ve akım değişiklikleri) dolayı azami %40 aşılması için gerekli önlemler
alınmalıdır.
6. Çevre sıcaklığı aralığı: 0° C ile 60° C arasında
7. Kasa dahilinde, açıldıktan sonra iyi görülebilen bir yere aşağıdaki uyarı
takılmalıdır:

! İkaz
Kasa sadece kısa bir süre açılmalıdır, örn. görsel diyagnoz için. Herhangi bir
şaltere basmayınız, herhangi bir ünite grubunu çekip çıkarmayınız veya
takmayınız, elektrik hatlarını (soket bağlantıları) ayırmayınız.
Eğer patlama tehlikesi söz konusu olan bir atmosfer olmadığı biliniyorsa, işbu
ikaz göz ardı edilebilir.

İzin verilmiş olan ünite gruplarının/modüllerin listesi

İzin verilmiş olan ünite gruplarının/modüllerin listesi için internete bakınız:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

Doküman ID 13702947.

44 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Product Information

SIMATIC S7-300
X2
Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD Release 3 4

New analog input module available

The S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD has been added to the
S7-300 family. The order number for this module is 6ES7 331-7PF01-0AB0.
This product information includes details about the characteristics and technical
specifications of analog input module SM 331; AI 8 RTD. Refer to the S7-300
Installation and Hardware Manual for more information about the S7-300 product
family.
You will also learn:
S How to start up analog input module SM 331; AI 8 RTD
S The measuring ranges available for analog input module
SM 331; AI 8 RTD
S How to configure analog input module SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Additional assistance
For assistance in answering technical questions, for training on this product, or for
ordering, contact your Siemens distributor or sales office.

Copyright 2004 by Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD (6ES7 331-7PF01-0AB0)

Order no.
6ES7 331-7PF01-0AB0

Characteristic features
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 RTD has the following characteristic
features:
S 8 differential inputs for RTD resistance temperature detector in 4 channel
groups
S Optional setting of the resistance thermometer type per channel group
S Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
S Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
S Programmable diagnostics
S Programmable diagnostic interrupt
S 8 channels with limit monitoring
S Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
S Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
S Isolated against the backplane bus interface
S Fully compatible with predecessor module SM 331-7PF00
S Includes Russian GOST RTD characteristics

Special feature
When operated in an ET200M distributed I/O configuration, the analog input
module SM 331; AI 8 RTD can only be used in the ET200M distributed I/O
configuration with the following versions of the IM153 (or later)
S IM153-1 6ES7 153-1AA03-0XB0 V.1
S IM153-2 6ES7 153-2AA02-0XB0 V.5
6ES7 153-2AB01-0XB0 V.4

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

2 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Terminal connection diagram
Figure 1 shows the terminal connection diagram and the 4-wire wiring diagram for
the SM331; AI 8 RTD Module.
The detailed technical specifications for this analog input module are on the
following page.

1 L M 21 L+
2 22
M0+ M4+
3 ADC ADC 23
M0– DC M4–
4 to 24
CH0 CH4
Ic0+ DC Ic4+
5 25
Ic0– Ic4–
6 26
M1+ 7 27 M5+

M1– M5–
8 28
CH1 Ic5+ CH5
Ic1+ 9 29
Ic1– DAC DAC
10 Ic5–
30
M2+ M6+
11 31
M2– ADC ADC M6–
12 32
CH2 CH6
Ic2+ Logic Ic6+
13 and 33
Ic2– back Ic6–
14 34
plane
M3+ bus M7+
15 interface 35
M3– 16 36 M7–
CH3 CH7
Ic3+ Ic7+
17 37
Ic3– Ic7–
18 DAC DAC 38

19 39

20 40 M

Figure 1 Connection Diagram of Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Module filtering mode 8 channels, hardware
Weight Approx. 272 g
Integration/conversion time/
Data for Specific Module resolution (per channel)
Supports clocked No S Programmable Yes
operation S Basic conversion time in 80
Number of inputs 8 ms

Length of cable S Additional conversion time 100*

for measuring 3L
S Shielded max. 200 m resistance, in ms
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
S Additional conversion time 0
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC for open-circuit monitoring,
electronics L+ in ms

S Reverse polarity protection Yes S Resolution including sign 16 bits

Constant measured current for max. 5 mA S Noise suppression 400 / 60 / 50

resistance-type sensor for interference frequency
f1 in Hz
Isolation
Smoothing of the measured None / low/
S Between channels and Yes
values average/ high
backplane bus
Conversion time (per channel) 100 ms
S Between channels and Yes
power supply of the Basic response time of module 200 ms
electronics (all channels enabled)
S Between the channels Yes Module filtering mode 8 channels, software
In groups of 2
Integration/conversion time/
Permitted potential difference resolution (per channel)

S Between the inputs (UCM ) 75 VDC / 60 VAC

S Programmable Yes

S Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC

S Basic conversion time in 8 / 25 / 30
ms
Minternal (UISO)

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

S Additional conversion time 25 / 43 / 48*
for measuring 3L
Current consumption resistance, in ms
S From the backplane bus max. 100 mA S Additional conversion time 0
S From the power supply L+ max. 240 mA for open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.6 W
S Resolution including sign 16 bits

S Noise suppression 400 / 60 / 50

for interference frequency
f1 in Hz

Smoothing of the measured None / low/

values average/ high

Conversion time (per channel) 25 / 43 / 48 ms

Basic response time of module 50 / 86 / 96 ms

(all channels enabled)

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

4 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Module filtering mode 4 channels, hardware Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input
range)
Integration/conversion time/
resolution (per channel) S Resistance thermometer
S Programmable Yes Pt 50, Pt 100, Pt 200, "0.5 °C
Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100,
S Basic conversion time in 3.3
ms Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni
1000, Cu 50, Cu 100,
S Additional conversion time 100*
Pt 10, Cu 10
for measuring 3L "1.0 °C
resistance, in ms S Resistors "0.05 %
S Additional conversion time 100** Temperature error (with
for open-circuit monitoring, reference to the input range)
in ms
S Resistance thermometer "0.015 °C/K
S Resolution including sign 16 bits S Resistors "0.005 %/K
S Noise suppres 400 / 60 / 50
Linearity error (with reference to
sion for interference
the input range)
frequency f1 in Hz
S Resistance thermometer "0.2 °C
Smoothing of the measured None / low/
S Resistors "0.02 %
values average/ high

Basic response time of module 10 ms Repeat accuracy (in the steady

(all channels enabled) state at 25 °C, referred to the
input range)
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error S Resistance thermometer "0.2 °C
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 1%), S Resistors "0.01 %
”(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
S Common-mode > 100 dB
interference Interrupts
(UCM < 60 VAC) S Hardware interrupt Programmable
(channels 0 – 7)
S Series-mode interference > 90 dB
(peak value of interference S Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
< rated value of input
range) Diagnostic functions Programmable

Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB S Group error display Red LED (SF)

Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred S Diagnostic information can Possible
to 0 to 60 _C input range) be displayed

S Resistance thermometer
Pt 50, Pt 100, Pt 200, "1.0 °C
Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100,
Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni
1000, Cu 50, Cu 100,
Pt 10, Cu 10 "2.0 °C

S Resistors "0.1 %

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Data for Selecting a Sensor
Input range (rated values) input
resistance
S Resistance thermometer Pt 10, Pt 50, Pt 100,
Pt 200, Pt 500,
Pt 1000, Ni 100,
Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500,
Ni 1000, Cu 10, Cu 50,
Cu 100,
S Resistors 150, 300, 600 W
Maximum input voltage for 35 VDC continuous;
voltage input (destruction limit) 75 VDC for max. 1 s
(duty factor 1:20)
Connection of the sensor
S For measuring resistance

With two-conductor Possible

connection
With three-conductor Possible***
connection

With four-conductor Possible

connection
Characteristic linearization
S Resistance thermometer Pt 10, Pt 50, Pt 100,
Pt 200, Pt 500,
Pt 1000, Ni 100,
Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500,
Ni 1000, Cu 10, Cu 50,
Cu 100 (standard and
climatic range)
S Technical unit for Degrees Celsius;
temperature measurement degrees Fahrenheit

* The resistance measurement for a three-conductor connection is performed every 5 minutes.

** Open-circuit monitoring in module filtering mode 4 Channels, Hardware is performed every 3 seconds.
*** Maximum lead resistance for 3-wire sensor measurements for PT 10 and Cu 10 RTD elements is 10 W. For all other RTD
elements. The maximum lead resistance for 3-wire sensor measurements is 20 W.

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

6 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD:

S With STEP 7 (see the STEP 7 User Manual) or
S In the user program by means of SFCs (see the STEP 7 System and Standard
Functions Reference Manual)

Parameterization restrictions when using the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD with

PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in an ET 200M
PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7 master,
certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do not
support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these functions
are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt enable,
hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other
parameters are permitted.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
S Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
S Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
upon limit violation
S Hardware interrupt at Yes/no
end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware
interrupt
S Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 32767 Dynamic Channel
S Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 -32768

Diagnostics
S Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
S With wire-break Yes/no No
check

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Table 1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
S Measuring Method Deactivated RTD-4L
R-4L Resistance
(four-conductor connection)
R-3L Resistance,
(three-conductor connection)
RTD-4L Temperature resistor
(linear, four-conductor Channel
connection) Dynamic
group
RTD-3L Temperature resistor
(linear, three-conductor
connection)
S Measuring Range Refer to the section on measuring Pt 100
ranges of the input channels that you climatic
can set. 0.003850
(IPTS-68)
S Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit Degrees
Dynamic Module
Celsius
S Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8
Dynamic Module
8 channels software filter channels,
4 channels hardware filter hardware
filter
S Temperature Platinum (Pt) 0.003850
coefficient for 0.003850 W/W/ °C (IPTS-68)
temperature 0.003916 W/W/ °C
measurement with 0.003902 W/W/ °C
bulb resistor (RTD) 0.003920 W/W/ °C
0.003850 W/W/ °C (ITS-90)
0.003910 W/W/ °C
Nickel (Ni)
Channel
0.006170 W/W/ °C Dynamic
group
0.006180 W/W/ °C
0.006720 W/W/ °C
0.005000 W/W/ °C (LG Ni 1000)
Copper (Cu)
0.004260 W/W/ °C
0.004270 W/W/ °C
0.004280 W/W/ °C
S Interference 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50/60/400
Dynamic Channel
suppression* Hz
group

S Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel

Low group
Average
High
* 50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes;
50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

8 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD are arranged in four groups of two. You
can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Table 2 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit

violation
You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in
STEP 7.

Module filtering mode

The SM 331; AI 8 RTD operates in one of the following modes:
S “Hardware filter, 8 channels”
S “Software filter, 8 channels”
S “Hardware filter, 4 channels”
The operating mode affects the scan time of the module.

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
”Hardware filter 8 channels” mode
In “Hardware filter 8 channels” mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x RTD
switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains
four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously
for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been
converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 2).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 2 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time

Scan time of the module

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD is 84 ms. The
module must then be switched over to the other channel in the group by means of
opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 16 ms to switch and settle. Each
channel needs a time of 100 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 200 ms.
Scan time = (tK + tU) x 2
Scan time = (84 ms + 16 ms) x 2
Scan time = 200 ms
tK: channel conversion time for one channel
tU: time for switching to the other channel in the channel group

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

10 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
”Software filter 8 channels” mode
In “Software filter 8 channels” mode, the analog/digital conversion occurs in exactly
the same way as in “hardware filter 8 channels” mode. That is to say, as the
module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert
simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels are
converted, all the ADCs convert simultaneously for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 3).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 3 Software filter 8 channels scan time

Scan time of the module

The channel conversion time depends, however, on the programmed interference
frequency suppression. When you set an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the
channel conversion time including communication time is 32 ms. When you set an
interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion time is 27 ms. When you
set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to
9 ms. As with 8-channel hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over
by means of opto MOS relays with a time of 16 ms for switching to the other
channel of the group. This relationship is shown in the table that follows.

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Table 3 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode

Programmed Channel Scan Time* Module Scan Time (All

Interference Frequency Channels)
Suppression
50 Hz 48 ms 96 ms
60 Hz 43 ms 86 ms
400 Hz 25 ms 50 ms

* Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 16 ms switching time to the other channel
in the channel group

Scan time in “Hardware Filter, 4 Channels” mode

In this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different
groups. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the
ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 4 Hardware filter 4 channels scan time

Scan time of the module

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD is 10 ms. As
the module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel
scan time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.
Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

12 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check
The wire-break check is a hardware function of the module that is available in all
operating modes.
In the 8-channel hardware and software filter operating modes, the scan time
of the module is unchanged, irrespective of the number of channels for which
wire-break has been enabled.
In the 4-channel hardware filter operating mode, the module interrupts
processing of the input data 100 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other
words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 100 ms.

Smoothing of the measured values

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog
values in Section 4.6 of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic Controller S7-300
Module Data Reference Manual .

Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L

If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage.
The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Section 4.16 of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic Controller S7-300
Module Data Reference Manual .

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
S RTD 4-conductor measurement
S RTD 3-conductor measurement
S Resistor 4-conductor measurement
S Resistor 3-conductor measurement
You perform the setting with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
Set the “measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
You must terminate an unused channel of an enabled channel group with a
nominal resistance in order to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel (refer
to the block diagram, Figure 1, for the connection).
In the “4-Channel Hardware Filter” operating mode, termination is not necessary
provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and
7 are not monitored in this mode.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the “measuring range” parameter
in STEP 7.

Table 4 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD

Method Selected Measuring Range

Deactivated Deactivated
Resistance, four-conductor 150 W
connection 300 W
600 W
Resistance, three-conductor 150 W
connection 300 W
600 W

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

14 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Table 4 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD

Method Selected Measuring Range

Thermal resistance Pt 100 Climatic
+linearization Ni 100 Climatic
four-conductor Pt 100 Standard
connection Ni 100 Standard
Pt 500 Standard
Pt 1000 Standard
Ni 1000 Standard
Pt 200 Climatic
Pt 500 Climatic
Pt 1000 Climatic
Ni 1000 Climatic
Pt 200 Standard
Ni 120 Standard
Ni 120 Climatic
Cu 10 Climatic
Cu 10 Standard
Ni 200 Standard
Ni 200 Climatic
Ni 500 Standard
Ni 500 Climatic
Pt 10 GOST Climatic
Pt 10 GOST Standard
Pt 50 GOST Climatic
Pt 50 GOST Standard
Pt 100 GOST Climatic
Pt 100 GOST Standard
Pt 500 GOST Climatic
Pt 500 GOST Standard
Cu 10 GOST Climatic
Cu 10 GOST Standard
Cu 50 GOST Climatic
Cu 50 GOST Standard
Cu 100 GOST Climatic
Cu 100 GOST Standard
Ni 100 GOST Climatic
Ni 100 GOST Standard

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 15

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Method Selected Measuring Range
Thermal resistance Pt 100 Climatic
+linearization Ni 100 Climatic
three-conductor Pt 100 Standard
connection Ni 100 Standard
Pt 500 Standard
Pt 1000 Standard
Ni 1000 Standard
Pt 200 Climatic
Pt 500 Climatic
Pt 1000 Climatic
Ni 1000 Climatic
Pt 200 Standard
Ni 120 Standard
Ni 120 Climatic
Cu 10 Climatic
Cu 10 Standard
Ni 200 Standard
Ni 200 Climatic
Ni 500 Standard
Ni 500 Climatic
Pt 10 GOST Climatic
Pt 10 GOST Standard
Pt 50 GOST Climatic
Pt 50 GOST Standard
Pt 100 GOST Climatic
Pt 100 GOST Standard
Pt 500 GOST Climatic
Pt 500 GOST Standard
Cu 10 GOST Climatic
Cu 10 GOST Standard
Cu 50 GOST Climatic
Cu 50 GOST Standard
Cu 100 GOST Climatic
Cu 100 GOST Standard
Ni 100 GOST Climatic
Ni 100 GOST Standard

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

16 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with
the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all
the enabled channels is complete.

Table 5 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware
interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
additional information
Special 2 bits per channel to identify the range
analog
l
Upper limit exceeded in
markers 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
channel
Lower limit exceeded in
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
channel
End-of-scan-cycle event X 2
Unassigned bit 3

Wiring Diagrams
Figure 5 shows the wiring diagrams for 4-wire and 3-wire sensor elements. When
you use a 3-wire sensor, ensure you insert the jumper between M+ and Ic+.
Incorrect wiring results in unpredictable module behavior.

M+
M+ Jumper M+ to Ic+

M–
M–

Ic+ Ic+

Ic– Ic–

4-Wire Wiring 3-Wire Wiring

Figure 5 4-Wire and 3-Wire Wiring Diagram

Unused Input Channels

In order to reduce unnecessary wiring, use STEP 7 to deactivate unused channel
groups of the SM331; AI 8 RTD module (see Table 1).
You must terminate an unused channel within an activated group to eliminate
diagnostic errors for the unused input. Figure 5 shows how to attach a nominal
resistor for the selected input range to terminate the unused input.
When you operate in the 4 Channel Hardware Module Mode, no channel
termination is required if you deactivate the unused input channel groups.
Channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 are not monitored during this module mode of operation.

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 17

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Value Representation of the Measuring Ranges of the Analog
Input Module SM 331: AI 8 RTD

Introduction
The tables in this section contain the digitized analog values for the various
measuring ranges of the analog input module. See table 6 through table 17.

How to Read the Measured-Value Tables

Since the binary representation for the analog values is always the same, these
tables only contain the measured values and the units.

Resistance-Type Sensors Measuring Ranges

Table 6 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for
resistance-type sensors with the measuring ranges 150 Ω, 300 Ω, and 600 Ω.

Table 6 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters from 150 W to 600 W

System Resistance-Type Transmitter Range

Dec. Hex. 150 W 300 W 600 W
32767 7FFF 177.77 W 355.54 W 711.09 W Overflow
32512 7F00 150.01 W 300.01 W 600.02 W
32511 7EFF 176.38 W 352.77 W 705.53 W Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 150 W 300 W 600 W
20736 5100 112.5 W 225 W 450 W
1 1 5.43 mW 10.85 21.70 Rated range
mW mW
0 0 0W 0W 0W

(negative values physically Underrange

not possible)

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

18 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Pt Standard Temperature Ranges
Table 7 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the standard
temperature range of the Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500 and Pt 1000 sensors. In addition,
GOST Pt 0.003850 (ITS-90) 10, 50, 100, and 500 temperature ranges are
represented.

Table 7 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors

Pt 10, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000

Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units

standard standard
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit decimal (1 digit decimal
=0.15C) =0.1 5F)
> 1000.0 32767 7FFFH > 1832.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H
: : : : : : Overrange
850.1 8501 2135H 1562.1 15621 3D05H
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 3D04H
: : : : : : Rated range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–243.0 –2430 F682H –405.4 –4054 F02AH
< –243.0 –32768 8000H < –405.4 –32768 8000H Underflow

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 19

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Pt Climatic Temperature Ranges
Table 8 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the climatic
temperature range of the Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500 and Pt 1000 sensors. In addition,
GOST Pt 10, 50, 100, and 500 temperature ranges are represented.

Table 8 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors

Pt 10, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000

Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units

climatic climatic
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.015F)
>155.00 32767 7FFFH >311.00 32767 7FFFH Overflow
155.00 15500 3C8CH 311.00 31100 797CH
: : : : : : Overrange
130.01 13001 32C9H 266.01 26601 67E9H
130.00 13000 32C8H 266.00 26600 67E8H
: : : : : : Rated range
–120.00 –12000 D120H –184.00 –18400 B820H
–120.01 –12001 D11FH –184.01 –18401 B81FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–145.00 –14500 C75CH –229.00 –22900 A68CH
< –145.00 –32768 8000H < –229.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Ni Standard Temperature Ranges

Table 9 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the standard
temperature range of the Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500 and Ni 1000 sensors.

Table 9 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors

Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000

Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units

standard standard
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.15C) 0.15F)
>295.0 32767 7FFFH >563.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295.0 2950 B86H 563.0 5630 15FEH
: : : : : : Overrange
250.1 2501 9C5H 482.1 4821 12D5H
250.0 2500 9C4H 482.0 4820 12D4H
: : : : : : Rated range
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FD08H
–60.1 –601 FDA7H –76.1 –761 FD07H
: : : : : : Underrange
–105.0 –1050 FBE6H –157.0 –1570 F9DEH
< –105.0 –32768 8000H < –157.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

20 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Ni Climatic Temperature Ranges
Table 10 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the standard
temperature range of the Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500 and Ni 1000 sensors.

Table 10 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors

Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000

Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units

climatic climatic
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.015F)
> 295.00 32767 7FFFH >325.11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295.00 29500 733CH 327.66 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
250.01 25001 61A9H 280.01 28001 6D61H
250.00 25000 61A8H 280.00 28000 6D60H
: : : : : : Rated range
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
–60.01 –6001 E88FH –76.01 –7601 E24FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–105.00 –10500 D6FCH –157.00 –15700 C2ACH
< –105.00 –32768 8000H < –157.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Cu Standard Temperature Ranges

Table 11 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the standard
temperature range of the Cu 10 sensor.

Table 11 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature

Detectors Cu 10

Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units
standard standard
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.015F)
> 312.0 32767 7FFFH >593.6 32767 7FFFH Overflow
312.0 3120 C30H 593.6 5936 1730H
: : : : : : Overrange
260.1 2601 A29H 500.1 5001 12D5H
260.0 2600 A28H 500.0 5000 1389H
: : : : : : Rated range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–240.0 –2400 F6A0H –400.0 –4000 F060H
< –240.0 –32768 8000H < –400.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 21

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Cu Climatic Temperature Ranges
Table 12 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the climatic
temperature range of the Cu 10 sensor. In addition, GOST Cu 10, 50, and 100
temperature ranges are represented.

Table 12 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature

Detectors Cu 10, 50, 100

Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units
climatic climatic
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.015F)
> 180.00 32767 7FFFH >327.66 32767 7FFFH Overflow
180.00 18000 4650H 327.66 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
150.01 15001 3A99H 280.01 28001 6D61AH
150.00 15000 3A98H 280.00 28000 6D60H
: : : : : : Rated range
–50.00 –5000 EC78H –58.00 –5800 E958H
–50.01 –5001 EC77H –58.01 –5801 E957H
: : : : : : Underrange
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
< –60.00 –32768 8000H < –76.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Pt 0.003910 GOST Standard Temperature Ranges

Table 13 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the GOST
standard temperature range of the Pt 10, 50, 100, 500 sensors.

Table 13 Analog value representation for GOST RTD Resistance Temperature

Detectors Pt 10, 50, 100, 500

Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units

standard standard
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit decimal (1 digit decimal
=0.15C) =0.15F)
> 1295.0 32767 7FFFH > 2363.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1295.0 12950 3296H 2363.0 23630 5CE4H
: : : : : : Overrange
1100.1 11001 2AF9H 2012.1 20121 4E99H
1100.0 11000 2AF8H 2012.0 20120 4E98H
: : : : : : Rated range
–260.0 –2600 F5D8H –436.0 –4360 EEF8H
–260.1 –2601 F5D7H –436.1 –4361 EEF7H
: : : : : : Underrange
–273.2 –2732 F554H –459.7 –4597 EE0BH
< –273.2 –32768 8000H < –459.7 –32768 8000H Underflow

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

22 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Ni GOST Standard Temperature Ranges
Table 14 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the GOST
standard temperature range of the Ni 100 sensor.

Table 14 Analog value representation for GOST RTD Resistance Temperature

Detector Ni100

Ni 100 Units Ni 100 Units

standard standard
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.15C) 0.15F)
>212.4 32767 7FFFH >414.3 32767 7FFFH Overflow
212.4 2124 084CH 414.3 4143 102FH
: : : : : : Overrange
180.1 1801 0709H 356.1 3561 0DE9H
180.0 1800 0708H 356.0 3560 0DE8H
: : : : : : Rated range
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FD08H
–60.1 –601 FDA7H –76.1 –761 FD07H
: : : : : : Underrange
–105.0 –1050 FBE6H –157.0 –1570 F9DEH
< –105.0 –32768 8000H < –157.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

Ni GOST Climatic Temperature Ranges

Table 15 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the GOST
climatic temperature range of the Ni 100 sensor.

Table 15 Analog value representation for GOST RTD Resistance Temperature

Detector Ni 100

Ni 100 Units Ni 100 Units

climatic climatic
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.15C) 0.15F)
> 212.40 32767 7FFFH >327.66 32767 7FFFH Overflow
212.40 21240 52F8H 327.66 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
180.01 18001 4651H 280.01 28001 6D61H
180.00 18000 4650H 280.00 28000 6D60H
: : : : : : Rated range
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
–60.01 –6001 E88FH –76.01 –7601 E24FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–105.00 –10500 D6FCH –157.00 –15700 C2ACH
< –105.00 –32768 8000H < –157.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 23

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Cu 0.00426 GOST Standard Temperature Ranges
Table 16 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the GOST
standard temperature range of the Cu 10, 50, 100, 500 sensors.

Table 16 Analog Value Representation for GOST RTD Resistance Temperature

Detectors Cu 10, 50, 100, 500

Cu xx0 Units Cu xx0 Units

standard standard
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.15C) 0.015F)
> 240.0 32767 7FFFH >464.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
240.0 2400 0960H 464.0 4640 1220H
: : : : : : Overrange
200.1 2001 07D1H 392.1 3921 0F51H
200.0 2000 07D0H 392.0 3920 0F50H
: : : : : : Rated range
–50.0 –500 FE0CH –58.0 –580 FDBCH
–50.1 –501 FE0BH –58.1 –581 FDBBH
: : : : : : Underrange
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FD08H
< –60.0 –32768 8000H < –76.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

Cu 0.00428 GOST Standard Temperature Ranges

Table 17 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the GOST
standard temperature range of the Cu 10, 50, 100, 500 sensors.

Table 17 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature

Detectors Cu 10, 50, 100, 500

Cu xx0 Units Cu xx0 Units

standard standard
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.15C) 0.015F)
> 240.0 32767 7FFFH >464.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
240.0 2400 0960H 464.0 4640 1220H
: : : : : : Overrange
200.1 2001 07D1H 392.1 3921 0F51H
200.0 2000 07D0H 392.0 3920 0F50H
: : : : : : Rated range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–240.0 –2400 F6A0H –405.4 –4054 F02AH
< –240.0 –32768 8000H < –405.4 –32768 8000H Underflow

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

24 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Parameter Sets for Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7.
In the user program, you can use a SFC:
S To reassign parameters to the module and
S To transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed modules

Parameters stored in data records

The parameters of the AI 8 x RTD module are located in data records 0 and 1; for
some other analog input modules, in data record 128 as well.

Modifiable parameters
You can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the module using
SFC 55. The parameters set on the CPU are not changed when you do this!
You cannot modify the parameters of data record 0 in the user program.

SFCs for parameter assignment

The following SFCs are available for assigning parameters to the AI 8 x RTD
module in the user program:

Table 18 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules

SFC Identifier Application

No.
55 WR_PARM Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1 and 28)
to the addressed signal module.
56 WR_DPARM Transfer parameters (data record 0, 1 or 128) from the
CPU to the addressed signal module.
57 PARM_MOD Transfer all parameters (data record 0, 1 and 128)
from the CPU to the addressed signal module.

Description of the parameters

The following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the AI 8 x RTD
module. The parameters of the AI 8 x RTD modules are described:
S In the on-line help of STEP 7
S In this Product Information document.
You will find the parameters that can be adjusted for the signal module
concerned in the specific sections for the different signal modules.

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 25

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Parameters of Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input
module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
S In STEP 7
S With SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table 19 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics No Yes
0
Diagnostics: With wire-break check No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes
1
Cycle end interrupt enable Yes Yes
Temperature unit Yes Yes
Measuring Method Yes Yes
Measuring Range Yes Yes
Module filtering mode Yes Yes
Temperature coefficient Yes Yes
128
Interference Suppression Yes Yes
Smoothing Yes Yes
Upper limit value Yes Yes
Lower limit value Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

26 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Structure of Data Record 1
Figure 6 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the Analog
Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD.
You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to “1”.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number

Byte 0

Celsius / Fahrenheit

Cycle end interrupt enable

Diagnostics enable
Limit value interrupt enable

Byte 1 Unused

Byte 2 Unused
Byte 3 Unused

Byte 4 Unused
Byte 5 Unused

Byte 6 Unused
Byte 7 Unused

Byte 8 Unused
Byte 9 Unused

Byte 10 Unused
Byte 11 Unused

Byte 12 Unused
Byte 13 Unused

Figure 6 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 27

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Structure of Data Record 128
Figure 7 shows the structure of data record 128 for the parameters of the Analog
Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Module Mode (See Table 20)
Byte 0
Interference frequency
Byte 1 suppression

Channel group 0
Channel group 1
(See Table 21)
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

Measurement Type, Group 0

(see Table 22)

Byte 3

Measurement Range, Group 0

(see Table 22)
Byte 4

Alpha Selection, Group 0

(see Table 23)
Smoothing, Group 0
(see Table 24)
Byte 5

Measurement Type, Group 1

(see Table 22)

Byte 6

Measurement Range, Group 1

(see Table 22)

Byte 7

Alpha Selection, Group 1

(see Table 23)
Smoothing, Group 1
(see Table 24)

Figure 7 Data Record 128 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

28 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Byte 8

Measurement Type, Group 2

(see Table 22)

Byte 9

Measurement Range, Group 2

(see Table 22)

Byte 10

Alpha Selection, Group 2

(see Table 23)
Smoothing, Group 2
(see Table 24)

Byte 11

Measurement Type, Group 3

(see Table 22)

Byte 12

Measurement Range, Group 3

(see Table 22)

Byte 13

Alpha Selection, Group 3

(see Table 23)
Smoothing, Group 3
(see Table 24)

Byte 14 High Byte Upper limit value

Group 0;
Byte 15 Low Byte Channel 0
Byte 16 High Byte Lower limit value
Group 0;
Byte 17 Low Byte Channel 0

Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
Group 0;
Byte 19 Low Byte Channel 1

Byte 20 Lower limit value

High Byte
Group 0;
Byte 21 Low Byte Channel 1

Figure 7 Data Record 128 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD
(continued)

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 29

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Byte 22 High Byte Upper limit value
Group 1;
Byte 23 Low Byte Channel 2

Byte 24 High Byte Lower limit value

Group 1;
Byte 25 Low Byte Channel 2

Upper limit value

Byte 26 High Byte Group 1;
Channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Lower limit value
Byte 28 High Byte Group 1;
Byte 29 Low Byte Channel 3

Byte 30 High Byte Upper limit value

Group 2;
Byte 31 Low Byte Channel 4
Byte 32 High Byte Lower limit value
Group 2;
Byte 33 Low Byte Channel 4

Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
Group 2;
Byte 35 Low Byte Channel 5

Byte 36 Lower limit value

High Byte
Group 2;
Byte 37 Low Byte Channel 5

Byte 38 High Byte Upper limit value

Group 3;
Byte 39 Low Byte Channel 6
Byte 40 High Byte Lower limit value
Group 3;
Byte 41 Low Byte Channel 6

Upper limit value

Byte 42 High Byte
Group 3;
Byte 43 Low Byte Channel 7

Byte 44 Lower limit value

High Byte
Group 3;
Byte 45 Low Byte Channel 7

Figure 7 Data Record 128 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD
(continued)

The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation.
Observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

30 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Module Mode
Table 20 contains the codes for the various module operating modes that you enter
in byte 0 of data record 128 (see Figure 7).

Table 20 Codes for the module modes of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Module Mode Code

8 Channel Hardware Filtering 2#00000000
8 Channel Software Filtering 2#00000001
4 Channel Hardware Filtering 2#00000010

Interference Frequency Suppression

Table 21 contains the codes for the various frequencies that you enter in record
128 (see Figure 7). Note that the 50 Hz, 60 Hz, and 400 Hz selections are for the 8
Channel Software Filtering module mode only. The 50, 60, and 400 Hz selection is
for the 8 Channel and 4 Channel Hardware Filtering module modes only.

Table 21 Codes for the Interference Frequency Suppression of Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Interference Frequency Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50, 60, and 400 Hz 2#11

Measurement Type and Measurement Range

Table 22 contains all the measuring ranges for the Analog Input Module SM 331;
AI 8 RTD. Table 22 also shows the codes for the measurement types and the
measuring range. You must enter these codes, according to the measuring range
desired, in the appropriate bytes of data record 128 (see Figure 7).

Table 22 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD

Method Selected Code Measuring Range Code

(Hex) (Hex)
Deactivated 0x0 Deactivated 0x00
Resistance, four-conductor 150 W 0x02
connection 0x4 300 W 0x04
600 W 0x06
Resistance, three-conductor 150 W 0x02
connection 0x5 300 W 0x04
600 W 0x06

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 31

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Table 22 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD

Method Selected Code Measuring Range Code

(Hex) (Hex)
Thermal resistance 0x8 Pt 100 Climatic 0x00
+linearization Ni 100 Climatic 0x01
four-conductor Pt 100 Standard 0x02
connection Ni 100 Standard 0x03
Pt 500 Standard 0x04
Pt 1000 Standard 0x05
Ni 1000 Standard 0x06
Pt 200 Climatic 0x07
Pt 500 Climatic 0x08
Pt 1000 Climatic 0x09
Ni 1000 Climatic 0x0A
Pt 200 Standard 0x0B
Ni 120 Standard 0x0C
Ni 120 Climatic 0x0D
Cu 10 Climatic 0x0E
Cu 10 Standard 0x0F
Ni 200 Standard 0x10
Ni 200 Climatic 0x11
Ni 500 Standard 0x12
Ni 500 Climatic 0x13
Pt 10 GOST Climatic 0x14
Pt 10 GOST Standard 0x15
Pt 50 GOST Climatic 0x16
Pt 50 GOST Standard 0x17
Pt 100 GOST Climatic 0x18
Pt 100 GOST Standard 0x19
Pt 500 GOST Climatic 0x1A
Pt 500 GOST Standard 0x1B
Cu 10 GOST Climatic 0x1C
Cu 10 GOST Standard 0x1D
Cu 50 GOST Climatic 0x1E
Cu 50 GOST Standard 0x1F
Cu 100 GOST Climatic 0x20
Cu 100 GOST Standard 0x21
Ni 100 GOST Climatic 0x22
Ni 100 GOST Standard 0x23

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

32 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Method Selected Code Measuring Range Code
(Hex) (Hex)
Thermal resistance 0x9 Pt 100 Climatic 0x00
+linearization Ni 100 Climatic 0x01
three-conductor Pt 100 Standard 0x02
connection Ni 100 Standard 0x03
Pt 500 Standard 0x04
Pt 1000 Standard 0x05
Ni 1000 Standard 0x06
Pt 200 Climatic 0x07
Pt 500 Climatic 0x08
Pt 1000 Climatic 0x09
Ni 1000 Climatic 0x0A
Pt 200 Standard 0x0B
Ni 120 Standard 0x0C
Ni 120 Climatic 0x0D
Cu 10 Climatic 0x0E
Cu 10 Standard 0x0F
Ni 200 Standard 0x10
Ni 200 Climatic 0x11
Ni 500 Standard 0x12
Ni 500 Climatic 0x13
Pt 10 GOST Climatic 0x14
Pt 10 GOST Standard 0x15
Pt 50 GOST Climatic 0x16
Pt 50 GOST Standard 0x17
Pt 100 GOST Climatic 0x18
Pt 100 GOST Standard 0x19
Pt 500 GOST Climatic 0x1A
Pt 500 GOST Standard 0x1B
Cu 10 GOST Climatic 0x1C
Cu 10 GOST Standard 0x1D
Cu 50 GOST Climatic 0x1E
Cu 50 GOST Standard 0x1F
Cu 100 GOST Climatic 0x20
Cu 100 GOST Standard 0x21
Ni 100 GOST Climatic 0x22
Ni 100 GOST Standard 0x23

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A5E00400156-01 33

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Resistance-type Thermometer Alpha Selection
Table 23 contains all the alpha selections for the resistance-type thermometer
measuring range of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD. You must enter
these codes, according to the measuring range desired, in the appropriate bytes of
data record 128 (see Figure 7).

Table 23 Codes for the Alpha Selection of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Alpha Selection Code

Pt 0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (IPTS-68) 2#0000
Pt 0.003916 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0001
Pt 0.003902 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0010
Pt 0.003920 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0011
Pt 0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (ITS-90) 2#0100
Pt 0.003910 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0101
Ni 0.006170 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0111
Ni 0.006180 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1000
Ni 0.006720 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1001
Ni 0.005000 Ω/Ω/°C (LG Ni 1000) 2#1010
Cu 0.004260 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1011
Cu 0.004270 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1100
Cu 0.004280 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1101

Input Smoothing Selection

Table 24 contains all the smoothing selections for the Analog Input Module SM
331; AI 8 RTD. You must enter these codes, according to the measuring range
desired, in the appropriate bytes of data record 128 (see Figure 7).

Table 24 Codes for the Smoothing Selection of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Smoothing Selection Code

None 2#00
Weak 2#01
Medium 2#10
Strong 2#11

Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

34 A5E00400156-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Product Information

SIMATIC S7-300
X 2
Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC as of Version 3 4

New Analog Input Module Available

The S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC has been added to the
S7-300 family. The order number for this module is 6ES7 331-7PF11-0AB0.
This product information includes details about the characteristics and technical
specifications of analog input module SM 331; AI 8×TC. Refer to the S7-300
Installation and Hardware Manual for more information about the S7-300 product
family.
You will also learn:
S How to start up the analog input module
S The measuring ranges available for the analog input module
S How to configure the analog input module

Additional Assistance
For assistance in answering technical questions, for training on this product, or for
ordering, contact your Siemens distributor or sales office.

Copyright 2005 by Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Input
Module SM 331; AI 8×TC

Order No.
6ES7 331-7PF11-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC has the following features:
S 8 differential inputs for thermocouples (TC) in 4 channel groups
S Optional setting of the thermocouple type per channel group
S Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
S Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
S Programmable diagnostics
S Programmable diagnostic interrupt
S 8 channels with limit monitoring
S Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
S Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
S Programmable reaction to open thermocouple
S Isolated against the backplane bus interface
S Fully compatible with predecessor module 6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0
S Added support for Russian GOST thermocouple characteristics, TXK/XK(L)

Use of the module in the distributed peripheral ET 200M

When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x TC in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you
must have one of the following IM 153-x:
S IM 153-1; as of 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
S IM 153-2; as of 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
S IM 153-2; as of 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

2 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Fault indicator -- red

SF 1 L- M+ 21 L+
2 22
3 23
DC
4 to 24
DC
5 25

6 26
TC+0 TC+4
Channel 7 27
0 TC-4 K4
TC-0 8 28
TC+1 TC+5
Channel 9 29
1 ADC ADC TC-5 K5
TC-1
10 30
TC+2 TC+6
Channel 11 31
2 TC-2 ADC ADC K6
12 32 TC-6
TC+3 TC+7
Channel 13 Back- 33
3 TC-3 plane TC-7 K7
14 bus 34
inter- 35
KV+
15
face
16 36 KV-
Ext KV
lc+
17 37
Ext lc-
18 38
KV

19 39

20 40 M

Channel
number

Figure 1 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 3

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Module filtering mode 8 channels, hardware
Weight Approx. 272 g
Integration time/conversion
Data for Specific Module time/ resolution (per
channel)
Supports clocked No
operation S Programmable Yes
Length of cable S Basic conversion time in 95
S Shielded max. 100 m ms

Voltages, Currents, Potentials S Additional conversion 4

time for open-circuit
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC monitoring, in ms
electronics L+
S Resolution including 16 bits
S Reverse polarity protection Yes sign
Constant measured current for typ. 0.7 mA S Noise suppression 400/60/50
resistance-type sensor for interference
frequency f1 in Hz
Isolation
Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high
S Between channels and Yes values
backplane bus
Basic response time of 190 ms
S Between channels and Yes module (all channels
power supply of the enabled)
electronics
Module filtering mode 8 channels, software
S Between the channels Yes
In groups of 2 Integration time/conversion
time/ resolution (per
Permitted potential difference channel)
S Between the inputs (UCM ) 75 VDC / 60 VAC S Programmable Yes
S Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC S Basic conversion time in 23/72/83
Minternal (UISO) ms
Insulation tested with 500 VDC S Additional conversion 4
time for open-circuit
Current consumption monitoring, in ms
S From the backplane bus max. 100 mA S Resolution including 16 bits
S From supply voltage max. 240 mA sign
L+ S Noise suppression 400/60/50
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.0 W for interference
frequency f1 in Hz

Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high

values

Basic response time of 46/144/166 ms

module (all channels
enabled)

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

4 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Analog Value Generation (Cont’d) Type N -150 °C to +1300 °C ±2.2 °C
Measuring principle Integrating -200 °C to -150 °C ±3.0 °C
Module filtering mode 4 channels, hardware Type R +100 °C to +1769 °C ±1.5 °C
Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) -50 °C to +100 °C ±1.8 °C
S Programmable Yes Type S +100 °C to +1769 °C ±1.7 °C
S Basic conversion time in 1.0 -50 °C to +100 °C ±2.0 °C
ms
Type B 4) +800 °C to +1820 °C ±2.3 °C
S Additional conversion 93 1)
time for open-circuit +200 °C +800 °C ±3.8 °C
monitoring, in ms
Type C +100 °C to +2315 °C ±2.3 °C
S Resolution including 16 bits
0 °C +100 °C ±2.5 °C
sign
Type --150 °C to +800 °C ±1.0 °C
S Noise suppression for 400/60/50
frequency f1 in Hz Txk/xk(L) --200 °C --150 °C ±1.5 °C
Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input
values range)
Basic response time of 10 ms S Thermocouple
module (all channels
enabled) Type T -200 °C to +400 °C ±0.5 °C

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error -230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C

Noise suppression for f = n× (f1 ± 1%), Type U -150 °C to +600 °C ±0.5 °C
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.
-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.0 °C
S Common-mode > 100 dB
interference (Ucm < 60 Type E -200 °C to +1000 °C ±0.5 °C
VAC)
-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C
S Series-mode > 90 dB 2)
Type J -150 °C to +1200 °C ±0.5 °C
interference (peak value
of interference < rated -210 °C to -150 °C ±1.0 °C
value of input range)
Type L -150 °C to +900 °C ±0.5 °C
Crosstalk between the > 100 dB
inputs -200 °C to -150 °C ±1.0 °C
Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred Type K -150 °C to +1372 °C ±0.5 °C
to 0 to 60 °C input range) Note: This limit does not cover
the error cold connection point3) -220 °C to -150 °C ±1.0 °C

S Thermocouple Type N -150 °C to +1300 °C ±0.5 °C

Type T -200 °C to +400 °C ±0.7 °C -200 °C to -150 °C ±1.0 °C

-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.5 °C Type R +100 °C to +1769 °C ±0.5 °C

Type U -150 °C to +600 °C ±0.9 °C -50 °C to +100 °C ±1.0 °C

-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.2 °C Type S +100 °C to +1769 °C ±0.5 °C

Type E -200 °C to +1000 °C ±1.2 °C -50 °C to +100 °C ±1.0 °C

Type B 4) +800 °C to +1820 °C ±1.0 °C

-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.5 °C

Type J -150 °C to +1200 °C ±1.4 °C +200 °C to +800 °C ±2.0 °C

-210 °C to -150 °C ±1.7 °C Type C +100 °C to +2315 °C ±0.5 °C

Type L -150 °C to +900 °C ±1.5 °C 0 °C +100 °C ±1.0 °C

-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.8 °C Type --150 °C to +800 °C ±0.5 °C

Type K -150 °C to +1372 °C ±2.1 °C Txk/xk(L) --200 °C --150 °C ±1.0 °C

-220 °C to -150 °C ±2.9 °C

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 5

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Temperature error (with ±0.005%/K Data for Selecting a Sensor
reference to the input range)
Input ranges (rated values)/
Linearity error (with ± 0.02% input resistance
reference to the input range) S Thermocouples Type B, C, N, E, R, S, J, L,
Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.01% T, K, U, Txk/xk(L)
steady state at 25 °C, Maximum input voltage for 20 VDC continuous; 75
referred to the output range voltage input (destruction VDC for max. 1 s (duty
3)
limit) factor 1:20)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Characteristic linearization Programmable
Interrupts Temperature compensation Programmable
S Hardware interrupt Programmable S Internal temperature Possible
(channels 0 to 7) compensation

S Diagnostic interrupt Programmable S External temperature Possible

compensation with
Diagnostic functions Programmable Pt 100 (0.003850)
S Group error display Red LED (SF) S Compensation for 0°C Possible
S Diagnostics information Possible comparison point
read-out temperature
S Compensation for 50°C Possible
comparison point
temperature
S Technical unit for Degrees Celsius/
temperature degrees Fahrenheit
measurement

1) Open-circuit monitoring in 4 channels, Hardware operating mode is performed every 3 seconds.

2) Series-mode rejection in 8 channels, software mode is reduced as follows:
50 Hz > 70 dB
60 Hz > 70 dB
400 Hz > 80 dB
3) The operational limit comprises only the basic error of the analog input at Ta = 25 °C and the total
temperature error. The total error must cover the error for the compensation of the cold connection
point. Internal compensation of the cold connection point = max. 1.5 °C
External compensation of the cold connection point = accuracy +0.1 °C of the used external RTD.
External compensation of the cold connection point, where the connection point is held at 0 °C or 50
°C = accuracy of the connection point temperature control.

4) Because of the slight rise over the range of approx. 0 °C to 85 °C, the lack of compensation of the
comparison point temperature only has a negligible effect on a type B thermocouple. If there is no
compensation and the measuring method “Compensation to 0 °C” is set, the deviation in the type B
thermocouple duringtemperature measurement is: 200 °C to 1802 °C <0.5 °C

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

6 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8×TC
You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC bits in STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7 of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic Controllers
S7--300 Module Data Manual.

Parameterization restrictions when using the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC in an ET 200M
PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7 master,
certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do not
support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these functions
are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt enable,
hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other
parameters are permitted.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
S Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
S Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
upon limit violation
S Hardware interrupt Yes/no
at end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware
interrupt
S Upper limit value 32511 to --32512* 32767 Dynamic Channel
S Lower limit value --32512 to 32511* -32768

Diagnostics
S Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
S With wire-break Yes/no No
check
* These values are within overrange and underrange limits. See Tables 7 through 17.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 7

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Table 1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
S Measuring Method Deactivated TC-IL
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal
comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external
comparison)
TC-L00C Thermocouple (linear, ref. Channel
Dynamic
temperature 0°C) group
TC-L50C Thermocouple (linear, ref.
temperature 50°C)
S Measuring Range For the settable measuring ranges of Type K
the input channels, please refer to
the individual module description.
S Reaction to open Overflow; underflow Overflow
thermocouple
S Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Degrees Dynamic Module
Fahrenheit Celsius
S Module filtering 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels, Dynamic Module
mode 8 channels software filter hardware
4 channels hardware filter filter
S Interference 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 50/60/400 Dynamic Channel
suppression* Hz group
S Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel
Low group
Average
High
* 50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes;
50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

8 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC are arranged in four groups of two. You
can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Table 2 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit violation
You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in
STEP 7.

Module filtering mode

The SM 331; AI 8 x TC operates in one of the following modes:
S “Hardware filter, 8 channels”
S “Software filter, 8 channels”
S “Hardware filter, 4 channels”
The operating mode affects the scan time of the module.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 9

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
“Hardware filter 8 channels” mode
In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC
switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains
four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously
for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been
converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 2).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 3 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time

Scan time in the mode

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC is 91 ms. The
module must then be switched over to the other channel in the group by means of
opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 7 ms to switch and settle. Each channel
needs a time of 98 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 196 ms.
Scan time = (tK + tU) x 2
Scan time = (91 ms + 7 ms) x 2
Scan time = 196 ms
tK: channel conversion time for one channel
tU: time for switching to the other channel in the channel group

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

10 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
“Software filter 8 channels” mode
In 8-channel software filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC
switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains
four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously
for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been
converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4 Software filter 8 channels scan time

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 11

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Scan time of the module
In the 8-channel software filter mode of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC, the
channel conversion time is guided by the interference frequency set. When you set
an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including
communication time is 76 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz,
the channel conversion time is 65 ms. When you set an interference frequency of
400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to 16 ms. As with 8-channel
hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over by means of opto MOS
relays with a switchover time of 7 ms to the other channel of the group. Table 3
shows the scan time of the module at a certain interference frequency.

Table 3 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode

Programmed Channel Scan Time* Module Scan Time (All

Interference Frequency Channels)
Suppression
50 Hz 83 ms 166 ms
60 Hz 72 ms 144 ms
400 Hz 23 ms 46 ms

* Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 7 ms switching time to the other channel
in the channel group

“Hardware filter 4 channels” mode

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC does
not switch over between the channels of the individual groups. As the module
contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert
simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 5 Hardware filter 4 channels scan time

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

12 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Scan time of the module
In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC is 10 ms. As the
module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel scan
time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.
Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms

Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check

The wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all
operating modes.
In the 8-Channel Hardware and Software Filter operating mode prolongs the
scan time of the module by 4 ms, irrespective of the number of channels for which
wire-break has been enabled.
In the 4-Channel Hardware Filter operating mode, the module interrupts
processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other
words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 93 ms.

Smoothing of the measured values

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog
values in Section 4.6 of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic Controllers S7--300
Module Data Manual.

Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L

If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage.
The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4--46, on page 4--72 of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic
Controllers S7--300 Module Data Manual.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 13

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Connecting Thermocouples

Design of thermocouples
A thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and
connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or
metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends.
There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the
material used -- for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all
thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type.

Measuring junction
Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs

Connecting point
Compensating leads

Reference junction

Leads

Point at which thermo-e. m. f. is measured

°C

Figure 6 Design of Thermocouples

Principle of Operation of Thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free
ends of the thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo emf, occurs
at the free ends. The magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the
difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature
at the free ends, as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple.
Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends
must be kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine
the temperature of the measuring junction.
The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference
junction by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires consist of
the same material as the thermocouple wires. The supply leads are copper wire.
Note: Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity, otherwise
there will be considerable measuring errors.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

14 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Compensation of the reference junction temperature
You can compensate for the effects of temperature fluctuations at the reference
junction by means of compensating leads.
There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference
junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the
difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point.
You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the
reference junction to be.

Table 4 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature

Option Explanation
No compensation If you want to acquire only the difference in temperature
between the measuring point and the reference junction.
Internal compensation If you employ internal compensation, the internal
(refer to Figure 7 for connection) temperature (thermocouple internal comparison) of the
module is used for comparison purposes.
External compensation with resistance You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a
thermometer for acquisition of the reference resistance thermometer and have it calculated by the
junction temperature module for any thermocouple.
(refer to Figure 8 and LEERER MERKERfor
connection)

Theory of operation of internal compensation

With internal compensation, you can establish the reference point across the
terminals of the analog input modules. In this case, you must run the
compensating lines right up to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor
acquires the temperature of the module and supplies a compensation voltage.
Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 15

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below
The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M--: Measuring lead (negative)
IC+: Positive connection of constant current output
IC-: Negative connection of constant current output
COMP+: Compensating terminal (positive)
COMP -- : Compensating terminal (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
P5V: Module logic power supply
KV +/KV --: Connections to the shunt comparison

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

16 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Connection of thermocouples with internal compensation
Connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module, either directly or by means
of compensating lines. Each channel group can use a thermocouple type
supported by the analog module independently of the other channel groups.

L+
Thermocouple M

M+
K0 M--

Logic
. ADC
. Backplane
. bus
M+
K7 M--

Compensating leads
(same material as
thermocouple)

Figure 7 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an

Isolated AI

Connecting thermocouples with temperature compensation to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC
All 8 inputs are available as measurement channels when the thermocouples are
connected via reference junctions that are controlled at 0 °C or 50 °C.

L+
Copper M
wire

M+
K0 M-
.
Reference junction .
Logic

controlled at ADUs Backplane

.
0_C or 50_C bus
M+
K6 M-
M+
K7 M-

Figure 8 Connecting thermocouples via a reference junction to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 17

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Connecting thermocouples with resistance thermometer to the
SM 331; AI 8 x TC
With this type of compensation, the reference junction terminal temperature is
determined by a bulb resistor sensor with a temperature range of -25 °C to 85 °C.

Copper L+
wire M

KV+
K0 KV--
Thermo- P5V
couples ADC

KV+

Logic
K7 KV--

Backplane
KV+ bus
Compensating KV--
leads (same Pt 100
material as IC+ M internal
thermocouple) IC --

Ref. junction

Figure 9 Connecting thermocouples with external compensation via resistance thermometers to the
SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

18 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8×TC

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
S Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 0 °C
S Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 50 °C
S Thermocouples, linearization with internal comparison
S Thermocouple, linearization with external comparison
You perform the setting with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
Set the “measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
You must terminate an unused channel in an enabled channel group to avoid
diagnostic errors for the unused channel. To do this, short the Plus input and Minus
input of the channel.
In the “4-Channel Hardware Filter” operating mode, termination is not necessary
provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and
7 are not monitored in this mode.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the “measuring range” parameter
in STEP 7.

Table 5 Measuring Ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x TC

Method Selected Measuring Range Description

TC-L00C: Type B You will find the digitized analog values
(thermocouple, linear, Type C in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range
reference temperature of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic
Type E
0 °C) Controllers S7--300 Module Data Manual
Type J
TC-L50C:
(thermocouple, linear, Type K
reference temperature Type L
50 °C) Type N
TC-IL: Type R
(thermocouple, linear,
internal compensation) Type S
TC-EL: Type T
(thermocouple, linear, Type U
external compensation) Type Txk/xk(l)

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 19

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with
the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all
the enabled channels is complete.

Table 6 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware
interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
additional information
Analog 2 bits per channel to identify the range
special
i l
Upper limit exceeded in
marker 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
channel
s
Lower limit exceeded in
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
channel
End-of-scan-cycle event X 2
Unassigned byte 3

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

20 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Value Representation of the Measuring Ranges of the Analog
Input Module SM 331: AI 8×TC

Introduction
The tables in this section contain the digitized analog values for the various
measuring ranges of the analog input module. See Table 7 through Table
LEERER MERKER.

How to Read the Measured-Value Tables

Since the binary representation for the analog values is always the same, these
tables only contain the measured values and the units.

Analog value representation for thermocouples type B

Table 7 Analog value representation for thermocouples type B

Units Units
Type
T pe B Type
T pe B Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
>2070.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2070.0 20700 50DCH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
1821.0 18210 4722H 2786.6 27866 6CDAH
1820.0 18200 4718H 2786.5 27865 6CD9H
: : : : : : Rated range
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H

: : : : : : Underrange
--120.0 --1200 FB50H --184.0 --1840 F8D0H
< --120.0 --32768 8000H < --184.0 --32768 8000H Underflow

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 21

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type C

Table 8 Analog value representation for thermocouples type C

Units Units
Type
T pe C Type
T pe C Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
>2500.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2500.0 25000 61A8H 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
2315.1 23151 5A6FH 2786.6 27866 6CDAH
2315.0 23150 5A6EH 2786.5 27865 6CD9H
: : : : : : Rated range
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H
0.1 --1 FFFFH 31.9 319 013FH
: : : : : : Underrange
--120.0 --1200 FB50H --184.0 --1840 F8D0H
< --120.0 --32768 8000H < --184.0 --32768 8000H Underflow

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type E

Table 9 Analog value representation for thermocouples type E

Units Units
Type E Type E Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
> 1200.0 32767 7FFFH > 2192,0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H
: : : : : : Overrange
1000.1 10001 2711H 1833.8 18338 47A2H
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H
: : : : : : Rated range
--270.0 --2700 F574H --454.0 --4540 EE44H
< --270.0 < --2700 <F574H < --454.0 < --4540 <EE44H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or
of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple
type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

22 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type J

Table 10 Analog value representation for thermocouples type J

Units Units
Type
T pe J Type
T pe J Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
> 1450.0 32767 7FFFH > 2642,0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1450.0 14500 38A4H 2642.0 26420 6734H
: : : : : : Overrange
1201.0 12010 2EEAH 2193.8 21938 55B2H
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H
: : : : : : Rated range
--210.0 --2100 F7CCH --346.0 --3460 F27CH
< --210.0 < --2100 <F7CCH < --346.0 < --3460 <F27CH Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or
of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple
type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F31CH and outputs 8000H. ... of EA0CH and outputs 8000H.

Analog value representation for thermocouples type K

Table 11 Analog value representation for thermocouples type K

Units Units
Type
T pe K Type
T pe K Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
> 1622.0 32767 7FFFH >2951.6 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1622.0 16220 3F5CH 2951.6 29516 734CH
: : : : : : Overrange
1373.0 13730 35A2H 2503.4 25034 61CAH
1372.0 13720 3598H 2501.6 25061 61B8H
: : : : : : Rated range
--270.0 --2700 F574H --454.0 --4540 EE44H
< --270.0 < --2700 < F574H < --454.0 < --4540 <EE44H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or
of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple
type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 23

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog value representation for thermocouples type L

Table 12 Analog value representation for thermocouples type L

Units Units
Type
T pe L Type
T pe L Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
>1150.0 32767 7FFFH >2102.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1150.0 11500 2CECH 2102.0 21020 521CH
: : : : : : Overrange
901.0 9010 2332H 1653.8 16538 409AH
900.0 9000 2328H 1652.0 16520 4088H
: : : : : : Rated range
--200.0 --2000 F830H --328.0 --3280 F330H
< --200.0 < --2000 < F830H < --328.0 < --3280 <F330H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or
of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple
type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type N

Table 13 Analog value representation for thermocouples type N

Units Units
Type
T pe N Type
T pe N Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
> 1550.0 32767 7FFFH >2822.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1550.0 15500 3C8CH 2822.0 28220 6E3CH
: : : : : : Overrange
1300.1 13001 32C9H 2373.8 23738 5CBAH
1300.0 13000 32C8H 2372.0 23720 5CA8H
: : : : : : Rated range
--270.0 --2700 F574H --454.0 --4540 EE44H
< --270.0 < --2700 < F574H < --454.0 < --4540 <EE44H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or
of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple
type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

24 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type R, S

Table 14 Analog value representation for thermocouples type R, S

Units Units
Types R,
R S Types R,
R
decimal hexa- S decimal hexa- Range
in °C decimal in °F decimal

>2019.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH Overflow

2019.0 20190 4EDEH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
1770.0 17770 4524H 3218.0 32180 7DB4H
1769.0 17690 451AH 3216.2 32162 7DA2H
: : : : : : Rated range
--50.0 --500 FE0CH --58.0 --580 FDBCH
--51.0 --510 FE02H --59.8 --598 FDAAH
: : : : : : Underrange
--170.0 --1700 F95CH --274.0 --2740 F54CH
< --170.0 --32768 8000H < --274.0 --32768 8000H Underflow

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type T

Table 15 Analog value representation for thermocouples type T

Units Units
Type T Type T Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
>540.0 32767 7FFFH >1004.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
540.0 5400 1518H 1004.0 10040 2738H
: : : Overrange
401.0 4010 0FAAH
400.0 4000 0FA0H 752.0 7520 1D60H
: : : : : : Rated range
--270.0 --2700 F574H --454.0 --4540 EE44H
< --270.0 < --2700 <F574H < --454.0 < --4540 <EE44H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or
of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple
type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 25

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type U

Table 16 Analog value representation for thermocouples type U

Units Units
Type
T pe U Type
T pe U Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
>850.0 32767 7FFFH >1562.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 2738.0H
: : : : : : Overrange
601.0 6010 177AH 1113.8 11138 2B82H
600.0 6000 1770H 1112.0 11120 2B70H
: : : : : : Rated range
--200.0 --2000 F830H --328.0 --3280 F330H
< --200.0 < --2000 <F830H < --328.0 < --3280 <F330H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or
of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple
type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type TXK/XKL GOST

Table 17 Analog value representation for thermocouples type TXK/XKL GOST

Units Units
Type Type
TXK/XKL decimal hexa- TXK/XKL decimal hexa- Range
in °C decimal in °F decimal

>1050.0 32767 7FFFH >1922.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow

1050.0 10500 2904H 1922.0 19220 4B14H
: : : : : : Overrange
800.1 8001 1F41H 1472.1 14721 3981H
800.0 8000 1F40H 1472.0 14720 3980H
: : : : : :
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H Rated range
: : : : : :
--200.0 --2000 F830H --328.0 --3280 F330H

< --200.0 --32768 8000H < --328.0 --32768 8000H Underflow

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

26 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Parameter Sets for Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC

Parameter Assignment in the User Program

You have already set the parameters for the S7-300 module using STEP 7. You
can use an SFC in the user program to change the AI 8×TC module dynamic
parameters. You can also use an SFC in the user program to transfer the
parameters from the CPU to the addressed module.

Parameters Stored in Data Records

The parameters for the AI 8×TC module are stored in three data records: records
0, 1 and 128.

Modifiable Parameters
You can change the parameters of record 1 and/or record 128 and pass them to
the AI 8×TC module using SFC 55. This does not change the parameters set on
the CPU. You cannot change the S7-300 parameters of record 0 in the user
program.
The following section shows an overview of the parameters that are stored in
records 0, 1, and 128 for the AI 8×TC module.

SFCs for Parameter Assignment

The following SFCs are available for assigning the parameters for the AI 8×TC
module in the user program.

Table 18 SFCs for Assigning Module Parameters

SFC No. Identifier Application

Transfer modifiable parameters (record 1 and 128) to
55 WR_PARM
the addressed signal module.
Transfer parameters (records 0, 1 or 128) from the
56 WR_DPARM
CPU to the addressed signal module.
Transfer all parameters (records 0, 1, and 128) from
57 PARM_MOD
the CPU to the addressed signal module.

Description of the Parameters

The following section contains all the modifiable parameters for the AI 8×TC
module.
The parameters for the AI 8×TC module are described in this Product Information
document and in the online help of STEP 7.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 27

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Parameters of Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC

Parameters
Table 19 contains all the parameters that you can set for the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8×TC. The comparison shows:
S Parameters you can change using STEP 7.
S Parameters you can change using SFC 55 “WR_PARM”.
The parameters you set using STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module using
SFCs 56 and 57.

Table 19 Parameters for the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC

Data Record Configurable with...

Parameter
No. ...SFC 55 ...Programming Device
Diagnostics: Group 0 No Yes
Diagnostics: with wire-break 0 No Yes
Limit value interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Diagnostic interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
End of cycle interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Measurement units 1 Yes Yes
Module Mode 128 Yes Yes
Interference frequency 128 Yes Yes
suppression
Measurement type 128 Yes Yes
Measurement range 128 Yes Yes
Measurement smoothing 128 Yes Yes
Measurement TC burnout 128 Yes Yes
Upper limit value 128 Yes Yes
Lower limit value 128 Yes Yes
Note: Before you can enable the diagnostic interrupt in record 1 in the user program, you must first
enable the diagnostics in record 0 with STEP 7.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

28 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Structure of Data Record 1
Figure 10 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the Analog
Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC.
You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to “1”.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number

Byte 0

Celsius / Fahrenheit

Cycle end interrupt enable

Diagnostics enable
Limit value interrupt enable

Byte 1 Unused

Byte 2 Unused
Byte 3 Unused

Byte 4 Unused
Byte 5 Unused

Byte 6 Unused
Byte 7 Unused

Byte 8 Unused
Byte 9 Unused

Byte 10 Unused
Byte 11 Unused

Byte 12 Unused
Byte 13 Unused

Figure 10 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 29

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Structure of Data Record 128
Figure 11 shows the structure of data record 128 for the parameters of the Analog
Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Module Mode (See Table 20)
Byte 0
Interference frequency
Byte 1 suppression

Channel group 0
Channel group 1
(See Table 21)
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

Measurement Type, Group 0

(see Table 22)

Byte 3

Measurement Range, Group 0

(see Table 22)

Byte 4

Smoothing, Group 0
(see Table 23)

TC Burnout Selection, Group 0

(see Table 24)
Byte 5

Measurement Type, Group 1

(see Table 22)

Byte 6

Measurement Range, Group 1

(see Table 22)

Byte 7

Smoothing, Group 1
(see Table 23)

TC Burnout Selection, Group 1

(see Table 24)

Figure 11 Data Record 128 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

30 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Byte 8

Measurement Type, Group 2

(see Table 22)

Byte 9

Measurement Range, Group 2

(see Table 22)

Byte 10

Smoothing, Group 2
(see Table 23)
TC Burnout Selection, Group 2
(see Table 24)

Byte 11

Measurement Type, Group 3

(see Table 22)

Byte 12

Measurement Range, Group 3

(see Table 22)

Byte 13

Smoothing, Group 3
(see Table 23)

TC Burnout Selection, Group 3

(see Table 24)

Byte 14 High Byte Upper limit value

Group 0;
Byte 15 Low Byte Channel 0
Byte 16 High Byte Lower limit value
Group 0;
Byte 17 Low Byte Channel 0

Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
Group 0;
Byte 19 Low Byte Channel 1

Byte 20 Lower limit value

High Byte
Group 0;
Byte 21 Low Byte Channel 1

Figure 11 Data Record 128 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC
(continued)

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 31

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Byte 22 High Byte Upper limit value
Group 1;
Byte 23 Low Byte Channel 2

Byte 24 High Byte Lower limit value

Group 1;
Byte 25 Low Byte Channel 2

Upper limit value

Byte 26 High Byte Group 1;
Channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Lower limit value
Byte 28 High Byte Group 1;
Byte 29 Low Byte Channel 3

Byte 30 High Byte Upper limit value

Group 2;
Byte 31 Low Byte Channel 4
Byte 32 High Byte Lower limit value
Group 2;
Byte 33 Low Byte Channel 4

Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
Group 2;
Byte 35 Low Byte Channel 5

Byte 36 Lower limit value

High Byte
Group 2;
Byte 37 Low Byte Channel 5

Byte 38 High Byte Upper limit value

Group 3;
Byte 39 Low Byte Channel 6
Byte 40 High Byte Lower limit value
Group 3;
Byte 41 Low Byte Channel 6

Upper limit value

Byte 42 High Byte
Group 3;
Byte 43 Low Byte Channel 7

Byte 44 Lower limit value

High Byte
Group 3;
Byte 45 Low Byte Channel 7

Figure 11 Data Record 128 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC
(continued)

The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation.
Observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

32 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Module Mode
Table 20 contains the codes for the various module operating modes that you enter
in byte 0 of data record 128 (see Figure 11).

Table 20 Codes for the module modes of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC

Module Mode Code

8 Channel Hardware Filtering 2#00000000
8 Channel Software Filtering 2#00000001
4 Channel Hardware Filtering 2#00000010

Interference Frequency Suppression

Table 21 contains the codes for the various frequencies that you enter in byte 1 of
data record 128 (see Figure 11). Note that the 50 Hz, 60 Hz, and 400 Hz
selections are for the 8 Channel Software Filtering module mode only. The 50, 60,
and 400 Hz selection is for the 8 Channel and 4 Channel Hardware Filtering
module modes only.

Table 21 Codes for the Interference Frequency Suppression of Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8×TC

Interference Frequency Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50, 60, and 400 Hz 2#11

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 33

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
Table 22 contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the module
and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of data
record 128 (see Figure 11).

Table 22 Codesforthe MeasuringRangesoftheSM331;AI 8×TC

Measurement Type Code Measurement Range Code
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Thermocouple, 2#1010 B 2#0000
linearization, reference N 2#0001
temperature 0° C E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
TXK/XK(L) 2#1011
Thermocouple, 2#1011 B 2#0000
linearization, reference N 2#0001
temperature 50° C E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
TXK/XK(L) 2#1011
Thermocouple, 2#1101 B 2#0000
linearization, internal N 2#0001
comparison E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
TXK/XK(L) 2#1011
Thermocouple, 2#1110 B 2#0000
linearization, external N 2#0001
comparison E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
TXK/XK(L) 2#1011

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

34 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
Input Smoothing Selection
Table 23 contains all the smoothing selections for the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8×TC. You must enter these codes, according to the smoothing option
desired, in the appropriate bytes of data record 128 (see Figure 11).

Table 23 Codes for the Smoothing Selection of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI
8×TC

Smoothing Selection Code

None 2#00
Weak 2#01
Medium 2#10
Strong 2#11

TC Burnout Selection
Table 24 contains all the TC burnout selections for the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8×TC. You must enter these codes, according to the TC burnout
selection desired, in the appropriate bytes of data record 128 (see Figure 11).

Table 24 Codes for the TC Burnout Selection of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI
8×TC

Smoothing Selection Code

Upscale 2#0
Downscale 2#1

Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 35

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt
 Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC
36 A5E00455107-01

CuuDuongThanCong.com https://fb.com/tailieudientucntt